0% found this document useful (0 votes)

280 views581 pages

TNC 640 - User Manual Cycles en (892905-21)

Uploaded by

toigo1985

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

280 views581 pages

TNC 640 - User Manual Cycles en (892905-21)

Uploaded by

toigo1985

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 581

TNC 640

User’s Manual
Cycle Programming

NC Software
340590-02
340591-02
340594-02

English (en)
5/2013
Fundamentals
Fundamentals
About this Manual

About this Manual

The symbols used in this manual are described below.

This symbol indicates that important information

about the function described must be considered.

WARNING This symbol indicates a possibly

dangerous situation that may cause light injuries if
not avoided.

This symbol indicates that there is one or more

of the following risks when using the described
function:
Danger to workpiece
Danger to fixtures
Danger to tool
Danger to machine
Danger to operator

This symbol indicates that the described function

must be adapted by the machine tool builder. The
function described may therefore vary depending on
the machine.

This symbol indicates that you can find detailed

information about a function in another manual.

Would you like any changes, or have you found any

errors?
We are continuously striving to improve our documentation for you.
Please help us by sending your requests to the following e-mail
address: [email protected].

4 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

TNC Model, Software and Features

This manual describes functions and features provided by TNCs as
of the following NC software numbers.
TNC model NC software number
TNC 640 340590-02
TNC 640 E 340591-02
TNC 640 Programming Station 340594-02
The suffix E indicates the export version of the TNC. The export
version of the TNC has the following limitations:
Simultaneous linear movement in up to 4 axes

The machine tool builder adapts the usable features of the TNC to
his machine by setting machine parameters. Some of the functions
described in this manual may therefore not be among the features
provided by the TNC on your machine tool.
TNC functions that may not be available on your machine include:
Tool measurement with the TT

Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with

the features of your machine.
Many machine manufacturers, as well as HEIDENHAIN, offer
programming courses for the TNCs. We recommend these courses
as an effective way of improving your programming skill and
sharing information and ideas with other TNC users.

User's Manual:
All TNC functions that have no connection with
cycles are described in the User's Manual of the TNC
640. Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a
copy of this User’s Manual.
ID of User's Manual for Conversational Programming:
892903-xx.
ID of User's Manual DIN/ISO: 892909-xx.

Software options
The TNC 640 features various software options that can be enabled by your machine tool builder. Each option is to
be enabled separately and contains the following respective functions:
Hardware, options
■ 1st additional axis for 4 axes plus spindle
■ 2nd additional axis for 5 axes plus spindle

Software option 1 (option number 08)

Rotary table machining ■ Programming of cylindrical contours as if in two axes
■ Feed rate in distance per minute
Coordinate transformation ■ Working plane, tilting the ...
Interpolation ■ Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane (spacial arc)

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 5

Fundamentals
TNC Model, Software and Features

Software option 2 (option number 09)

3-D machining ■ Motion control with minimum jerk
■ 3-D tool compensation through surface normal vectors
■ Using the electronic handwheel to change the angle of the swivel head
during program run without affecting the position of the tool point.
(TCPM = Tool Center Point Management)
■ Keeping the tool normal to the contour
■ Tool radius compensation perpendicular to traversing and tool direction
Interpolation ■ Linear in 5 axes (subject to export permit)

HEIDENHAIN DNC (option number 18)

■ Communication with external PC applications over COM component

Display step (Option number 23)

Input resolution and display ■ Linear axes to 0.01 µm
step ■ Rotary axes to 0.00001°

Dynamic Collision Monitoring (DCM) software option (option number 40)

Collision monitoring in all ■ The machine manufacturer defines objects to be monitored
machine operating modes ■ Three warning levels in manual operation
■ Program interrupt during automatic operation
■ Includes monitoring of 5-axis movements

Software option for additional conversational languages (option number 41)

Additional conversational ■ Slovenian
languages ■ Norwegian
■ Slovak
■ Latvian
■ Korean
■ Estonian
■ Turkish
■ Romanian
■ Lithuanian

DXF Converter software option (option number 42)

Extracting contour ■ Supported DXF format: AC1009 (AutoCAD R12)
programs and machining ■ For contours and point patterns
positions from DXF data.
Extracting contour sections ■ Simple and convenient specification of reference points
from plain-language ■ Select graphical features of contour sections from conversational
programs. programs

Adaptive Feed Control (AFC) software option (option number 45)

Function for adaptive feed- ■ Recording the actual spindle power by means of a teach-in cut
rate control for optimizing ■ Defining the limits of automatic feed rate control
the machining conditions
during series production ■ Fully automatic feed control during program run

6 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

TNC Model, Software and Features

KinematicsOpt software option (option number 48)

Touch-probe cycles for ■ Backup/restore active kinematics
automatic testing and ■ Test active kinematics
optimization of the machine
kinematics ■ Optimize active kinematics

Mill-Turning software option (option number 50)

Functions for milling/turning ■ Switching between Milling/Turning mode of operation
mode ■ Constant cutting speed
■ Tool-tip radius compensation
■ Turning cycles

Extended Tool Managment software option (option number 93)

■ Extended tool management, python-based

Remote Desktop Manager software option (option number 133)

Remote operation of ■ Windows on a separate computer unit
external computer units ■ Incorporated in the TNC interface
(e.g. Windows PC) via the
TNC user interface

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 7

Fundamentals
TNC Model, Software and Features

Cross Talk Compensation (CTC) software option (option number 141)

Compensation of axis ■ Determination of dynamically caused position deviation through axis
couplings acceleration
■ Compensation of the TCP

Position Adaptive Control (PAC) software option (option number 142)

Changing control ■ Changing of the control parameters depending on the position of the
parameters axes in the working space
■ Changing of the control parameters depending on the speed or
acceleration of an axis

Load Adaptive Control (LAC) software option (option number 143)

Dynamic changing of control ■ Automatic determination of workpiece weight and frictional forces
parameters ■ Continuous adaptation of the parameters of the adaptive precontrolling
to the actual weight of the workpiece during machining

Active Chatter Control (ACC) software option (option number 145)

Fully automatic function for chatter control during machining

8 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

TNC Model, Software and Features

Feature Content Level (upgrade functions)

Along with software options, significant further improvements
of the TNC software are managed via the Feature Content Level
upgrade functions. Functions subject to the FCL are not available
simply by updating the software on your TNC.

All upgrade functions are available to you without

surcharge when you receive a new machine.

Upgrade functions are identified in the manual with FCL n, where n

indicates the sequential number of the feature content level.
You can purchase a code number in order to permanently enable
the FCL functions. For more information, contact your machine tool
builder or HEIDENHAIN.

Intended place of operation

The TNC complies with the limits for a Class A device in
accordance with the specifications in EN 55022, and is intended for
use primarily in industrially-zoned areas.

Legal information
This product uses open source software. Further information is
available on the control under
Programming and Editing operating mode
MOD function
LICENSE INFO soft key

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 9

Fundamentals
New cycle functions of software 34059x-02

New cycle functions of software 34059x-02

New Cycle 225 EngravingSee "ENGRAVING (Cycle 225, DIN/
ISO: G225)", page 276
With Cycle 256, rectangular stud, a parameter is now available
with which you can determine the approach position on the
stud See "RECTANGULAR STUD (Cycle 256, DIN/ISO: G256)",
page 154
With Cycle 257, circular stud milling, a parameter is now
available with which you can determine the approach position
on the stud See "CIRCULAR STUD (Cycle 257, DIN/ISO: G257)",
page 158
New cycles for radial recessing (radial/axial) See "SIMPLE
RADIAL RECESSING (Cycle 841, DIN/ISO: G841)", page 329
With the new blank form update function, the TNC detects
areas with residual material during turning operations and
can then machine them selectively. See "Blank form update
(FUNCTION TURNDATA)", page 284
Cycle 402 now also allows you to compensate workpiece
misalignment by rotating the rotary table See "BASIC ROTATION
over two studs (Cycle 402, DIN/ISO: G402)", page 404
New Touch Probe Cycle 484 for calibrating the wireless TT 449
touch probe See "Calibrating the wireless TT 449 (Cycle 484,
DIN/ISO: G484)", page 565
New manual probing cycle "Center line as datum" (see User's
Manual)
Predefined values can now be entered into a cycle parameter
with the PREDEF function in cycles See "Program defaults for
cycles", page 54
The following improvements were made to the KinematicsOpt
cycles:
Newer, faster optimization algorithm
After angle optimization, a separate measurement series
is no longer required for position optimization See "Various
modes (Q406)", page 544
Return of offset errors (change of machine datum) in the
parameters Q147-149 See "Cycle run", page 532
Up to eight plane measuring points for the measurement of
spheres See "Cycle parameters", page 541
The active tool-axis direction can now be activated in manual
mode and during handwheel superimposition as a virtual tool
axis (see User's Manua).

10 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

Contents
1 Fundamentals / Overviews............................................................................................................. 45
2 Using Fixed Cycles........................................................................................................................... 49
3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling........................................................................................................................69
4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling.......................................................................................... 99
5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling..........................................................135
6 Fixed Cycles: Pattern Definitions.................................................................................................. 165
7 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket........................................................................................................175
8 Fixed Cycles: Cylindrical Surface.................................................................................................. 201
9 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket with Contour Formula.................................................................215
10 Fixed Cycles: Multipass Milling.................................................................................................... 229
11 Cycles: Coordinate Transformations............................................................................................. 243
12 Cycles: Special Functions.............................................................................................................. 267
13 Cycles: Turning................................................................................................................................279
14 Using Touch Probe Cycles............................................................................................................. 385
15 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment............................ 395
16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting.......................................................................... 415
17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection...............................................................467
18 Touch Probe Cycles: Special Functions........................................................................................ 511
19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement........................................................525
20 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Tool Measurement....................................................................557
21 Tables of Cycles.............................................................................................................................. 573

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 11

Contents

12 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

1 Fundamentals / Overviews............................................................................................................. 45

1.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................46

1.2 Available Cycle Groups.......................................................................................................................... 47

Overview of fixed cycles......................................................................................................................... 47

Overview of touch probe cycles.............................................................................................................. 48

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 13

Contents

2 Using Fixed Cycles........................................................................................................................... 49

2.1 Working with fixed cycles..................................................................................................................... 50

Machine-specific cycles............................................................................................................................50
Defining a cycle using soft keys.............................................................................................................. 51
Defining a cycle using the GOTO function.............................................................................................. 51
Calling a cycle.......................................................................................................................................... 52

2.2 Program defaults for cycles.................................................................................................................. 54

Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 54
Entering GLOBAL DEF.............................................................................................................................54
Using GLOBAL DEF information..............................................................................................................55
Global data valid everywhere...................................................................................................................56
Global data for drilling operations............................................................................................................ 56
Global data for milling operations with pocket cycles 25x...................................................................... 56
Global data for milling operations with contour cycles............................................................................57
Global data for positioning behavior........................................................................................................ 57
Global data for probing functions............................................................................................................ 57

2.3 PATTERN DEF pattern definition...........................................................................................................58

Application................................................................................................................................................ 58
Entering PATTERN DEF............................................................................................................................59
Using PATTERN DEF................................................................................................................................59
Defining individual machining positions................................................................................................... 60
Defining a single row...............................................................................................................................60
Defining a single pattern..........................................................................................................................61
Defining individual frames........................................................................................................................62
Defining a full circle................................................................................................................................. 63
Defining a pitch circle.............................................................................................................................. 64

2.4 Point tables............................................................................................................................................. 65

14 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling........................................................................................................................69

3.1 Fundamentals......................................................................................................................................... 70

Overview.................................................................................................................................................. 70

3.2 CENTERING (Cycle 240, DIN/ISO: G240)............................................................................................. 71

3.3 DRILLING (Cycle 200).............................................................................................................................73

3.4 REAMING (Cycle 201, DIN/ISO: G201)................................................................................................. 75

3.5 BORING (Cycle 202, DIN/ISO: G202)....................................................................................................77

3.6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING (Cycle 203, DIN/ISO: G203)............................................................................80

3.7 BACK BORING (Cycle 204, DIN/ISO: G204)......................................................................................... 83

3.8 UNIVERSAL PECKING (Cycle 205, DIN/ISO: G205).............................................................................86

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 15

Contents

3.9 BORE MILLING (Cycle 208)................................................................................................................... 90

3.10 SINGLE-LIP D.H.DRLNG (Cycle 241, DIN/ISO: G241)..........................................................................93

3.11 Programming Examples........................................................................................................................ 96

Example: Drilling cycles........................................................................................................................... 96

Example: Using drilling cycles in connection with PATTERN DEF...........................................................97

16 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling.......................................................................................... 99

4.1 Fundamentals....................................................................................................................................... 100

Overview................................................................................................................................................ 100

4.2 TAPPING NEW with a floating tap holder (Cycle 206, DIN/ISO: G206).......................................... 101

4.3 RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder NEW (Cycle 207, DIN/ISO: G207)........................... 104

4.4 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING (Cycle 209, DIN/ISO: G209)......................................................... 107

4.5 Fundamentals of Thread Milling........................................................................................................ 111

Prerequisites...........................................................................................................................................111

4.6 THREAD MILLING (Cycle 262, DIN/ISO: G262)................................................................................. 113

4.7 THREAD MILLING/COUNTERSINKING (Cycle 263, DIN/ISO:G263).................................................116

4.8 THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 264, DIN/ISO: G264)................................................................120

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 17

Contents

4.9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 265, DIN/ISO: G265)................................................124

4.10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING (Cycle 267, DIN/ISO: G267)................................................................. 128

4.11 Programming Examples...................................................................................................................... 132

Example: Thread milling......................................................................................................................... 132

18 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling..........................................................135

5.1 Fundamentals....................................................................................................................................... 136

Overview................................................................................................................................................ 136

5.2 RECTANGULAR POCKET (Cycle 251, DIN/ISO: G251)...................................................................... 137

5.3 CIRCULAR POCKET (Cycle 252, DIN/ISO: G252)............................................................................... 141

5.4 SLOT MILLING (Cycle 253, DIN/ISO: G253).......................................................................................145

5.5 CIRCULAR SLOT (Cycle 254, DIN/ISO: G254).................................................................................... 149

5.6 RECTANGULAR STUD (Cycle 256, DIN/ISO: G256).......................................................................... 154

5.7 CIRCULAR STUD (Cycle 257, DIN/ISO: G257)....................................................................................158

5.8 Programming Examples...................................................................................................................... 162

Example: Milling pockets, studs and slots.............................................................................................162

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 19

Contents

6 Fixed Cycles: Pattern Definitions.................................................................................................. 165

6.1 Fundamentals....................................................................................................................................... 166

Overview................................................................................................................................................ 166

6.2 CIRCULAR PATTERN (Cycle 220, DIN/ISO: G220)............................................................................. 167

6.3 LINEAR PATTERN (Cycle 221, DIN/ISO: G221).................................................................................. 170

6.4 Programming Examples...................................................................................................................... 172

Example: Polar hole patterns................................................................................................................. 172

20 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

7 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket........................................................................................................175

7.1 SL Cycles............................................................................................................................................... 176

7.2 CONTOUR (Cycle 14, DIN/ISO: G37).................................................................................................. 178

Please note while programming:........................................................................................................... 178

Cycle parameters................................................................................................................................... 178

7.3 Superimposed contours...................................................................................................................... 179

Fundamentals......................................................................................................................................... 179
Subprograms: overlapping pockets........................................................................................................ 179
Area of inclusion.................................................................................................................................... 180
Area of exclusion................................................................................................................................... 181
Area of intersection................................................................................................................................182

7.4 CONTOUR DATA (Cycle 20, DIN/ISO: G120)......................................................................................183

Please note while programming:........................................................................................................... 183

Cycle parameters................................................................................................................................... 184

7.5 PILOT DRILLING (Cycle 21, DIN/ISO: G121)...................................................................................... 185

7.6 ROUGHING (Cycle 22, DIN/ISO: G122).............................................................................................. 187

7.7 FLOOR FINISHING (Cycle 23, DIN/ISO: G123)...................................................................................190

7.8 SIDE FINISHING (Cycle 24, DIN/ISO: G124)...................................................................................... 191

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 21

Contents

7.9 CONTOUR TRAIN (Cycle 25, DIN/ISO: G125).................................................................................... 193

7.10 Programming Examples...................................................................................................................... 195

Example: Roughing-out and fine-roughing a pocket.............................................................................. 195

Example: Pilot drilling, roughing-out and finishing overlapping contours............................................... 197
Example: Contour train.......................................................................................................................... 199

22 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

8 Fixed Cycles: Cylindrical Surface.................................................................................................. 201

8.1 Fundamentals....................................................................................................................................... 202

Overview of cylindrical surface cycles...................................................................................................202

8.2 CYLINDER SURFACE (Cycle 27, DIN/ISO: G127, software option 1)................................................ 203

Cycle call................................................................................................................................................ 203

Please note while programming:........................................................................................................... 204
Cycle parameters................................................................................................................................... 205

8.3 CYLINDER SURFACE Slot milling (Cycle 28, DIN/ISO: G128, software option 1).......................... 206

8.4 CYLINDER SURFACE Ridge milling (Cycle 29, DIN/ISO: G129, software option 1)........................209

8.5 Programming Examples...................................................................................................................... 212

Example: Cylinder surface with Cycle 27.............................................................................................. 212

Example: Cylinder surface with Cycle 28.............................................................................................. 214

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 23

Contents

9 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket with Contour Formula.................................................................215

9.1 SL cycles with complex contour formula..........................................................................................216

Fundamentals......................................................................................................................................... 216
Selecting a program with contour definitions........................................................................................218
Defining contour descriptions................................................................................................................ 218
Entering a complex contour formula..................................................................................................... 219
Superimposed contours......................................................................................................................... 220
Contour machining with SL Cycles........................................................................................................222
Example: Roughing and finishing superimposed contours with the contour formula............................223

9.2 SL cycles with simple contour formula............................................................................................. 226

24 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

10 Fixed Cycles: Multipass Milling.................................................................................................... 229

10.1 Fundamentals....................................................................................................................................... 230

Overview................................................................................................................................................ 230

10.2 MULTIPASS MILLING (Cycle 230, DIN/ISO: G230)............................................................................ 231

10.3 RULED SURFACE (Cycle 231, DIN/ISO: G231)...................................................................................233

10.4 FACE MILLING (Cycle 232, DIN/ISO: G232)....................................................................................... 237

10.5 Programming Examples...................................................................................................................... 241

Example: Multipass milling.................................................................................................................... 241

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 25

Contents

11 Cycles: Coordinate Transformations............................................................................................. 243

11.1 Fundamentals....................................................................................................................................... 244

11.2 DATUM SHIFT (Cycle 7, DIN/ISO: G54).............................................................................................. 245

11.3 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables (Cycle 7, DIN/ISO: G53).............................................................. 246

Effect...................................................................................................................................................... 246
Please note while programming:........................................................................................................... 247
Cycle parameters................................................................................................................................... 247
Selecting a datum table in the part program.........................................................................................248
Editing the datum table in the Programming and Editing mode of operation........................................248
Configuring the datum table.................................................................................................................. 250
To exit a datum table............................................................................................................................. 250
Status displays....................................................................................................................................... 250

11.4 DATUM SETTING (Cycle 247, DIN/ISO: G247)................................................................................... 251

11.5 MIRRORING (Cycle 8, DIN/ISO: G28)................................................................................................. 252

11.6 ROTATION (Cycle 10, DIN/ISO: G73).................................................................................................. 254

11.7 SCALING (Cycle 11, DIN/ISO: G72).................................................................................................... 256

26 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

11.8 AXIS-SPECIFIC SCALING (Cycle 26)................................................................................................... 257

11.9 WORKING PLANE (Cycle 19, DIN/ISO: G80, software option 1)..................................................... 259

Effect...................................................................................................................................................... 259
Please note while programming:........................................................................................................... 260
Cycle parameters................................................................................................................................... 260
Resetting.................................................................................................................................................261
Positioning the axes of rotation............................................................................................................. 261
Position display in the tilted system...................................................................................................... 262
Workspace monitoring........................................................................................................................... 262
Positioning in a tilted coordinate system...............................................................................................263
Combining coordinate transformation cycles.........................................................................................263
Procedure for working with Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE...................................................................... 264

11.10 Programming Examples...................................................................................................................... 265

Example: Coordinate transformation cycles.......................................................................................... 265

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 27

Contents

12 Cycles: Special Functions.............................................................................................................. 267

12.1 Fundamentals....................................................................................................................................... 268

Overview................................................................................................................................................ 268

12.2 DWELL TIME (Cycle 9, DIN/ISO: G04)................................................................................................269

Function.................................................................................................................................................. 269
Cycle parameters................................................................................................................................... 269

12.3 PROGRAM CALL (Cycle 12, DIN/ISO: G39)........................................................................................270

Cycle function.........................................................................................................................................270
Please note while programming:........................................................................................................... 270
Cycle parameters................................................................................................................................... 271

12.4 SPINDLE ORIENTATION (Cycle 13, DIN/ISO: G36)............................................................................272

Cycle function.........................................................................................................................................272
Please note while programming:........................................................................................................... 272
Cycle parameters................................................................................................................................... 272

12.5 TOLERANCE (Cycle 32, DIN/ISO: G62)...............................................................................................273

Cycle function.........................................................................................................................................273
Influences of the geometry definition in the CAM system................................................................... 273
Please note while programming:........................................................................................................... 274
Cycle parameters................................................................................................................................... 275

12.6 ENGRAVING (Cycle 225, DIN/ISO: G225)...........................................................................................276

28 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13 Cycles: Turning................................................................................................................................279

13.1 Turning Cycles (software option 50)...................................................................................................280

13.2 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM(Cycle 800, DIN/ISO: G800).............................................. 286

13.3 RESET ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM (Cycle 801, DIN/ISO: G801).............................................. 288

13.4 Fundamentals of Turning Cycles........................................................................................................ 289

13.5 TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL (Cycle 811, DIN/ISO: G811)......................................................290

13.6 TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL EXTENDED (Cycle 812, DIN/ISO: G812)................................. 292

13.7 TURN, LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE (Cycle 813, DIN/ISO: G813)......................................................... 296

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 29

Contents

13.8 TURN, LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE EXTENDED (Cycle 814, DIN/ISO: G814)..................................... 299

13.9 TURN CONTOUR LONGITUDINAL (Cycle 810, DIN/ISO: G810)....................................................... 303

13.10 TURN CONTOUR-PARALLEL (Cycle 815, DIN/ISO: G815)................................................................ 307

13.11 TURN SHOULDER FACE (Cycle 821, DIN/ISO: G821)....................................................................... 311

13.12 TURN SHOULDER FACE EXTENDED (Cycle 822, DIN/ISO: G822)................................................... 314

30 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13.13 TURN, TRANSVERSE PLUNGE (Cycle 823, DIN/ISO: G823)............................................................ 318

13.14 TURN, TRANSVERSE PLUNGE EXTENDED (Cycle 824, DIN/ISO: G824)........................................ 321

13.15 TURN CONTOUR FACE (Cycle 820, DIN/ISO: G820).........................................................................325

13.16 SIMPLE RADIAL RECESSING (Cycle 841, DIN/ISO: G841)............................................................... 329

13.17 RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED(Cycle 842, DIN/ISO: G842).......................................................... 332

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 31

Contents

13.18 RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL(Cycle 840, DIN/ISO: G840)............................................................337

13.19 SIMPLE AXIAL RECESSING (Cycle 851, DIN/ISO: G851)................................................................. 341

13.20 AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED(Cycle 852, DIN/ISO: G852).............................................................344

13.21 AXIAL RECESSING(Cycle 850, DIN/ISO: G850).................................................................................349

13.22 RADIAL RECESSING (Cycle 861, DIN/ISO: G861)............................................................................. 353

32 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13.23 RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED(Cycle 862, DIN/ISO: G862).......................................................... 356

13.24 RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL(Cycle 860, DIN/ISO: G860)............................................................360

13.25 AXIAL RECESSING (Cycle 871, DIN/ISO: G871)................................................................................363

13.26 AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED(Cycle 872, DIN/ISO: G872).............................................................365

13.27 AXIAL RECESSING(Cycle 870, DIN/ISO: G870).................................................................................369

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 33

Contents

13.28 THREAD LONGITUDINAL (Cycle 831, DIN/ISO: G831)..................................................................... 372

13.29 THREAD EXTENDED (Cycle 832, DIN/ISO: G832)............................................................................. 375

13.30 CONTOUR-PARALLEL THREAD (Cycle 830, DIN/ISO: G830)............................................................ 379

13.31 Example program................................................................................................................................. 383

Example: Shoulder with recess............................................................................................................. 383

34 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

14 Using Touch Probe Cycles............................................................................................................. 385

14.1 General information about touch probe cycles................................................................................ 386

Method of function................................................................................................................................ 386

Consideration of a basic rotation in the Manual Operation mode......................................................... 386
Cycles in the Manual and El. Handwheel modes..................................................................................386
Touch probe cycles for automatic operation.......................................................................................... 387

14.2 Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles.........................................................................389

Maximum traverse to touch point: DIST in touch probe table...............................................................389

Set-up clearance to touch point: SET_UP in touch probe table............................................................. 389
Orient the infrared touch probe to the programmed probe direction: TRACK in touch probe table....... 389
Touch trigger probe, probing feed rate: F in touch probe table............................................................. 390
Touch trigger probe, rapid traverse for positioning: FMAX.................................................................... 390
Touch trigger probe, rapid traverse for positioning: F_PREPOS in touch probe table............................ 390
Multiple measurements......................................................................................................................... 391
Confidence interval of multiple measurements.....................................................................................391
Executing touch probe cycles................................................................................................................ 392

14.3 Touch probe table................................................................................................................................ 393

General information................................................................................................................................393
Editing touch probe tables..................................................................................................................... 393
Touch probe data....................................................................................................................................394

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 35

Contents

15 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment............................ 395

15.1 Fundamentals....................................................................................................................................... 396

15.2 BASIC ROTATION (Cycle 400, DIN/ISO: G400).................................................................................. 398

15.3 BASIC ROTATION over two holes (Cycle 401, DIN/ISO: G401)........................................................ 401

15.4 BASIC ROTATION over two studs (Cycle 402, DIN/ISO: G402)........................................................ 404

15.5 BASIC ROTATION compensation via rotary axis (Cycle 403, DIN/ISO: G403)................................ 407

15.6 SET BASIC ROTATION (Cycle 404, DIN/ISO: G404).......................................................................... 410

15.7 Compensating workpiece misalignment by rotating the C axis (Cycle 405, DIN/ISO: G405)....... 411

15.8 Example: Determining a basic rotation from two holes.................................................................. 414

36 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting.......................................................................... 415

16.1 Fundamentals....................................................................................................................................... 416

16.2 DATUM SLOT CENTER (Cycle 408, DIN/ISO: G408)..........................................................................420

16.3 DATUM RIDGE CENTER (Cycle 409, DIN/ISO: G409)........................................................................ 424

16.4 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF RECTANGLE (Cycle 410, DIN/ISO: G410)............................................... 427

16.5 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF RECTANGLE (Cycle 411, DIN/ISO: G411)........................................... 431

16.6 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CIRCLE (Cycle 412, DIN/ISO: G412)....................................................... 435

16.7 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE (Cycle 413, DIN/ISO: G413)................................................... 440

16.8 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CORNER (Cycle 414, DIN/ISO: G414).................................................444

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 37

Contents

16.9 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CORNER (Cycle 415, DIN/ISO: G415).....................................................448

16.10 DATUM CIRCLE CENTER (Cycle 416, DIN/ISO: G416).......................................................................451

16.11 DATUM IN TOUCH PROBE AXIS (Cycle 417, DIN/ISO: G417)...........................................................455

16.12 DATUM AT CENTER OF 4 HOLES (Cycle 418, DIN/ISO: G418).........................................................457

16.13 DATUM IN ONE AXIS (Cycle 419, DIN/ISO: G419)............................................................................461

16.14 Example: Datum setting in center of a circular segment and on top surface of workpiece..........464

16.15 Example: Datum setting on top surface of workpiece and in center of a bolt hole circle............. 465

38 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection...............................................................467

17.1 Fundamentals....................................................................................................................................... 468

Overview................................................................................................................................................ 468
Recording the results of measurement.................................................................................................469
Measurement results in Q parameters................................................................................................. 471
Classification of results.......................................................................................................................... 471
Tolerance monitoring.............................................................................................................................. 471
Tool monitoring.......................................................................................................................................472
Reference system for measurement results......................................................................................... 473

17.2 DATUM PLANE (Cycle 0, DIN/ISO: G55)............................................................................................ 474

17.3 POLAR DATUM PLANE (Cycle 1)........................................................................................................ 475

17.4 MEASURE ANGLE (Cycle 420, DIN/ISO: G420).................................................................................476

17.5 MEASURE HOLE (Cycle 421, DIN/ISO: G421)................................................................................... 479

17.6 MEASURE HOLE OUTSIDE (Cycle 422, DIN/ISO: G422)...................................................................482

17.7 MEASURE RECTANGLE INSIDE (Cycle 423, DIN/ISO: G423)........................................................... 485

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 39

Contents

17.8 MEASURE RECTANGLE OUTSIDE (Cycle 424, DIN/ISO: G424)....................................................... 489

17.9 MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH (Cycle 425, DIN/ISO: G425).................................................................... 492

17.10 MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH (Cycle 426, DIN/ISO: G426)..................................................................... 495

17.11 MEASURE COORDINATE (Cycle 427, DIN/ISO: G427).......................................................................498

17.12 MEASURE BOLT HOLE CIRCLE (Cycle 430, DIN/ISO: G430)............................................................ 501

17.13 MEASURE PLANE (Cycle 431, DIN/ISO: G431)................................................................................. 504

17.14 Programming Examples...................................................................................................................... 507

Example: Measuring and reworking a rectangular stud........................................................................ 507

Example: Measuring a rectangular pocket and recording the results....................................................509

40 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

18 Touch Probe Cycles: Special Functions........................................................................................ 511

18.1 Fundamentals....................................................................................................................................... 512

Overview................................................................................................................................................ 512

18.2 MEASURE (Cycle 3)..............................................................................................................................513

18.3 Calibrating a touch trigger probe.......................................................................................................515

18.4 Displaying calibration values.............................................................................................................. 516

18.5 CALIBRATE TS (Cycle 460, DIN/ISO: G460)....................................................................................... 517

18.6 CALIBRATE TS LENGTH (Cycle 461, DIN/ISO: G461)....................................................................... 519

18.7 CALIBRATE TS RADIUS INSIDE (Cycle 462, DIN/ISO: G462)........................................................... 520

18.8 CALIBRATE TS RADIUS OUTSIDE (Cycle 463, DIN/ISO: G463)....................................................... 522

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 41

Contents

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement........................................................525

19.1 Kinematics Measurement with TS Touch Probes (KinematicsOpt option).................................... 526

19.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................................................................528

Please note while programming:........................................................................................................... 528

19.3 SAVE KINEMATICS (Cycle 450, DIN/ISO: G450, Option).................................................................. 529

19.4 MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option).......................................................... 532

Cycle run.................................................................................................................................................532
Positioning direction............................................................................................................................... 534
Machines with Hirth-coupled axes.........................................................................................................535
Choice of number of measuring points................................................................................................. 536
Choice of the calibration sphere position on the machine table............................................................537
Notes on the accuracy...........................................................................................................................537
Notes on various calibration methods................................................................................................... 538
Backlash..................................................................................................................................................539
Please note while programming:........................................................................................................... 540
Cycle parameters................................................................................................................................... 541
Various modes (Q406)............................................................................................................................544
Logging function.....................................................................................................................................545

19.5 PRESET COMPENSATION (Cycle 452, DIN/ISO: G452, option)....................................................... 546

42 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

20 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Tool Measurement....................................................................557

20.1 Fundamentals....................................................................................................................................... 558

Overview................................................................................................................................................ 558
Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483.............................................................. 559
Setting machine parameters.................................................................................................................. 560
Entries in the tool table TOOL.T............................................................................................................562

20.2 Calibrate the TT (Cycle 30 or 480, DIN/ISO: G480)........................................................................... 564

20.3 Calibrating the wireless TT 449 (Cycle 484, DIN/ISO: G484)........................................................... 565

Fundamentals......................................................................................................................................... 565
Cycle run.................................................................................................................................................565
Please note while programming:........................................................................................................... 565
Cycle parameters................................................................................................................................... 565

20.4 Measuring tool length (Cycle 31 or 481, DIN/ISO: G481).................................................................566

20.5 Measuring tool radius (Cycle 32 or 482, DIN/ISO: G482)................................................................. 568

20.6 Measuring tool length and radius (Cycle 33 or 483, DIN/ISO: G483)..............................................570

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 43

Contents

21 Tables of Cycles.............................................................................................................................. 573

21.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................... 574

Fixed cycles............................................................................................................................................574
Turning cycles.........................................................................................................................................576
Touch probe cycles.................................................................................................................................577

44 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

1
Fundamentals /
Overviews
1 Fundamentals / Overviews
1.1 Introduction

1.1 Introduction
Frequently recurring machining cycles that comprise several
working steps are stored in the TNC memory as standard cycles.
Coordinate transformations and several special functions are also
available as cycles.
Most cycles use Q parameters as transfer parameters. Parameters
with specific functions that are required in several cycles always
have the same number: For example, Q200 is always assigned the
set-up clearance, Q202 the plunging depth, etc.

Danger of collision!
Cycles sometimes execute extensive operations. For
safety reasons, you should run a graphical program
test before machining.

If you use indirect parameter assignments in cycles

with numbers greater than 200 (e.g. Q210 = Q1), any
change in the assigned parameter (e.g. Q1) will have
no effect after the cycle definition. Define the cycle
parameter (e.g. Q210) directly in such cases.
If you define a feed-rate parameter for fixed cycles
greater than 200, then instead of entering a
numerical value you can use soft keys to assign the
feed rate defined in the TOOL CALL block (FAUTO
soft key). You can also use the feed-rate alternatives
FMAX (rapid traverse), FZ (feed per tooth) and FU
(feed per rev), depending on the respective cycle and
the function of the feed-rate parameter.
Note that, after a cycle definition, a change of the
FAUTO feed rate has no effect, because internally the
TNC assigns the feed rate from the TOOL CALL block
when processing the cycle definition.
If you want to delete a block that is part of a cycle,
the TNC asks you whether you want to delete the
whole cycle.

46 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

1
Available Cycle Groups 1.2

1.2 Available Cycle Groups

Overview of fixed cycles

The soft-key row shows the available groups of
cycles

Cycle group Soft key Page

Cycles for pecking, reaming, boring, and counterboring 70

Cycles for tapping, thread cutting and thread milling 100

Cycles for milling pockets, studs and slots 136

Cycles for producing hole patterns, such as circular or linear point patterns 166

SL (Subcontour List) cycles which allow the contour-parallel machining of relatively 202
complex contours consisting of several overlapping subcontours, cylinder surface
interpolation
Cycles for multipass milling of flat or twisted surfaces 230

Coordinate transformation cycles which enable datum shift, rotation, mirror image, 244
enlarging and reducing for various contours

Special cycles such as dwell time, program call, oriented spindle stop and 268
tolerance

Cycles for turning operations 280

If required, switch to machine-specific fixed

cycles. These fixed cycles can be integrated by
your machine tool builder.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 47

1 Fundamentals / Overviews
1.2 Available Cycle Groups

Overview of touch probe cycles

The soft-key row shows the available groups of
cycles

Cycle group Soft key Page

Cycles for automatic measurement and compensation of workpiece misalignment 396

Cycles for automatic workpiece presetting 416

Cycles for automatic workpiece inspection 468

Special cycles 512

Cycles for automatic kinematics measurement 396

Cycles for automatic tool measurement (enabled by the machine tool builder) 558

If required, switch to machine-specific touch

probe cycles. These touch probe cycles can be
integrated by your machine tool builder.

48 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

2
Using Fixed Cycles
2 Using Fixed Cycles
2.1 Working with fixed cycles

2.1 Working with fixed cycles

Machine-specific cycles
In addition to the HEIDENHAIN cycles, many machine tool builders
offer their own cycles in the TNC. These cycles are available in a
separate cycle-number range:
Cycles 300 to 399
Machine-specific cycles that are to be defined through the
CYCLE DEF key
Cycles 500 to 599
Machine-specific touch probe cycles that are to be defined
through the TOUCH PROBE key

Refer to your machine manual for a description of the

specific function.

Sometimes machine-specific cycles use transfer parameters that

HEIDENHAIN already uses in standard cycles. The TNC executes
DEF-active cycles as soon as they are defined (See "Calling a
cycle", page 52). It executes CALL-active cycles only after they
have been called (See "Calling a cycle", page 52). When DEF-
active cycles and CALL-active cycles are used simultaneously, it is
important to prevent overwriting of transfer parameters already in
use. Use the following procedure:
As a rule, always program DEF-active cycles before CALL-active
cycles
If you do want to program a DEF-active cycle between the
definition and call of a CALL-active cycle, do it only if there is no
common use of specific transfer parameters

50 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

2
Working with fixed cycles 2.1

Defining a cycle using soft keys

The soft-key row shows the available groups of
cycles

Press the soft key for the desired group of cycles,

for example DRILLING for the drilling cycles

Select the desired cycle, for example THREAD

MILLING. The TNC initiates the programming
dialog and asks all required input values. At the
same time a graphic of the input parameters
is displayed in the right screen window. The
parameter that is asked for in the dialog prompt is
highlighted
Enter all parameters requested by the TNC and
conclude each entry with the ENT key
The TNC ends the dialog when all required data
has been entered

Defining a cycle using the GOTO function

The soft-key row shows the available groups of
cycles

The TNC opens the smartSelect selection window

with an overview of the cycles
Choose the desired cycle with the arrow keys or
mouse. The TNC then initiates the cycle dialog as
described above

Example NC blocks
7 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q201=3 ;DEPTH
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q211=0 ;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q211=0.25 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 51

2 Using Fixed Cycles
2.1 Working with fixed cycles

Calling a cycle

Prerequisites
The following data must always be programmed
before a cycle call:
BLK FORM for graphic display (needed only for
test graphics)
Tool call
Direction of spindle rotation (M functions M3/M4)
Cycle definition (CYCL DEF)

For some cycles, additional prerequisites must be

observed. They are detailed in the descriptions for
each cycle.

The following cycles become effective automatically as soon as

they are defined in the part program. These cycles cannot and
must not be called:
Cycle 220 for point patterns on circles and Cycle 221 for point
patterns on lines
SL Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY
SL Cycle 20 CONTOUR DATA
Cycle 32 TOLERANCE
Coordinate transformation cycles
Cycle 9 DWELL TIME
All touch probe cycles
You can call all other cycles with the functions described as follows.
Calling a cycle with CYCL CALL
The CYCL CALL function calls the most recently defined fixed
cycle once. The starting point of the cycle is the position that was
programmed last before the CYCL CALL block.
To program the cycle call, press the CYCL CALL
key
Press the CYCL CALL M soft key to enter a cycle
call
If necessary, enter the miscellaneous function M
(for example M3 to switch the spindle on), or end
the dialog by pressing the END key

Calling a cycle with CYCL CALL PAT

The CYCL CALL PAT function calls the most recently defined fixed
cycle at all positions that you defined in a PATTERN DEF pattern
definition (See "PATTERN DEF pattern definition", page 58) or in
a point table (See "Point tables", page 65).

52 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

2
Working with fixed cycles 2.1

Calling a cycle with CYCL CALL POS

The CYCL CALL POS function calls the most recently defined fixed
cycle once. The starting point of the cycle is the position that you
defined in the CYCL CALL POS block.
Using positioning logic the TNC moves to the position defined in
the CYCL CALL POS block.
If the tool’s current position in the tool axis is greater than the
top surface of the workpiece (Q203), the TNC moves the tool to
the programmed position first in the machining plane and then
in the tool axis.

If the tool’s current position in the tool axis is below the top
surface of the workpiece (Q203), the TNC moves the tool to
the programmed position first in the tool axis to the clearance
height and then in the working plane to the programmed
position.

Three coordinate axes must always be programmed

in the CYCL CALL POS block. With the coordinate
in the tool axis you can easily change the starting
position. It serves as an additional datum shift.
The feed rate most recently defined in the CYCL
CALL POS block applies only to traverse to the start
position programmed in this block.
As a rule, the TNC moves without radius
compensation (R0) to the position defined in the
CYCL CALL POS block.
If you use CYCL CALL POS to call a cycle in which
a start position is defined (for example Cycle 212),
then the position defined in the cycle serves as an
additional shift of the position defined in the CYCL
CALL POS block. You should therefore always define
the start position to be set in the cycle as 0.

Calling a cycle with M99/89

The M99 function, which is active only in the block in which it
is programmed, calls the last defined fixed cycle once. You can
program M99 at the end of a positioning block. The TNC moves to
this position and then calls the last defined fixed cycle.
If the TNC is to run the cycle automatically after every positioning
block, program the first cycle call with M89.
To cancel the effect of M89, program:
M99 in the positioning block in which you move to the last
starting point, or
Use CYCL DEF to define a new fixed cycle

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 53

2 Using Fixed Cycles
2.2 Program defaults for cycles

2.2 Program defaults for cycles

Overview
All Cycles 20 to 25, as well as all of those with numbers 200 or
higher, always use identical cycle parameters, such as the set-up
clearance Q200, which you must enter for each cycle definition.
The GLOBAL DEF function gives you the possibility of defining
these cycle parameters once at the beginning of the program,
so that they are effective globally for all fixed cycles used in the
program. In the respective fixed cycle you then simply link to the
value defined at the beginning of the program.
The following GLOBAL DEF functions are available:
Machining patterns Soft key Page
GLOBAL DEF COMMON 56
Definition of generally valid cycle
parameters
GLOBAL DEF DRILLING 56
Definition of specific drilling cycle
parameters
GLOBAL DEF POCKET MILLING 56
Definition of specific pocket-milling
cycle parameters
GLOBAL DEF CONTOUR MILLING 57
Definition of specific contour milling
cycle parameters
GLOBAL DEF POSITIONING 57
Definition of the positioning behavior
for CYCL CALL PAT
GLOBAL DEF PROBING 57
Definition of specific touch probe cycle
parameters

Entering GLOBAL DEF

Select the Programming and Editing operating
mode
Press the special functions key

Select the functions for program defaults

Select GLOBAL DEF functions

Select the desired GLOBAL DEF function, e.g.

GLOBAL DEF COMMON
Enter the required definitions, and confirm each
entry with the ENT key

54 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

2
Program defaults for cycles 2.2

Using GLOBAL DEF information

If you have entered the corresponding GLOBAL DEF functions at
the beginning of the program, then you can link to these globally
valid values when defining any fixed cycle.
Proceed as follows:
Select the Programming and Editing operating
mode
Select fixed cycles

Select the desired group of cycles, for example:

drilling cycles
Select the desired cycle, e.g. DRILLING
The TNC displays the SET STANDARD VALUES
soft key, if there is a global parameter for it
Press the SET STANDARD VALUES soft key. The
TNC enters the word PREDEF (predefined) in the
cycle definition. You have now created a link to the
corresponding GLOBAL DEF parameter that you
defined at the beginning of the program

Danger of collision!
Please note that later changes to the program
settings affect the entire machining program, and
can therefore change the machining procedure
significantly.
If you enter a fixed value in a fixed cycle, then this
value will not be changed by the GLOBAL DEF
functions.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 55

2 Using Fixed Cycles
2.2 Program defaults for cycles

Global data valid everywhere

Set-up clearance: Distance between tool tip and workpiece
surface for automated approach of the cycle start position in the
tool axis
2nd set-up clearance: Position to which the TNC positions the
tool at the end of a machining step. The next machining position
is approached at this height in the machining plane
F positioning: Feed rate at which the TNC traverses the tool
within a cycle
F retraction: Feed rate at which the TNC retracts the tool

The parameters are valid for all fixed cycles with

numbers greater than 2xx.

Global data for drilling operations

Retraction rate for chip breaking: Value by which the TNC
retracts the tool during chip breaking
Dwell time at depth: Time in seconds that the tool remains at
the hole bottom
Dwell time at top: Time in seconds that the tool remains at the
set-up clearance

The parameters apply to the drilling, tapping and

thread milling cycles 200 to 209, 240, and 262 to 267.

Global data for milling operations with pocket cycles

25x
Overlap factor: The tool radius multiplied by the overlap factor
equals the lateral stepover
Climb or up-cut: Select the type of milling
Plunging type: Plunge into the material helically, in a
reciprocating motion, or vertically

The parameters apply to milling cycles 251 to 257.

56 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

2
Program defaults for cycles 2.2

Global data for milling operations with contour cycles

Set-up clearance: Distance between tool tip and workpiece
surface for automated approach of the cycle start position in the
tool axis
Clearance height: Absolute height at which the tool cannot
collide with the workpiece (for intermediate positioning and
retraction at the end of the cycle)
Overlap factor: The tool radius multiplied by the overlap factor
equals the lateral stepover
Climb or up-cut: Select the type of milling

The parameters apply to SL cycles 20, 22, 23, 24 and

25.

Global data for positioning behavior

Positioning behavior: Retraction in the tool axis at the end of
the machining step: Return to the 2nd set-up clearance or to the
position at the beginning of the unit

The parameters apply to each fixed cycle that you call

with the CYCL CALL PAT function.

Global data for probing functions

Set-up clearance: Distance between stylus and workpiece
surface for automated approach of the probing position
Clearance height: The coordinate in the touch probe axis to
which the TNC traverses the touch probe between measuring
points, if the Move to clearance height option is activated
Move to clearance height: Select whether the TNC moves
the touch probe to the set-up clearance or clearance height
between the measuring points

Applies to all Touch Probe Cycles 4xx.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 57

2 Using Fixed Cycles
2.3 PATTERN DEF pattern definition

2.3 PATTERN DEF pattern definition

Application
You use the PATTERN DEF function to easily define regular
machining patterns, which you can call with the CYCL CALL PAT
function. As with the cycle definitions, support graphics that
illustrate the respective input parameter are also available for
pattern definitions.

PATTERN DEF is to be used only in connection with

the tool axis Z.

The following machining patterns are available:

Machining patterns Soft key Page
POINT 60
Definition of up to any 9 machining
positions
ROW 60
Definition of a single row, straight or
rotated
PATTERN 61
Definition of a single pattern,
straight, rotated or distorted
FRAME 62
Definition of a single frame, straight,
rotated or distorted
CIRCLE 63
Definition of a full circle

PITCH CIRCLE 64
Definition of a pitch circle

58 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

2
PATTERN DEF pattern definition 2.3

Entering PATTERN DEF

Select the Programming and Editing operating
mode
Press the special functions key

Select the functions for contour and point

machining
Open a PATTERN DEF block

Select the desired machining pattern, e.g. a single

row
Enter the required definitions, and confirm each
entry with the ENT key

Using PATTERN DEF

As soon as you have entered a pattern definition, you can call it
with the CYCL CALL PAT function Calling a cycle, page 52. The TNC
then performs the most recently defined machining cycle on the
machining pattern you defined.

A machining pattern remains active until you define

a new one, or select a point table with the SEL
PATTERN function.
You can use the mid-program startup function
to select any point at which you want to start or
continue machining (see User's Manual, Test Run
and Program Run sections).

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 59

2 Using Fixed Cycles
2.3 PATTERN DEF pattern definition

Defining individual machining positions

NC blocks
You can enter up to 9 machining positions. Confirm
10 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
each entry with the ENT key.
11 PATTERN DEF POS1
If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not (X+25 Y+33.5 Z+0) POS2 (X+50 Y+75 Z
equal to 0, then this value is effective in addition to +0)
the workpiece surface Q203 that you defined in the
machining cycle.

X coord. of machining position (absolute): Enter X

coordinate
Y coord. of machining position (absolute): Enter Y
coordinate
Coordinate of workpiece surface (absolute): Enter
Z coordinate at which machining is to begin

Defining a single row

Starting point in X (absolute): Coordinate of the

starting point of the row in the X axis
Starting point in Y (absolute): Coordinate of the
starting point of the row in the Y axis
Spacing of machining positions (incremental):
Distance between the machining positions. You can
enter a positive or negative value
Number of repetitions: Total number of machining
operations
Rot. position of entire pattern (absolute):
Angle of rotation around the entered starting
point. Reference axis: Reference axis of the active
machining plane (e.g. X for tool axis Z). You can
enter a positive or negative value
Coordinate of workpiece surface (absolute): Enter
Z coordinate at which machining is to begin

60 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

2
PATTERN DEF pattern definition 2.3

Defining a single pattern

NC blocks
If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not
10 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
equal to 0, then this value is effective in addition to
the workpiece surface Q203 that you defined in the 11 PATTERN DEF PAT1 (X+25 Y+33,5
DX+8 DY+10 NUMX5 NUMY4 ROT+0
machining cycle.
ROTX+0 ROTY+0 Z+0)
The Rotary pos. ref. ax. and Rotary pos. minor
ax. parameters are added to a previously performed
rotated position of the entire pattern.

Starting point in X (absolute): Coordinate of the

starting point of the pattern in the X axis
Starting point in Y (absolute): Coordinate of the
starting point of the pattern in the Y axis
Spacing of machining positions X (incremental):
Distance between the machining positions in the X
direction. You can enter a positive or negative value
Spacing of machining positions Y (incremental):
Distance between the machining positions in the Y
direction. You can enter a positive or negative value
Number of columns: Total number of columns in
the pattern
Number of lines: Total number of rows in the
pattern
Rot. position of entire pattern (absolute): Angle
of rotation by which the entire pattern is rotated
around the entered starting point. Reference axis:
Reference axis of the active machining plane (e.g. X
for tool axis Z). You can enter a positive or negative
value
Rotary pos. ref. ax.: Angle of rotation around which
only the reference axis of the machining plane is
distorted with respect to the entered starting point.
You can enter a positive or negative value.
Rotary pos. minor ax.: Angle of rotation around
which only the minor axis of the machining plane is
distorted with respect to the entered starting point.
You can enter a positive or negative value.
Coordinate of workpiece surface (absolute): Enter
Z coordinate at which machining is to begin

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 61

2 Using Fixed Cycles
2.3 PATTERN DEF pattern definition

Defining individual frames

NC blocks
If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not
10 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
equal to 0, then this value is effective in addition to
the workpiece surface Q203 that you defined in the 11 PATTERN DEF FRAME1
(X+25 Y+33.5 DX+8 DY+10 NUMX5
machining cycle.
NUMY4 ROT+0 ROTX+0 ROTY+0 Z+0)
The Rotary pos. ref. ax. and Rotary pos. minor
ax. parameters are added to a previously performed
rotated position of the entire pattern.

Starting point in X (absolute): Coordinate of the

starting point of the frame in the X axis
Starting point in Y (absolute): Coordinate of the
starting point of the frame in the Y axis
Spacing of machining positions X (incremental):
Distance between the machining positions in the X
direction. You can enter a positive or negative value
Spacing of machining positions Y (incremental):
Distance between the machining positions in the Y
direction. You can enter a positive or negative value
Number of columns: Total number of columns in
the pattern
Number of lines: Total number of rows in the
pattern
Rot. position of entire pattern (absolute): Angle
of rotation by which the entire pattern is rotated
around the entered starting point. Reference axis:
Reference axis of the active machining plane (e.g. X
for tool axis Z). You can enter a positive or negative
value
Rotary pos. ref. ax.: Angle of rotation around which
only the reference axis of the machining plane is
distorted with respect to the entered starting point.
You can enter a positive or negative value
Rotary pos. minor ax.: Angle of rotation around
which only the minor axis of the machining plane is
distorted with respect to the entered starting point.
You can enter a positive or negative value.
Coordinate of workpiece surface (absolute): Enter
Z coordinate at which machining is to begin

62 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

2
PATTERN DEF pattern definition 2.3

Defining a full circle

Bolt-hole circle center X (absolute): Coordinate of

the circle center in the X axis
Bolt-hole circle center Y (absolute): Coordinate of
the circle center in the Y axis
Bolt-hole circle diameter: Diameter of the bolt-
hole circle
Starting angle: Polar angle of the first machining
position. Reference axis: Reference axis of the
active machining plane (e.g. X for tool axis Z). You
can enter a positive or negative value
Number of repetitions: Total number of machining
positions on the circle
Coordinate of workpiece surface (absolute): Enter
Z coordinate at which machining is to begin

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 63

2 Using Fixed Cycles
2.3 PATTERN DEF pattern definition

Defining a pitch circle

Bolt-hole circle center X (absolute): Coordinate of

the circle center in the X axis
Bolt-hole circle center Y (absolute): Coordinate of
the circle center in the Y axis
Bolt-hole circle diameter: Diameter of the bolt-
hole circle
Starting angle: Polar angle of the first machining
position. Reference axis: Major axis of the active
machining plane (e.g. X for tool axis Z). You can
enter a positive or negative value
Stepping angle/end angle: Incremental polar angle
between two machining positions. You can enter a
positive or negative value As an alternative you can
enter the end angle (switch via soft key).
Number of repetitions: Total number of machining
positions on the circle
Coordinate of workpiece surface (absolute): Enter
Z coordinate at which machining is to begin

64 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

2
Point tables 2.4

2.4 Point tables

Application
You should create a point table whenever you want to run a cycle,
or several cycles in sequence, on an irregular point pattern.
If you are using drilling cycles, the coordinates of the working
plane in the point table represent the hole centers. If you are
using milling cycles, the coordinates of the working plane in
the point table represent the starting-point coordinates of the
respective cycle (e.g. center-point coordinates of a circular pocket).
Coordinates in the spindle axis correspond to the coordinate of the
workpiece surface.

Creating a point table

Select the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation.
Call the file manager: Press the PGM MGT key.

FILE NAME?
Enter the name and file type of the point table and
confirm your entry with the ENT key.
Select the unit of measure: Press the MM or INCH
soft key. The TNC changes to the program blocks
window and displays an empty point table.
With the INSERT LINE soft key, insert new
lines and enter the coordinates of the desired
machining position.
Repeat the process until all desired coordinates have been entered.

The name of the point table must begin with a letter.

Use the soft keys X OFF/ON, Y OFF/ON, Z OFF/ON
(second soft-key row) to specify which coordinates
you want to enter in the point table.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 65

2 Using Fixed Cycles
2.4 Point tables

Hiding single points from the machining process

In the FADE column of the point table you can specify if the defined
point is to be hidden during the machining process.
In the table, select the point to be hidden.

Select the FADE column.

Activate hiding, or

Deactivate hiding.

Selecting a point table in the program

In the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation, select the
program for which you want to activate the point table.
Press the PGM CALL key to call the function for
selecting the point table.
Press the POINT TABLE soft key.

Enter the name of the point table and confirm your entry with the
END key. If the point table is not stored in the same directory as
the NC program, you must enter the complete path.
Example NC block
7 SEL PATTERN "TNC:\DIRKT5\MUST35.PNT"

66 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

2
Point tables 2.4

Calling a cycle in connection with point tables

With CYCL CALL PAT the TNC runs the point table
that you last defined (even if you defined the point
table in a program that was nested with CALL PGM).

If you want the TNC to call the last defined fixed cycle at the points
defined in a point table, then program the cycle call with CYCLE
CALL PAT:
To program the cycle call, press the CYCL CALL
key
Press the CYCL CALL PAT soft key to call a point
table
Enter the feed rate at which the TNC is to move
from point to point (if you make no entry the TNC
will move at the last programmed feed rate; FMAX
is not valid)
If required, enter a miscellaneous function M, then
confirm with the END key
The TNC retracts the tool to the safety clearance between the
starting points. Depending on which is greater, the TNC uses either
the spindle axis coordinate from the cycle call or the value from
cycle parameter Q204 as the clearance height.
If you want to move at reduced feed rate when pre-positioning in
the spindle axis, use the miscellaneous function M103.
Effect of the point tables with SL cycles and Cycle 12
The TNC interprets the points as an additional datum shift.
Effect of the point tables with Cycles 200 to 208 and 262 to 267
The TNC interprets the points of the working plane as coordinates
of the hole centers. If you want to use the coordinate defined in
the point table for the spindle axis as the starting point coordinate,
you must define the workpiece surface coordinate (Q203) as 0.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 67

2 Using Fixed Cycles
2.4 Point tables

Effect of the point tables with Cycles 210 to 215

The TNC interprets the points as an additional datum shift. If you
want to use the points defined in the point table as starting-point
coordinates, you must define the starting points and the workpiece
surface coordinate (Q203) in the respective milling cycle as 0.
Effect of the point tables with Cycles 251 to 254
The TNC interprets the points of the working plane as coordinates
of the cycle starting point. If you want to use the coordinate
defined in the point table for the spindle axis as the starting point
coordinate, you must define the workpiece surface coordinate
(Q203) as 0.

68 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
Fixed Cycles:
Drilling
3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.1 Fundamentals

3.1 Fundamentals

Overview
The TNC offers 9 cycles for all types of drilling operations:
Cycle Soft key Page
240 CENTERING 71
With automatic pre-positioning, 2nd
set-up clearance, optional entry of
the centering diameter or centering
depth
200 DRILLING 73
With automatic pre-positioning, 2nd
set-up clearance
201 REAMING 75
With automatic pre-positioning, 2nd
set-up clearance
202 BORING 77
With automatic pre-positioning, 2nd
set-up clearance
203 UNIVERSAL DRILLING 80
With automatic pre-positioning, 2nd
set-up clearance, chip breaking, and
decrementing
204 BACK BORING 83
With automatic pre-positioning, 2nd
set-up clearance
205 UNIVERSAL PECKING 86
With automatic pre-positioning, 2nd
set-up clearance, chip breaking, and
advanced stop distance
208 BORE MILLING 90
With automatic pre-positioning, 2nd
set-up clearance
241 SINGLE-LIP D.H.DRLNG 93
With automatic pre-positioning to
deepened starting point, shaft speed
and coolant definition

70 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
CENTERING (Cycle 240, DIN/ISO: G240) 3.2

3.2 CENTERING (Cycle 240, DIN/ISO:

G240)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to set-up clearance above the workpiece surface.
2 The tool is centered at the programmed feed rate F to the
programmed centering diameter or centering depth.
3 If defined, the tool remains at the centering depth.
4 Finally, the tool path is retraced to setup clearance or—if
programmed—to the 2nd setup clearance at rapid traverse
FMAX.

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block for the starting point

(hole center) in the working plane with radius
compensation R0.
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter Q344
(diameter) or Q201 (depth) determines the working
direction. If you program the diameter or depth = 0,
the cycle will not be executed.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 71

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.2 CENTERING (Cycle 240, DIN/ISO: G240)

Cycle parameters
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Enter a
positive value. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Select depth/diameter (0/1) Q343: Select whether
centering is based on the entered diameter or
depth. If the TNC is to center based on the entered
diameter, the point angle of the tool must be
defined in the T ANGLE column of the tool table
TOOL.T.
0: Centering based on the entered depth
1: Centering based on the entered diameter
Depth Q201 (incremental): Distance between
workpiece surface and centering bottom (tip
of centering taper). Only effective if Q343=0 is
defined. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Diameter (algebraic sign) Q344: Centering
diameter. Only effective if Q343=1 is defined. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of
the tool during centering in mm/min. Input range: 0
to 99999.999; alternatively FAUTO, FU
Dwell time at depth Q211: Time in seconds that
NC blocks
the tool remains at the hole bottom. Input range 0 to
3600.0000 10 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
11 CYCL DEF 240 CENTERING
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q343=1 ;SELECT DEPTH/DIA.
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental): Q201=+0 ;DEPTH
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q344=-9 ;DIAMETER
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q206=250 ;FEED RATE FOR
PLNGNG
Q211=0.1 ;DWELL TIME AT
BOTTOM
Q203=+20 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=100 ;2ND SET-UP
CLEARANCE
12 L X+30 Y+20 R0 FMAX M3 M99
13 L X+80 Y+50 R0 FMAX M99

72 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
DRILLING (Cycle 200) 3.3

3.3 DRILLING (Cycle 200)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to set-up clearance above the workpiece surface.
2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed
feed rate F.
3 The TNC returns the tool at FMAX to the set-up clearance,
dwells there (if a dwell time was entered), and then moves at
FMAX to the set-up clearance above the first plunging depth.
4 The tool then drills deeper by the plunging depth at the
programmed feed rate F.
5 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 4) until the programmed
total hole depth is reached.
6 Finally, the tool path is retraced to setup clearance from the
hole bottom or—if programmed—to the 2nd setup clearance at
FMAX.

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block for the starting point

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 73

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.3 DRILLING (Cycle 200)

Cycle parameters
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Enter a
positive value. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Depth Q201 (incremental): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of hole (tip of drill
taper). Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of
the tool during drilling in mm/min. Input range 0 to
99999.999; alternatively FAUTO, FU
Plunging depth Q202 (incremental): Infeed per cut.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999. The depth does not
have to be a multiple of the plunging depth. The
TNC will go to depth in one movement if:
the plunging depth is equal to the depth
the plunging depth is greater than the depth
Dwell time at top Q210: Time in seconds that the
tool remains at set-up clearance after having been
retracted from the hole for chip removal. Input range
0 to 3600.0000
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 NC blocks
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental): 11 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q201=-15 ;DEPTH
Q206=250 ;FEED RATE FOR
Dwell time at depth Q211: Time in seconds that
PLNGNG
the tool remains at the hole bottom. Input range 0 to
3600.0000 Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q211=0 ;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=+20 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=100 ;2ND SET-UP
CLEARANCE
Q211=0.1 ;DWELL TIME AT
BOTTOM
12 L X+30 Y+20 FMAX M3
13 CYCL CALL
14 L X+80 Y+50 FMAX M99

74 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
REAMING (Cycle 201, DIN/ISO: G201) 3.4

3.4 REAMING (Cycle 201, DIN/ISO: G201)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to the entered set-up clearance above the workpiece
surface.
2 The tool reams to the entered depth at the programmed feed
rate F.
3 If programmed, the tool remains at the hole bottom for the
entered dwell time.
4 The tool then retracts to set-up clearance at the feed rate F, and
from there—if programmed—to the 2nd set-up clearance in
FMAX.

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block for the starting point

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 75

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.4 REAMING (Cycle 201, DIN/ISO: G201)

76 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
BORING (Cycle 202, DIN/ISO: G202) 3.5

3.5 BORING (Cycle 202, DIN/ISO: G202)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to set-up clearance above the workpiece surface.
2 The tool drills to the programmed depth at the feed rate for
plunging.
3 If programmed, the tool remains at the hole bottom for the
entered dwell time with active spindle rotation for cutting free.
4 The TNC then orients the spindle to the position that is defined
in parameter Q336.
5 If retraction is selected, the tool retracts in the programmed
direction by 0.2 mm (fixed value).
6 The tool then retracts to set-up clearance at the retraction rate,
and from there—if programmed—to the 2nd set-up clearance at
FMAX. If Q214=0 the tool point remains on the wall of the hole.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 77

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.5 BORING (Cycle 202, DIN/ISO: G202)

Please note while programming:

Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the

machine tool builder for use of this cycle.
This cycle is effective only for machines with servo-
controlled spindle.

Program a positioning block for the starting point

(hole center) in the working plane with radius
compensation R0.
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
After the cycle is completed, the TNC restores the
coolant and spindle conditions that were active
before the cycle call.

Danger of collision!
Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to
define whether, if a positive depth is entered, the
TNC should output an error message (on) or not (off).
Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation
for pre-positioning when a positive depth is
entered. This means that the tool moves at rapid
traverse in the tool axis to set-up clearance below
the workpiece surface!
Select a disengaging direction in which the tool
moves away from the edge of the hole.
Check the position of the tool tip when you program
a spindle orientation to the angle that you enter in
Q336 (for example, in the Positioning with Manual
Data Input mode of operation). Set the angle so that
the tool tip is parallel to a coordinate axis.
During retraction the TNC automatically takes an
active rotation of the coordinate system into account.

78 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
BORING (Cycle 202, DIN/ISO: G202) 3.5

Cycle parameters
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Depth Q201 (incremental): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of hole. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of
the tool during boring at mm/min. Input range 0 to
99999.999; alternatively FAUTO, FU
Dwell time at depth Q211: Time in seconds that
the tool remains at the hole bottom. Input range 0 to
3600.0000
Retraction feed rate Q208: Traversing speed of the
tool in mm/min when retracting from the hole. If
you enter Q208 = 0, the tool retracts at feed rate for
plunging. Input range 0 to 99999.999, alternatively
FMAX, FAUTO
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision 10 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range 0 to 99999.999 11 CYCL DEF 202 BORING
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Disengaging direction (0/1/2/3/4) Q214:
Determine the direction in which the TNC retracts Q201=-15 ;DEPTH
the Q206=100 ;FEED RATE FOR
tool on the hole bottom (after spindle orientation) PLNGNG
0: Do not retract the tool Q211=0.5 ;DWELL TIME AT
1: Retract the tool in minus direction of the principle BOTTOM
axis
2: Retract the tool in minus direction of the minor Q208=250 ;RETRACTION FEED
RATE
axis
3: Retract the tool in plus direction of the principle Q203=+20 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
axis Q204=100 ;2ND SET-UP
4: Retract the tool in plus direction of the minor axis CLEARANCE
Angle for spindle orientation Q336 (absolute): Q214=1 ;DISENGAGING DIRECTN
Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before Q336=0 ;ANGLE OF SPINDLE
retracting it. Input range -360.000 to 360.000
12 L X+30 Y+20 FMAX M3
13 CYCL CALL
14 L X+80 Y+50 FMAX M99

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 79

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING (Cycle 203, DIN/ISO: G203)

3.6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING (Cycle 203, DIN/

ISO: G203)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to the entered set-up clearance above the workpiece
surface.
2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the entered feed rate
F.
3 If you have programmed chip breaking, the tool then retracts
by the entered retraction value. If you are working without chip
breaking, the tool retracts at the retraction feed rate to the set-
up clearance, remains there—if programmed—for the entered
dwell time, and advances again at FMAX to the set-up clearance
above the first PLUNGING DEPTH.
4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed
feed rate. If programmed, the plunging depth is decreased after
each infeed by the decrement.
5 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 4) until the programmed
total hole depth is reached.
6 The tool remains at the hole bottom—if programmed—for
the entered dwell time to cut free, and then retracts to set-up
clearance at the retraction feed rate. If programmed, the tool
moves to the 2nd set-up clearance at FMAX.

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block for the starting point

80 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
UNIVERSAL DRILLING (Cycle 203, DIN/ISO: G203) 3.6

Cycle parameters
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Depth Q201 (incremental): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of hole (tip of drill
taper). Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of
the tool during drilling in mm/min. Input range 0 to
99999.999; alternatively FAUTO, FU
Plunging depth Q202 (incremental): Infeed per cut.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999. The depth does not
NC blocks
have to be a multiple of the plunging depth. The
TNC will go to depth in one movement if: 11 CYCL DEF 203 UNIVERSAL DRILLING
the plunging depth is equal to the depth Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
the plunging depth is greater than the depth and Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
no chip breaking is defined
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR
Dwell time at top Q210: Time in seconds that the PLNGNG
tool remains at set-up clearance after having been Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
retracted from the hole for chip removal. Input range
0 to 3600.0000 Q211=0 ;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=+20 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 CLEARANCE
Q212=0.2 ;DECREMENT
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q213=3 ;CHIP BREAKING
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q205=3 ;MIN. PLUNGING DEPTH
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Q211=0.25 ;DWELL TIME AT
Decrement Q212 (incremental): Value by which the BOTTOM
TNC decreases the plunging depth Q202 after each Q208=500 ;RETRACTION FEED
infeed. Input range 0 to 99999.9999 RATE
No. of breaks before retracting Q213: Number Q256=0.2 ;DIST. FOR CHIP BRKNG
of chip breaks after which the TNC is to withdraw
the tool from the hole for chip removal. For chip
breaking, the TNC retracts the tool each time by the
value in Q256. Input range 0 to 99999
Minimum plunging depth Q205 (incremental): If
you have entered a decrement, the TNC limits the
plunging depth to the value entered with Q205.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 81

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING (Cycle 203, DIN/ISO: G203)

Dwell time at depth Q211: Time in seconds that

the tool remains at the hole bottom. Input range 0 to
3600.0000
Retraction feed rate Q208: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min when retracting from the hole.
If you enter Q208 = 0, the TNC retracts the tool at
the feed rate in Q206. Input range 0 to 99999.999,
alternatively FMAX, FAUTO
Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256
(incremental): Value by which the TNC retracts the
tool during chip breaking. Input range 0.1000 to
99999.9999

82 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
BACK BORING (Cycle 204, DIN/ISO: G204) 3.7

3.7 BACK BORING (Cycle 204, DIN/ISO:

G204)

Cycle run
This cycle allows holes to be bored from the underside of the
workpiece.
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to set-up clearance above the workpiece surface.
2 The TNC then orients the spindle to the 0° position with an
oriented spindle stop and displaces the tool by the off-center
distance.
3 The tool is then plunged into the already bored hole at the
feed rate for pre-positioning until the tooth has reached set-up
clearance on the underside of the workpiece.
4 The TNC then centers the tool again over the bore hole,
switches on the spindle and the coolant and moves at the feed
rate for boring to the depth of bore.
5 If a dwell time is entered, the tool will pause at the top of the
bore hole and will then be retracted from the hole again. The
TNC carries out another oriented spindle stop and the tool is
once again displaced by the off-center distance.
6 The tool then retracts to set-up clearance at the feed rate for
pre-positioning, and from there—if programmed—to the 2nd
set-up clearance at FMAX.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 83

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.7 BACK BORING (Cycle 204, DIN/ISO: G204)

Please note while programming:

Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the

machine tool builder for use of this cycle.
This cycle is effective only for machines with servo-
controlled spindle.
Special boring bars for upward cutting are required
for this cycle.

Program a positioning block for the starting point

(hole center) in the working plane with radius
compensation R0.
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter depth
determines the working direction. Note: A positive
sign bores in the direction of the positive spindle
axis.
The entered tool length is the total length to the
underside of the boring bar and not just to the tooth.
When calculating the starting point for boring, the
TNC considers the tooth length of the boring bar and
the thickness of the material.

Danger of collision!
Check the position of the tool tip when you program
a spindle orientation to the angle that you enter in
Q336 (for example, in the Positioning with Manual
Data Input mode of operation). Set the angle so that
the tool tip is parallel to a coordinate axis. Select a
disengaging direction in which the tool moves away
from the edge of the hole.

84 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
BACK BORING (Cycle 204, DIN/ISO: G204) 3.7

Cycle parameters
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Depth of counterbore Q249 (incremental):
Distance between underside of workpiece and the
top of the hole. A positive sign means the hole will
be bored in the positive spindle axis direction. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Material thickness Q250 (incremental): Thickness
of the workpiece. Input range 0.0001 to 99999.9999
Off-center distance Q251 (incremental): Off-center
distance for the boring bar; value from tool data
sheet. Input range 0.0001 to 99999.9999
Tool edge height Q252 (incremental): Distance
between the underside of the boring bar and the
main cutting tooth; value from tool data sheet. Input
range 0.0001 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for pre-positioning Q253: Traversing
speed of the tool in mm/min when plunging into the
workpiece, or when retracting from the workpiece.
Input range 0 to 99999.999; alternatively FMAX,
FAUTO
Feed rate for back boring Q254: Traversing speed
of the tool during back boring in mm/min. Input
NC blocks
range 0 to 99999.999; alternatively FAUTO, FU
11 CYCL DEF 204 BACK BORING
Dwell time Q255: Dwell time in seconds at the top
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
of the bore hole. Input range 0 to 3600.000
Q249=+5 ;DEPTH OF
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute): COUNTERBORE
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
Q250=20 ;MATERIAL THICKNESS
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q251=3.5 ;OFF-CENTER DISTANCE
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q252=15 ;TOOL EDGE HEIGHT
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Q254=200 ;F COUNTERBORING
Disengaging direction (1/2/3/4) Q214: Determine Q255=0 ;DWELL TIME
the direction in which the TNC displaces the tool by
Q203=+20 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
the off-center distance (after spindle orientation);
programming 0 is not allowed Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
1: Retract the tool in minus direction of the principle CLEARANCE
axis Q214=1 ;DISENGAGING DIRECTN
2: Retract the tool in minus direction of the minor
Q336=0 ;ANGLE OF SPINDLE
axis
3: Retract the tool in plus direction of the principle
axis
4: Retract the tool in plus direction of the minor axis
Angle for spindle orientation Q336 (absolute):
Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before
it is plunged into or retracted from the bore hole.
Input range -360.0000 to 360.0000

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 85

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.8 UNIVERSAL PECKING (Cycle 205, DIN/ISO: G205)

3.8 UNIVERSAL PECKING (Cycle 205, DIN/

ISO: G205)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to the entered set-up clearance above the workpiece
surface.
2 If you enter a deepened starting point, the TNC move at the
defined positioning feed rate to the set-up clearance above the
deepened starting point.
3 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the entered feed rate
F.
4 If you have programmed chip breaking, the tool then retracts
by the entered retraction value. If you are working without
chip breaking, the tool is moved at rapid traverse to the set-up
clearance, and then at FMAX to the entered starting position
above the first plunging depth.
5 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed
feed rate. If programmed, the plunging depth is decreased after
each infeed by the decrement.
6 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 4) until the programmed
total hole depth is reached.
7 The tool remains at the hole bottom—if programmed—for
the entered dwell time to cut free, and then retracts to set-up
clearance at the retraction feed rate. If programmed, the tool
moves to the 2nd set-up clearance at FMAX.

86 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
UNIVERSAL PECKING (Cycle 205, DIN/ISO: G205) 3.8

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block for the starting point

(hole center) in the working plane with radius
compensation R0.
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
If you enter different advance stop distances for
Q258 and Q259, the TNC will change the advance
stop distances between the first and last plunging
depths at the same rate.
If you use Q379 to enter a deepened starting point,
the TNC merely changes the starting point of the
infeed movement. Retraction movements are not
changed by the TNC, therefore they are calculated
with respect to the coordinate of the workpiece
surface.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 87

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.8 UNIVERSAL PECKING (Cycle 205, DIN/ISO: G205)

Cycle parameters
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Depth Q201 (incremental): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of hole (tip of drill
taper). Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of
the tool during drilling in mm/min. Input range 0 to
99999.999; alternatively FAUTO, FU
Plunging depth Q202 (incremental): Infeed per cut.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999. The depth does not
NC blocks
have to be a multiple of the plunging depth. The
TNC will go to depth in one movement if: 11 CYCL DEF 205 UNIVERSAL PECKING
the plunging depth is equal to the depth Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
the plunging depth is greater than the depth Q201=-80 ;DEPTH
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute): Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range PLNGNG
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q202=15 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental): Q203=+100 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. CLEARANCE
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Q212=0.5 ;DECREMENT
Decrement Q212 (incremental): Value by which Q205=3 ;MIN. PLUNGING DEPTH
the TNC decreases the plunging depth Q202. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q258=0.5 ;UPPER ADV. STOP DIST.
Q259=1 ;LOWER ADV. STOP
Minimum plunging depth Q205 (incremental): If
DIST.
you have entered a decrement, the TNC limits the
plunging depth to the value entered with Q205. Q257=5 ;DEPTH FOR CHIP
Input range 0 to 99999.9999 BRKNG
Q256=0.2 ;DIST. FOR CHIP BRKNG
Upper advanced stop distance Q258 (incremental):
Set-up clearance for rapid traverse positioning Q211=0.25 ;DWELL TIME AT
when the TNC moves the tool again to the current BOTTOM
plunging depth after retraction from the hole; Q379=7.5 ;START POINT
value for the first plunging depth. Input range 0 to
Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
99999.9999
Lower advanced stop distance Q259 (incremental):
Set-up clearance for rapid traverse positioning
when the TNC moves the tool again to the current
plunging depth after retraction from the hole;
value for the last plunging depth. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Infeed depth for chip breaking Q257
(incremental): Depth at which the TNC carries out
chip breaking. No chip breaking if 0 is entered. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999

88 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
UNIVERSAL PECKING (Cycle 205, DIN/ISO: G205) 3.8

Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256

(incremental): Value by which the TNC retracts the
tool during chip breaking. The TNC retracts the tool
at a feed rate of 3000 mm/min. Input range 0.1000
to 99999.9999.
Dwell time at depth Q211: Time in seconds that
the tool remains at the hole bottom. Input range 0 to
3600.0000
Deepened starting point Q379 (incremental with
respect to the workpiece surface): Starting position
of drilling if a shorter tool has already pilot drilled
to a certain depth. The TNC moves at the feed
rate for pre-positioning from the set-up clearance
to the deepened starting point. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Feed rate for pre-positioning Q253: Traversing
velocity of the tool during positioning from the set-
up clearance to a deepened starting point in mm/
min. Effective only if Q379 is entered not equal to
0. Input range 0 to 99999.999, alternatively FMAX,
FAUTO

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 89

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.9 BORE MILLING (Cycle 208)

3.9 BORE MILLING (Cycle 208)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to the programmed set-up clearance above the workpiece
surface and then moves the tool to the bore hole circumference
on a rounded arc (if enough space is available).
2 The tool mills in a helix from the current position to the first
plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F.
3 When the drilling depth is reached, the TNC once again
traverses a full circle to remove the material remaining after the
initial plunge.
4 The TNC then positions the tool at the center of the hole again.
5 Finally the TNC returns to the setup clearance at FMAX. If
programmed, the tool moves to the 2nd set-up clearance at
FMAX.

90 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
BORE MILLING (Cycle 208) 3.9

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block for the starting point

(hole center) in the working plane with radius
compensation R0.
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
If you have entered the bore hole diameter to be
the same as the tool diameter, the TNC will bore
directly to the entered depth without any helical
interpolation.
An active mirror function does not influence the type
of milling defined in the cycle.
Note that if the infeed distance is too large, the tool
or the workpiece may be damaged.
To prevent the infeeds from being too large, enter
the maximum plunge angle of the tool in the ANGLE
column of the tool table. The TNC then automatically
calculates the max. infeed permitted and changes
your entered value accordingly.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 91

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.9 BORE MILLING (Cycle 208)

Cycle parameters
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool lower edge and workpiece surface.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Depth Q201 (incremental): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of hole. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed
of the tool during helical drilling in mm/min. Input
range 0 to 99999.999; alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Infeed per helix Q334 (incremental): Depth of the
tool plunge with each helix (=360°). Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Nominal diameter Q335 (absolute value): Bore-hole
diameter. If you have entered the nominal diameter
to be the same as the tool diameter, the TNC will
bore directly to the entered depth without any NC blocks
helical interpolation. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
12 CYCL DEF 208 BORE MILLING
Roughing diameter Q342 (absolute): As soon as
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
you enter a value greater than 0 in Q342, the TNC
no longer checks the ratio between the nominal Q201=-80 ;DEPTH
diameter and the tool diameter. This allows you Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR
to rough-mill holes whose diameter is more than PLNGNG
twice as large as the tool diameter. Input range 0 to
Q334=1.5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
99999.9999
Q203=+100 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Climb or up-cut Q351: Type of milling operation
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
with M3
CLEARANCE
+1 = climb
–1 = up-cut Q335=25 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
Q342=0 ;ROUGHING DIAMETER
Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT

92 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
SINGLE-LIP D.H.DRLNG (Cycle 241, DIN/ISO: G241) 3.10

3.10 SINGLE-LIP D.H.DRLNG (Cycle 241,

DIN/ISO: G241)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to the entered set-up clearance above the workpiece
surface.
2 Then the TNC moves the tool at the defined positioning feed
rate to the set-up clearance above the deepened starting point
and activates the drilling speed (M3) and the coolant. The TNC
executes the approach motion with the direction of rotation
defined in the cycle, with clockwise, counterclockwise or
stationary spindle.
3 The tool drills to the entered drilling depth at the programmed
feed rate F.
4 If programmed, the tool remains at the hole bottom for chip
breaking. Then the TNC switches off the coolant and resets the
drilling speed to the value defined for retraction.
5 After the dwell time at the hole bottom, the tool is retracted to
the set-up clearance at the retraction feed rate. If programmed,
the tool moves to the 2nd set-up clearance at FMAX.

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block for the starting point

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 93

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.10 SINGLE-LIP D.H.DRLNG (Cycle 241, DIN/ISO: G241)

Cycle parameters
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Depth Q201 (incremental): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of hole. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of
the tool during drilling in mm/min. Input range 0 to
99999.999; alternatively FAUTO, FU
Dwell time at depth Q211: Time in seconds that
the tool remains at the hole bottom. Input range 0 to
NC blocks
3600.0000
11 CYCL DEF 241 SINGLE-LIP
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute): D.H.DRLNG
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q201=-80 ;DEPTH
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR
PLNGNG
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q211=0.25 ;DWELL TIME AT
BOTTOM
Deepened starting point Q379 (incremental with
Q203=+100 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
respect to the workpiece surface): Starting position
for actual drilling operation. The TNC moves at Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
the feed rate for pre-positioning from the set- CLEARANCE
up clearance to the deepened starting point. Input Q379=7.5 ;START POINT
range 0 to 99999.9999
Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
Feed rate for pre-positioning Q253: Traversing Q208=1000 ;RETRACTION FEED
velocity of the tool during positioning from the set- RATE
up clearance to the deepened starting point in mm/
Q426=3 ;DIR. OF SPINDLE ROT.
min. Effective only if Q379 is entered not equal to
0. Input range 0 to 99999.999, alternatively FMAX, Q427=25 ;ROT. SPEED INFEED/
FAUTO OUT
Q428=500 ;DRILLING SPEED
Retraction feed rate Q208: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min when retracting from the hole. Q429=8 ;COOLANT ON
If you enter Q208 = 0, the TNC retracts the tool at Q430=9 ;COOLANT OFF
the feed rate in Q206. Input range 0 to 99999.999,
alternatively FMAX, FAUTO
Rotat. dir. of entry/exit (3/4/5) Q426: Desired
direction of spindle rotation when tool moves into
and retracts from the hole. Input:
3: Turn the spindle with M3
4: Turn the spindle with M4
5: Move with stationary spindle
Spindle speed of entry/exit Q427: Desired spindle
speed when tool moves into and retracts from the
hole. Input range 0 to 99999

94 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
SINGLE-LIP D.H.DRLNG (Cycle 241, DIN/ISO: G241) 3.10

Drilling speed Q428: Desired speed for drilling.

Input range 0 to 99999
M function for coolant on? Q429: M function for
switching on the coolant. The TNC switches the
coolant on if the tool is in the hole at the deepened
starting point. Input range 0 to 999
M function for coolant off? Q430: M function for
switching off the coolant. The TNC switches the
coolant off if the tool is at the hole depth. Input
range 0 to 999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 95

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.11 Programming Examples

3.11 Programming Examples

Example: Drilling cycles

0 BEGIN PGM C200 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20 Definition of workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 TOOL CALL 1 Z S4500 Tool call (tool radius 3)
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
5 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Cycle definition
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q201=-15 ;DEPTH
Q206=250 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q210=0 ;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=-10 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=20 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q211=0.2 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
6 L X+10 Y+10 R0 FMAX M3 Approach hole 1, spindle ON
7 CYCL CALL Cycle call
8 L Y+90 R0 FMAX M99 Approach hole 2, call cycle
9 L X+90 R0 FMAX M99 Approach hole 3, call cycle
10 L Y+10 R0 FMAX M99 Approach hole 4, call cycle
11 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract in the tool axis, end program
12 END PGM C200 MM

96 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

3
Programming Examples 3.11

Example: Using drilling cycles in connection with

PATTERN DEF
The drill hole coordinates are stored in the pattern
definition PATTERN DEF POS and are called by the TNC
with CYCL CALL PAT.
The tool radii are selected so that all work steps can be
seen in the test graphics.

Program sequence
Centering (tool radius 4)
Drilling (tool radius 2.4)
Tapping (tool radius 3)

0 BEGIN PGM 1 MM
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20 Definition of workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Y+0
3 TOOL CALL 1 Z S5000 Call the centering tool (tool radius 4)
4 L Z+10 R0 F5000 Move tool to clearance height (enter a value for F): the TNC
positions to the clearance height after every cycle
5 PATTERN DEF Define all drilling positions in the point pattern
POS1( X+10 Y+10 Z+0 )
POS2( X+40 Y+30 Z+0 )
POS3( X+20 Y+55 Z+0 )
POS4( X+10 Y+90 Z+0 )
POS5( X+90 Y+90 Z+0 )
POS6( X+80 Y+65 Z+0 )
POS7( X+80 Y+30 Z+0 )
POS8( X+90 Y+10 Z+0 )
6 CYCL DEF 240 CENTERING Cycle definition: CENTERING
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q343=0 ;SELECT DEPTH/DIA.
Q201=-2 ;DEPTH
Q344=-10 ;DIAMETER
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q211=0 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
7 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M13 Call the cycle in connection with the hole pattern
8 L Z+100 R0 FMAX Retract the tool, change the tool
9 TOOL CALL 2 Z S5000 Call the drilling tool (radius 2.4)
10 L Z+10 R0 F5000 Move tool to clearance height (enter a value for F)
11 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Cycle definition: drilling

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 97

3 Fixed Cycles: Drilling
3.11 Programming Examples

Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE

Q201=-25 ;DEPTH
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q211=0 ;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q211=0.2 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
12 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M13 Call the cycle in connection with the hole pattern
13 L Z+100 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
14 TOOL CALL 3 Z S200 Call the tapping tool (radius 3)
15 L Z+50 R0 FMAX Move tool to clearance height
16 CYCL DEF 206 TAPPING NEW Cycle definition for tapping
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q201=-25 ;THREAD DEPTH
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q211=0 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
17 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M13 Call the cycle in connection with the hole pattern
18 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program
19 END PGM 1 MM

98 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
Fixed Cycles:
Tapping / Thread
Milling
4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.1 Fundamentals

4.1 Fundamentals

Overview
The TNC offers 8 cycles for all types of threading operations:
Cycle Soft key Page
206 TAPPING NEW 101
With a floating tap holder, with
automatic pre-positioning, 2nd set-up
clearance
207 TAPPING NEW 104
Without a floating tap holder, with
automatic pre-positioning, 2nd set-up
clearance
209 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING 107
Without a floating tap holder, with
automatic pre-positioning, 2nd set-up
clearance, chip breaking
262 THREAD MILLING 113
Cycle for milling a thread in pre-drilled
material
263 THREAD MILLING/ 116
COUNTERSINKING
Cycle for milling a thread in pre-drilled
material and machining a countersunk
chamfer
264 THREAD DRILLING/MILLING 120
Cycle for drilling into solid material
with subsequent milling of the thread
with a tool
265 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING/ 124
MILLING
Cycle for milling the thread into solid
material
267 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING 128
Cycle for milling an external thread
and machining a countersunk chamfer

100 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
TAPPING NEW with a floating tap holder (Cycle 206, DIN/ISO: 4.2
G206)

4.2 TAPPING NEW with a floating tap

holder (Cycle 206, DIN/ISO: G206)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to the entered set-up clearance above the workpiece
surface.
2 The tool drills to the total hole depth in one movement.
3 Once the tool has reached the total hole depth, the direction of
spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the set-
up clearance at the end of the dwell time. If programmed, the
tool moves to the 2nd set-up clearance at FMAX.
4 At the set-up clearance, the direction of spindle rotation
reverses once again.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 101

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.2 TAPPING NEW with a floating tap holder (Cycle 206, DIN/ISO:
G206)

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block for the starting point

(hole center) in the working plane with radius
compensation R0.
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
A floating tap holder is required for tapping. It must
compensate the tolerances between feed rate and
spindle speed during the tapping process.
When a cycle is being run, the spindle speed override
knob is disabled. The feed-rate override knob is active
only within a limited range, which is defined by the
machine tool builder (refer to your machine manual).
For tapping right-hand threads activate the spindle
with M3, for left-hand threads use M4.

102 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
TAPPING NEW with a floating tap holder (Cycle 206, DIN/ISO: 4.2
G206)

Cycle parameters
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Guide value: 4x pitch.
Thread depth Q201 (incremental): Distance
between workpiece surface and root of thread.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Feed rate F Q206: Traversing speed of the tool
during tapping. Input range 0 to 99999.999
alternatively FAUTO
Dwell time at bottom Q211: Enter a value between NC blocks
0 and 0.5 seconds to avoid wedging of the tool 25 CYCL DEF 206 TAPPING NEW
during retraction. Input range 0 to 3600.0000
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute): Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR
PLNGNG
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental): Q211=0.25 ;DWELL TIME AT
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision BOTTOM
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q203=+25 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
CLEARANCE

The feed rate is calculated as follows: F = S x p

F: Feed rate (mm/min)
S: Spindle speed (rpm)
p: Thread pitch (mm)
Retracting after a program interruption
If you interrupt program run during tapping with the machine stop
button, the TNC will display a soft key with which you can retract
the tool.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 103

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.3 RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder NEW (Cycle 207, DIN/
ISO: G207)

4.3 RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap

holder NEW (Cycle 207, DIN/ISO: G207)

Cycle run
The TNC cuts the thread without a floating tap holder in one or
more passes.
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to the entered set-up clearance above the workpiece
surface.
2 The tool drills to the total hole depth in one movement.
3 Once the tool has reached the total hole depth, the direction of
spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the set-
up clearance at the end of the dwell time. If programmed, the
tool moves to the 2nd set-up clearance at FMAX.
4 The TNC stops the spindle turning at set-up clearance.

104 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder NEW (Cycle 207, DIN/ 4.3
ISO: G207)

Please note while programming:

Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the

machine tool builder for use of this cycle.
This cycle is effective only for machines with servo-
controlled spindle.

Program a positioning block for the starting point

(hole center) in the working plane with radius
compensation R0.
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
The TNC calculates the feed rate from the spindle
speed. If the feed-rate override is used during
tapping, the TNC automatically adjusts the feed rate.
The feed-rate override knob is disabled.
At the end of the cycle the spindle comes to a stop.
Before the next operation, restart the spindle with
M3 (or M4).

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 105

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.3 RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder NEW (Cycle 207, DIN/
ISO: G207)

2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental): Q201=-20 ;DEPTH

Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q239=+1 ;THREAD PITCH
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Q203=+25 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
CLEARANCE

Retracting after a program interruption

If you interrupt program run during thread cutting with the machine
stop button, the TNC will display the MANUAL OPERATION soft
key. If you press MANUAL OPERATION, you can retract the tool
under program control. Simply press the positive axis direction
button of the active spindle axis.

106 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING (Cycle 209, DIN/ISO: G209) 4.4

4.4 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING (Cycle

209, DIN/ISO: G209)

Cycle run
The TNC machines the thread in several passes until it reaches the
programmed depth. You can define in a parameter whether the tool
is to be retracted completely from the hole for chip breaking.
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to the programmed set-up clearance above the workpiece
surface. There it carries out an oriented spindle stop.
2 The tool moves to the programmed infeed depth, reverses the
direction of spindle rotation and retracts by a specific distance
or completely for chip release, depending on the definition. If
you have defined a factor for increasing the spindle speed, the
TNC retracts from the hole at the corresponding speed.
3 It then reverses the direction of spindle rotation again and
advances to the next infeed depth.
4 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 3) until the programmed
thread depth is reached.
5 The tool is then retracted to set-up clearance. If programmed,
the tool moves to the 2nd set-up clearance at FMAX.
6 The TNC stops the spindle turning at set-up clearance.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 107

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.4 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING (Cycle 209, DIN/ISO: G209)

Please note while programming:

Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the

machine tool builder for use of this cycle.
This cycle is effective only for machines with servo-
controlled spindle.

Program a positioning block for the starting point

(hole center) in the working plane with radius
compensation R0.
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter "thread
depth" determines the working direction.
The TNC calculates the feed rate from the spindle
speed. If the feed-rate override is used during
tapping, the TNC automatically adjusts the feed rate.
The feed-rate override knob is disabled.
If you defined an rpm factor for fast retraction in
cycle parameter Q403, the TNC limits the speed to
the maximum speed of the active gear range.
At the end of the cycle the spindle comes to a stop.
Before the next operation, restart the spindle with
M3 (or M4).

108 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING (Cycle 209, DIN/ISO: G209) 4.4

Cycle parameters
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Thread depth Q201 (incremental): Distance
between workpiece surface and root of thread.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Thread pitch Q239: Pitch of the thread. The
algebraic sign differentiates between right-hand and
left-hand threads:
+ = right-hand thread
–= left-hand thread Input range -99.9999 to 99.9999
NC blocks
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range 26 CYCL DEF 209 TAPPING W/ CHIP
BRKG
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q239=+1 ;THREAD PITCH
Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q203=+25 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Infeed depth for chip breaking Q257 Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
(incremental): Depth at which the TNC carries out CLEARANCE
chip breaking. No chip breaking if 0 is entered. Input
Q257=5 ;DEPTH FOR CHIP
range 0 to 99999.9999 BRKNG
Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256: The Q256=+25 ;DIST. FOR CHIP BRKNG
TNC multiplies the pitch Q239 by the programmed
Q336=50 ;ANGLE OF SPINDLE
value and retracts the tool by the calculated value
during chip breaking. If you enter Q256 = 0, the Q403=1.5 ;RPM FACTOR
TNC retracts the tool completely from the hole (to
the set-up clearance) for chip breaking. Input range
0.1000 to 99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 109

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.4 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING (Cycle 209, DIN/ISO: G209)

Angle for spindle orientation Q336 (absolute):

Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before
machining the thread. This allows you to regroove
the thread, if required. Input range -360.0000 to
360.0000
RPM factor for retraction Q403: Factor by
which the TNC increases the spindle speed—
and therefore also the retraction feed rate—when
retracting from the drill hole. Input range 0.0001 to
10 Maximum increase to maximum speed of the
active gear range

Retracting after a program interruption

If you interrupt program run during thread cutting with the machine
stop button, the TNC will display the MANUAL OPERATION soft
key. If you press the MANUAL OPERATION key, you can retract the
tool under program control. Simply press the positive axis direction
button of the active spindle axis.

110 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
Fundamentals of Thread Milling 4.5

4.5 Fundamentals of Thread Milling

Prerequisites
Your machine tool should feature internal spindle cooling
(cooling lubricant at least 30 bars, compressed air supply at
least 6 bars).
Thread milling usually leads to distortions of the thread profile.
To correct this effect, you need tool-specific compensation
values which are given in the tool catalog or are available from
the tool manufacturer. You program the compensation with the
delta value for the tool radius DR in the TOOL CALL.
The Cycles 262, 263, 264 and 267 can only be used with
rightward rotating tools. For Cycle 265 you can use rightward
and leftward rotating tools.
The working direction is determined by the following input
parameters: Algebraic sign Q239 (+ = right-hand thread / – =
left-hand thread) and milling method Q351 (+1 = climb / –1 =
up-cut). The table below illustrates the interrelation between the
individual input parameters for rightward rotating tools.

Internal Pitch Climb/ Work direction

thread Up-cut
Right-handed + +1(RL) Z+
Left-handed – –1(RR) Z+
Right-handed + –1(RR) Z–
Left-handed – +1(RL) Z–

External Pitch Climb/ Work direction

thread Up-cut
Right-handed + +1(RL) Z–
Left-handed – –1(RR) Z–
Right-handed + –1(RR) Z+
Left-handed – +1(RL) Z+

The TNC references the programmed feed rate

during thread milling to the tool cutting edge. Since
the TNC, however, always displays the feed rate
relative to the path of the tool tip, the displayed value
does not match the programmed value.
The machining direction of the thread changes if you
execute a thread milling cycle in connection with
Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE in only one axis.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 111

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.5 Fundamentals of Thread Milling

Danger of collision!
Always program the same algebraic sign for the
infeeds: Cycles comprise several sequences of
operation that are independent of each other.
The order of precedence according to which the
work direction is determined is described with the
individual cycles. For example, if you only want to
repeat the countersinking process of a cycle, enter 0
for the thread depth. The work direction will then be
determined from the countersinking depth.
Procedure in case of a tool break
If a tool break occurs during thread cutting, stop
program run, change to the Positioning with MDI
operating mode and move the tool on a linear path to
the hole center. You can then retract the tool in the
infeed axis and replace it.

112 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
THREAD MILLING (Cycle 262, DIN/ISO: G262) 4.6

4.6 THREAD MILLING (Cycle 262, DIN/ISO:

G262)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to the entered set-up clearance above the workpiece
surface.
2 The tool moves at the programmed feed rate for pre-positioning
to the starting plane. The starting plane is derived from the
algebraic sign of the thread pitch, the milling method (climb or
up-cut milling) and the number of threads per step.
3 The tool then moves tangentially on a helical path to the thread
major diameter. Before the helical approach, a compensating
motion of the tool axis is carried out in order to begin at the
programmed starting plane for the thread path.
4 Depending on the setting of the parameter for the number of
threads, the tool mills the thread in one helical movement, in
several offset helical movements or in one continuous helical
movement.
5 After that the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns
to the starting point in the working plane.
6 At the end of the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool in rapid
traverse to setup clearance or, if programmed, to the 2nd setup
clearance.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 113

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.6 THREAD MILLING (Cycle 262, DIN/ISO: G262)

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block for the starting point

(hole center) in the working plane with radius
compensation R0.
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter "thread
depth" determines the working direction.
If you program the thread DEPTH = 0, the cycle will
not be executed.
The nominal thread diameter is approached in a semi-
circle from the center. A pre-positioning movement
to the side is carried out if the pitch of the tool
diameter is four times smaller than the nominal
thread diameter.
Note that the TNC makes a compensation
movement in the tool axis before the approach
movement. The length of the compensation
movement is at most half of the thread pitch. Ensure
sufficient space in the hole!
If you change the thread depth, the TNC
automatically changes the starting point for the
helical movement.

114 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
THREAD MILLING (Cycle 262, DIN/ISO: G262) 4.6

Cycle parameters
Nominal diameter Q335: Nominal thread diameter.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Thread pitch Q239: Pitch of the thread. The
algebraic sign differentiates between right-hand and
left-hand threads:
+ = right-hand thread
–= left-hand thread Input range -99.9999 to 99.9999
Thread depth Q201 (incremental): Distance
between workpiece surface and root of thread.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Threads per step Q355: Number of thread starts by
which the tool is displaced:
0 = one helix on the thread depth
1 = continuous helix on the complete thread length
>1 = several helix paths with approach and
departure, between these the TNC sets the tool by
Q355 x pitch. Input range 0 to 99999
Feed rate for pre-positioning Q253: Traversing
speed of the tool when moving in and out of the
workpiece, in mm/min. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
alternatively FMAX, FAUTO
Climb or up-cut Q351: Type of milling operation
with M3
+1 = climb NC blocks
–1 = up-cut 25 CYCL DEF 262 THREAD MILLING
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance Q335=10 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range Q239=+1.5 ;THREAD PITCH
0 to 99999.9999
Q201=-20 ;THREAD DEPTH
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute):
Q355=0 ;THREADS PER STEP
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q203=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of CLEARANCE
the tool in mm/min while milling. Input range 0 to Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR
99999.999 alternatively FAUTO MILLING

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 115

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.7 THREAD MILLING/COUNTERSINKING (Cycle 263, DIN/ISO:G263)

4.7 THREAD MILLING/COUNTERSINKING

(Cycle 263, DIN/ISO:G263)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to the entered set-up clearance above the workpiece
surface.

Countersinking
2 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre-positioning to the
countersinking depth minus the set-up clearance, and then at
the feed rate for countersinking to the countersinking depth.
3 If a safety clearance to the side has been entered, the TNC
immediately positions the tool at the feed rate for pre-
positioning to the countersinking depth.
4 Then, depending on the available space, the TNC makes a
tangential approach to the core diameter, either tangentially
from the center or with a pre-positioning move to the side, and
follows a circular path.

Countersinking at front
5 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre-positioning to the sinking
depth at front.
6 The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the
center on a semicircle to the offset at front, and then follows a
circular path at the feed rate for countersinking.
7 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the hole center.

Thread milling
8 The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate for pre-
positioning to the starting plane for the thread. The starting
plane is determined from the thread pitch and the type of
milling (climb or up-cut).
9 Then the tool moves tangentially on a helical path to the thread
diameter and mills the thread with a 360° helical motion.
10 After that the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns
to the starting point in the working plane.
11 At the end of the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool in rapid
traverse to setup clearance or, if programmed, to the 2nd setup
clearance.

116 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
THREAD MILLING/COUNTERSINKING (Cycle 263, DIN/ISO:G263) 4.7

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block for the starting point

(hole center) in the working plane with radius
compensation R0.
The algebraic sign of the cycle parameters depth
of thread, countersinking depth or sinking depth at
front determines the working direction. The working
direction is defined in the following sequence:
1. Thread depth
2. Countersinking depth
3. Depth at front
If you program a depth parameter to be 0, the TNC
does not execute that step.
If you want to countersink at front, define the
countersinking depth as 0.
Program the thread depth as a value smaller than the
countersinking depth by at least one-third the thread
pitch.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 117

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.7 THREAD MILLING/COUNTERSINKING (Cycle 263, DIN/ISO:G263)

Cycle parameters
Nominal diameter Q335: Nominal thread diameter.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Thread pitch Q239: Pitch of the thread. The
algebraic sign differentiates between right-hand and
left-hand threads:
+ = right-hand thread
–= left-hand thread Input range -99.9999 to 99.9999
Thread depth Q201 (incremental): Distance
between workpiece surface and root of thread.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Countersinking depth Q356 (incremental):
Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the
workpiece. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for pre-positioning Q253: Traversing
speed of the tool when moving in and out of the
workpiece, in mm/min. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
alternatively FMAX, FAUTO
Climb or up-cut Q351: Type of milling operation
with M3
+1 = climb
–1 = up-cut
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Set-up clearance to the side Q357 (incremental):
Distance between tool tooth and the wall of the
hole. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Depth at front Q358 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and the top surface of the
workpiece for countersinking at front. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Countersinking offset at front Q359 (incremental):
Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center
away from the hole center. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999

118 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
THREAD MILLING/COUNTERSINKING (Cycle 263, DIN/ISO:G263) 4.7

2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental): NC blocks

Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision 25 CYCL DEF 263 THREAD MLLNG/
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. CNTSNKG
Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q335=10 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
Feed rate for countersinking Q254: Traversing Q239=+1.5 ;THREAD PITCH
speed of the tool during countersinking in mm/min.
Q201=-16 ;THREAD DEPTH
Input range 0 to 99999.9999 alternatively FAUTO,
FU Q356=-20 ;COUNTERSINKING
DEPTH
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of
Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
the tool in mm/min while milling. Input range 0 to
99999.999 alternatively FAUTO Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q357=0.2 ;CLEARANCE TO SIDE
Q358=+0 ;DEPTH AT FRONT
Q359=+0 ;OFFSET AT FRONT
Q203=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
CLEARANCE
Q254=150 ;F COUNTERBORING
Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR
MILLING

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 119

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.8 THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 264, DIN/ISO: G264)

4.8 THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle

264, DIN/ISO: G264)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to the entered set-up clearance above the workpiece
surface.

Drilling
2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed
feed rate for plunging.
3 If you have programmed chip breaking, the tool then retracts
by the entered retraction value. If you are working without
chip breaking, the tool is moved at rapid traverse to the set-up
clearance, and then at FMAX to the entered starting position
above the first plunging depth.
4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed
feed rate.
5 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 4) until the programmed
total hole depth is reached.

Countersinking at front
6 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre-positioning to the sinking
depth at front.
7 The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the
center on a semicircle to the offset at front, and then follows a
circular path at the feed rate for countersinking.
8 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the hole center.
Thread milling
9 The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate for pre-
positioning to the starting plane for the thread. The starting
plane is determined from the thread pitch and the type of
milling (climb or up-cut).
10 Then the tool moves tangentially on a helical path to the thread
diameter and mills the thread with a 360° helical motion.
11 After that the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns
to the starting point in the working plane.
12 At the end of the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool in rapid
traverse to setup clearance or, if programmed, to the 2nd setup
clearance.

120 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 264, DIN/ISO: G264) 4.8

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block for the starting point

(hole center) in the working plane with radius
compensation R0.
The algebraic sign of the cycle parameters depth
of thread, countersinking depth or sinking depth at
front determines the working direction. The working
direction is defined in the following sequence:
1. Thread depth
2. Countersinking depth
3. Depth at front
If you program a depth parameter to be 0, the TNC
does not execute that step.
Program the thread depth as a value smaller than the
total hole depth by at least one-third the thread pitch.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 121

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.8 THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 264, DIN/ISO: G264)

122 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 264, DIN/ISO: G264) 4.8

the plunging depth is equal to the depth NC blocks

the plunging depth is greater than the depth 25 CYCL DEF 264 THREAD DRILLNG/
Upper advanced stop distance Q258 (incremental): MLLNG
Set-up clearance for rapid traverse positioning Q335=10 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
when the TNC moves the tool again to the current Q239=+1.5 ;THREAD PITCH
plunging depth after retraction from the hole. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q201=-16 ;THREAD DEPTH
Q356=-20 ;TOTAL HOLE DEPTH
Infeed depth for chip breaking Q257
(incremental): Depth at which the TNC carries out Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
chip breaking. No chip breaking if 0 is entered. Input Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
range 0 to 99999.9999
Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256 Q258=0.2 ;ADV. STOP DIST.
(incremental): Value by which the TNC retracts the
tool during chip breaking. Input range 0.1000 to Q257=5 ;DEPTH FOR CHIP
99999.9999 BRKNG
Q256=0.2 ;DIST. FOR CHIP BRKNG
Depth at front Q358 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and the top surface of the Q358=+0 ;DEPTH AT FRONT
workpiece for countersinking at front. Input range Q359=+0 ;OFFSET AT FRONT
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Countersinking offset at front Q359 (incremental): Q203=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center
away from the hole center. Input range 0 to Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
CLEARANCE
99999.9999
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance PLNGNG
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR
0 to 99999.9999
MILLING
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed
of the tool when moving into the workpiece in
mm/min. Input range 0 to 99999.999 alternatively
FAUTO, FU
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min while milling. Input range 0 to
99999.999 alternatively FAUTO

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 123

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 265, DIN/ISO: G265)

4.9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING/MILLING

(Cycle 265, DIN/ISO: G265)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to the entered set-up clearance above the workpiece
surface.

Countersinking at front
2 If countersinking occurs before thread milling, the tool moves
at the feed rate for countersinking to the sinking depth at front.
If countersinking occurs after thread milling, the TNC moves
the tool to the countersinking depth at the feed rate for pre-
positioning.
3 The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the
center on a semicircle to the offset at front, and then follows a
circular path at the feed rate for countersinking.
4 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the hole center.

Thread milling
5 The tool moves at the programmed feed rate for pre-positioning
to the starting plane for the thread.
6 The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a
helical movement.
7 The tool moves on a continuous helical downward path until it
reaches the thread depth.
8 After that the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns
to the starting point in the working plane.
9 At the end of the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool in rapid
traverse to setup clearance or, if programmed, to the 2nd setup
clearance.

124 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
HELICAL THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 265, DIN/ISO: G265) 4.9

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block for the starting point

(hole center) in the working plane with radius
compensation R0.
The algebraic sign of the cycle parameters depth
of thread or sinking depth at front determines the
working direction. The working direction is defined in
the following sequence:
1. Thread depth
2. Depth at front
If you program a depth parameter to be 0, the TNC
does not execute that step.
If you change the thread depth, the TNC
automatically changes the starting point for the
helical movement.
The type of milling (up-cut/climb) is determined by
the thread (right-hand/left-hand) and the direction of
tool rotation, since it is only possible to work in the
direction of the tool.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 125

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 265, DIN/ISO: G265)

Cycle parameters
Nominal diameter Q335: Nominal thread diameter.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Thread pitch Q239: Pitch of the thread. The
algebraic sign differentiates between right-hand and
left-hand threads:
+ = right-hand thread
–= left-hand thread Input range -99.9999 to 99.9999
Thread depth Q201 (incremental): Distance
between workpiece surface and root of thread.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for pre-positioning Q253: Traversing
speed of the tool when moving in and out of the
workpiece, in mm/min. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
alternatively FMAX, FAUTO
Depth at front Q358 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and the top surface of the
workpiece for countersinking at front. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Countersinking offset at front Q359 (incremental):
Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center
away from the hole center. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Countersinking Q360: Running the chamfer
0 = before thread milling
1 = after thread milling
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999

126 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
HELICAL THREAD DRILLING/MILLING (Cycle 265, DIN/ISO: G265) 4.9

Feed rate for countersinking Q254: Traversing

speed of the tool during countersinking in mm/min.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999 alternatively FAUTO,
FU
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min while milling. Input range 0 to
99999.999 alternatively FAUTO

NC blocks
25 CYCL DEF 265 HEL. THREAD DRLG/
MLG
Q335=10 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
Q239=+1.5 ;THREAD PITCH
Q201=-16 ;THREAD DEPTH
Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
Q358=+0 ;DEPTH AT FRONT
Q359=+0 ;OFFSET AT FRONT
Q360=0 ;COUNTERSINKING
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q203=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
CLEARANCE
Q254=150 ;F COUNTERBORING
Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR
MILLING

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 127

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING (Cycle 267, DIN/ISO: G267)

4.10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING (Cycle 267,

DIN/ISO: G267)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse
FMAX to the entered set-up clearance above the workpiece
surface.

Countersinking at front
2 The TNC moves on the reference axis of the working plane from
the center of the stud to the starting point for countersinking
at front. The position of the starting point is determined by the
thread radius, tool radius and pitch.
3 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre-positioning to the sinking
depth at front.
4 The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the
center on a semicircle to the offset at front, and then follows a
circular path at the feed rate for countersinking.
5 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the starting point.

Thread milling
6 The TNC positions the tool to the starting point if there has
been no previous countersinking at front. Starting point for
thread milling = starting point for countersinking at front.
7 The tool moves at the programmed feed rate for pre-positioning
to the starting plane. The starting plane is derived from the
algebraic sign of the thread pitch, the milling method (climb or
up-cut milling) and the number of threads per step.
8 The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a
helical movement.
9 Depending on the setting of the parameter for the number of
threads, the tool mills the thread in one helical movement, in
several offset helical movements or in one continuous helical
movement.
10 After that the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns
to the starting point in the working plane.
11 At the end of the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool in rapid
traverse to setup clearance or, if programmed, to the 2nd setup
clearance.

128 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING (Cycle 267, DIN/ISO: G267) 4.10

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block for the starting point

(stud center) in the working plane with radius
compensation R0.
The offset required before countersinking at the front
should be determined ahead of time. You must enter
the value from the center of the stud to the center of
the tool (uncorrected value).
The algebraic sign of the cycle parameters depth
of thread or sinking depth at front determines the
working direction. The working direction is defined in
the following sequence:
1. Thread depth
2. Depth at front
If you program a depth parameter to be 0, the TNC
does not execute that step.
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter "thread
depth" determines the working direction.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 129

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING (Cycle 267, DIN/ISO: G267)

Cycle parameters
Nominal diameter Q335: Nominal thread diameter.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Thread pitch Q239: Pitch of the thread. The
algebraic sign differentiates between right-hand and
left-hand threads:
+ = right-hand thread
–= left-hand thread Input range -99.9999 to 99.9999
Thread depth Q201 (incremental): Distance
between workpiece surface and root of thread.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Threads per step Q355: Number of thread starts by
which the tool is displaced:
0 = one helix on the thread depth
1 = continuous helix on the complete thread length
>1 = several helix paths with approach and
departure, between these the TNC sets the tool by
Q355 x pitch. Input range 0 to 99999
Feed rate for pre-positioning Q253: Traversing
speed of the tool when moving in and out of the
workpiece, in mm/min. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
alternatively FMAX, FAUTO
Climb or up-cut Q351: Type of milling operation
with M3
+1 = climb
–1 = up-cut
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Depth at front Q358 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and the top surface of the
workpiece for countersinking at front. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Countersinking offset at front Q359 (incremental):
Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center
away from the hole center. Input range 0 to
99999.9999

130 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING (Cycle 267, DIN/ISO: G267) 4.10

Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute): NC blocks

Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range 25 CYCL DEF 267 OUTSIDE THREAD
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 MLLNG
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental): Q335=10 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q239=+1.5 ;THREAD PITCH
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Q201=-20 ;THREAD DEPTH
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Q355=0 ;THREADS PER STEP
Feed rate for countersinking Q254: Traversing
speed of the tool during countersinking in mm/min. Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
Input range 0 to 99999.9999 alternatively FAUTO, Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
FU Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of Q358=+0 ;DEPTH AT FRONT
the tool in mm/min while milling. Input range 0 to
Q359=+0 ;OFFSET AT FRONT
99999.999 alternatively FAUTO
Q203=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
CLEARANCE
Q254=150 ;F COUNTERBORING
Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR
MILLING

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 131

4 Fixed Cycles: Tapping / Thread Milling
4.11 Programming Examples

4.11 Programming Examples

Example: Thread milling

The drill hole coordinates are stored in the point table
TAB1.PNT and are called by the TNC with CYCL CALL
PAT.
The tool radii are selected so that all work steps can be
seen in the test graphics.

Program sequence
Centering
Drilling
Tapping

0 BEGIN PGM 1 MM
1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20 Definition of workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Y+0
3 TOOL CALL 1 Z S5000 Call tool: centering drill
4 L Z+10 R0 F5000 Move tool to clearance height (enter a value for F): the TNC
positions to the clearance height after every cycle
5 SEL PATTERN "TAB1" Definition of point table
6 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Cycle definition: CENTERING
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q201=-2 ;DEPTH
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q202=2 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q210=0 ;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE 0 must be entered here, effective as defined in point table
Q204=0 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE 0 must be entered here, effective as defined in point table
Q211=0.2 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
10 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M3 Cycle call in connection with point table TAB1.PNT, feed rate
between the points: 5000 mm/min
11 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M6 Retract the tool, change the tool
12 TOOL CALL 2 Z S5000 Call tool: drill
13 L Z+10 R0 F5000 Move tool to clearance height (enter a value for F)
14 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Cycle definition: drilling
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q201=-25 ;DEPTH
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q211=0 ;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE 0 must be entered here, effective as defined in point table

132 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

4
Programming Examples 4.11

Q204=0 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE 0 must be entered here, effective as defined in point table
Q211=0.2 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
15 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M3 Cycle call in connection with point table TAB1.PNT
16 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M6 Retract the tool, change the tool
17 TOOL CALL 3 Z S200 Call tool: tap
18 L Z+50 R0 FMAX Move tool to clearance height
19 CYCL DEF 206 TAPPING NEW Cycle definition for tapping
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q201=-25 ;THREAD DEPTH
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q211=0 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE 0 must be entered here, effective as defined in point table
Q204=0 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE 0 must be entered here, effective as defined in point table
20 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M3 Cycle call in connection with point table TAB1.PNT
21 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M2 Retract in the tool axis, end program
22 END PGM 1 MM

TAB1. PNT MM
NR X Y Z
0 +10 +10 +0
1 +40 +30 +0
2 +90 +10 +0
3 +80 +30 +0
4 +80 +65 +0
5 +90 +90 +0
6 +10 +90 +0
7 +20 +55 +0
[END]

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 133

5
Fixed Cycles:
Pocket Milling /
Stud Milling / Slot
Milling
5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling
5.1 Fundamentals

5.1 Fundamentals

Overview
The TNC offers 6 cycles for machining pockets, studs and slots:
Cycle Soft key Page
251 RECTANGULAR POCKET 137
Roughing/finishing cycle with
selection of machining operation and
helical plunging
252 CIRCULAR POCKET 141
Roughing/finishing cycle with
selection of machining operation and
helical plunging
253 SLOT MILLING 145
Roughing/finishing cycle with
selection of machining operation and
reciprocal plunging
254 CIRCULAR SLOT 149
Roughing/finishing cycle with
selection of machining operation and
reciprocal plunging
256 RECTANGULAR STUD 154
Roughing/finishing cycle with
stepover, if multiple passes are
required
257 CIRCULAR STUD 158
Roughing/finishing cycle with
stepover, if multiple passes are
required

136 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5
RECTANGULAR POCKET (Cycle 251, DIN/ISO: G251) 5.2

5.2 RECTANGULAR POCKET (Cycle 251,

DIN/ISO: G251)

Cycle run
Use Cycle 251 RECTANGULAR POCKET to completely machine
rectangular pockets. Depending on the cycle parameters, the
following machining alternatives are available:
Complete machining: Roughing, floor finishing, side finishing
Only roughing
Only floor finishing and side finishing
Only floor finishing
Only side finishing

Roughing
1 The tool plunges the workpiece at the pocket center and
advances to the first plunging depth. Specify the plunging
strategy with parameter Q366.
2 The TNC roughs out the pocket from the inside out, taking the
overlap factor (Parameter Q370) and the finishing allowance
(Parameters Q368 and Q369) into account.
3 At the end of the roughing operation, the TNC moves the tool
tangentially away from the pocket wall, then moves by the set-
up clearance above the current pecking depth and returns from
there at rapid traverse to the pocket center.
4 This process is repeated until the programmed pocket depth is
reached.

Finishing
5 Inasmuch as finishing allowances are defined, the TNC then
finishes the pocket walls, in multiple infeeds if so specified. The
pocket wall is approached tangentially.
6 Then the TNC finishes the floor of the pocket from the inside
out. The pocket floor is approached tangentially.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 137

5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling
5.2 RECTANGULAR POCKET (Cycle 251, DIN/ISO: G251)

Please note while programming:

With an inactive tool table you must always plunge

vertically (Q366=0) because you cannot define a
plunging angle.
Pre-position the tool in the machining plane to the
starting position with radius compensation R0. Note
parameter Q367 (position).
The TNC automatically pre-positions the tool in
the tool axis. Note parameter Q204 (2nd set-up
clearance).
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
At the end of the cycle, the TNC returns the tool to
the starting position.
At the end of a roughing operation, the TNC
positions the tool back to the pocket center at rapid
traverse. The tool is above the current pecking depth
by the set-up clearance. Enter the set-up clearance
so that the tool cannot jam because of chips.
The TNC outputs an error message during helical
plunging if the internally calculated diameter of the
helix is smaller than twice the tool diameter. If you
are using a center-cut tool, you can switch off this
monitoring function via the suppressPlungeErr
machine parameter.
The TNC reduces the infeed depth to the LCUTS tool
length defined in the tool table if the tool length is
shorter than the Q202 infeed depth programmed in
the cycle.

138 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5
RECTANGULAR POCKET (Cycle 251, DIN/ISO: G251) 5.2

Cycle parameters
Machining operation (0/1/2) Q215: Define
machining operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing
Side finishing and floor finishing are only machined
when the specific allowance (Q368, Q369) is
defined
1st side length Q218 (incremental): Pocket length,
parallel to the reference axis of the working plane.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
2nd side length Q219 (incremental): Pocket length,
parallel to the minor axis of the working plane. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Corner radius Q220: Radius of the pocket corner. If
you have entered 0 here, the TNC assumes that the
corner radius is equal to the tool radius. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Finishing allowance for side Q368 (incremental):
Finishing allowance in the working plane. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Angle of rotation Q224 (absolute): Angle by which
the entire machining is rotated. The center of
rotation is the position at which the tool is located
when the cycle is called. Input range -360.0000 to
360.0000
Pocket position Q367: Position of the pocket in
reference to the position of the tool when the cycle
is called:
0: Tool position = pocket center
1: Tool position = left corner below
2: Tool position = right corner below
3: Tool position = right corner top
4: Tool position = left top corner top
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min while milling. Input range 0 to
99999.999 alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Climb or up-cut Q351: Type of milling operation
with M3
+1 = climb
–1 = up-cut
PREDEF: The TNC uses the value from the GLOBAL
DEF block
Depth Q201 (incremental): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of pocket. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Plunging depth Q202 (incremental): Infeed per
cut. Enter a value greater than 0. Input range 0 to
99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 139

5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling
5.2 RECTANGULAR POCKET (Cycle 251, DIN/ISO: G251)

Finishing allowance for floor Q369 (incremental

value): Finishing allowance in the tool axis. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of
the tool while moving to depth in mm/min. Input
range 0 to 99999.999; alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Infeed for finishing Q338 (incremental): Infeed per
cut. Q338=0: Finishing in one infeed. Input range 0
to 99999.9999
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
NC blocks
0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF
8 CYCL DEF 251 RECTANGULAR
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute): POCKET
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
Q215=0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q218=80 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q219=60 ;2ND SIDE LENGTH
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q220=5 ;CORNER RADIUS
Input range 0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF Q368=0.2 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Path overlap factor Q370: Q370 x tool radius Q224=+0 ;ANGLE OF ROTATION
= stepover factor k. Input range: 0.1 to 1.9999
Q367=0 ;POCKET POSITION
alternatively PREDEF.
Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR
Plunging strategy Q366: Type of plunging strategy: MILLING
0: vertical plunging. The TNC plunges
Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
perpendicularly, regardless of the plunging angle
ANGLE defined in the tool table Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
1: helical plunging. In the tool table, the plunging Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as
Q369=0.1 ;ALLOWANCE FOR
not equal to 0. Otherwise, the TNC generates an
FLOOR
error message
2: reciprocal plunging. In the tool table, the plunging Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR
angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as PLNGNG
not equal to 0. Otherwise, the TNC generates an Q338=5 ;INFEED FOR FINISHING
error message. The reciprocation length depends
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
on the plunging angle. As a minimum value the TNC
uses twice the tool diameter Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
PREDEF: The TNC uses the value from the GLOBAL Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
DEF block CLEARANCE

Feed rate for finishing Q385: Traversing speed of Q370=1 ;TOOL PATH OVERLAP
the tool during side and floor finishing in mm/min. Q366=1 ;PLUNGE
Input range 0 to 99999.999; alternatively FAUTO,
Q385=500 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
FU, FZ
9 L X+50 Y+50 R0 FMAX M3 M99

140 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5
CIRCULAR POCKET (Cycle 252, DIN/ISO: G252) 5.3

5.3 CIRCULAR POCKET (Cycle 252, DIN/

ISO: G252)

Cycle run
Use Cycle 252 CIRCULAR POCKET to completely machine circular
pockets. Depending on the cycle parameters, the following
machining alternatives are available:
Complete machining: Roughing, floor finishing, side finishing
Only roughing
Only floor finishing and side finishing
Only floor finishing
Only side finishing

Finishing
1 Inasmuch as finishing allowances are defined, the TNC then
finishes the pocket walls, in multiple infeeds if so specified. The
pocket wall is approached tangentially.
2 Then the TNC finishes the floor of the pocket from the inside
out. The pocket floor is approached tangentially.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 141

5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling
5.3 CIRCULAR POCKET (Cycle 252, DIN/ISO: G252)

Please note while programming:

With an inactive tool table you must always plunge

vertically (Q366=0) because you cannot define a
plunging angle.
Pre-position the tool in the machining plane to
the starting position (circle center) with radius
compensation R0.
The TNC automatically pre-positions the tool in
the tool axis. Note parameter Q204 (2nd set-up
clearance).
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
At the end of the cycle, the TNC returns the tool to
the starting position.
At the end of a roughing operation, the TNC
positions the tool back to the pocket center at rapid
traverse. The tool is above the current pecking depth
by the set-up clearance. Enter the set-up clearance
so that the tool cannot jam because of chips.
The TNC outputs an error message during helical
plunging if the internally calculated diameter of the
helix is smaller than twice the tool diameter. If you
are using a center-cut tool, you can switch off this
monitoring function via the suppressPlungeErr
machine parameter.
The TNC reduces the infeed depth to the LCUTS tool
length defined in the tool table if the tool length is
shorter than the Q202 infeed depth programmed in
the cycle.

142 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5
CIRCULAR POCKET (Cycle 252, DIN/ISO: G252) 5.3

Cycle parameters
Machining operation (0/1/2) Q215: Define
machining operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing
Side finishing and floor finishing are only machined
when the specific allowance (Q368, Q369) is
defined
Circle diameter Q223: Diameter of the finished
pocket. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Finishing allowance for side Q368 (incremental):
Finishing allowance in the working plane. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min while milling. Input range 0 to
99999.999 alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Climb or up-cut Q351: Type of milling operation
with M3
+1 = climb
–1 = up-cut
PREDEF: The TNC uses the value from the GLOBAL
DEF block
Depth Q201 (incremental): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of pocket. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Plunging depth Q202 (incremental): Infeed per
cut. Enter a value greater than 0. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Finishing allowance for floor Q369 (incremental
value): Finishing allowance in the tool axis. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of
the tool while moving to depth in mm/min. Input
range 0 to 99999.999; alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 143

5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling
5.3 CIRCULAR POCKET (Cycle 252, DIN/ISO: G252)

Infeed for finishing Q338 (incremental): Infeed per NC blocks

cut. Q338=0: Finishing in one infeed. Input range 0 8 CYCL DEF 252 CIRCULAR POCKET
to 99999.9999
Q215=0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance Q223=60 ;CIRCLE DIAMETER
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF Q368=0.2 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute): MILLING
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q369=0.1 ;ALLOWANCE FOR
Input range 0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF FLOOR

Path overlap factor Q370: Q370 x tool radius Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR
= stepover factor k. Input range: 0.1 to 1.9999 PLNGNG
alternatively PREDEF. Q338=5 ;INFEED FOR FINISHING

Plunging strategy Q366: Type of plunging strategy: Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE

0 = Vertical plunging. In the tool table, the Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
be defined as 0 or 90. The TNC will otherwise CLEARANCE
display an error message.
Q370=1 ;TOOL PATH OVERLAP
1 = helical plunging. In the tool table, the
Q366=1 ;PLUNGE
plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must
be defined as not equal to 0. The TNC will Q385=500 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
otherwise display an error message. 9 L X+50 Y+50 R0 FMAX M3 M99
Alternative: PREDEF
Feed rate for finishing Q385: Traversing speed of
the tool during side and floor finishing in mm/min.
Input range 0 to 99999.999; alternatively FAUTO,
FU, FZ

144 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5
SLOT MILLING (Cycle 253, DIN/ISO: G253) 5.4

5.4 SLOT MILLING (Cycle 253, DIN/ISO:

G253)

Cycle run
Use Cycle 253 to completely machine a slot. Depending on the
cycle parameters, the following machining alternatives are available:
Complete machining: Roughing, floor finishing, side finishing
Only roughing
Only floor finishing and side finishing
Only floor finishing
Only side finishing

Roughing
1 Starting from the left slot arc center, the tool moves in a
reciprocating motion at the plunging angle defined in the tool
table to the first infeed depth. Specify the plunging strategy
with parameter Q366.
2 The TNC roughs out the slot from the inside out, taking the
finishing allowances (parameter Q368) into account.
3 This process is repeated until the programmed slot depth is
reached.

Finishing
4 Inasmuch as finishing allowances are defined, the TNC then
finishes the slot walls, in multiple infeeds if so specified. The
slot side is approached tangentially in the left slot arc.
5 Then the TNC finishes the floor of the slot from the inside out.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 145

5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling
5.4 SLOT MILLING (Cycle 253, DIN/ISO: G253)

Please note while programming:

With an inactive tool table you must always plunge

vertically (Q366=0) because you cannot define a
plunging angle.
Pre-position the tool in the machining plane to the
starting position with radius compensation R0. Note
parameter Q367 (position).
The TNC automatically pre-positions the tool in
the tool axis. Note parameter Q204 (2nd set-up
clearance).
At the end of the cycle the TNC merely moves the
tool in working plane back to the center of the slot;
in the other working plane axis the TNC does not do
any positioning. If you define a slot position not equal
to 0, then the TNC only positions the tool in the tool
axis to the 2nd set-up clearance. Prior to a new cycle
call, move the tool back to the starting position or
program always absolute traverse motions after the
cycle call.
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
If the slot width is greater than twice the tool
diameter, the TNC roughs the slot correspondingly
from the inside out. You can therefore mill any slots
with small tools, too.
The TNC reduces the infeed depth to the LCUTS tool
length defined in the tool table if the tool length is
shorter than the Q202 infeed depth programmed in
the cycle.

146 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5
SLOT MILLING (Cycle 253, DIN/ISO: G253) 5.4

Cycle parameters
Machining operation (0/1/2) Q215: Define
machining operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing
Side finishing and floor finishing are only machined
when the specific allowance (Q368, Q369) is
defined
Slot length Q218 (value parallel to the reference
axis of the working plane): Enter the length of the
slot. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Slot width Q219 (value parallel to the secondary
axis of the working plane): Enter the slot width.
If you enter a slot width that equals the tool
diameter, the TNC will carry out the roughing
process only (slot milling). Maximum slot width for
roughing: Twice the tool diameter. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Finishing allowance for side Q368 (incremental):
Finishing allowance in the working plane. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Angle of rotation Q374 (absolute): Angle by which
the entire slot is rotated. The center of rotation is
the position at which the tool is located when the
cycle is called. Input range -360.000 to 360.000
Slot position (0/1/2/3/4) Q367: Position of the slot
in reference to the position of the tool when the
cycle is called:
0: Tool position = slot center
1: Tool position = left end of slot
2: Tool position = center of left slot arc
3: Tool position = center of right slot arc
4: Tool position = right end of slot
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min while milling. Input range 0 to
99999.999 alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Climb or up-cut Q351: Type of milling operation
with M3
+1 = climb
–1 = up-cut
PREDEF: The TNC uses the value from the GLOBAL
DEF block
Depth Q201 (incremental): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of slot. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 147

5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling
5.4 SLOT MILLING (Cycle 253, DIN/ISO: G253)

Plunging depth Q202 (incremental): Infeed per NC blocks

cut. Enter a value greater than 0. Input range 0 to 8 CYCL DEF 253 SLOT MILLING
99999.9999
Q215=0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
Finishing allowance for floor Q369 (incremental Q218=80 ;SLOT LENGTH
value): Finishing allowance in the tool axis. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q219=12 ;SLOT WIDTH
Q368=0.2 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of
the tool while moving to depth in mm/min. Input Q374=+0 ;ANGLE OF ROTATION
range 0 to 99999.999; alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ Q367=0 ;SLOT POSITION
Infeed for finishing Q338 (incremental): Infeed per Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR
cut. Q338=0: Finishing in one infeed. Input range 0 MILLING
to 99999.9999 Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF
Q369=0.1 ;ALLOWANCE FOR
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute): FLOOR
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 PLNGNG
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental): Q338=5 ;INFEED FOR FINISHING
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
Plunging strategy Q366: Type of plunging strategy: CLEARANCE
0 = Vertical plunging. The plunging angle
Q366=1 ;PLUNGE
(ANGLE) in the tool table is not evaluated.
Q385=500 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
1, 2 = Reciprocating plunge. In the tool table,
the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool 9 L X+50 Y+50 R0 FMAX M3 M99
must be defined as not equal to 0. The TNC will
otherwise display an error message.
Alternative: PREDEF
Feed rate for finishing Q385: Traversing speed of
the tool during side and floor finishing in mm/min.
Input range 0 to 99999.999; alternatively FAUTO,
FU, FZ

148 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5
CIRCULAR SLOT (Cycle 254, DIN/ISO: G254) 5.5

5.5 CIRCULAR SLOT (Cycle 254, DIN/ISO:

G254)

Cycle run
Use Cycle 254 to completely machine a circular slot. Depending
on the cycle parameters, the following machining alternatives are
available:
Complete machining: Roughing, floor finishing, side finishing
Only roughing
Only floor finishing and side finishing
Only floor finishing
Only side finishing

Roughing
1 The tool moves in a reciprocating motion in the slot center at
the plunging angle defined in the tool table to the first infeed
depth. Specify the plunging strategy with parameter Q366.
2 The TNC roughs out the slot from the inside out, taking the
finishing allowances (parameter Q368) into account.
3 This process is repeated until the programmed slot depth is
reached.

Finishing
4 Inasmuch as finishing allowances are defined, the TNC then
finishes the slot walls, in multiple infeeds if so specified. The
slot side is approached tangentially.
5 Then the TNC finishes the floor of the slot from the inside out.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 149

5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling
5.5 CIRCULAR SLOT (Cycle 254, DIN/ISO: G254)

Please note while programming:

With an inactive tool table you must always plunge

vertically (Q366=0) because you cannot define a
plunging angle.
Pre-position the tool in the machining plane to the
starting position with radius compensation R0. Note
parameter Q367 (position).
The TNC automatically pre-positions the tool in
the tool axis. Note parameter Q204 (2nd set-up
clearance).
At the end of the cycle the TNC returns the tool to
the starting point (center of the pitch circle) in the
working plane. Exception: if you define a slot position
not equal to 0, then the TNC only positions the tool
in the tool axis to the 2nd set-up clearance. In these
cases, always program absolute traverse movements
after the cycle call.
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
If the slot width is greater than twice the tool
diameter, the TNC roughs the slot correspondingly
from the inside out. You can therefore mill any slots
with small tools, too.
The slot position 0 is not allowed if you use Cycle
254 Circular Slot in combination with Cycle 221.
The TNC reduces the infeed depth to the LCUTS tool
length defined in the tool table if the tool length is
shorter than the Q202 infeed depth programmed in
the cycle.

150 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5
CIRCULAR SLOT (Cycle 254, DIN/ISO: G254) 5.5

Cycle parameters
Machining operation (0/1/2) Q215: Define
machining operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing
Side finishing and floor finishing are only machined
when the specific allowance (Q368, Q369) is
defined
Slot width Q219 (value parallel to the secondary
axis of the working plane): Enter the slot width.
If you enter a slot width that equals the tool
diameter, the TNC will carry out the roughing
process only (slot milling). Maximum slot width for
roughing: Twice the tool diameter. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Finishing allowance for side Q368 (incremental):
Finishing allowance in the working plane. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Pitch circle diameter Q375: Enter the diameter of
the pitch circle. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Reference for slot position (0/1/2/3) Q367:
Position of the slot in reference to the position of
the tool when the cycle is called:
0: Tool position is not taken into account. The slot
position is determined from the entered pitch circle
center and the starting angle
1: Tool position = center of left slot arc. Starting
angle Q376 refers to this position. The entered pitch
circle center is not taken into account
2: Tool position = center of centerline. Starting angle
Q376 refers to this position. The entered pitch circle
center is not taken into account
3: Tool position = center of right slot arc. Starting
angle Q376 refers to this position. The entered pitch
circle center is not taken into account.
Center in 1st axis Q216 (absolute): Center of the
pitch circle in the reference axis of the working
plane. Only effective if Q367 = 0. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Center in 2nd axis Q217 (absolute): Center of the
pitch circle in the minor axis of the working plane.
Only effective if Q367 = 0. Input range -99999.9999
to 99999.9999
Starting angle Q376 (absolute): Enter the polar
angle of the starting point. Input range -360.000 to
360.000
Angular length Q248 (incremental): Enter the
angular length of the slot. Input range 0 to 360.000

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 151

5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling
5.5 CIRCULAR SLOT (Cycle 254, DIN/ISO: G254)

Stepping angle Q378 (incremental): Angle by which

the entire slot is rotated. The center of rotation is at
the center of the pitch circle. Input range -360.000
to 360.000
Number of repetitions Q377: Number of machining
operations on a pitch circle. Input range 1 to 99999
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min while milling. Input range 0 to
99999.999 alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ

152 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5
CIRCULAR SLOT (Cycle 254, DIN/ISO: G254) 5.5

Climb or up-cut Q351: Type of milling operation NC blocks

with M3 8 CYCL DEF 254 CIRCULAR SLOT
+1 = climb
Q215=0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
–1 = up-cut
PREDEF: The TNC uses the value from the GLOBAL Q219=12 ;SLOT WIDTH
DEF block Q368=0.2 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Depth Q201 (incremental): Distance between Q375=80 ;PITCH CIRCLE DIA.
workpiece surface and bottom of slot. Input range Q367=0 ;REF. SLOT POSITION
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q216=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Plunging depth Q202 (incremental): Infeed per
Q217=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
cut. Enter a value greater than 0. Input range 0 to
99999.9999 Q376=+45 ;STARTING ANGLE
Q248=90 ;ANGULAR LENGTH
Finishing allowance for floor Q369 (incremental
value): Finishing allowance in the tool axis. Input Q378=0 ;STEPPING ANGLE
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q377=1 ;NR OF REPETITIONS
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR
the tool while moving to depth in mm/min. Input MILLING
range 0 to 99999.999; alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
Infeed for finishing Q338 (incremental): Infeed per Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
cut. Q338=0: Finishing in one infeed. Input range 0
Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
to 99999.9999
Q369=0.1 ;ALLOWANCE FOR
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance FLOOR
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR
0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF PLNGNG
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute): Q338=5 ;INFEED FOR FINISHING
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
CLEARANCE
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF Q366=1 ;PLUNGE

Plunging strategy Q366: Type of plunging strategy: Q385=500 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
0: vertical plunging. The plunging angle (ANGLE) in 9 L X+50 Y+50 R0 FMAX M3 M99
the tool table is not evaluated.
1, 2: reciprocal plunging. In the tool table, the
plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be
defined as not equal to 0. Otherwise, the TNC
generates an error message
PREDEF: The TNC uses the value from the GLOBAL
DEF block
Feed rate for finishing Q385: Traversing speed of
the tool during side and floor finishing in mm/min.
Input range 0 to 99999.999; alternatively FAUTO,
FU, FZ

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 153

5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling
5.6 RECTANGULAR STUD (Cycle 256, DIN/ISO: G256)

5.6 RECTANGULAR STUD (Cycle 256, DIN/

ISO: G256)

Cycle run
Use Cycle 256 to machine a rectangular stud. If a dimension of the
workpiece blank is greater than the maximum possible stepover,
then the TNC performs multiple stepovers until the finished
dimension has been machined.
1 The tool moves from the cycle starting position (stud center)
to the starting position for stud machining. Specify the starting
position with parameter Q437. The standard setting (Q437=0)
lies 2 mm to the right next to the stud blank
2 If the tool is at the 2nd set-up clearance, it moves at rapid
traverse FMAX to the set-up clearance, and from there advances
to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging.
3 The tool then moves tangentially to the stud contour and
machines one revolution.
4 If the finished dimension cannot be machined with one
revolution, the TNC performs a stepover with the current
factor, and machines another revolution. The TNC takes the
dimensions of the workpiece blank, the finished dimension, and
the permitted stepover into account. This process is repeated
until the defined finished dimension has been reached. If you
have set the starting point on a corner (Q437 not equal to 0), the
TNC mills on a spiral path from the starting point inward until
the finished dimension has been reached.
5 If further stepovers are required the tool then departs the
contour on a tangential path and returns to the starting point of
stud machining.
6 The TNC then plunges the tool to the next plunging depth, and
machines the stud at this depth.
7 This process is repeated until the programmed stud depth is
reached.
8 At the end of the cycle, the TNC merely positions the tool in
the tool axis at the clearance height defined in the cycle. This
means that the end position differs from the starting position.

154 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5
RECTANGULAR STUD (Cycle 256, DIN/ISO: G256) 5.6

Please note while programming:

Pre-position the tool in the machining plane to the

starting position with radius compensation R0. Note
parameter Q367 (position).
The TNC automatically pre-positions the tool in
the tool axis. Note parameter Q204 (2nd set-up
clearance).
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
The TNC reduces the infeed depth to the LCUTS tool
length defined in the tool table if the tool length is
shorter than the Q202 infeed depth programmed in
the cycle.

Danger of collision!
Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to
define whether, if a positive depth is entered, the
TNC should output an error message (on) or not (off).
Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation
for pre-positioning when a positive depth is
entered. This means that the tool moves at rapid
traverse in the tool axis to set-up clearance below
the workpiece surface!
Leave enough room next to the stud for the approach
motion. Minimum: tool diameter + 2 mm
At the end, the TNC positions the tool back to the
set-up clearance, or to the 2nd set-up clearance
if one was programmed. This means that the end
position of the tool after the cycle differs from the
starting position.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 155

5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling
5.6 RECTANGULAR STUD (Cycle 256, DIN/ISO: G256)

Cycle parameters
1st side length Q218: Stud length, parallel to the
reference axis of the working plane. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Workpiece blank side length 1 Q424: Length of
the stud blank, parallel to the reference axis of the
working plane. Enter Workpiece blank side length
1 greater than 1st side length. The TNC performs
multiple stepovers if the difference between blank
dimension 1 and finished dimension 1 is greater
than the permitted stepover (tool radius multiplied
by path overlap Q370). The TNC always calculates a
constant stepover. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
2nd side length Q219: Stud length, parallel to the
minor axis of the working plane. Enter Workpiece
blank side length 2 greater than 2nd side length.
The TNC performs multiple stepovers if the
difference between blank dimension 2 and finished
dimension 2 is greater than the permitted stepover
(tool radius multiplied by path overlap Q370). The
TNC always calculates a constant stepover. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Workpiece blank side length 2 Q425: Length of
the stud blank, parallel to the minor axis of the
working plane. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Corner radius Q220: Radius of the stud corner.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Finishing allowance for side Q368 (incremental):
Finishing allowance in the working plane, is left over
after machining. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Angle of rotation Q224 (absolute): Angle by which
the entire machining is rotated. The center of
rotation is the position at which the tool is located
when the cycle is called. Input range -360.0000 to
360.0000
Stud position Q367: Position of the stud in
reference to the position of the tool when the cycle
is called:
0: Tool position = stud center
1: Tool position = left corner below
2: Tool position = right corner below
3: Tool position = right corner top
4: Tool position = left top corner top
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min while milling. Input range 0 to
99999.999 alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ

156 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5
RECTANGULAR STUD (Cycle 256, DIN/ISO: G256) 5.6

Climb or up-cut Q351: Type of milling operation NC blocks

with M3 8 CYCL DEF 256 RECTANGULAR STUD
+1 = climb
Q218=60 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH
–1 = up-cut
PREDEF: The TNC uses the value from the GLOBAL Q424=74 ;WORKPC. BLANK SIDE
DEF block 1
Q219=40 ;2ND SIDE LENGTH
Depth Q201 (incremental): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of stud. Input range Q425=60 ;WORKPC. BLANK SIDE
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 2
Q220=5 ;CORNER RADIUS
Plunging depth Q202 (incremental): Infeed per
cut. Enter a value greater than 0. Input range 0 to Q368=0.2 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
99999.9999 Q224=+0 ;ANGLE OF ROTATION
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of Q367=0 ;STUD POSITION
the tool while moving to depth in mm/min. Input Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR
range 0 to 99999.999; alternatively FMAX, FAUTO, MILLING
FU, FZ
Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute): PLNGNG
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. CLEARANCE
Input range 0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF Q370=1 ;TOOL PATH OVERLAP
Path overlap factor Q370: Q370 x tool radius Q437=0 ;APPROACH POSITION
= stepover factor k. Input range 0.1 to 1.414; 9 L X+50 Y+50 R0 FMAX M3 M99
alternatively PREDEF
Approach position (0...4) Q437 Define the
approach strategy of the tool:
0: Right of the stud (default setting)
1: left corner below
2: right corner below
3: right corner top
4: left corner top. If approach marks on the stud
surface are caused by the setting Q437=0, specify
another approach position.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 157

5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling
5.7 CIRCULAR STUD (Cycle 257, DIN/ISO: G257)

5.7 CIRCULAR STUD (Cycle 257, DIN/ISO:

G257)

Cycle run
Use Cycle 257 to machine a circular stud. If the diameter of the
workpiece blank is greater than the maximum possible stepover,
then the TNC performs multiple stepovers until the finished
diameter has been machined.
1 The tool moves from the cycle starting position (stud center) to
the starting position for stud machining. With the polar angle
you specify the starting position with respect to the stud center
using parameter Q376.
2 If the tool is at the 2nd set-up clearance, it moves at rapid
traverse FMAX to the set-up clearance, and from there advances
to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging.
3 The tool then moves tangentially on a helical path to the stud
contour and machines one revolution.
4 If the finished diameter cannot be machined with one
revolution, the TNC performs helical infeed movements until the
finished diameter is reached. The TNC takes the dimensions of
the workpiece blank diameter, the finished diameter, and the
permitted stepover into account.
5 The TNC retracts the tool on a helical path from the contour.
6 If more than one plunging movement is required, the tool
repeats the plunging movement at the point next to the
departure movement.
7 This process is repeated until the programmed stud depth is
reached.
8 At the end of the cycle, the TNC positions the tool—after the
helical departure movement—in the tool axis to the 2nd set-up
clearance defined in the cycle, and finally to the center of the
stud.

Please note while programming:

Pre-position the tool in the machining plane to

the starting position (stud center) with radius
compensation R0.
The TNC automatically pre-positions the tool in
the tool axis. Note parameter Q204 (2nd set-up
clearance).
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
At the end of the cycle, the TNC returns the tool to
the starting position.
The TNC reduces the infeed depth to the LCUTS tool
length defined in the tool table if the tool length is
shorter than the Q202 infeed depth programmed in
the cycle.

158 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5
CIRCULAR STUD (Cycle 257, DIN/ISO: G257) 5.7

Danger of collision!
Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to
define whether, if a positive depth is entered, the
TNC should output an error message (on) or not (off).
Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation
for pre-positioning when a positive depth is
entered. This means that the tool moves at rapid
traverse in the tool axis to set-up clearance below
the workpiece surface!
Leave enough room next to the stud for the approach
motion. Minimum: tool diameter + 2 mm
At the end, the TNC positions the tool back to the
set-up clearance, or to the 2nd set-up clearance
if one was programmed. This means that the end
position of the tool after the cycle differs from the
starting position.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 159

5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling
5.7 CIRCULAR STUD (Cycle 257, DIN/ISO: G257)

Cycle parameters
Finished part diameter Q223: Diameter of
the completely machined stud. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Workpiece blank diameter Q222: Diameter of
the workpiece blank. Enter the workpiece blank
diameter greater than the finished diameter. The
TNC performs multiple stepovers if the difference
between the workpiece blank diameter and finished
diameter is greater than the permitted stepover (tool
radius multiplied by path overlap Q370). The TNC
always calculates a constant stepover. Input range 0
to 99999.9999
Finishing allowance for side Q368 (incremental):
Finishing allowance in the working plane. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min while milling. Input range 0 to
99999.999 alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Climb or up-cut Q351: Type of milling operation
with M3
+1 = climb
–1 = up-cut
PREDEF: The TNC uses the value from the GLOBAL
DEF block
Depth Q201 (incremental): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of stud. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Plunging depth Q202 (incremental): Infeed per
cut. Enter a value greater than 0. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of
the tool while moving to depth in mm/min. Input
range 0 to 99999.999; alternatively FMAX, FAUTO,
FU, FZ

160 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5
CIRCULAR STUD (Cycle 257, DIN/ISO: G257) 5.7

Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance NC blocks

between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range 8 CYCL DEF 257 CIRCULAR STUD
0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF
Q223=60 ;FINISHED PART
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute): DIAMETER
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range Q222=60 ;WORKPIECE BLANK
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 DIAMETER

2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental): Q368=0.2 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE

Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. MILLING
Input range 0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF
Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
Path overlap factor Q370: Q370 x tool radius Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
= stepover factor k. Input range 0.1 to 1.414;
Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
alternatively PREDEF
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR
Starting angle Q376: Polar angle relative to the stud PLNGNG
center from which the tool approaches the stud.
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Input range 0 to 359°
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
CLEARANCE
Q370=1 ;TOOL PATH OVERLAP
Q376=0 ;STARTING ANGLE
9 L X+50 Y+50 R0 FMAX M3 M99

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 161

5 Fixed Cycles: Pocket Milling / Stud Milling / Slot Milling
5.8 Programming Examples

5.8 Programming Examples

Example: Milling pockets, studs and slots

0 BEGINN PGM C210 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40 Definition of workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 TOOL CALL 1 Z S3500 Call the tool for roughing/finishing
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
5 CYCL DEF 256 RECTANGULAR STUD Define cycle for machining the contour outside
Q218=90 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH
Q424=100 ;WORKPC. BLANK SIDE 1
Q219=80 ;2ND SIDE LENGTH
Q425=100 ;WORKPC. BLANK SIDE 2
Q220=0 ;CORNER RADIUS
Q368=0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Q224=0 ;ANGLE OF ROTATION
Q367=0 ;STUD POSITION
Q207=250 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
Q201=-30 ;DEPTH
Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q206=250 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=20 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q370=1 ;TOOL PATH OVERLAP
Q437=0 ;APPROACH POSITION
6 L X+50 Y+50 R0 M3 M99 Call cycle for machining the contour outside
7 CYCL DEF 252 CIRCULAR POCKET Define CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING cycle
Q215=0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
Q223=50 ;CIRCLE DIAMETER
Q368=0.2 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT

162 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

5
Programming Examples 5.8

Q201=-30 ;DEPTH
Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q369=0.1 ;ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q338=5 ;INFEED FOR FINISHING
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q370=1 ;TOOL PATH OVERLAP
Q366=1 ;PLUNGE
Q385=750 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
8 L X+50 Y+50 R0 FMAX M99 Call CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING cycle
9 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M6 Tool change
10 TOLL CALL 2 Z S5000 Call tool: slotting mill
11 CYCL DEF 254 CIRCULAR SLOT Define SLOT cycle
Q215=0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
Q219=8 ;SLOT WIDTH
Q368=0.2 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Q375=70 ;PITCH CIRCLE DIA.
Q367=0 ;REF. SLOT POSITION No pre-positioning in X/Y required
Q216=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Q217=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
Q376=+45 ;STARTING ANGLE
Q248=90 ;ANGULAR LENGTH
Q378=180 ;STEPPING ANGLE Starting point for second slot
Q377=2 ;NR OF REPETITIONS
Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Q351=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
Q201=-20 ;DEPTH
Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q369=0.1 ;ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q338=5 ;INFEED FOR FINISHING
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q366=1 ;PLUNGE
12 CYCL CALL FMAX M3 Call SLOT cycle
13 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract in the tool axis, end program
14 END PGM C210 MM

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 163

6
Fixed Cycles:
Pattern Definitions
6 Fixed Cycles: Pattern Definitions
6.1 Fundamentals

6.1 Fundamentals

Overview
The TNC provides two cycles for machining point patterns directly:
Cycle Soft key Page
220 POLAR PATTERN 167

221 CARTESIAN PATTERN 170

You can combine Cycle 220 and Cycle 221 with the following fixed
cycles:

If you have to machine irregular point patterns, use

CYCL CALL PAT(See "Point tables") to develop point
tables.
More regular point patterns are available with the
PATTERN DEF function (See "PATTERN DEF pattern
definition").

Cycle 200 DRILLING

Cycle 201 REAMING
Cycle 202 BORING
Cycle 203 UNIVERSAL DRILLING
Cycle 204 BACK BORING
Cycle 205 UNIVERSAL PECKING
Cycle 206 TAPPING NEW with a floating tap holder
Cycle 207 RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder
NEW
Cycle 208 BORE MILLING
Cycle 209 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING
Cycle 240 CENTERING
Cycle 251 RECTANGULAR POCKET
Cycle 252 CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING
Cycle 253 SLOT MILLING
Cycle 254 CIRCULAR SLOT (can only be combined with
Cycle 221)
Cycle 256 RECTANGULAR STUD
Cycle 257 CIRCULAR STUD
Cycle 262 THREAD MILLING
Cycle 263 THREAD MILLING/COUNTERSINKING
Cycle 264 THREAD DRILLING/MILLING
Cycle 265 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING/MILLING
Cycle 267 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING

166 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

6
CIRCULAR PATTERN (Cycle 220, DIN/ISO: G220) 6.2

6.2 CIRCULAR PATTERN (Cycle 220, DIN/

ISO: G220)

Cycle run
1 At rapid traverse, the TNC moves the tool from its current
position to the starting point for the first machining operation.
Sequence:
2. Move to the 2nd set-up clearance (spindle axis)
Approach the starting point in the spindle axis.
Move to the set-up clearance above the workpiece surface
(spindle axis).
2 From this position, the TNC executes the last defined fixed
cycle.
3 The tool then approaches on a straight line or circular arc the
starting point for the next machining operation. The tool stops at
the set-up clearance (or the 2nd set-up clearance).
4 This process (1 to 3) is repeated until all machining operations
have been executed.

Please note while programming:

Cycle 220 is DEF active, which means that Cycle 220

automatically calls the last defined fixed cycle.
If you combine Cycle 220 with one of the fixed
cycles 200 to 209 and 251 to 267, the set-up
clearance, workpiece surface and 2nd set-up
clearance that you defined in Cycle 220 will be
effective for the selected fixed cycle.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 167

6 Fixed Cycles: Pattern Definitions
6.2 CIRCULAR PATTERN (Cycle 220, DIN/ISO: G220)

Cycle parameters
Center in 1st axis Q216 (absolute): Center of the
pitch circle in the reference axis of the working
plane. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Center in 2nd axis Q217 (absolute): Center of the
pitch circle in the minor axis of the working plane.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Pitch circle diameter Q244: Diameter of the pitch
circle. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Starting angle Q245 (absolute): Angle between the
reference axis of the working plane and the starting
point for the first machining operation on the pitch
circle. Input range -360.000 to 360.000
Stopping angle Q246 (absolute): Angle between the
reference axis of the working plane and the starting
point for the last machining operation on the pitch
circle (does not apply to full circles). Do not enter
the same value for the stopping angle and starting
angle. If you enter the stopping angle greater than
the starting angle, machining will be carried out
counterclockwise; otherwise, machining will be
clockwise. Input range -360.000 to 360.000
Stepping angle Q247 (incremental): Angle between
NC blocks
two machining operations on a pitch circle. If you
enter an angle step of 0, the TNC will calculate the 53 CYCL DEF 220 POLAR PATTERN
angle step from the starting and stopping angles Q216=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
and the number of pattern repetitions. If you enter
Q217=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
a value other than 0, the TNC will not take the
stopping angle into account. The sign for the angle Q244=80 ;PITCH CIRCLE DIA.
step determines the working direction (negative = Q245=+0 ;STARTING ANGLE
clockwise). Input range -360.000 to 360.000
Q246=+360 ;STOPPING ANGLE
Number of repetitions Q241: Number of machining Q247=+0 ;STEPPING ANGLE
operations on a pitch circle. Input range 1 to 99999
Q241=8 ;NR OF REPETITIONS
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999 Q203=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE

Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute): Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP

CLEARANCE
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q301=1 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
Q365=0 ;TYPE OF TRAVERSE

168 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

6
CIRCULAR PATTERN (Cycle 220, DIN/ISO: G220) 6.2

2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):

Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Traversing to clearance height Q301: Definition of
how the touch probe is to move between machining
operations:
0: Move at set-up clearance between machining
operations
1: Move at 2nd set-up clearance between machining
operations
Type of traverse? Line=0/Arc=1 Q365: Definition
of the path function with which the tool moves
between machining operations:
0: Move in a straight line between machining
operations
1: Move in a circular arc on the pitch circle diameter
between machining operations

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 169

6 Fixed Cycles: Pattern Definitions
6.3 LINEAR PATTERN (Cycle 221, DIN/ISO: G221)

6.3 LINEAR PATTERN (Cycle 221, DIN/ISO:

G221)

Cycle run
1 The TNC automatically moves the tool from its current position
to the starting point for the first machining operation.
Sequence:
2. Move to the set-up clearance (spindle axis)
Approach the starting point in the machining plane
Move to the set-up clearance above the workpiece surface
(spindle axis)
2 From this position, the TNC executes the last defined fixed
cycle.
3 The tool then approaches the starting point for the next
machining operation in the positive reference axis direction at
set-up clearance (or 2nd set-up clearance).
4 This process (1 to 3) is repeated until all machining operations
on the first line have been executed. The tool is located above
the last point on the first line.
5 The tool subsequently moves to the last point on the second
line where it carries out the machining operation.
6 From this position, the tool approaches the starting point for
the next machining operation in the negative reference axis
direction.
7 This process (6) is repeated until all machining operations in the
second line have been executed.
8 The tool then moves to the starting point of the next line.
9 All subsequent lines are processed in a reciprocating
movement.

Please note while programming:

Cycle 221 is DEF active, which means that Cycle 221

automatically calls the last defined fixed cycle.
If you combine Cycle 221 with one of the fixed
cycles 200 to 209 and 251 to 267, the set-up
clearance, workpiece surface, 2nd set-up clearance
and the rotational position that you defined in Cycle
221 will be effective for the selected fixed cycle.
The slot position 0 is not allowed if you use Cycle
254 Circular Slot in combination with Cycle 221.

170 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

6
LINEAR PATTERN (Cycle 221, DIN/ISO: G221) 6.3

Cycle parameters
Starting point in 1st axis Q225 (absolute):
Coordinate of the starting point in the reference axis
of the working plane.
Starting point 2nd axis Q226 (absolute): Coordinate
of the starting point in the minor axis of the
machining plane
Spacing in 1st axis Q237 (incremental): Spacing
between each point on a line
Spacing in 2nd axis Q238 (incremental): Spacing
between each line
Number of columns Q242: Number of machining
operations on a line
Number of lines Q243: Number of lines
Angle of rotation Q224 (absolute): Angle by which
the entire pattern is rotated. The center of rotation
lies in the starting point
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range NC blocks
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 54 CYCL DEF 221 CARTESIAN PATTERN

2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental): Q225=+15 ;STARTNG PNT 1ST AXIS
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision Q226=+15 ;STARTNG PNT 2ND
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. AXIS
Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q237=+10 ;SPACING IN 1ST AXIS
Traversing to clearance height Q301: Definition of Q238=+8 ;SPACING IN 2ND AXIS
how the touch probe is to move between machining
Q242=6 ;NUMBER OF COLUMNS
operations:
0: Move at set-up clearance between machining Q243=4 ;NUMBER OF LINES
operations Q224=+15 ;ANGLE OF ROTATION
1: Move at 2nd set-up clearance between machining
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
operations
Q203=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
CLEARANCE
Q301=1 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 171

6 Fixed Cycles: Pattern Definitions
6.4 Programming Examples

6.4 Programming Examples

Example: Polar hole patterns

0 BEGIN PGM BOHRB MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40 Definition of workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 Y+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 TOOL CALL 1 Z S3500 Tool call
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M3 Retract the tool
5 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Cycle definition: drilling
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q201=-15 ;DEPTH
Q206=250 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q202=4 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q211=0 ;DWELL TIME AT TOP
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=0 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q211=0.25 ;DWELL TIME AT BOTTOM
6 CYCL DEF 220 POLAR PATTERN Define cycle for polar pattern 1, CYCL 200 is called
automatically; Q200, Q203 and Q204 are effective as
defined in Cycle 220.
Q216=+30 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Q217=+70 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
Q244=50 ;PITCH CIRCLE DIA.
Q245=+0 ;STARTING ANGLE
Q246=+360 ;STOPPING ANGLE
Q247=+0 ;STEPPING ANGLE
Q241=10 ;NR OF REPETITIONS
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=100 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE

172 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

6
Programming Examples 6.4

Q301=1 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE

Q365=0 ;TYPE OF TRAVERSE
7 CYCL DEF 220 POLAR PATTERN Define cycle for polar pattern 2, CYCL 200 is called
automatically; Q200, Q203 and Q204 are effective as
defined in Cycle 220.
Q216=+90 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Q217=+25 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
Q244=70 ;PITCH CIRCLE DIA.
Q245=+90 ;STARTING ANGLE
Q246=+360 ;STOPPING ANGLE
Q247=+30 ;STEPPING ANGLE
Q241=5 ;NR OF REPETITIONS
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q203=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=100 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q301=1 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
Q365=0 ;TYPE OF TRAVERSE
8 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract in the tool axis, end program
9 END PGM BOHRB MM

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 173

7
Fixed Cycles:
Contour Pocket
7 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket
7.1 SL Cycles

7.1 SL Cycles

Fundamentals
SL cycles enable you to form complex contours by combining up Program structure: Machining with
to 12 subcontours (pockets or islands). You define the individual SL cycles
subcontours in subprograms. The TNC calculates the total contour 0 BEGIN PGM SL2 MM
from the subcontours (subprogram numbers) that you enter in Cycle
14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY. ...
12 CYCL DEF 14 CONTOUR...
The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle 13 CYCL DEF 20 CONTOUR DATA...
is limited. You can program up to 16384 contour
elements in one SL cycle. ...

SL cycles conduct comprehensive and complex 16 CYCL DEF 21 PILOT DRILLING...

internal calculations as well as the resulting machining 17 CYCL CALL
operations. For safety reasons, always run a graphical ...
program test before machining! This is a simple way
18 CYCL DEF 22 ROUGH-OUT...
of finding out whether the TNC-calculated program will
provide the desired results. 19 CYCL CALL
When you use local QL Q parameters in a contour ...
subprogram you must also assign or calculate these in 22 CYCL DEF 23 FLOOR FINISHING...
the contour subprogram.
23 CYCL CALL
...
Characteristics of the subprograms 26 CYCL DEF 24 SIDE FINISHING...
Coordinate transformations are allowed. If they are programmed 27 CYCL CALL
within the subcontour they are also effective in the following
subprograms, but they need not be reset after the cycle call. ...

The TNC recognizes a pocket if the tool path lies inside the 50 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
contour, for example if you machine the contour clockwise with 51 LBL 1
radius compensation RR. ...
The TNC recognizes an island if the tool path lies outside the 55 LBL 0
contour, for example if you machine the contour clockwise with
radius compensation RL. 56 LBL 2

The subprograms must not contain spindle axis coordinates. ...

Always program both axes in the first block of the subprogram 60 LBL 0
If you use Q parameters, then only perform the calculations and ...
assignments within the affected contour subprograms. 99 END PGM SL2 MM

176 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

7
SL Cycles 7.1

Characteristics of the fixed cycles

The TNC automatically positions the tool to the set-up clearance
before a cycle.
Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since the
cutter traverses around islands instead of over them.
The radius of "inside corners" can be programmed—the tool
keeps moving to prevent surface blemishes at inside corners (this
applies to the outermost pass in the Rough-out and Side Finishing
cycles).
The contour is approached in a tangential arc for side finishing.
For floor finishing, the tool again approaches the workpiece on a
tangential arc (for spindle axis Z, for example, the arc may be in
the Z/X plane).
The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up-cut
milling.

The machining data (such as milling depth, finishing allowance and

set-up clearance) are entered as CONTOUR DATA in Cycle 20.

Overview
Cycle Soft key Page
14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY (essential) 178

20 CONTOUR DATA (essential) 183

21 PILOT DRILLING (optional) 185

22 ROUGH-OUT (essential) 187

23 FLOOR FINISHING (optional) 190

24 SIDE FINISHING (optional) 191

Enhanced cycles:
Cycle Soft key Page
25 CONTOUR TRAIN 193

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 177

7 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket
7.2 CONTOUR (Cycle 14, DIN/ISO: G37)

7.2 CONTOUR (Cycle 14, DIN/ISO: G37)

Please note while programming:

All subprograms that are superimposed to define the contour are
listed in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY.

Cycle 14 is DEF active which means that it becomes

effective as soon as it is defined in the part program.
You can list up to 12 subprograms (subcontours) in
Cycle 14.

Cycle parameters
Label numbers for the contour: Enter all label
numbers for the individual subprograms that are to
be superimposed to define the contour. Confirm
every label number with the ENT key. When you
have entered all numbers, conclude entry with the
END key. Entry of up to 12 subprogram numbers 1
to 254.

178 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

7
Superimposed contours 7.3

7.3 Superimposed contours

Fundamentals
Pockets and islands can be overlapped to form a new contour. You
can thus enlarge the area of a pocket by another pocket or reduce it
by an island.

NC blocks
12 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR
13 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL
1/2/3/4

Subprograms: overlapping pockets

The subsequent programming examples are contour

subprograms that are called by Cycle 14 CONTOUR
GEOMETRY in a main program.

Pockets A and B overlap.

The TNC calculates the points of intersection S1 and S2 (they do
not have to be programmed).
The pockets are programmed as full circles.
Subprogram 1: Pocket A
51 LBL 1
52 L X+10 Y+50 RR
53 CC X+35 Y+50
54 C X+10 Y+50 DR-
55 LBL 0

Subprogram 2: Pocket B
56 LBL 2
57 L X+90 Y+50 RR
58 CC X+65 Y+50
59 C X+90 Y+50 DR-
60 LBL 0

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 179

7 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket
7.3 Superimposed contours

Area of inclusion
Both surfaces A and B are to be machined, including the
overlapping area:
The surfaces A and B must be pockets.
The first pocket (in Cycle 14) must start outside the second
pocket.

Surface A:
51 LBL 1
52 L X+10 Y+50 RR
53 CC X+35 Y+50
54 C X+10 Y+50 DR-
55 LBL 0

Surface B:
56 LBL 2
57 L X+90 Y+50 RR
58 CC X+65 Y+50
59 C X+90 Y+50 DR-
60 LBL 0

180 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

7
Superimposed contours 7.3

Area of exclusion
Surface A is to be machined without the portion overlapped by B:
Surface A must be a pocket and B an island.
A must start outside of B.
B must start inside of A.

Surface A:
51 LBL 1
52 L X+10 Y+50 RR
53 CC X+35 Y+50
54 C X+10 Y+50 DR-
55 LBL 0

Surface B:
56 LBL 2
57 L X+40 Y+50 RL
58 CC X+65 Y+50
59 C X+40 Y+50 DR-
60 LBL 0

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 181

7 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket
7.3 Superimposed contours

Area of intersection
Only the area where A and B overlap is to be machined. (The areas
covered by A or B alone are to be left unmachined.)
A and B must be pockets.
A must start inside of B.

Surface A:
51 LBL 1
52 L X+60 Y+50 RR
53 CC X+35 Y+50
54 C X+60 Y+50 DR-
55 LBL 0

Surface B:
56 LBL 2
57 L X+90 Y+50 RR
58 CC X+65 Y+50
59 C X+90 Y+50 DR-
60 LBL 0

182 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

7
CONTOUR DATA (Cycle 20, DIN/ISO: G120) 7.4

7.4 CONTOUR DATA (Cycle 20, DIN/ISO:

G120)

Please note while programming:

Machining data for the subprograms describing the subcontours
are entered in Cycle 20.

Cycle 20 is DEF active, which means that it becomes

effective as soon as it is defined in the part program.
The machining data entered in Cycle 20 are valid for
Cycles 21 to 24.
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
If you are using the SL cycles in Q parameter
programs, the cycle parameters Q1 to Q20 cannot be
used as program parameters.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 183

7 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket
7.4 CONTOUR DATA (Cycle 20, DIN/ISO: G120)

Cycle parameters
Milling depth Q1 (incremental): Distance between
workpiece surface and bottom of pocket. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Path overlap factor Q2: Q2 x tool radius = stepover
factor k. Input range -0.0001 to 1.9999
Finishing allowance for side Q3 (incremental):
Finishing allowance in the working plane. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Finishing allowance for floor Q4 (incremental):
Finishing allowance in the tool axis. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Workpiece surface coordinate Q5 (absolute):
Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Set-up clearance Q6 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Clearance height Q7 (absolute): Absolute height at
which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece (for
intermediate positioning and retraction at the end of
the cycle). Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Inside corner radius Q8: Inside "corner" rounding NC blocks
radius; entered value is referenced to the path of 57 CYCL DEF 20 CONTOUR DATA
the tool center and is used to calculate smoother Q1=-20 ;MILLING DEPTH
traverse motions between the contour elements.
Q8 is not a radius that is inserted as a separate Q2=1 ;TOOL PATH OVERLAP
contour element between programmed Q3=+0.2 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
elements! Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q4=+0.1 ;ALLOWANCE FOR
Direction of rotation? Q9: Machining direction for FLOOR
pockets. Q5=+30 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q9 = –1 up-cut milling for pocket and island Q6=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q9 = +1 climb milling for pocket and island Q7=+80 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
You can check the machining parameters during a program Q8=0.5 ;ROUNDING RADIUS
interruption and overwrite them if required.
Q9=+1 ;DIRECTION OF
ROTATION

184 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

7
PILOT DRILLING (Cycle 21, DIN/ISO: G121) 7.5

7.5 PILOT DRILLING (Cycle 21, DIN/ISO:

G121)

Cycle run
1 The tool drills from the current position to the first plunging
depth at the programmed feed rate F.
2 When it reaches the first plunging depth, the tool retracts in
rapid traverse FMAX to the starting position and advances again
to the first plunging depth minus the advanced stop distance t.
3 The advanced stop distance is automatically calculated by the
control:
At a total hole depth up to 30 mm: t = 0.6 mm
At a total hole depth exceeding 30 mm: t = hole depth / 50
Maximum advanced stop distance: 7 mm
4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed
feed rate F.
5 The TNC repeats this process (1 to 4) until the programmed
total hole depth is reached.
6 After a dwell time at the hole bottom, the tool is returned to the
starting position in rapid traverse FMAX for chip breaking.

Application
Cycle 21 is for PILOT DRILLING of the cutter infeed points. It
accounts for the allowance for side and the allowance for floor as
well as the radius of the rough-out tool. The cutter infeed points
also serve as starting points for roughing.

Please note while programming:

When calculating the infeed points, the TNC does

not account for the delta value DR programmed in a
TOOL CALL block.
In narrow areas, the TNC may not be able to carry
out pilot drilling with a tool that is larger than the
rough-out tool.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 185

7 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket
7.5 PILOT DRILLING (Cycle 21, DIN/ISO: G121)

Cycle parameters
Plunging depth Q10 (incremental): Dimension
by which the tool drills in each infeed (negative
sign for negative working direction). Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for plunging Q11: Traversing speed of
the tool when plunging into the workpiece in mm/
min. Input range 0 to 99999.9999 alternatively
FAUTO, FU, FZ
Rough-out tool number/name Q13 or QS13:
Number or name of rough-out tool. Input range 0
to 32767.9 if a number is entered; maximum 16
characters if a name is entered. NC blocks
58 CYCL DEF 21 PILOT DRILLING
Q10=+5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR
PLNGNG
Q13=1 ;ROUGH-OUT TOOL

186 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

7
ROUGHING (Cycle 22, DIN/ISO: G122) 7.6

7.6 ROUGHING (Cycle 22, DIN/ISO: G122)

Cycle run
1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point, taking
the allowance for side into account.
2 In the first plunging depth, the tool mills the contour from inside
outward at the milling feed rate.
3 First the island contours (C and D in the figure at right) are
rough-milled until the pocket contour (A, B) is approached.
4 In the next step the TNC moves the tool to the next plunging
depth and repeats the roughing procedure until the program
depth is reached.
5 Finally the TNC retracts the tool to the clearance height.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 187

7 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket
7.6 ROUGHING (Cycle 22, DIN/ISO: G122)

Please note while programming:

This cycle requires a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641) or

pilot drilling with Cycle 21.
You define the plunging behavior of Cycle 22 with
parameter Q19 and with the tool table in the ANGLE
and LCUTS columns:
If Q19=0 is defined, the TNC always plunges
perpendicularly, even if a plunge angle (ANGLE) is
defined for the active tool.
If you define the ANGLE=90°, the TNC plunges
perpendicularly. The reciprocation feed rate Q19 is
used as plunging feed rate.
If the reciprocation feed rate Q19 is defined in
Cycle 22 and ANGLE is defined between 0.1 and
89.999 in the tool table, the TNC plunges helically
at the defined ANGLE.
If the reciprocation feed is defined in Cycle 22 and
no ANGLE is in the tool table, the TNC displays an
error message.
If geometrical conditions do not allow helical
plunging (slot geometry), the TNC tries a
reciprocating plunge. The reciprocation length is
calculated from LCUTS and ANGLE (reciprocation
length = LCUTS / tan ANGLE).

If you clear out an acute inside corner and use an

overlap factor greater than 1, some material might
be left over. Check especially the innermost path in
the test run graphic and, if necessary, change the
overlap factor slightly. This allows another distribution
of cuts, which often provides the desired results.
During fine roughing the TNC does not take a
defined wear value DR of the coarse roughing tool
into account.

Danger of collision!
After executing an SL cycle you must program the
first traverse motion in the working plane with both
coordinate data, e.g. L X+80 Y+0 R0 FMAX.

188 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

7
ROUGHING (Cycle 22, DIN/ISO: G122) 7.6

Cycle parameters
Plunging depth Q10 (incremental): Infeed per cut. NC blocks
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 59 CYCL DEF 22 ROUGH-OUT
Feed rate for plunging Q11: Traversing speed Q10=+5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
of the tool in the spindle axis. Input range 0 to Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR
99999.9999, alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ PLNGNG
Feed rate for milling Q12: Traversing speed of Q12=750 ;FEED RATE FOR
the tool in the working plane. Input range 0 to MILLING
99999.9999, alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ Q18=1 ;COARSE ROUGHING
TOOL
Coarse roughing tool Q18 or QS18: Number or
name of the tool with which the TNC has already Q19=150 ;RECIPROCATION FEED
coarse-roughed the contour. Press the TOOL RATE
NAME soft key to switch to name input. The TNC Q208=9999 ;RETRACTION FEED
automatically inserts the closing quotation mark RATE
when you exit the input field. If there was no coarse
roughing, enter "0"; if you enter a number or a
name, the TNC will only rough-out the portion that
could not be machined with the coarse roughing
tool. If the portion that is to be roughed cannot
be approached from the side, the TNC will mill in
a reciprocating plunge-cut; for this purpose you
must enter the tool length LCUTS in the tool table
TOOL.T and define the maximum plunging ANGLE
of the tool. The TNC will otherwise generate an
error message. Input range 0 to 32767.9 if a number
is entered; maximum 16 characters if a name is
entered.
Reciprocation feed rate Q19: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min during reciprocating plunge cut.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999; alternatively FAUTO,
FU, FZ
Retraction feed rate Q208: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min when retracting after machining.
If you enter Q208 = 0, the TNC retracts the tool at
the feed rate in Q12. Input range 0 to 99999.9999,
alternatively FMAX,FAUTO

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 189

7 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket
7.7 FLOOR FINISHING (Cycle 23, DIN/ISO: G123)

7.7 FLOOR FINISHING (Cycle 23, DIN/ISO:

G123)

Cycle run
The tool approaches the machining plane smoothly (on a vertically
tangential arc) if there is sufficient room. If there is not enough
room, the TNC moves the tool to depth vertically. The tool then
clears the finishing allowance remaining from rough-out.

Please note while programming:

The TNC automatically calculates the starting point

for finishing. The starting point depends on the
available space in the pocket.
The approaching radius for pre-positioning to the final
depth is permanently defined and independent of the
plunging angle of the tool.

Danger of collision!
After executing an SL cycle you must program the
first traverse motion in the working plane with both
coordinate data, e.g. L X+80 Y+0 R0 FMAX.

Cycle parameters
Feed rate for plunging Q11: Traversing speed of
the tool when plunging into the workpiece in mm/
min. Input range 0 to 99999.9999 alternatively
FAUTO, FU, FZ
Feed rate for milling Q12: Traversing speed of
the tool in the working plane. Input range 0 to
99999.9999, alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Retraction feed rate Q208: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min when retracting after machining.
If you enter Q208 = 0, the TNC retracts the tool at NC blocks
the feed rate in Q12. Input range 0 to 99999.9999,
60 CYCL DEF 23 FLOOR FINISHING
alternatively FMAX,FAUTO
Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR
PLNGNG
Q12=350 ;FEED RATE FOR
MILLING
Q208=9999 ;RETRACTION FEED
RATE

190 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

7
SIDE FINISHING (Cycle 24, DIN/ISO: G124) 7.8

7.8 SIDE FINISHING (Cycle 24, DIN/ISO:

G124)

Cycle run
The subcontours are approached and departed on a tangential arc.
Each subcontour is finished separately.

Please note while programming:

The sum of allowance for side (Q14) and the radius

of the finish mill must be smaller than the sum of
allowance for side (Q3, Cycle 20) and the radius of
the rough mill.
This calculation also holds if you run Cycle 24 without
having roughed out with Cycle 22; in this case, enter
"0" for the radius of the rough mill.
You can use Cycle 24 also for contour milling. Then
you must:
define the contour to be milled as a single island
(without pocket limit), and

enter the finishing allowance (Q3) in Cycle 20

to be greater than the sum of the finishing
allowance Q14 + radius of the tool being used.

The TNC automatically calculates the starting point

for finishing. The starting point depends on the
available space in the pocket and the allowance
programmed in Cycle 20.
The starting point calculated by the TNC also
depends on the machining sequence. If you select
the finishing cycle with the GOTO key and then start
the program, the starting point can be at a different
location from where it would be if you execute the
program in the defined sequence.

Danger of collision!
After executing an SL cycle you must program the
first traverse motion in the working plane with both
coordinate data, e.g. L X+80 Y+0 R0 FMAX.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 191

7 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket
7.8 SIDE FINISHING (Cycle 24, DIN/ISO: G124)

Cycle parameters
Direction of rotation Q9: Machining direction:
+1: Rotation counterclockwise
–1: Rotation clockwise
Plunging depth Q10 (incremental): Infeed per cut.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for plunging Q11: Traversing speed of
the tool when plunging into the workpiece in mm/
min. Input range 0 to 99999.9999 alternatively
FAUTO, FU, FZ
NC blocks
Feed rate for milling Q12: Traversing speed of
the tool in the working plane. Input range 0 to 61 CYCL DEF 24 SIDE FINISHING
99999.9999, alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ Q9=+1 ;DIRECTION OF
ROTATION
Finishing allowance for side Q14 (incremental):
Enter the allowed material for several finish-milling Q10=+5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
operations. If you enter Q14 = 0, the remaining Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR
finishing allowance will be cleared. Input range PLNGNG
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q12=350 ;FEED RATE FOR
MILLING
Q14=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE

192 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

7
CONTOUR TRAIN (Cycle 25, DIN/ISO: G125) 7.9

7.9 CONTOUR TRAIN (Cycle 25, DIN/ISO:

G125)

Cycle run
In conjunction with Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY, this cycle
facilitates the machining of open and closed contours.
Cycle 25 CONTOUR TRAIN offers considerable advantages over
machining a contour using positioning blocks:
The TNC monitors the operation to prevent undercuts and
surface blemishes. It is recommended that you run a graphic
simulation of the contour before execution.
If the radius of the selected tool is too large, the corners of the
contour may have to be reworked.
The contour can be machined throughout by up-cut or by climb
milling. The type of milling even remains effective when the
contours are mirrored.
The tool can traverse back and forth for milling in several
infeeds: This results in faster machining.
Allowance values can be entered in order to perform repeated
rough-milling and finish-milling operations.

Please note while programming:

The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH

determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
The TNC takes only the first label of Cycle 14
CONTOUR GEOMETRY into account.
The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle
is limited. You can program up to 16384 contour
elements in one SL cycle.
Cycle 20 CONTOUR DATA is not required.
The miscellaneous functions M109 and M110 are not
effective when machining a contour with Cycle 25.
When you use local QL Q parameters in a contour
subprogram you must also assign or calculate these
in the contour subprogram.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 193

7 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket
7.9 CONTOUR TRAIN (Cycle 25, DIN/ISO: G125)

Danger of collision!
To avoid collisions,
Do not program positions in incremental
dimensions immediately after Cycle 25 since they
are referenced to the position of the tool at the
end of the cycle.
Move the tool to defined (absolute) positions in
all main axes, since the position of the tool at the
end of the cycle is not identical to the position of
the tool at the start of the cycle.

Cycle parameters
Milling depth Q1 (incremental): Distance between NC blocks
workpiece surface and contour floor. Input range 62 CYCL DEF 25 CONTOUR TRAIN
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q1=-20 ;MILLING DEPTH
Finishing allowance for side Q3 (incremental): Q3=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Finishing allowance in the working plane. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q5=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q7=+50 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Workpiece surface coordinate Q5 (absolute):
Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input Q10=+5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR
PLNGNG
Clearance height Q7 (absolute): Absolute height at
which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece (for Q12=350 ;FEED RATE FOR
intermediate positioning and retraction at the end of MILLING
the cycle). Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q15=-1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
Plunging depth Q10 (incremental): Infeed per cut.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for plunging Q11: Traversing speed
of the tool in the spindle axis. Input range 0 to
99999.9999, alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Feed rate for milling Q12: Traversing speed of
the tool in the working plane. Input range 0 to
99999.9999, alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
CLIMB OR UP-CUT Q15:
Climb milling: Input value = +1
Conventional up-cut milling: Input value = –1
Climb milling and up-cut milling alternately in several
infeeds: Input value = 0

194 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

7
Programming Examples 7.10

7.10 Programming Examples

Example: Roughing-out and fine-roughing a pocket

0 BEGIN PGM C20 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X-10 Y-10 Z-40
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0 Definition of workpiece blank
3 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2500 Tool call: coarse roughing tool, diameter 30
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
5 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Define contour subprogram
6 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL 1
7 CYCL DEF 20 CONTOUR DATA Define general machining parameters
Q1=-20 ;MILLING DEPTH
Q2=1 ;TOOL PATH OVERLAP
Q3=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Q4=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR
Q5=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q6=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q7=+100 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Q8=0.1 ;ROUNDING RADIUS
Q9=-1 ;DIRECTION
8 CYCL DEF 22 ROUGH-OUT Cycle definition: Coarse roughing
Q10=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q12=350 ;FEED RATE FOR ROUGH-OUT
Q18=0 ;COARSE ROUGHING TOOL
Q19=150 ;RECIPROCATION FEED RATE
Q208=30000 ;RETRACTION FEED RATE
9 CYCL CALL M3 Cycle call: Coarse roughing
10 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M6 Tool change
11 TOOL CALL 2 Z S3000 Tool call: fine roughing tool, diameter 15

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 195

7 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket
7.10 Programming Examples

12 CYCL DEF 22 ROUGH-OUT Define the fine roughing cycle

Q10=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q12=350 ;FEED RATE FOR ROUGH-OUT
Q18=1 ;COARSE ROUGHING TOOL
Q19=150 ;RECIPROCATION FEED RATE
Q208=30000 ;RETRACTION FEED RATE
13 CYCL CALL M3 Cycle call: Fine roughing
14 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract in the tool axis, end program
15 LBL 1 Contour subprogram
16 L X+0 Y+30 RR
17 FC DR- R30 CCX+30 CCY+30
18 FL AN+60 PDX+30 PDY+30 D10
19 FSELECT 3
20 FPOL X+30 Y+30
21 FC DR- R20 CCPR+55 CCPA+60
22 FSELECT 2
23 FL AN-120 PDX+30 PDY+30 D10
24 FSELECT 3
25 FC X+0 DR- R30 CCX+30 CCY+30
26 FSELECT 2
27 LBL 0
28 END PGM C20 MM

196 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

7
Programming Examples 7.10

Example: Pilot drilling, roughing-out and finishing

overlapping contours

0 BEGIN PGM C21 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40 Definition of workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2500 Tool call: Drill, diameter 12
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
5 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Define contour subprogram
6 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL 1 /2 /3 /4
7 CYCL DEF 20 CONTOUR DATA Define general machining parameters
Q1=-20 ;MILLING DEPTH
Q2=1 ;TOOL PATH OVERLAP
Q3=+0.5 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Q4=+0.5 ;ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR
Q5=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q6=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q7=+100 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Q8=0.1 ;ROUNDING RADIUS
Q9=-1 ;DIRECTION
8 CYCL DEF 21 PILOT DRILLING Cycle definition: Pilot drilling
Q10=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q11=250 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q13=2 ;ROUGH-OUT TOOL
9 CYCL CALL M3 Cycle call: Pilot drilling
10 L +250 R0 FMAX M6 Tool change
11 TOOL CALL 2 Z S3000 Call the tool for roughing/finishing, diameter 12
12 CYCL DEF 22 ROUGH-OUT Cycle definition: Rough-out
Q10=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q12=350 ;FEED RATE FOR ROUGH-OUT

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 197

7 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket
7.10 Programming Examples

Q18=0 ;COARSE ROUGHING TOOL

Q19=150 ;RECIPROCATION FEED RATE
Q208=30000 ;RETRACTION FEED RATE
13 CYCL CALL M3 Cycle call: Rough-out
14 CYCL DEF 23 FLOOR FINISHING Cycle definition: Floor finishing
Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q12=200 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Q208=30000 ;RETRACTION FEED RATE
15 CYCL CALL Cycle call: Floor finishing
16 CYCL DEF 24 SIDE FINISHING Cycle definition: Side finishing
Q9=+1 ;DIRECTION OF ROTATION
Q10=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q12=400 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Q14=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
17 CYCL CALL Cycle call: Side finishing
18 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program
19 LBL 1 Contour subprogram 1: left pocket
20 CC X+35 Y+50
21 L X+10 Y+50 RR
22 C X+10 DR-
23 LBL 0
24 LBL 2 Contour subprogram 2: right pocket
25 CC X+65 Y+50
26 L X+90 Y+50 RR
27 C X+90 DR-
28 LBL 0
29 LBL 3 Contour subprogram 3: square left island
30 L X+27 Y+50 RL
31 L Y+58
32 L X+43
33 L Y+42
34 L X+27
35 LBL 0
36 LBL 4 Contour subprogram 4: triangular right island
37 L X+65 Y+42 RL
38 L X+57
39 L X+65 Y+58
40 L X+73 Y+42
41 LBL 0
42 END PGM C21 MM

198 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

7
Programming Examples 7.10

Example: Contour train

0 BEGIN PGM C25 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40 Definition of workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2000 Tool call: Diameter 20
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
5 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Define contour subprogram
6 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL 1
7 CYCL DEF 25 CONTOUR TRAIN Define machining parameters
Q1=-20 ;MILLING DEPTH
Q3=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Q5=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q7=+250 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Q10=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q12=200 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Q15=+1 ;CLIMB OR UP-CUT
8 CYCL CALL M3 Cycle call
9 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program
10 LBL 1 Contour subprogram
11 L X+0 Y+15 RL
12 L X+5 Y+20
13 CT X+5 Y+75
14 L Y+95
15 RND R7.5
16 L X+50
17 RND R7.5
18 L X+100 Y+80
19 LBL 0
20 END PGM C25 MM

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 199

8
Fixed Cycles:
Cylindrical Surface
8 Fixed Cycles: Cylindrical Surface
8.1 Fundamentals

8.1 Fundamentals

Overview of cylindrical surface cycles

Cycle Soft key Page
27 CYLINDER SURFACE 203

28 CYLINDER SURFACE 206

slot milling

29 CYLINDER SURFACE 209

ridge milling

202 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

8
CYLINDER SURFACE (Cycle 27, DIN/ISO: G127, software option 1) 8.2

8.2 CYLINDER SURFACE (Cycle 27, DIN/

ISO: G127, software option 1)

Cycle call
This cycle enables you to program a contour in two dimensions and
then roll it onto a cylindrical surface for 3-D machining. Use Cycle
28 if you want to mill guideways on the cylinder.
The contour is described in a subprogram identified in Cycle 14
CONTOUR GEOMETRY.
In the subprogram you always describe the contour with the
coordinates X and Y, regardless of which rotary axes exist on your
machine. This means that the contour description is independent
of your machine configuration. The path functions L, CHF, CR, RND
and CT are available.
The dimensions for the rotary axis (X coordinates) can be entered
as desired either in degrees or in mm (or inches). Specify this with
Q17 in the cycle definition.
1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point, taking
the allowance for side into account.
2 At the first plunging depth, the tool mills along the programmed
contour at the milling feed rate Q12.
3 At the end of the contour, the TNC returns the tool to the set-up
clearance and returns to the point of penetration.
4 Steps 1 to 3 are repeated until the programmed milling depth
Q1 is reached.
5 Then the tool moves to the set-up clearance.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 203

8 Fixed Cycles: Cylindrical Surface
8.2 CYLINDER SURFACE (Cycle 27, DIN/ISO: G127, software option 1)

Please note while programming:

The machine and TNC must be prepared for cylinder

surface interpolation by the machine tool builder.
Refer to your machine manual.

In the first NC block of the contour program, always

program both cylinder surface coordinates.
The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle
is limited. You can program up to 16384 contour
elements in one SL cycle.
The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH
determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
This cycle requires a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641).
The cylinder must be set up centered on the rotary
table. Set the reference point to the center of the
rotary table.
The spindle axis must be perpendicular to the rotary
table axis when the cycle is called; If this is not
the case, the TNC will generate an error message.
Switching of the kinematics may be required.
This cycle can also be used in a tilted working plane.
The set-up clearance must be greater than the tool
radius.
The machining time can increase if the contour
consists of many non-tangential contour elements.
When you use local QL Q parameters in a contour
subprogram you must also assign or calculate these
in the contour subprogram.

204 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

8
CYLINDER SURFACE (Cycle 27, DIN/ISO: G127, software option 1) 8.2

Cycle parameters
Milling depth Q1 (incremental): Distance between NC blocks
the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour. 63 CYCL DEF 27 CYLINDER SURFACE
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q1=-8 ;MILLING DEPTH
Finishing allowance for side Q3 (incremental): Q3=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Finishing allowance in the plane of the unrolled
cylindrical surface. This allowance is effective in the Q6=+0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
direction of the radius compensation. Input range Q10=+3 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR
Set-up clearance Q6 (incremental): Distance PLNGNG
between the tool tip and the cylinder surface. Input Q12=350 ;FEED RATE FOR
range 0 to 99999.9999 MILLING

Plunging depth Q10 (incremental): Infeed per cut. Q16=25 ;RADIUS

Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q17=0 ;DIMENSION TYPE
Feed rate for plunging Q11: Traversing speed
of the tool in the spindle axis. Input range 0 to
99999.9999, alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Feed rate for milling Q12: Traversing speed of
the tool in the working plane. Input range 0 to
99999.9999, alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Cylinder radius Q16: Radius of the cylinder on
which the contour is to be machined. Input range 0
to 99999.9999
Dimension type? deg=0 MM/INCH=1 Q17: The
coordinates for the rotary axis of the subprogram
are given either in degrees (0) or in mm/inches (1).

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 205

8 Fixed Cycles: Cylindrical Surface
8.3 CYLINDER SURFACE Slot milling (Cycle 28, DIN/ISO: G128,
software option 1)

8.3 CYLINDER SURFACE Slot milling

(Cycle 28, DIN/ISO: G128, software
option 1)

Cycle run
This cycle enables you to program a guide notch in two dimensions
and then transfer it onto a cylindrical surface. Unlike Cycle 27,
with this cycle the TNC adjusts the tool so that, with radius
compensation active, the walls of the slot are nearly parallel. You
can machine exactly parallel walls by using a tool that is exactly as
wide as the slot.
The smaller the tool is with respect to the slot width, the larger the
distortion in circular arcs and oblique line segments. To minimize
this process-related distortion, you can define in parameter Q21
a tolerance with which the TNC machines a slot as similar as
possible to a slot machined with a tool of the same width as the
slot.
Program the midpoint path of the contour together with the tool
radius compensation. With the radius compensation you specify
whether the TNC cuts the slot with climb milling or up-cut milling.
1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point.
2 At the first plunging depth, the tool mills along the programmed
slot wall at the milling feed rate Q12 while respecting the
finishing allowance for the side.
3 At the end of the contour, the TNC moves the tool to the
opposite wall and returns to the infeed point.
4 Steps 2 to 3 are repeated until the programmed milling depth
Q1 is reached.
5 If you have defined the tolerance in Q21, the TNC then
remachines the slot walls to be as parallel as possible.
6 Finally, the tool retracts in the tool axis to the clearance height
or to the position last programmed before the cycle.

206 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

8
CYLINDER SURFACE Slot milling (Cycle 28, DIN/ISO: G128, 8.3
software option 1)

Please note while programming:

The machine and TNC must be prepared for cylinder

surface interpolation by the machine tool builder.
Refer to your machine manual.

In the first NC block of the contour program, always

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 207

8 Fixed Cycles: Cylindrical Surface
8.3 CYLINDER SURFACE Slot milling (Cycle 28, DIN/ISO: G128,
software option 1)

Cycle parameters
Milling depth Q1 (incremental): Distance between NC blocks
the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour. 63 CYCL DEF 28 CYLINDER SURFACE
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q1=-8 ;MILLING DEPTH
Finishing allowance for side Q3 (incremental): Q3=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Finishing allowance on the slot wall. The finishing
allowance reduces the slot width by twice Q6=+0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
the entered value. Input range -99999.9999 to Q10=+3 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
99999.9999 Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR
Set-up clearance Q6 (incremental): Distance PLNGNG
between the tool tip and the cylinder surface. Input Q12=350 ;FEED RATE FOR
range 0 to 99999.9999 MILLING

Plunging depth Q10 (incremental): Infeed per cut. Q16=25 ;RADIUS

Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q17=0 ;DIMENSION TYPE
Feed rate for plunging Q11: Traversing speed Q20=12 ;SLOT WIDTH
of the tool in the spindle axis. Input range 0 to Q21=0 ;TOLERANCE
99999.9999, alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Feed rate for milling Q12: Traversing speed of
the tool in the working plane. Input range 0 to
99999.9999, alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Cylinder radius Q16: Radius of the cylinder on
which the contour is to be machined. Input range 0
to 99999.9999
Dimension type? deg=0 MM/INCH=1 Q17: The
coordinates for the rotary axis of the subprogram
are given either in degrees (0) or in mm/inches (1).
Slot width Q20: Width of the slot to be machined.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Tolerance Q21: If you use a tool smaller than
the programmed slot width Q20, process-related
distortion occurs on the slot wall wherever the
slot follows the path of an arc or oblique line. If
you define the tolerance Q21, the TNC adds a
subsequent milling operation to ensure that the
slot dimensions are as close as possible to those
of a slot that has been milled with a tool exactly
as wide as the slot. With Q21 you define the
permitted deviation from this ideal slot. The number
of subsequent milling operations depends on the
cylinder radius, the tool used, and the slot depth.
The smaller the tolerance is defined, the more exact
the slot is and the longer the remachining takes.
Input range 0 to 9.9999
Recommendation: Use a tolerance of 0.02 mm.
Function inactive: Enter 0 (default setting)

208 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

8
CYLINDER SURFACE Ridge milling (Cycle 29, DIN/ISO: G129, 8.4
software option 1)

8.4 CYLINDER SURFACE Ridge milling

(Cycle 29, DIN/ISO: G129, software
option 1)

Cycle run
This cycle enables you to program a ridge in two dimensions and
then transfer it onto a cylindrical surface. With this cycle the TNC
adjusts the tool so that, with radius compensation active, the walls
of the slot are always parallel. Program the midpoint path of the
ridge together with the tool radius compensation. With the radius
compensation you specify whether the TNC cuts the ridge with
climb milling or up-cut milling.
At the ends of the ridge the TNC always adds a semicircle whose
radius is half the ridge width.
1 The TNC positions the tool over the starting point of machining.
The TNC calculates the starting point from the ridge width and
the tool diameter. It is located next to the first point defined in
the contour subprogram, offset by half the ridge width and the
tool diameter. The radius compensation determines whether
machining begins from the left (1, RL = climb milling) or the
right of the ridge (2, RR = up-cut milling).
2 After the TNC has positioned to the first plunging depth, the tool
moves on a circular arc at the milling feed rate Q12 tangentially
to the ridge wall. If so programmed, it will leave metal for the
finishing allowance.
3 At the first plunging depth, the tool mills along the programmed
ridge wall at the milling feed rate Q12 until the stud is
completed.
4 The tool then departs the ridge wall on a tangential path and
returns to the starting point of machining.
5 Steps 2 to 4 are repeated until the programmed milling depth
Q1 is reached.
6 Finally, the tool retracts in the tool axis to the clearance height
or to the position last programmed before the cycle.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 209

8 Fixed Cycles: Cylindrical Surface
8.4 CYLINDER SURFACE Ridge milling (Cycle 29, DIN/ISO: G129,
software option 1)

Please note while programming:

The machine and TNC must be prepared for cylinder

surface interpolation by the machine tool builder.
Refer to your machine manual.

In the first NC block of the contour program, always

210 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

8
CYLINDER SURFACE Ridge milling (Cycle 29, DIN/ISO: G129, 8.4
software option 1)

Cycle parameters
Milling depth Q1 (incremental): Distance between NC blocks
the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour. 63 CYCL DEF 29 CYLINDER SURFACE
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 RIDGE
Finishing allowance for side Q3 (incremental): Q1=-8 ;MILLING DEPTH
Finishing allowance on the ridge wall. The finishing Q3=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
allowance increases the ridge width by twice
Q6=+0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
the entered value. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999 Q10=+3 ;PLUNGING DEPTH

Set-up clearance Q6 (incremental): Distance Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR

PLNGNG
between the tool tip and the cylinder surface. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q12=350 ;FEED RATE FOR
MILLING
Plunging depth Q10 (incremental): Infeed per cut.
Q16=25 ;RADIUS
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q17=0 ;DIMENSION TYPE
Feed rate for plunging Q11: Traversing speed
of the tool in the spindle axis. Input range 0 to Q20=12 ;RIDGE WIDTH
99999.9999, alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Feed rate for milling Q12: Traversing speed of
the tool in the working plane. Input range 0 to
99999.9999, alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Cylinder radius Q16: Radius of the cylinder on
which the contour is to be machined. Input range 0
to 99999.9999
Dimension type? deg=0 MM/INCH=1 Q17: The
coordinates for the rotary axis of the subprogram
are given either in degrees (0) or in mm/inches (1).
Ridge width Q20: Width of the ridge to be
machined. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 211

8 Fixed Cycles: Cylindrical Surface
8.5 Programming Examples

8.5 Programming Examples

Example: Cylinder surface with Cycle 27

Machine with B head and C table

Cylinder centered on rotary table
Datum is on the underside, in the
center of the rotary table

0 BEGIN PGM C27 MM

1 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2000 Tool call: Diameter 7
2 L Z+250 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
3 L X+50 Y0 R0 FMAX Pre-position tool at rotary table center
4 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB+90 SPC+0 TURN MBMAX Positioning
FMAX
5 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Define contour subprogram
6 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL 1
7 CYCL DEF 27 CYLINDER SURFACE Define machining parameters
Q1=-7 ;MILLING DEPTH
Q3=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Q6=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q10=4 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q12=250 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Q16=25 ;RADIUS
Q17=1 ;DIMENSION TYPE
8 L C+0 R0 FMAX M13 M99 Pre-position rotary table, spindle ON, call the cycle
9 L Z+250 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
10 PLANE RESET TURN FMAX Tilt back, cancel the PLANE function
11 M2 End of program
12 LBL 1 Contour subprogram
13 L X+40 Y+20 RL Data for the rotary axis are entered in mm (Q17=1)
14 L X+50
15 RND R7.5
16 L Y+60
17 RND R7.5
18 L IX-20
19 RND R7.5
20 L Y+20
21 RND R7.5

212 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

8
Programming Examples 8.5

22 L X+50
23 LBL 0
24 END PGM C27 MM

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 213

8 Fixed Cycles: Cylindrical Surface
8.5 Programming Examples

Example: Cylinder surface with Cycle 28

Cylinder centered on rotary table

Machine with B head and C table
Datum at center of rotary table
Description of the midpoint path in the
contour subprogram

0 BEGIN PGM C28 MM

1 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2000 Tool call, tool axis Z, diameter 7
2 L Z+250 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
3 L X+50 Y+0 R0 FMAX Position tool at rotary table center
4 PLANE SPATIAL SPA+0 SPB+90 SPC+0 TURN FMAX Tilting
5 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Define contour subprogram
6 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL 1
7 CYCL DEF 28 CYLINDER SURFACE Define machining parameters
Q1=-7 ;MILLING DEPTH
Q3=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Q6=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q10=-4 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q12=250 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Q16=25 ;RADIUS
Q17=1 ;DIMENSION TYPE
Q20=10 ;SLOT WIDTH
Q21=0.02 ;TOLERANCE Remachining active
8 L C+0 R0 FMAX M3 M99 Pre-position rotary table, spindle ON, call the cycle
9 L Z+250 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
10 PLANE RESET TURN FMAX Tilt back, cancel the PLANE function
11 M2 End of program
12 LBL 1 Contour subprogram, description of the midpoint path
13 L X+60 X+0 RL Data for the rotary axis are entered in mm (Q17=1)
14 L Y-35
15 L X+40 Y-52.5
16 L Y-70
17 LBL 0
18 END PGM C28 MM

214 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

9
Fixed Cycles:
Contour Pocket
with Contour
Formula
9 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket with Contour Formula
9.1 SL cycles with complex contour formula

9.1 SL cycles with complex contour

formula

Fundamentals
SL cycles and the complex contour formula enable you to form
complex contours by combining subcontours (pockets or islands).
You define the individual subcontours (geometry data) as separate
programs. In this way, any subcontour can be used any number of
times. The TNC calculates the complete contour from the selected
subcontours, which you link together through a contour formula.

The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle

(all contour description programs) is limited to 128
contours. The number of possible contour elements
depends on the type of contour (inside or outside
contour) and the number of contour descriptions. You
can program up to 16384 elements.
The SL cycles with contour formula presuppose a Program structure: Machining with
structured program layout and enable you to save SL cycles and complex contour
frequently used contours in individual programs. Using formula
the contour formula, you can connect the subcontours 0 BEGIN PGM CONTOUR MM
to a complete contour and define whether it applies to ...
a pocket or island.
5 SEL CONTOUR "MODEL"
In its present form, the "SL cycles with contour
6 CYCL DEF 20 CONTOUR DATA...
formula" function requires input from several areas in
the TNC’s user interface. This function is to serve as a 8 CYCL DEF 22 ROUGH-OUT...
basis for further development. 9 CYCL CALL
...
12 CYCL DEF 23 FLOOR FINISHING...
13 CYCL CALL
...
16 CYCL DEF 24 SIDE FINISHING...
17 CYCL CALL
63 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
64 END PGM CONTOUR MM

216 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

9
SL cycles with complex contour formula 9.1

Properties of the subcontours Program structure: Calculation of the

By default, the TNC assumes that the contour is a pocket. Do not subcontours with contour formula
program a radius compensation. 0 BEGIN PGM MODEL MM
The TNC ignores feed rates F and miscellaneous functions M. 1 DECLARE CONTOUR QC1 = "CIRCLE1"
Coordinate transformations are allowed. If they are programmed 2 DECLARE CONTOUR QC2 =
within the subcontour they are also effective in the following "CIRCLEXY" DEPTH15
subprograms, but they need not be reset after the cycle call.
3 DECLARE CONTOUR QC3 =
Although the subprograms can contain coordinates in the spindle "TRIANGLE" DEPTH10
axis, such coordinates are ignored.
4 DECLARE CONTOUR QC4 = "SQUARE"
The working plane is defined in the first coordinate block of the DEPTH5
subprogram. 5 QC10 = ( QC1 | QC3 | QC4 ) \ QC2
You can define subcontours with various depths as needed
6 END PGM MODEL MM
Characteristics of the fixed cycles
0 BEGIN PGM CIRCLE 1 MM
The TNC automatically positions the tool to the set-up clearance
1 CC X+75 Y+50
before a cycle.
2 LP PR+45 PA+0
Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since the
cutter traverses around islands instead of over them. 3 CP IPA+360 DR+
The radius of "inside corners" can be programmed—the tool 4 END PGM CIRCLE 1 MM
keeps moving to prevent surface blemishes at inside corners (this
applies to the outermost pass in the Rough-out and Side Finishing 0 BEGIN PGM CIRCLE31XY MM
cycles). ...
The contour is approached in a tangential arc for side finishing. ...
For floor finishing, the tool again approaches the workpiece on a
tangential arc (for spindle axis Z, for example, the arc may be in
the Z/X plane).
The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up-cut
milling.

The machining data (such as milling depth, finishing allowance and

set-up clearance) are entered as CONTOUR DATA in Cycle 20.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 217

9 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket with Contour Formula
9.1 SL cycles with complex contour formula

Selecting a program with contour definitions

With the SEL CONTOUR function you select a program with contour
definitions, from which the TNC takes the contour descriptions:
Show the soft-key row with special functions

Select the menu for functions for contour and

point machining
Press the SEL CONTOUR soft key.
Enter the full name of the program with the
contour definition and confirm with the END key.

Program a SEL CONTOUR block before the SL

cycles. Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY is no longer
necessary if you use SEL CONTOUR.

Defining contour descriptions

With the DECLARE CONTOUR function you enter in a program
the path for programs from which the TNC draws the contour
descriptions. In addition, you can select a separate depth for this
contour description (FCL 2 function):
Show the soft-key row with special functions

Select the menu for functions for contour and

point machining
Press the DECLARE CONTOUR soft key.
Enter the number for the contour designator QC,
and confirm with the ENT key.
Enter the full name of the program with the
contour description and confirm with the END key,
or if desired,
Define a separate depth for the selected contour.

With the entered contour designators QC you can

include the various contours in the contour formula.
If you program separate depths for contours, then
you must assign a depth to all subcontours (assign
the depth 0 if necessary).

218 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

9
SL cycles with complex contour formula 9.1

Entering a complex contour formula

You can use soft keys to interlink various contours in a
mathematical formula.
Show the soft-key row with special functions

Select the menu for functions for contour and

point machining
Press the CONTOUR FORMULA soft key. The TNC
then displays the following soft keys:

Mathematical function Soft key

cut with
e.g. QC10 = QC1 & QC5

joined with
e.g. QC25 = QC7 | QC18

joined with, but without cut

e.g. QC12 = QC5 ^ QC25

without
e.g. QC25 = QC1 \ QC2

Parenthesis open
e.g. QC12 = QC1 * (QC2 + QC3)

Parenthesis closed
e.g. QC12 = QC1 * (QC2 + QC3)

Define single contour

e.g. QC12 = QC1

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 219

9 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket with Contour Formula
9.1 SL cycles with complex contour formula

Superimposed contours
By default, the TNC considers a programmed contour to be a
pocket. With the functions of the contour formula, you can convert
a contour from a pocket to an island.
Pockets and islands can be overlapped to form a new contour. You
can thus enlarge the area of a pocket by another pocket or reduce it
by an island.

Subprograms: overlapping pockets

The following programming examples are contour

description programs that are defined in a contour
definition program. The contour definition program
is called through the SEL CONTOUR function in the
actual main program.

Pockets A and B overlap.

The TNC calculates the points of intersection S1 and S2 (they do
not have to be programmed).
The pockets are programmed as full circles.
Contour description program 1: pocket A
0 BEGIN PGM POCKET_A MM
1 L X+10 Y+50 R0
2 CC X+35 Y+50
3 C X+10 Y+50 DR-
4 END PGM POCKET_A MM

Contour description program 2: pocket B

0 BEGIN PGM POCKET_B MM
1 L X+90 Y+50 R0
2 CC X+65 Y+50
3 C X+90 Y+50 DR-
4 END PGM POCKET_B MM

220 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

9
SL cycles with complex contour formula 9.1

Area of inclusion
Both areas A and B are to be machined, including the overlapping
area:
The areas A and B must be entered in separate programs
without radius compensation.
In the contour formula, the areas A and B are processed with
the "joined with" function.

Contour definition program:

50 ...
51 ...
52 DECLARE CONTOUR QC1 = "POCKET_A.H"
53 DECLARE CONTOUR QC2 = "POCKET_B.H"
54 QC10 = QC1 | QC2
55 ...
56 ...

Area of exclusion
Area A is to be machined without the portion overlapped by B:
The areas A and B must be entered in separate programs
without radius compensation.
In the contour formula, the area B is subtracted from the area A
with the without function.

Contour definition program:

50 ...
51 ...
52 DECLARE CONTOUR QC1 = "POCKET_A.H"
53 DECLARE CONTOUR QC2 = "POCKET_B.H"
54 QC10 = QC1 \ QC2
55 ...
56 ...

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 221

9 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket with Contour Formula
9.1 SL cycles with complex contour formula

Area of intersection
Only the area where A and B overlap is to be machined. (The areas
covered by A or B alone are to be left unmachined.)
The areas A and B must be entered in separate programs
without radius compensation.
In the contour formula, the areas A and B are processed with
the "intersection with" function.

Contour definition program:

50 ...
51 ...
52 DECLARE CONTOUR QC1 = "POCKET_A.H"
53 DECLARE CONTOUR QC2 = "POCKET_B.H"
54 QC10 = QC1 & QC2
55 ...
56 ...

Contour machining with SL Cycles

The complete contour is machined with the SL

Cycles 20 to 24 (See "Overview", page 177).

222 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

9
SL cycles with complex contour formula 9.1

Example: Roughing and finishing superimposed

contours with the contour formula

0 BEGIN PGM CONTOUR MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-40 Definition of workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+0
3 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+2.5 Tool definition of roughing cutter
4 TOOL DEF 2 L+0 R+3 Tool definition of finishing cutter
5 TOOL CALL 1 Z S2500 Tool call of roughing cutter
6 L Z+250 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
7 SEL CONTOUR "MODEL" Specify contour definition program
8 CYCL DEF 20 CONTOUR DATA Define general machining parameters
Q1=-20 ;MILLING DEPTH
Q2=1 ;TOOL PATH OVERLAP
Q3=+0.5 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
Q4=+0.5 ;ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR
Q5=+0 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q6=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q7=+100 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Q8=0.1 ;ROUNDING RADIUS
Q9=-1 ;DIRECTION

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 223

9 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket with Contour Formula
9.1 SL cycles with complex contour formula

9 CYCL DEF 22 ROUGH-OUT Cycle definition: Rough-out

Q10=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q12=350 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Q18=0 ;COARSE ROUGHING TOOL
Q19=150 ;RECIPROCATION FEED RATE
Q401=100 ;FEED RATE FACTOR
Q404=0 ;FINE ROUGH STRATEGY
10 CYCL CALL M3 Cycle call: Rough-out
11 TOOL CALL 2 Z S5000 Tool call of finishing cutter
12 CYCL DEF 23 FLOOR FINISHING Cycle definition: Floor finishing
Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q12=200 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
13 CYCL CALL M3 Cycle call: Floor finishing
14 CYCL DEF 24 SIDE FINISHING Cycle definition: Side finishing
Q9=+1 ;DIRECTION OF ROTATION
Q10=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q11=100 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q12=400 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Q14=+0 ;ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE
15 CYCL CALL M3 Cycle call: Side finishing
16 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract in the tool axis, end program
17 END PGM CONTOUR MM

Contour definition program with contour formula:

0 BEGIN PGM MODEL MM Contour definition program
1 DECLARE CONTOUR QC1 = "CIRCLE1" Definition of the contour designator for the program
"CIRCLE1"
2 FN 0: Q1 =+35 Assignment of values for parameters used in PGM
"CIRCLE31XY"
3 FN 0: Q2 =+50
4 FN 0: Q3 =+25
5 DECLARE CONTOUR QC2 = "CIRCLE31XY" Definition of the contour designator for the program
"CIRCLE31XY"
6 DECLARE CONTOUR QC3 = "TRIANGLE" Definition of the contour designator for the program
"TRIANGLE"
7 DECLARE CONTOUR QC4 = "SQUARE" Definition of the contour designator for the program
"SQUARE"
8 QC10 = ( QC 1 | QC 2 ) \ QC 3 \ QC 4 Contour formula
9 END PGM MODEL MM

224 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

9
SL cycles with complex contour formula 9.1

Contour description programs:

0 BEGIN PGM CIRCLE 1 MM Contour description program: circle at right
1 CC X+65 Y+50
2 L PR+25 PA+0 R0
3 CP IPA+360 DR+
4 END PGM CIRCLE 1 MM

0 BEGIN PGM CIRCLE31XY MM Contour description program: circle at left

1 CC X+Q1 Y+Q2
2 LP PR+Q3 PA+0 R0
3 CP IPA+360 DR+
4 END PGM CIRCLE31XY MM

0 BEGIN PGM TRIANGLE MM Contour description program: triangle at right

1 L X+73 Y+42 R0
2 L X+65 Y+58
3 L X+58 Y+42
4 L X+73
5 END PGM TRIANGLE MM

0 BEGIN PGM SQUARE MM Contour description program: square at left

1 L X+27 Y+58 R0
2 L X+43
3 L Y+42
4 L X+27
5 L Y+58
6 END PGM SQUARE MM

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 225

9 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket with Contour Formula
9.2 SL cycles with simple contour formula

9.2 SL cycles with simple contour formula

Fundamentals
SL cycles and the simple contour formula enable you to form Program structure: Machining with
contours by combining up to 9 subcontours (pockets or islands) in SL cycles and complex contour
a simple manner. You define the individual subcontours (geometry formula
data) as separate programs. In this way, any subcontour can be 0 BEGIN PGM CONTDEF MM
used any number of times. The TNC calculates the contour from the
selected subcontours. ...
5 CONTOUR DEF P1= "POCK1.H" I2
The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle = "ISLE2.H" DEPTH5 I3 "ISLE3.H"
(all contour description programs) is limited to 128 DEPTH7.5
contours. The number of possible contour elements 6 CYCL DEF 20 CONTOUR DATA...
depends on the type of contour (inside or outside
8 CYCL DEF 22 ROUGH-OUT...
contour) and the number of contour descriptions. You
can program up to 16384 elements. 9 CYCL CALL
...
12 CYCL DEF 23 FLOOR FINISHING...
13 CYCL CALL
...
16 CYCL DEF 24 SIDE FINISHING...
17 CYCL CALL
63 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2
64 END PGM CONTDEF MM

226 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

9
SL cycles with simple contour formula 9.2

Properties of the subcontours

Do not program a radius compensation.
The TNC ignores feed rates F and miscellaneous functions M.
Coordinate transformations are allowed. If they are programmed
within the subcontour they are also effective in the following
subprograms, but they need not be reset after the cycle call.
Although the subprograms can contain coordinates in the
spindle axis, such coordinates are ignored.
The working plane is defined in the first coordinate block of the
subprogram.

Characteristics of the fixed cycles

The TNC automatically positions the tool to the set-up clearance
before a cycle.
Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since
the cutter traverses around islands instead of over them.
The radius of "inside corners" can be programmed—the tool
keeps moving to prevent surface blemishes at inside corners
(this applies to the outermost pass in the Rough-out and Side
Finishing cycles).
The contour is approached in a tangential arc for side finishing.
For floor finishing, the tool again approaches the workpiece on a
tangential arc (for spindle axis Z, for example, the arc may be in
the Z/X plane).
The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up-cut
milling.

The machining data (such as milling depth, finishing allowance and

set-up clearance) are entered as CONTOUR DATA in Cycle 20.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 227

9 Fixed Cycles: Contour Pocket with Contour Formula
9.2 SL cycles with simple contour formula

Entering a simple contour formula

You can use soft keys to interlink various contours in a
mathematical formula.
Show the soft-key row with special functions

Select the menu for functions for contour and

point machining
Press the CONTOUR DEF soft key. The TNC opens
the dialog for entering the contour formula.
Enter the name of the first subcontour. The first
subcontour must always be the deepest pocket.
Confirm with the ENT key.
Specify via soft key whether the next subcontour
is a pocket or an island. Confirm with the ENT key.
Enter the name of the second subcontour.
Confirm with the ENT key.
If needed, enter the depth of the second
subcontour. Confirm with the ENT key.
Carry on with the dialog as described above until
you have entered all subcontours.

Always start the list of subcontours with the deepest

pocket!
If the contour is defined as an island, the TNC
interprets the entered depth as the island height. The
entered value (without an algebraic sign) then refers
to the workpiece top surface!
If the depth is entered as 0, then for pockets the
depth defined in the Cycle 20 is effective. Islands
then rise up to the workpiece top surface!

Contour machining with SL Cycles

The complete contour is machined with the SL

Cycles 20 to 24 (See "Overview").

228 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

10 Fixed Cycles:
Multipass Milling
10 Fixed Cycles: Multipass Milling
10.1 Fundamentals

10.1 Fundamentals

Overview
The TNC offers three cycles for machining surfaces with the
following characteristics:
Flat, rectangular surfaces
Flat, oblique-angled surfaces
Surfaces that are inclined in any way
Twisted surfaces

Cycle Soft key Page

230 MULTIPASS MILLING 231

For flat rectangular surfaces

231 RULED SURFACE 233
For oblique, inclined or twisted
surfaces
232 FACE MILLING 237
For level rectangular surfaces, with
indicated oversizes and multiple
infeeds

230 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

10
MULTIPASS MILLING (Cycle 230, DIN/ISO: G230) 10.2

10.2 MULTIPASS MILLING (Cycle 230, DIN/

ISO: G230)

Cycle run
1 From the current position in the working plane, the TNC
positions the tool in rapid traverse FMAX to the starting point 1;
the TNC moves the tool by its radius to the left and upward.
2 The tool then moves in at FMAX in the spindle axis to set-up
clearance. From there it approaches the programmed starting
position in the spindle axis at the feed rate for plunging.
3 The tool then moves as the programmed feed rate for milling
to the end point2. The TNC calculates the end point from the
programmed starting point, the programmed length, and the
tool radius.
4 The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass
at the stepover feed rate. The offset is calculated from the
programmed width and the number of cuts.
5 The tool then returns in the negative direction of the first axis.
6 Multipass milling is repeated until the programmed surface has
been completed.
7 At the end of the cycle, the tool is retracted in FMAX to set-up
clearance.

Please note while programming:

From the current position, the TNC positions the tool

at the starting point, first in the working plane and
then in the spindle axis.
Pre-position the tool in such a way that no collision
between tool and fixtures can occur.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 231

10 Fixed Cycles: Multipass Milling
10.2 MULTIPASS MILLING (Cycle 230, DIN/ISO: G230)

Cycle parameters
Starting point in 1st axis Q225 (absolute): Starting
point coordinate of the surface to be machined in
the reference axis of the working plane. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 (absolute): Starting
point coordinate of the surface to be machined in
the minor axis of the working plane. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Starting point in 3rd axis Q227 (absolute): Height
in the spindle axis at which multipass-milling is
carried out. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
1st side length Q218 (incremental): Length of the
surface to be multipass-milled in the reference axis
of the working plane, referenced to the starting
point in the 1st axis. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
2nd side length Q219 (incremental): Length of the
surface to be multipass-milled in the minor axis of
the working plane, referenced to the starting point
in the 2nd axis. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Number of cuts Q240: Number of passes to be
made over the width. Input range 0 to 99999
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed of NC blocks
the tool while moving to depth in mm/min. Input 71 CYCL DEF 230 MULTIPASS MILLING
range 0 to 99999.999; alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Q225=+10 ;STARTNG PNT 1ST AXIS
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of Q226=+12 ;STARTNG PNT 2ND
the tool in mm/min while milling. Input range 0 to AXIS
99999.999 alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Q227=+2.5 ;STARTNG PNT 3RD AXIS
Stepover feed rate Q209: Traversing speed of the Q218=150 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH
tool in mm/min when moving to the next pass. If
Q219=75 ;2ND SIDE LENGTH
you are moving the tool transversely in the material,
enter Q209 to be smaller than Q207. If you are Q240=25 ;NUMBER OF CUTS
moving it transversely in the open, Q209 may be Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR
greater than Q207. Input range 0 to 99999.9999, PLNGNG
alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance MILLING
between tool tip and milling depth for positioning Q209=200 ;STEPOVER FEED RATE
at the start and end of the cycle. Input range 0 to
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
99999.9999

232 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

10
RULED SURFACE (Cycle 231, DIN/ISO: G231) 10.3

10.3 RULED SURFACE (Cycle 231, DIN/ISO:

G231)

Cycle run
1 From the current position, the TNC positions the tool in a linear
3-D movement to the starting point 1.
2 The tool subsequently advances to the stopping point 2 at the
feed rate for milling.
3 From this point, the tool moves at rapid traverse FMAX by the
tool diameter in the positive tool axis direction, and then back to
starting point 1.
4 At the starting point 1 the TNC moves the tool back to the last
traversed Z value.
5 Then the TNC moves the tool in all three axes from point 1 in
the direction of point 4 to the next line.
6 From this point, the tool moves to the stopping point on this
pass. The TNC calculates the end point from point 2 and a
movement in the direction of point 3.
7 Multipass milling is repeated until the programmed surface has
been completed.
8 At the end of the cycle, the tool is positioned above the
highest programmed point in the spindle axis, offset by the tool
diameter.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 233

10 Fixed Cycles: Multipass Milling
10.3 RULED SURFACE (Cycle 231, DIN/ISO: G231)

Cutting motion
The starting point, and therefore the milling direction, is selectable
because the TNC always moves from point 1 to point 2 and in the
total movement from point 1 / 2 to point 3 / 4. You can program
point 1 at any corner of the surface to be machined.
If you are using an end mill for the machining operation, you can
optimize the surface finish in the following ways:
A shaping cut (spindle axis coordinate of point 1 greater than
spindle-axis coordinate of point 2) for slightly inclined surfaces.
A drawing cut (spindle axis coordinate of point 1 smaller than
spindle-axis coordinate of point 2) for steep surfaces.
When milling twisted surfaces, program the main cutting
direction (from point 1 to point 2) parallel to the direction of the
steeper inclination.

If you are using a spherical cutter for the machining operation, you
can optimize the surface finish in the following way:
When milling twisted surfaces, program the main cutting
direction (from point 1 to point 2) perpendicular to the direction
of the steepest inclination.

Please note while programming:

From the current position, the TNC positions the

tool in a linear 3-D movement to the starting point 1.
Pre-position the tool in such a way that no collision
between tool and fixtures can occur.
The TNC moves the tool with radius compensation
R0 to the programmed positions.
This cycle requires a center-cut end mill (ISO 1641) or
pilot drilling with Cycle 21.

234 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

10
RULED SURFACE (Cycle 231, DIN/ISO: G231) 10.3

Cycle parameters
Starting point in 1st axis Q225 (absolute): Starting
point coordinate of the surface to be machined in
the reference axis of the working plane. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 (absolute): Starting
point coordinate of the surface to be machined in
the minor axis of the working plane. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Starting point in 3rd axis Q227 (absolute): Starting
point coordinate of the surface to be multipass-
milled in the tool axis. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
2nd point in 1st axis Q228 (absolute): End point
coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in
the reference axis of the working plane. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
2nd point in 2nd axis Q229 (absolute): End point
coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in
the minor axis of the working plane. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
2nd point in 3rd axis Q230 (absolute): End point
coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled NC blocks
in the spindle axis. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999 72 CYCL DEF 231 RULED SURFACE
Q225=+0 ;STARTNG PNT 1ST AXIS
3rd point in 1st axis Q231 (absolute): Coordinate
of point 3 in the reference axis of the working plane. Q226=+5 ;STARTNG PNT 2ND
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 AXIS
Q227=-2 ;STARTNG PNT 3RD AXIS
3rd point in 2nd axis Q232 (absolute): Coordinate
of point 3 in the minor axis of the working plane. Q228=+100 ;2ND POINT 1ST AXIS
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q229=+15 ;2ND POINT 2ND AXIS
3rd point in 3rd axis Q233 (absolute): Coordinate Q230=+5 ;2ND POINT 3RD AXIS
of point 3 in the spindle axis. Input range Q231=+15 ;3RD POINT 1ST AXIS
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q232=+125 ;3RD POINT 2ND AXIS
4th point in 1st axis Q234 (absolute): Coordinate
Q233=+25 ;3RD POINT 3RD AXIS
of point 4 in the reference axis of the working plane.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q234=+15 ;4TH POINT 1ST AXIS

4th point in 2nd axis Q235 (absolute): Coordinate Q235=+125 ;4TH POINT 2ND AXIS
of point 4 in the minor axis of the working plane. Q236=+25 ;4TH POINT 3RD AXIS
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q240=40 ;NUMBER OF CUTS
Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR
MILLING

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 235

10 Fixed Cycles: Multipass Milling
10.3 RULED SURFACE (Cycle 231, DIN/ISO: G231)

4th point in 3rd axis Q236 (absolute): Coordinate

of point 4 in the spindle axis. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Number of cuts Q240: Number of passes to be
made between points 1 and 4, 2 and 3. Input range
0 to 99999
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of the
tool in mm/min while milling. The TNC performs the
first step at half the programmed feed rate. Input
range 0 to 99999.999, alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ

236 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

10
FACE MILLING (Cycle 232, DIN/ISO: G232) 10.4

10.4 FACE MILLING (Cycle 232, DIN/ISO:

G232)

Cycle run
Cycle 232 is used to face mill a level surface in multiple infeeds
while taking the finishing allowance into account. Three machining
strategies are available:
Strategy Q389=0: Meander machining, stepover outside the
surface being machined
Strategy Q389=1: Meander machining, stepover within the
surface being machined
Strategy Q389=2: Line-by-line machining, retraction and
stepover at the positioning feed rate

1 From the current position, the TNC positions the tool at rapid
traverse FMAX to the starting position using positioning logic
1: If the current position in the spindle axis is greater than the
2nd set-up clearance, the control positions the tool first in the
machining plane and then in the spindle axis. Otherwise it first
moves to the 2nd set-up clearance and then in the machining
plane. The starting point in the machining plane is offset from
the edge of the workpiece by the tool radius and the safety
clearance to the side.
2 The tool then moves in the spindle axis at the positioning feed
rate to the first plunging depth calculated by the control.
Strategy Q389=0
3 The tool subsequently advances to the stopping point 2 at the
programmed feed rate for milling. The end point lies outside
the surface. The control calculates the end point from the
programmed starting point, the programmed length, the
programmed safety clearance to the side and the tool radius.
4 The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass
at the pre-positioning feed rate. The offset is calculated from
the programmed width, the tool radius and the maximum path
overlap factor.
5 The tool then moves back in the direction of the starting point 1.
6 The process is repeated until the programmed surface has been
completed. At the end of the last pass, the tool plunges to the
next machining depth.
7 In order to avoid non-productive motions, the surface is then
machined in reverse direction.
8 The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined. In
the last infeed, simply the finishing allowance entered is milled
at the finishing feed rate.
9 At the end of the cycle, the tool is retracted in FMAX to the 2nd
set-up clearance.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 237

10 Fixed Cycles: Multipass Milling
10.4 FACE MILLING (Cycle 232, DIN/ISO: G232)

Strategy Q389=1
3 The tool subsequently advances to the stopping point 2 at the
programmed feed rate for milling. The end point lies within
the surface. The control calculates the end point from the
programmed starting point, the programmed length and the tool
radius.
4 The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass
at the pre-positioning feed rate. The offset is calculated from
the programmed width, the tool radius and the maximum path
overlap factor.
5 The tool then moves back in the direction of the starting point
1. The motion to the next line occurs within the workpiece
borders.
6 The process is repeated until the programmed surface has been
completed. At the end of the last pass, the tool plunges to the
next machining depth.
7 In order to avoid non-productive motions, the surface is then
machined in reverse direction.
8 The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined. In
the last infeed, simply the finishing allowance entered is milled
at the finishing feed rate.
9 At the end of the cycle, the tool is retracted in FMAX to the 2nd
set-up clearance.
Strategy Q389=2
3 The tool subsequently advances to the stopping point 2 at the
programmed feed rate for milling. The end point lies outside
the surface. The control calculates the end point from the
programmed starting point, the programmed length, the
programmed safety clearance to the side and the tool radius.
4 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the set-up
clearance over the current infeed depth, and then moves at the
pre-positioning feed rate directly back to the starting point in the
next line. The TNC calculates the offset from the programmed
width, the tool radius and the maximum path overlap factor.
5 The tool then returns to the current infeed depth and moves in
the direction of the next end point 2.
6 The multipass process is repeated until the programmed
surface has been completed. At the end of the last pass, the
tool plunges to the next machining depth.
7 In order to avoid non-productive motions, the surface is then
machined in reverse direction.
8 The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined. In
the last infeed, simply the finishing allowance entered is milled
at the finishing feed rate.
9 At the end of the cycle, the tool is retracted in FMAX to the 2nd
set-up clearance.

238 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

10
FACE MILLING (Cycle 232, DIN/ISO: G232) 10.4

Please note while programming:

Enter the 2nd set-up clearance in Q204 such that no

collision with the workpiece or the fixtures can occur.
If the starting point in the 3rd axis Q227 and the
end point in the 3rd axis Q386 are entered as equal
values, the TNC does not run the cycle (depth = 0
has been programmed).

Cycle parameters
Machining strategy (0/1/2) Q389: Determine how
the TNC should machine the surface:
0: Meander machining, stepover at the positioning
feed rate outside the surface being machined
1: Meander machining, stepover at the feed rate for
milling within the surface being machined
2: Line-by-line machining, retraction and stepover at
the positioning feed rate
Starting point in 1st axis Q225 (absolute): Starting
point coordinate of the surface to be machined in
the reference axis of the working plane. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 (absolute): Starting
point coordinate of the surface to be machined in
the minor axis of the working plane. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Starting point in 3rd axis Q227 (absolute):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface used to
calculate the infeeds. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
End point in 3rd axis Q386 (absolute): Coordinate
in the spindle axis to which the surface is to be face
milled. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
1st side length Q218 (incremental value): Length of
the surface to be machined in the reference axis of
the working plane. Use the algebraic sign to specify
the direction of the first milling path in reference
to the starting point in the 1st axis. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
2nd side length Q219 (incremental value): Length
of the surface to be machined in the minor axis of
the working plane. Use the algebraic sign to specify
the direction of the first stepover in reference to
the starting point in the 2nd axis. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 239

10 Fixed Cycles: Multipass Milling
10.4 FACE MILLING (Cycle 232, DIN/ISO: G232)

Maximum plunging depth Q202 (incremental

value): Maximum amount that the tool is advanced
each time. The TNC calculates the actual plunging
depth from the difference between the end point
and starting point of the tool axis (taking the
finishing allowance into account), so that uniform
plunging depths are used each time. Input range 0
to 99999.9999
Allowance for floor Q369 (incremental):
Distance used for the last infeed. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Max. path overlap factor Q370: Maximum
stepover factor k. The TNC calculates the actual NC blocks
stepover from the second side length (Q219) and
71 CYCL DEF 232 FACE MILLING
the tool radius so that a constant stepover is used
for machining. If you have entered a radius R2 Q389=2 ;STRATEGY
in the tool table (e.g. tooth radius when using a Q225=+10 ;STARTNG PNT 1ST AXIS
face-milling cutter), the TNC reduces the stepover
Q226=+12 ;STARTNG PNT 2ND
accordingly. Input range 0.1 to 1.9999
AXIS
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of Q227=+2.5 ;STARTNG PNT 3RD AXIS
the tool in mm/min while milling. Input range 0 to
Q386=-3 ;END POINT 3RD AXIS
99999.999 alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Q218=150 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH
Feed rate for finishing Q385: Traversing speed of
the tool in mm/min, while milling the last infeed. Q219=75 ;2ND SIDE LENGTH
Input range 0 to 99999.9999; alternatively FAUTO, Q202=2 ;MAX. PLUNGING DEPTH
FU, FZ
Q369=0.5 ;ALLOWANCE FOR
Feed rate for pre-positioning Q253: Traversing FLOOR
speed of the tool in mm/min when approaching Q370=1 ;MAX. TOOL PATH
the starting position and when moving to the next OVERLAP
pass. If you are moving the tool transversely to Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR
the material (Q389=1), the TNC moves the tool MILLING
at the feed rate for milling Q207. Input range 0 to
99999.9999, alternatively FMAX, FAUTO Q385=800 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
Q253=2000 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and the starting position in the Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
tool axis. If you are milling with machining strategy Q357=2 ;CLEARANCE TO SIDE
Q389=2, the TNC moves the tool at the set-up
Q204=2 ;2ND SET-UP
clearance over the current plunging depth to the CLEARANCE
starting point of the next pass. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Clearance to side Q357 (incremental): Safety
clearance to the side of the workpiece when
the tool approaches the first plunging depth,
and distance at which the stepover occurs if the
machining strategy Q389=0 or Q389=2 is used.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF

240 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

10
Programming Examples 10.5

10.5 Programming Examples

Example: Multipass milling

0 BEGIN PGM C230 MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z+0 Definition of workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+100 Y+100 Z+40
3 TOOL CALL 1 Z S3500 Tool call
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
5 CYCL DEF 230 MULTIPASS MILLING Cycle definition: MULTIPASS MILLING
Q225=+0 ;STARTNG PNT 1ST AXIS
Q226=+0 ;STARTNG PNT 2ND AXIS
Q227=+35 ;STARTNG PNT 3RD AXIS
Q218=100 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH
Q219=100 ;2ND SIDE LENGTH
Q240=25 ;NUMBER OF CUTS
Q206=250 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q207=400 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Q209=200 ;STEPOVER FEED RATE
Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
6 L X+-25 Y+0 R0 FMAX M3 Pre-position near the starting point
7 CYCL CALL Cycle call
8 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract in the tool axis, end program
9 END PGM C230 MM

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 241

11
Cycles: Coordinate
Transformations
11 Cycles: Coordinate Transformations
11.1 Fundamentals

11.1 Fundamentals

Overview
Once a contour has been programmed, you can position it on the
workpiece at various locations and in different sizes through the
use of coordinate transformations. The TNC provides the following
coordinate transformation cycles:
Cycle Soft key Page
7 DATUM 245
For shifting contours directly within
the program or from datum tables
247 DATUM SETTING 251
Datum setting during program run

8 MIRRORING 252
Mirroring contours

10 ROTATION 254
Rotating contours in the working
plane
11 SCALING FACTOR 256

Increasing or reducing the size of

contours
26 AXIS-SPECIFIC SCALING 257

Increasing or reducing the size of

contours with axis-specific scaling
19 WORKING PLANE Machining 259
in tilted coordinate system on
machines with swivel heads and/or
rotary tables

Effect of coordinate transformations

Beginning of effect: A coordinate transformation becomes effective
as soon as it is defined—it is not called separately. It remains in
effect until it is changed or canceled.
To cancel coordinate transformations:
Define cycles for basic behavior with a new value, such as
scaling factor 1.0
Execute a miscellaneous function M2, M30, or an END PGM
block (depending on machine parameter clearMode).
Select a new program

244 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

11
DATUM SHIFT (Cycle 7, DIN/ISO: G54) 11.2

11.2 DATUM SHIFT (Cycle 7, DIN/ISO: G54)

Effect
A DATUM SHIFT allows machining operations to be repeated at
various locations on the workpiece.
When the DATUM SHIFT cycle is defined, all coordinate data is
based on the new datum. The TNC displays the datum shift in each
axis in the additional status display. Input of rotary axes is also
permitted.
Resetting
Program a datum shift to the coordinates X=0, Y=0 etc. directly
with a cycle definition.
Call a datum shift to the coordinates X=0; Y=0 etc. from a
datum table.

Cycle parameters
Datum shift: Enter the coordinates of the new NC blocks
datum. Absolute values are referenced to the 13 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT
manually set workpiece datum. Incremental values
14 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+60
are always referenced to the datum which was last
valid—this can be a datum which has already been 16 CYCL DEF 7.3 Z-5
shifted. Input range: Up to six NC axes, each from 15 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+40
–99999.9999 to 99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 245

11 Cycles: Coordinate Transformations
11.3 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables (Cycle 7, DIN/ISO: G53)

11.3 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables

(Cycle 7, DIN/ISO: G53)

Effect
Datum tables are used for:
Frequently recurring machining sequences at various locations
on the workpiece
Frequent use of the same datum shift

Within a program, you can either program datum points directly in

the cycle definition or call them from a datum table.

Resetting
Call a datum shift to the coordinates X=0; Y=0 etc. from a
datum table.
Execute a datum shift to the coordinates X=0, Y=0 etc. directly
with a cycle definition
Status displays
In the additional status display, the following data from the datum
table are shown:
Name and path of the active datum table
Active datum number
Comment from the DOC column of the active datum number

246 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

11
DATUM SHIFT with datum tables (Cycle 7, DIN/ISO: G53) 11.3

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
Datums from a datum table are always and
exclusively referenced to the current datum (preset).

If you are using datum shifts with datum tables, then

use the SEL TABLE function to activate the desired
datum table from the NC program.
If you work without SEL TABLE, then you must
activate the desired datum table before the test
run or the program run. (This applies also to the
programming graphics).
Use the file management to select the desired
table for a test run in the Test Run operating
mode: The table receives the status S.
Use the file management in a program run mode
to select the desired table for program run: The
table receives the status M.

The coordinate values from datum tables are only

effective with absolute coordinate values.
New lines can only be inserted at the end of the
table.
If you create datum tables, the file name has to start
with a letter.

Cycle parameters
Datum shift: Enter the number of the datum from NC blocks
the datum table or a Q parameter. If you enter a Q 77 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT
parameter, the TNC activates the datum number
78 CYCL DEF 7.1 #5
entered in the Q parameter. Input range: 0 to 9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 247

11 Cycles: Coordinate Transformations
11.3 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables (Cycle 7, DIN/ISO: G53)

Selecting a datum table in the part program

With the SEL TABLE function you select the table from which the
TNC takes the datums:
Select the functions for program call: Press the
PGM CALL key
Press the DATUM TABLE soft key
Select the complete path name of the datum table
or the file with the SELECT soft key and confirm
your entry with the END key

Program a SEL TABLE block before Cycle 7 Datum

Shift.
A datum table selected with SEL TABLE remains
active until you select another datum table with SEL
TABLE or through PGM MGT.

Editing the datum table in the Programming and

Editing mode of operation

After you have changed a value in a datum table, you

must save the change with the ENT key. Otherwise
the change might not be included during program
run.

Select the datum table in the Programming and Editing mode of

operation
Call the file manager: Press the PGM MGT key
Display the datum tables: Press the SELECT TYPE
and SHOW .D soft keys
Select the desired table or enter a new file name.
Edit the file. The soft-key row comprises the
following functions for editing:

248 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

11
DATUM SHIFT with datum tables (Cycle 7, DIN/ISO: G53) 11.3

Function Soft key

Select beginning of table

Select end of table

Go to the previous page

Go to next page

Insert line (only possible at the end of table)

Delete line

Find

Go to beginning of line

Go to end of line

Copy the current value

Insert the copied value

Add the entered number of lines (datums) to the

end of the table

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 249

11 Cycles: Coordinate Transformations
11.3 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables (Cycle 7, DIN/ISO: G53)

Configuring the datum table

If you do not wish to define a datum for an active axis, press
the DEL key. Then the TNC clears the numerical value from the
corresponding input field.

You can change the properties of tables. Enter the

code number 555343 in the MOD menu. The TNC
then offers the EDIT FORMAT soft key if a table is
selected. When you press this soft key, the TNC
opens a pop-up window where the properties are
shown for each column of the selected table. Any
changes made only affect the open table.

To exit a datum table

Select a different type of file in file management and choose the
desired file.

After you have changed a value in a datum table, you

must save the change with the ENT key. Otherwise
the change may not be included during program run.

Status displays
In the additional status display, the TNC shows the values of the
active datum shift.

250 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

11
DATUM SETTING (Cycle 247, DIN/ISO: G247) 11.4

11.4 DATUM SETTING (Cycle 247, DIN/ISO:

G247)

Effect
With the DATUM SETTING cycle you can activate as the new
datum a preset defined in a preset table.
After a DATUM SETTING cycle definition, all of the coordinate
inputs and datum shifts (absolute and incremental) are referenced
to the new preset.
Status display
In the status display the TNC shows the active preset number
behind the datum symbol.

Please note before programming:

When activating a datum from the preset table,

the TNC resets the datum shift, mirroring, rotation,
scaling factor and axis-specific scaling factor.
If you activate preset number 0 (line 0), then you
activate the datum that you last set in a manual
operating mode.
Cycle 247 is not functional in Test Run mode.

Cycle parameters
Number for datum?: Enter the number of the NC blocks
datum to be activated from the preset table. Input 13 CYCL DEF 247 DATUM SETTING
range: 0 to 65535
Q339=4 ;DATUM NUMBER

Status displays
In the additional status display (POS. DISP. STATUS) the TNC shows
the active preset number behind the datum dialog.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 251

11 Cycles: Coordinate Transformations
11.5 MIRRORING (Cycle 8, DIN/ISO: G28)

11.5 MIRRORING (Cycle 8, DIN/ISO: G28)

Effect
The TNC can machine the mirror image of a contour in the working
plane.
The mirroring cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined in
the program. It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode
of operation. The active mirrored axes are shown in the additional
status display.
If you mirror only one axis, the machining direction of the tool is
reversed (except in SL cycles).
If you mirror two axes, the machining direction remains the
same.

The result of the mirroring depends on the location of the datum:

If the datum lies on the contour to be mirrored, the element
simply flips over.
If the datum lies outside the contour to be mirrored, the
element also "jumps" to another location.

Resetting
Program the MIRROR IMAGE cycle once again with NO ENT.

252 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

11
MIRRORING (Cycle 8, DIN/ISO: G28) 11.5

Please note while programming:

If you mirror only one axis, the machining direction

is reversed for the milling cycles (Cycles 2xx).
Exception: Cycle 208, in which the direction defined
in the cycle applies.

Cycle parameters
Mirrored axis?: Enter the axis to be mirrored. You NC blocks
can mirror all axes except for the spindle axis— 79 CYCL DEF 8.0 MIRROR IMAGE
including rotary axes—with the exception of the
80 CYCL DEF 8.1 X Y Z
spindle axis and its associated auxiliary axis. You can
enter up to three axes. Input range: Up to three NC
axes X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 253

11 Cycles: Coordinate Transformations
11.6 ROTATION (Cycle 10, DIN/ISO: G73)

11.6 ROTATION (Cycle 10, DIN/ISO: G73)

Effect
The TNC can rotate the coordinate system about the active datum
in the working plane within a program.
The ROTATION cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined in
the program. It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode
of operation. The active rotation angle is shown in the additional
status display.
Reference axis for the rotation angle:
X/Y plane: X axis
Y/Z plane: Y axis
Z/X plane: Z axis

Resetting
Program the ROTATION cycle once again with a rotation angle of
0°.

254 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

11
ROTATION (Cycle 10, DIN/ISO: G73) 11.6

Please note while programming:

An active radius compensation is canceled

by defining Cycle 10 and must therefore be
reprogrammed, if necessary.
After defining Cycle 10, you must move both axes of
the working plane to activate rotation for all axes.

Cycle parameters
Rotation: Enter the rotation angle in degrees (°). NC blocks
Input range –360.000° to +360.000° (absolute or 12 CALL LBL 1
incremental)
13 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT
14 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+60
15 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+40
16 CYCL DEF 10.0 ROTATION
17 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT+35
18 CALL LBL 1

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 255

11 Cycles: Coordinate Transformations
11.7 SCALING (Cycle 11, DIN/ISO: G72)

11.7 SCALING (Cycle 11, DIN/ISO: G72)

Effect
The TNC can increase or reduce the size of contours within
a program, enabling you to program shrinkage and oversize
allowances.
SCALING becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the
program. It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of
operation. The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status
display.
The scaling factor has an effect on
all three coordinate axes at the same time
Dimensions in cycles

Prerequisite
It is advisable to set the datum to an edge or a corner of the
contour before enlarging or reducing the contour.
Enlargement: SCL greater than 1 (up to 99.999 999)
Reduction: SCL less than 1 (down to 0.000 001)
Resetting
Program the SCALING cycle once again with a scaling factor of 1.

Cycle parameters
Scaling factor?: Enter the scaling factor SCL. The NC blocks
TNC multiplies the coordinates and radii by the SCL 11 CALL LBL 1
factor (as described under "Effect" above). Input
12 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM
range: 0.000000 to 99.999999
13 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+60
14 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+40
15 CYCL DEF 11.0 SCALING
16 CYCL DEF 11.1 SCL 0.75
17 CALL LBL 1

256 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

11
AXIS-SPECIFIC SCALING (Cycle 26) 11.8

11.8 AXIS-SPECIFIC SCALING (Cycle 26)

Effect
With Cycle 26 you can account for shrinkage and oversize factors
for each axis.
SCALING becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the
program. It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of
operation. The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status
display.
Resetting
Program the SCALING cycle once again with a scaling factor of 1
for the same axis.

Please note while programming:

Coordinate axes sharing coordinates for arcs must be

enlarged or reduced by the same factor.
You can program each coordinate axis with its own
axis-specific scaling factor.
In addition, you can enter the coordinates of a center
for all scaling factors.
The size of the contour is enlarged or reduced with
reference to the center, and not necessarily (as in
Cycle 11 SCALING) with reference to the active
datum.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 257

11 Cycles: Coordinate Transformations
11.8 AXIS-SPECIFIC SCALING (Cycle 26)

Cycle parameters
Axis and scaling factor: Select the coordinate axis/
axes by soft key and enter the factor(s) involved
in enlarging or reducing. Input range: 0.000000 to
99.999999
Center coordinates: Enter the center of the axis-
specific enlargement or reduction. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999

NC blocks
25 CALL LBL 1
26 CYCL DEF 26.0 AXIS-SPECIFIC
SCALING
27 CYCL DEF 26.1 X 1.4 Y 0.6 CCX+15
CCY+20
28 CALL LBL 1

258 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

11
WORKING PLANE (Cycle 19, DIN/ISO: G80, software option 1) 11.9

11.9 WORKING PLANE (Cycle 19, DIN/ISO:

G80, software option 1)

Effect
In Cycle 19 you define the position of the working plane—i.e. the
position of the tool axis referenced to the machine coordinate
system—by entering tilt angles. There are two ways to determine
the position of the working plane:
Enter the position of the rotary axes directly.
Describe the position of the working plane using up to 3
rotations (spatial angle) of the fixed machine coordinate
system. The required spatial angle can be calculated by cutting
a perpendicular line through the tilted working plane and
considering it from the axis around which you wish to tilt. With
two spatial angles, every tool position in space can be defined
exactly.

Note that the position of the tilted coordinate

system, and therefore also all movements in the
tilted system, are dependent on your description of
the tilted plane.

If you program the position of the working plane via spatial angles,
the TNC will calculate the required angle positions of the tilted axes
automatically and will store these in the parameters Q120 (A axis)
to Q122 (C axis). If two solutions are possible, the TNC will choose
the shorter path from the zero position of the rotary axes.
The axes are always rotated in the same sequence for calculating
the tilt of the plane: The TNC first rotates the A axis, then the B
axis, and finally the C axis.
Cycle 19 becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the
program. As soon as you move an axis in the tilted system, the
compensation for this specific axis is activated. You must move all
axes to activate compensation for all axes.
If you set the function Tilting program run to Active in the
Manual Operation mode, the angular value entered in this menu is
overwritten by Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 259

11 Cycles: Coordinate Transformations
11.9 WORKING PLANE (Cycle 19, DIN/ISO: G80, software option 1)

Please note while programming:

The functions for tilting the working plane are

interfaced to the TNC and the machine tool by the
machine tool builder. With some swivel heads and
tilting tables, the machine tool builder determines
whether the entered angles are interpreted as
coordinates of the rotary axes or as angular
components of a tilted plane.
Refer to your machine manual.

Because nonprogrammed rotary axis values are

interpreted as unchanged, you should always define
all three spatial angles, even if one or more angles
are at zero.
The working plane is always tilted around the active
datum.
If you use Cycle 19 when M120 is active, the TNC
automatically rescinds the radius compensation,
which also rescinds the M120 function.

Cycle parameters
Rotary axis and tilt angle?: Enter the axes of
rotation together with the associated tilt angles.
The rotary axes A, B and C are programmed using
soft keys. Input range -360.000 to 360.000
If the TNC automatically positions the rotary axes, you can enter
the following parameters:
Feed rate? F=: Traverse speed of the rotary axis
during automatic positioning. Input range: 0 to
99999.999
Set-up clearance? (incremental value): The TNC
positions the tilting head so that the position
that results from the extension of the tool by the
set-up clearance does not change relative to the
workpiece. Input range: 0 to 99999.9999

260 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

11
WORKING PLANE (Cycle 19, DIN/ISO: G80, software option 1) 11.9

Resetting
To cancel the tilt angle, redefine the WORKING PLANE cycle and
enter an angular value of 0° for all axes of rotation. You must then
program the WORKING PLANE cycle once again and respond to
the dialog question with the NO ENT key to disable the function.

Positioning the axes of rotation

The machine tool builder determines whether Cycle

19 positions the axes of rotation automatically or
whether they must be positioned manually in the
program. Refer to your machine manual.

Manual positioning of rotary axes

If the rotary axes are not positioned automatically in Cycle 19, you
must position them in a separate L block after the cycle definition.
If you use axis angles, you can define the axis values right in the L
block. If you use spatial angles, then use the Q parameters Q120
(A-axis value), Q121 (B-axis value) and Q122 (C-axis value), which
are described by Cycle 19.

For manual positioning, always use the rotary axis

positions stored in Q parameters Q120 to Q122.
Avoid using functions, such as M94 (modulo rotary
axes), in order to avoid discrepancies between
the actual and nominal positions of rotary axes in
multiple definitions.

Example NC blocks:
10 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
11 L X+25 Y+10 R0 FMAX
12 CYCL DEF 19.0 WORKING PLANE Define the spatial angle for calculation of the compensation
13 CYCL DEF 19.1 A+0 B+45 C+0
14 L A+Q120 C+Q122 R0 F1000 Position the rotary axes by using values calculated by Cycle
19
15 L Z+80 R0 FMAX Activate compensation for the spindle axis
16 L X-8.5 Y-10 R0 FMAX Activate compensation for the working plane

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 261

11 Cycles: Coordinate Transformations
11.9 WORKING PLANE (Cycle 19, DIN/ISO: G80, software option 1)

Automatic positioning of rotary axes

If the rotary axes are positioned automatically in Cycle 19:
The TNC can position only controlled axes
In order for the tilted axes to be positioned, you must enter a
feed rate and a set-up clearance in addition to the tilting angles,
during cycle definition.
Use only preset tools (the full tool length must be defined).
The position of the tool tip as referenced to the workpiece
surface remains nearly unchanged after tilting
The TNC performs the tilt at the last programmed feed rate.
The maximum feed rate that can be reached depends on the
complexity of the swivel head or tilting table.
Example NC blocks:
10 L Z+100 R0 FMAX
11 L X+25 Y+10 R0 FMAX
12 CYCL DEF 19.0 WORKING PLANE Define the angle for calculation of the compensation
13 CYCL DEF 19.1 A+0 B+45 C+0 F5000 SETUP50 Also define the feed rate and the clearance
14 L Z+80 R0 FMAX Activate compensation for the spindle axis
15 L X-8.5 Y-10 R0 FMAX Activate compensation for the working plane

Position display in the tilted system

On activation of Cycle 19, the displayed positions (ACTL and
NOML) and the datum indicated in the additional status display are
referenced to the tilted coordinate system. The positions displayed
immediately after cycle definition might not be the same as the
coordinates of the last programmed position before Cycle 19.

Workspace monitoring
The TNC monitors only those axes in the tilted coordinate system
that are moved. If necessary, the TNC outputs an error message.

262 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

11
WORKING PLANE (Cycle 19, DIN/ISO: G80, software option 1) 11.9

Positioning in a tilted coordinate system

With the miscellaneous function M130 you can move the tool,
while the coordinate system is tilted, to positions that are
referenced to the non-tilted coordinate system.
Positioning movements with straight lines that are referenced to
the machine coordinate system (blocks with M91 or M92) can also
be executed in a tilted working plane. Constraints:
Positioning is without length compensation.
Positioning is without machine geometry compensation.
Tool radius compensation is not permitted.

Combining coordinate transformation cycles

When combining coordinate transformation cycles, always make
sure the working plane is swiveled around the active datum. You
can program a datum shift before activating Cycle 19. In this case,
you are shifting the machine-based coordinate system.
If you program a datum shift after having activated Cycle 19, you
are shifting the tilted coordinate system.
Important: When resetting the cycles, use the reverse sequence
used for defining them:
1. 1st: Activate the datum shift
2. Activate tilting function
3. Activate rotation
...
Workpiece machining
...
1. Reset the rotation
2. Reset the tilting function
3. Reset the datum shift

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 263

11 Cycles: Coordinate Transformations
11.9 WORKING PLANE (Cycle 19, DIN/ISO: G80, software option 1)

Procedure for working with Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE

1 Write the program
Define the tool (not required if TOOL.T is active), and enter the
full tool length.
Call the tool.
Retract the tool in the tool axis to a position where there is
no danger of collision with the workpiece or clamping devices
during tilting.
If required, position the rotary axis or axes with an L block
to the appropriate angular value(s) (depending on a machine
parameter).
Activate datum shift if required.
Define Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE; enter the angular values for
the tilt axes
Traverse all principal axes (X, Y, Z) to activate compensation.
Write the program as if the machining process were to be
executed in a non-tilted plane.
If required, define Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE with other
angular values to execute machining in a different axis position.
In this case, it is not necessary to reset Cycle 19. You can define
the new angular values directly.
Reset Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE; program 0° for all tilt axes.
Disable the WORKING PLANE function; redefine Cycle 19 and
answer the dialog question with NO ENT.
Reset datum shift if required.
Position the tilt axes to the 0° position if required.
2 Clamp the workpiece
3 Datum setting
Manually by touch-off
Controlled with a HEIDENHAIN 3-D touch probe (see the Touch
Probe Cycles User's Manual, chapter 2).
Automatically with a HEIDENHAIN 3-D touch probe (see the
Touch Probe Cycles User's Manual, chapter 3).

4 Start the part program in the operating mode Program Run,

Full Sequence
5 Manual Operation mode
Use the 3-D ROT soft key to set the TILT WORKING PLANE
function to INACTIVE. Enter an angular value of 0° for each rotary
axis in the menu.

264 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

11
Programming Examples 11.10

11.10 Programming Examples

Example: Coordinate transformation cycles

Program sequence
Program the coordinate transformations in the main
program
Machining within a subprogram

0 BEGIN PGM COTRANS MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Z X+0 Y+0 Z-20 Definition of workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+130 Y+130 Z+0
3 TOOL CALL 1 Z S4500 Tool call
4 L Z+250 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
5 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT Shift datum to center
6 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+65
7 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+65
8 CALL LBL 1 Call milling operation
9 LBL 10 Set label for program section repeat
10 CYCL DEF 10.0 ROTATION Rotate by 45° (incremental)
11 CYCL DEF 10.1 IROT+45
12 CALL LBL 1 Call milling operation
13 CALL LBL 10 REP 6/6 Return jump to LBL 10; repeat the milling operation six
times
14 CYCL DEF 10.0 ROTATION Reset the rotation
15 CYCL DEF 10.1 ROT+0
16 CYCL DEF 7.0 DATUM SHIFT Reset the datum shift
17 CYCL DEF 7.1 X+0
18 CYCL DEF 7.2 Y+0
19 L Z+250 R0 FMAX M2 Retract in the tool axis, end program
20 LBL 1 Subprogram 1
21 L X+0 Y+0 R0 FMAX Define milling operation
22 L Z+2 R0 FMAX M3
23 L Z-5 R0 F200
24 L X+30 RL
25 L IY+10
26 RND R5
27 L IX+20
28 L IX+10 IY-10
29 RND R5
30 L IX-10 IY-10

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 265

11 Cycles: Coordinate Transformations
11.10 Programming Examples

31 L IX-20
32 L IY+10
33 L X+0 Y+0 R0 F5000
34 L Z+20 R0 FMAX
35 LBL 0
36 END PGM COTRANS MM

266 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

12
Cycles: Special
Functions
12 Cycles: Special Functions
12.1 Fundamentals

12.1 Fundamentals

Overview
The TNC provides five cycles for the following special purposes:
Cycle Soft key Page
9 DWELL TIME 269

12 PROGRAM CALL 270

13 SPINDLE ORIENTATION 272

32 TOLERANCE 273

225 ENGRAVING of texts 276

268 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

12
DWELL TIME (Cycle 9, DIN/ISO: G04) 12.2

12.2 DWELL TIME (Cycle 9, DIN/ISO: G04)

Function
This causes the execution of the next block within a running program
to be delayed by the programmed DWELL TIME. A dwell time can be
used for such purposes as chip breaking.
The cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program.
Modal conditions such as spindle rotation are not affected.

NC blocks
89 CYCL DEF 9.0 DWELL TIME
90 CYCL DEF 9.1 DWELL 1.5

Cycle parameters
Dwell time in seconds: Enter the dwell time in
seconds. Input range: 0 to 3600 s (1 hour) in steps
of 0.001 seconds

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 269

12 Cycles: Special Functions
12.3 PROGRAM CALL (Cycle 12, DIN/ISO: G39)

12.3 PROGRAM CALL (Cycle 12, DIN/ISO:

G39)

Cycle function
Routines that you have programmed (such as special drilling cycles
or geometrical modules) can be written as main programs. These
can then be called like fixed cycles.

Please note while programming:

The program you are calling must be stored on the

hard disk of your TNC.
If the program you are defining to be a cycle is
located in the same directory as the program you
are calling it from, you need only enter the program
name.
If the program you are defining to be a cycle is not
located in the same directory as the program you are
calling it from, you must enter the complete path, for
example TNC:\KLAR35\FK1\50.H.
If you want to define a DIN/ISO program to be a
cycle, enter the file type .I behind the program name.
As a rule, Q parameters are globally effective when
called with Cycle 12. So please note that changes
to Q parameters in the called program can also
influence the calling program.

270 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

12
PROGRAM CALL (Cycle 12, DIN/ISO: G39) 12.3

Cycle parameters
Program name: Enter the name of the program Designate program 50 as a cycle and
you want to call and, if necessary, the directory it is call it with M99
located in or 55 CYCL DEF 12.0 PGM CALL
Activate the file select dialog with the SELECT soft 56 CYCL DEF 12.1 PGM TNC:
key and select the program to be called \KLAR35\FK1\50.H
57 L X+20 Y+50 FMAX M99
Call the program with:
CYCL CALL (separate block) or
M99 (blockwise) or
M89 (executed after every positioning block)

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 271

12 Cycles: Special Functions
12.4 SPINDLE ORIENTATION (Cycle 13, DIN/ISO: G36)

12.4 SPINDLE ORIENTATION (Cycle 13, DIN/

ISO: G36)

Cycle function

Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the

machine tool builder for use of this cycle.

The TNC can control the machine tool spindle and rotate it to a given
angular position.
Oriented spindle stops are required for
Tool changing systems with a defined tool change position
Orientation of the transmitter/receiver window of HEIDENHAIN 3-
D touch probes with infrared transmission
NC blocks
The angle of orientation defined in the cycle is positioned to by
entering M19 or M20 (depending on the machine). 93 CYCL DEF 13.0 ORIENTATION
If you program M19 or M20 without having defined Cycle 13, the 94 CYCL DEF 13.1 ANGLE 180
TNC positions the machine tool spindle to an angle that has been set
by the machine manufacturer (see your machine manual).

Please note while programming:

Cycle 13 is used internally for Cycles 202, 204 and

209. Please note that, if required, you must program
Cycle 13 again in your NC program after one of the
machining cycles mentioned above.

Cycle parameters
Angle of orientation: Enter the angle referenced
to the reference axis of the working plane. Input
range: 0.0000° to 360.0000°

272 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

12
TOLERANCE (Cycle 32, DIN/ISO: G62) 12.5

12.5 TOLERANCE (Cycle 32, DIN/ISO: G62)

Cycle function

Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the

machine tool builder for use of this cycle.

With the entries in Cycle 32 you can influence the result of

HSC machining with respect to accuracy, surface definition and
speed, inasmuch as the TNC has been adapted to the machine’s
characteristics.
The TNC automatically smoothens the contour between two path
elements (whether compensated or not). The tool has constant
contact with the workpiece surface and therefore reduces wear on
the machine tool. The tolerance defined in the cycle also affects the
traverse paths on circular arcs.
If necessary, the TNC automatically reduces the programmed feed
rate so that the program can be machined at the fastest possible
speed without short pauses for computing time. Even if the TNC
does not move with reduced speed, it will always comply with
the tolerance that you have defined. The larger you define the
tolerance, the faster the TNC can move the axes.
Smoothing the contour results in a certain amount of deviation
from the contour. The size of this contour error (tolerance value)
is set in a machine parameter by the machine manufacturer. With
CYCLE 32 you can change the pre-set tolerance value and select
different filter settings, provided that your machine tool builder has
implemented these features.

Influences of the geometry definition in the CAM

system
The most important factor of influence in offline NC program
creation is the chord error S defined in the CAM system.
The maximum point spacing of NC programs generated in a
postprocessor (PP) is defined through the chord error. If the chord
error is less than or equal to the tolerance value T defined in Cycle
32, then the TNC can smooth the contour points unless any special
machine settings limit the programmed feed rate.
You will achieve optimal smoothing if in Cycle 32 you choose a
tolerance value between 110-% and 200-% of the CAM chord error.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 273

12 Cycles: Special Functions
12.5 TOLERANCE (Cycle 32, DIN/ISO: G62)

Please note while programming:

With very small tolerance values the machine cannot

cut the contour without jerking. These jerking
movements are not caused by poor processing
power in the TNC, but by the fact that, in order to
machine the contour element transitions very exactly,
the TNC might have to drastically reduce the speed.
Cycle 32 is DEF active which means that it becomes
effective as soon as it is defined in the part program.
The TNC resets Cycle 32 if you
Redefine it and confirm the dialog question for
the tolerance value with NO ENT.
Select a new program with the PGM MGT key.

After you have reset Cycle 32, the TNC reactivates

the tolerance that was predefined by machine
parameter.
In a program with millimeters set as unit of measure,
the TNC interprets the entered tolerance value in
millimeters. In an inch program it interprets it as
inches.
If you transfer a program with Cycle 32 that contains
only the cycle parameter Tolerance value T, the
control inserts the two remaining parameters with
the value 0 if required.
As the tolerance value increases, the diameter of
circular movements usually decreases. If the HSC
filter is active on your machine (ask your machine
tool builder, if necessary), the circle can also become
larger.
If Cycle 32 is active, the TNC shows the parameters
defined for Cycle 32 on the CYC tab of the additional
status display.

274 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

12
TOLERANCE (Cycle 32, DIN/ISO: G62) 12.5

Cycle parameters
Tolerance value T: Permissible contour deviation in NC blocks
mm (or inches with inch programming). Input range 95 CYCL DEF 32.0 TOLERANCE
0 to 99999.9999
96 CYCL DEF 32.1 T0.05
HSC MODE, Finishing=0, Roughing=1: Activate 97 CYCL DEF 32.2 HSC-MODE:1 TA5
filter:
Input value 0: Milling with increased contour
accuracy. The TNC uses internally defined
finishing filter settings
Input value 1: Milling at an increased feed rate.
The TNC uses internally defined roughing filter
settings
Tolerance for rotary axes TA: Permissible position
error of rotary axes in degrees when M128 is active
(FUNCTION TCPM). The TNC always reduces the
feed rate in such a way that—if more than one
axis is traversed—the slowest axis moves at its
maximum feed rate. Rotary axes are usually much
slower than linear axes. You can significantly reduce
the machining time for programs for more than
one axis by entering a large tolerance value (e.g.
10°), since the TNC does not always have to move
the rotary axis to the given nominal position. The
contour will not be damaged by entering a rotary
axis tolerance value. Only the position of the rotary
axis with respect to the workpiece surface will
change. Input range 0 to 179.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 275

12 Cycles: Special Functions
12.6 ENGRAVING (Cycle 225, DIN/ISO: G225)

12.6 ENGRAVING (Cycle 225, DIN/

ISO: G225)

Cycle run
This cycle is used to engrave texts on a flat surface of the
workpiece. The texts can be arranged in a straight line or along an
arc.
1 The TNC positions the tool in the working plane to the starting
point of the first character.
2 The tool plunges perpendicularly to the engraving floor and
mills the character. The TNC retracts the tool to the set-up
clearance between the characters when required. At the end
of the character the tool is at the set-up clearance above the
workpiece surface.
3 This process is repeated for all characters to be engraved.
4 Finally, the TNC retracts the tool to the 2nd set-up clearance.

Please note while programming:

The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH

determines the working direction. If you program
DEPTH=0, the cycle will not be executed.
If you engrave the text in a straight line (Q516=0),
the starting point of the first character is determined
by the tool position at the time the cycle is called.
If you engrave the text along an arc (Q516=1), the
arc's center is determined by the tool position at the
time the cycle is called.
The text to be engraved can also be transferred with
a string variable (QS).

276 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

12
ENGRAVING (Cycle 225, DIN/ISO: G225) 12.6

Cycle parameters
Engraving text QS500: Text to be engraved inside
quotation marks. Assignment of a string variable
through the Q key of the numerical keypad. The Q
key on the ASCI keyboard represents normal text
input. Allowed entry characters: See "Engraving
system variables"
Character height Q513 (absolute): Height of the
characters to be engraved in mm. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Space factor Q514: The font used is a proportional
font. Each character has its own width, which
is engraved correspondingly by the TNC if you
program Q514 = 0. If Q514 is not equal to 0, the
TNC scales the space between the characters. Input
range 0 to 9.9999
NC blocks
Font Q515: Currently without function
62 CYCL DEF 225 ENGRAVING
Text in a straight line/on arc (0/1) Q516: Qs500="A" ;ENGRAVING TEXT
Engrave text in a straight line: Input = 0
Q513=10 ;CHARACTER HEIGHT
Engrave text on an arc: Input = 1
Q514=0 ;SPACE FACTOR
Angle of rotation Q374: Center angle if the text is
to be arranged on an arc. Input range -360.0000 to Q515=0 ;FONT
+360.0000° Q516=0 ;TEXT LAYOUT

Radius of text on an arc Q517 (absolute): Radius Q374=0 ;ANGLE OF ROTATION

of the arc in mm on which the TNC is to arrange the Q517=0 ;CIRCLE RADIUS
text. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Q207=750 ;FEED RATE FOR
Feed rate for milling Q207: Traversing speed of MILLING
the tool in mm/min while milling. Input range 0 to Q201=-0.5 ;DEPTH
99999.999 alternatively FAUTO, FU, FZ
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR
Depth Q201 (incremental value): Distance between PLNGNG
workpiece surface and engraving floor Q200=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Feed rate for plunging Q206: Traversing speed Q203=+20 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
of the tool when moving into the workpiece in Q204=50 ;2ND SET-UP
mm/min. Input range 0 to 99999.999 alternatively CLEARANCE
FAUTO, FU
Set-up clearance Q200 (incremental): Distance
between tool tip and workpiece surface. Input range
0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF
Coordinate of workpiece surface Q203 (absolute):
Coordinate of the workpiece surface. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
2nd set-up clearance Q204 (incremental):
Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision
between tool and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 277

12 Cycles: Special Functions
12.6 ENGRAVING (Cycle 225, DIN/ISO: G225)

Allowed engraving characters

The following special characters are allowed in addition to
lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numbers:
!#$%&‘()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]_

The TNC uses the special characters % and \

for special functions. These characters must be
indicated twice in the text to be engraved (e.g. %%) if
you want to engrave them.

Characters that cannot be printed

Apart from text, you can also define certain non-printable
characters for formatting purposes. Enter the special character \
before the non-printable characters.
The following formatting possibilities are available:
\n: Line break
\t: Horizontal tab (the tab width is permanently set to 8
characters)
\t: Vertical tab (the tab width is permanently set to one line)

Engraving system variables

In addition to the standard characters, you can engrave the
contents of certain system variables. Enter the special character %
before the system variable.
You can also engrave the current date. Enter %time<x>. <x>
defines the date format whose meaning is identical to the
function SYSSTR ID332 (see the User's Manual for Conversational
Programming, "Q parameter programming" chapter, "Copying
system data to a string" section).

Keep in mind that you must enter a leading 0 when

entering the date formats 1 to 9, e.g. time08.

278 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
Cycles: Turning
13 Cycles: Turning
13.1 Turning Cycles (software option 50)

13.1 Turning Cycles (software option 50)

Overview
Defining turning cycles:
The soft-key row shows the available groups of cycles

Select the menu for cycle group TURNING

Select cycle group, e.g. cycles for longitudinal turning

Select cycle, e.g. TURN SHOULDER, LONGITUDINAL
The TNC offers the following cycles for turning operations:
Cycle group Cycle Soft key Page
Special Cycles

ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM(Cycle 800, 286

DIN/ISO: G800)

RESET ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM (Cycle 801, 288

DIN/ISO: G801)

Cycles for longitudinal 289

turning

TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL (Cycle 811, 290

DIN/ISO: G811)

TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL EXTENDED 292

(Cycle 812, DIN/ISO: G812)

TURN, LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE (Cycle 813, DIN/ 296

ISO: G813)

TURN, LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE EXTENDED 299

(Cycle 814, DIN/ISO: G814)

TURN CONTOUR LONGITUDINAL (Cycle 810, DIN/ 303

ISO: G810)

TURN CONTOUR-PARALLEL (Cycle 815, DIN/ISO: 307

G815)

280 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
Turning Cycles (software option 50) 13.1

Cycle group Cycle Soft key Page

Cycles for transverse 289
turning

TURN SHOULDER FACE (Cycle 821, DIN/ISO: 311

G821)

TURN SHOULDER FACE EXTENDED (Cycle 822, 314

DIN/ISO: G822)

TURN, TRANSVERSE PLUNGE (Cycle 823, DIN/ 318

ISO: G823)

TURN, TRANSVERSE PLUNGE EXTENDED (Cycle 321

824, DIN/ISO: G824)

TURN CONTOUR FACE (Cycle 820, DIN/ISO: G820) 325

TURN CONTOUR-PARALLEL (Cycle 815, DIN/ISO: 307

G815)

Cycles for recessing

SIMPLE RADIAL RECESSING (Cycle 841, DIN/ISO: 329

G841)

RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED(Cycle 842, DIN/ 332

ISO: G842)

RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL(Cycle 840, DIN/ 337

ISO: G840)

SIMPLE AXIAL RECESSING (Cycle 851, DIN/ISO: 341

G851)

AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED(Cycle 852, DIN/ 344

ISO: G852)

AXIAL RECESSING(Cycle 850, DIN/ISO: G850) 349

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 281

13 Cycles: Turning
13.1 Turning Cycles (software option 50)

Cycle group Cycle Soft key Page

Cycles for recessing

RADIAL RECESSING (Cycle 861, DIN/ISO: G861) 353

RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED(Cycle 862, DIN/ 356

ISO: G862)

RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL(Cycle 860, DIN/ 360

ISO: G860)

AXIAL RECESSING (Cycle 871, DIN/ISO: G871) 363

AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED(Cycle 872, DIN/ 365

ISO: G872)

AXIAL RECESSING(Cycle 870, DIN/ISO: G870) 369

Cycles for thread turning

THREAD LONGITUDINAL (Cycle 831, DIN/ISO: 372

G831)

THREAD EXTENDED (Cycle 832, DIN/ISO: G832) 375

CONTOUR-PARALLEL THREAD (Cycle 830, DIN/ 379

ISO: G830)

282 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
Turning Cycles (software option 50) 13.1

Working with turning cycles

You can only use turning cycles in Turning mode

FUNCTION MODE TURN.

In turning cycles the TNC takes into account the cutting geometry
(TO, RS, P-ANGLE, T-ANGLE) of the tool so that damage to the
defined contour elements is prevented. The TNC outputs a warning
if complete machining of the contour with the active tool is not
possible.
You can use the turning cycles both for inside and outside
machining. Depending upon the specific cycle, the TNC detects
the machining position (inside/outside machining) via the starting
position or tool position when the cycle is called. In some cycles
you can also enter the machining position directly in the cycle.
After modifying the machining position, check the tool position and
rotation direction.
If you program M136 before a cycle, the TNC interprets feed rate
values in the cycle in mm/rev., and without M136 in mm/min.
If turning cycles are executed during inclined machining (M144), the
angles of the tool to the contour change. The TNC automatically
takes these modifications into account and thus also monitors the
machining in inclined state to prevent contour damage.
Some cycles machine contours that you have written in a
subprogram. You program these contours with plain-language
path functions or FK functions. Before calling the cycle you must
program the cycle 14 CONTOUR to define the subprogram number.
You must call turning cycles 81x - 87x with CYCL CALL or M99.
Before calling a cycle, be sure to program:
Turning mode FUNCTION MODE TURN
Tool call TOOL CALL
Direction of rotation of turning spindle, e.g. M303
Selection of speed/cutting speed FUNCTION TURNDATA SPIN
If you use feed rate per revolution mm/rev., M136
Tool positioning to suitable starting point e.g. L X+130 Y+0 R0
FMAX
Adaptation of coordinate system and align tool CYCL DEF 800
ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 283

13 Cycles: Turning
13.1 Turning Cycles (software option 50)

Blank form update (FUNCTION TURNDATA)

During turning operations workpieces must often be machined
with several tools. Often a contour element cannot be completely
finished because the tool form does not permit this (e.g. with
a back cut). In this case, single sub-areas have to be reworked
with other tools. The TNC detects the already machined areas
with the blank form update and adapts all approach and departure
paths to the specific, current machining situation. With the shorter
machining paths, traverses in the air are avoided to significantly
reduce machining time.
To activate the blank form update, program the TURNDATA BLANK
function and link to a program or subprogram with a workpiece
blank specification. The workpiece blank defined in TURNDATA
BLANK determines the area to be machined with the blank form
update. TURNDATA BLANK OFF deactivates blank form update.

The TNC optimizes machining areas and approach

motions with blank form update. The TNC takes into
account the specific tracked workpiece blank for
approach and departure paths. If parts of the finished
part extend beyond the workpiece blank, this may
damage the workpiece and tool.

Blank form update is only possible with cycle

machining in turning mode (FUNCTION MODE TURN).
You must define a closed contour as the workpiece
blank for the blank form update (start position = end
position). The workpiece blank corresponds to the
cross-section of a rotationally symmetrical body.

284 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
Turning Cycles (software option 50) 13.1

The TNC has various options for defining the blank:

Workpiece blank definition Soft key
Deactivate blank form update TURNDATA
BLANK OFF: No input
Workpiece blank definition in a program: Enter
name of the file

Workpiece blank definition in a program: Enter

the string parameter with the program name

Workpiece blank definition in a subprogram:

Enter the number of the subprogram

Workpiece blank definition in a subprogram:

Enter the name of the subprogram

Workpiece blank definition in a subprogram:

Enter the string parameter with the
subprogram name
Activate blank form update and define workpiece blank:
Show the soft-key row with special functions

Select the menu for TURNING PROGRAM

FUNCTIONS
Select BASIC FUNCTIONS

Select FUNCTION MODE

Select the function for blank form update

Select blank form update

NC syntax
11 FUNCTION TURNDATABLANK LBL 20

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 285

13 Cycles: Turning
13.2 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM
(Cycle 800, DIN/ISO: G800)

13.2 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE

SYSTEM
(Cycle 800, DIN/ISO: G800)

Application

Your machine manufacturer may make own functions

available for aligning the tool. Refer to your machine
manual.

Before carrying out turning operations you must:

correctly position the tool
orient the tool tip

To bring the tool into suitable position, program a traversing block,

e.g. L Y+0 R0 FMAX to the center of the turning spindle.
Use the cycle 800 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE POSITION
to orient the tool tip. Cycle 800 aligns the workpiece coordinate
system to the precession angle Q497 and correspondingly
orients the tool tip. The TNC orients the tool tip to the rotary table
center for outer machining and in the opposite direction for inner
machining.
With the precession angle Q497 you define at which position on
the workpiece circumference machining should occur. This may
be necessary if you have to bring the tool into a specific position
to machine a process due to reasons of space. You can also rotate
the machining position to better observe machining processes. If
you carry out inclined turning, orient the precession angle of the
tool tip and the coordinate system to a suitable position (see User's
Manual, Turning chapter).
The turning cycles of the TNC can be used for inside and outside
machining. With Cycle 800 you can reverse the tool coordinate
system (REVERSE TOOL Q498). In this way you can use tools both
for inside and outside machining. The TNC then rotates the spindle
by 180° and reverses tool orientation TO.

286 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM 13.2
(Cycle 800, DIN/ISO: G800)

Effect
With Cycle 800 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM, the
TNC aligns the workpiece coordinate system and orients the tool
correspondingly. The cycle is effective from the time of definition
until the next tool call.

The tool must be clamped and measured in the

correct position.
You can only use Cycle 800 when a turning tool is
selected.
Check the orientation of the tool before machining.

The Cycle 800 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE

SYSTEM is machine-dependent. Refer to your
machine manual.

Cycle parameters
PRECESSION ANGLE Q497: Angle to which the
TNC aligns the tool. Input range 0 to 359.9999
REVERSE TOOL Q498: mirror tool for inside/
outside machining. Input range 0 and 1.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 287

13 Cycles: Turning
13.3 RESET ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM
(Cycle 801, DIN/ISO: G801)

13.3 RESET ROTARY COORDINATE

SYSTEM
(Cycle 801, DIN/ISO: G801)

Application

The Cycle 801 RESET ROTARY COORDINATE

SYSTEM is machine-dependent. Refer to your
machine manual.

With Cycle 801 RESET ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM you can

reset the settings you have made with Cycle 800 ADAPT ROTARY
COORDINATE SYSTEM.

Effect
Cycle 801 resets all settings you have programmed with Cycle 800.
They are:
Precession angle Q497
Reverse tool Q498

Cycle 801 merely resets the settings of Cycle 800. It

does not orient the tool to the starting position. If a
tool was oriented with Cycle 800, it remains in this
position also after resetting.

Cycle parameters
Cycle 801 does not have a cycle parameter. Finish
the cycle input with the "END" key.

288 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
Fundamentals of Turning Cycles 13.4

13.4 Fundamentals of Turning Cycles

The pre-positioning of the tool decisively affects the workspace
of the cycle and thus the machining time. During roughing, the
starting point for cycles corresponds to the tool position when a
cycle is called. When calculating the area to be machined, the TNC
takes into account the starting point and the end point defined in
the cycle or contour defined in the cycle. If the starting point lies in
the area to be machined the TNC positions the tool beforehand in
some cycles to set-up clearance.
The turning direction with 81x cycles is longitudinal to the rotary
axis and lateral to the rotary axis with 82x cycles. The motions are
contour-parallel in cycle 815.
The cycles can be used for inside and outside machining. The
TNC takes the information for this from the position of the tool
or the definition in the cycle (See "Working with turning cycles",
page 283).
In cycles with freely defined contours (Cycles 810, 820 and 815),
the programming direction of the contour determines the direction
of machining.
In cycles for turning you can specify the machining strategies of
roughing, finishing or complete machining.

Caution: Danger to the workpiece and tool!

The turning cycles position the tool automatically
to the starting point during finishing. The approach
strategy is influenced by the position of the tool
when the cycle is called. The decisive factor is
whether the tool is located inside or outside an
envelope contour when the cycle is called. The
envelope contour is the programmed contour,
enlarged by the set-up clearance.
If the tool is within the envelope contour, the cycle
positions the tool at the defined feed rate directly
to the starting position. This can cause contour
damage. Position the tool at a sufficient distance
from the starting point to prevent the possibility of
contour damage.
If the tool is outside the envelope contour,
positioning to the envelope contour is performed
at rapid traverse, and at the programmed feed rate
within the envelope contour.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 289

13 Cycles: Turning
13.5 TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL
(Cycle 811, DIN/ISO: G811)

13.5 TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL

(Cycle 811, DIN/ISO: G811)

Application
This cycle enables you to carry out longitudinal turning of right-
angled shoulders.
You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining. If the tool
is outside the contour to be machined when the cycle is called, the
cycle runs outside machining. If the tool is inside the contour to be
machined, the cycle runs inside machining.

Roughing cycle run

The cycle processes the area from the tool position to the end
point defined in the cycle.
1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse. The
infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX. CUTTING
DEPTH.
2 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in longitudinal direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate by one infeed
value.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
5 The TNC repeats this process (1 to 4) until the final contour is
completed.
6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Finishing cycle run

1 The TNC traverses the tool in the Z coordinate by the set-up
clearance Q460. The movement is performed at rapid traverse.
2 The TNC runs the paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse.
3 The TNC finishes the finished part contour at the defined feed
rate Q505.
4 The TNC returns the tool to set-up clearance at the defined feed
rate.
5 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

290 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL 13.5
(Cycle 811, DIN/ISO: G811)

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to the starting position

with radius compensation R0 before the cycle call.
The tool position at cycle call defines the size of the
area to be machined (cycle starting point).
Also refer to the fundamentals of turning cycles
(Fundamentals of Turning Cycles).

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining
operation:
0: Roughing and finishing Q494 Q463
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize
Q460
Set-up clearance Q460 (incremental): Distance for
retraction and pre-positioning Ø Q493

Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of

the contour end point (diameter value)
Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour Q484
end point
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed
(radius value) in radial direction. The infeed is divided
evenly to avoid abrasive cuts. Ø Q483

Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during

roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per NC blocks
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
11 CYCL DEF 811 TURN SHOULDER
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter LONG.
oversize for the defined contour Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
defined contour in axial direction Q493=+50 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during CONTOUR
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the Q494=-55 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per Q463=+3 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
Contour smoothing Q506:
Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
0: After each cut along the contour (within the
DIAMETER
infeed range)
1: Contour smoothing after the last cut (complete Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
contour); retract below 45° Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
2: No contour smoothing; retract below 45°
Q506=+0 ;CONTOUR SMOOTHING
12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
13 CYCL CALL

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 291

13 Cycles: Turning
13.6 TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL EXTENDED
(Cycle 812, DIN/ISO: G812)

13.6 TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL

EXTENDED
(Cycle 812, DIN/ISO: G812)

Application
This cycle enables you to run longitudinal turning of shoulders.
Expanded scope of function:
You can insert a chamfer or curve at the contour start and
contour end.

In the cycle you can define angles for the face and
circumferential surfaces

You can insert a radius in the contour edge

You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining. If the start
diameter Q491 is larger than the end diameter Q493, the cycle
runs outside machining. If the start diameter Q491 is less than the
end diameter Q493, the cycle runs inside machining.

Roughing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle
is called. If the starting point is within the area to be machined,
the TNC positions the tool in the X coordinate and then in the Z
coordinate to set-up clearance and begins the cycle there.
1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse. The
infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX. CUTTING
DEPTH.
2 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in longitudinal direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate by one infeed
value.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
5 The TNC repeats this process (1 to 4) until the final contour is
completed.
6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

292 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL EXTENDED 13.6
(Cycle 812, DIN/ISO: G812)

Finishing cycle run

If the starting point lies in the area to be machined, the TNC
positions the tool beforehand to set-up clearance in the Z
coordinate.
1 The TNC runs the paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse.
2 The TNC finishes the finished part contour (contour starting
point to contour end point) at the defined feed rate Q505.
3 The TNC returns the tool to set-up clearance at the defined feed
rate.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to a safe position with

radius compensation R0 before the cycle call.
The tool position at cycle call (cycle starting point)
affects the area to be machined.
Also refer to the fundamentals of turning cycles (See
page 289).

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 293

13 Cycles: Turning
13.6 TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL EXTENDED
(Cycle 812, DIN/ISO: G812)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining
operation: Q484
0: Roughing and finishing
Q463
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize Ø Q491
Ø Q483
Set-up clearance Q460 (incremental): Distance for
retraction and pre-positioning
Diameter at contour start Q491: X coordinate of
the contour starting point (diameter value)
Q493
Contour start in Z Q492: Z coordinate of the Q494
contour starting point
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
the contour end point (diameter value) Q460

Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour Ø Q493

end point

294 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL EXTENDED 13.6
(Cycle 812, DIN/ISO: G812)

Angle of circumferential surface Q495: Angle NC blocks

between the circumferential surface and the rotary 11 CYCL DEF 812 TURN SHOULDER
axis LONG. EXTENDED.
Type of starting element Q501: Define the type of Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
element at the start of the contour (circumferential Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
surface):
Q491=+75 ;DIAMETER AT
0: No additional element
CONTOUR START
1: Element is a chamfer
2: Element is a radius Q492=+0 ;CONTOUR START IN Z
Q493=+50 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
Size of starting element Q502: Size of the starting
CONTOUR
element (chamfer section)
Q494=-55 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Radius of contour edge Q500: Radius of the inside
Q495=+5 ;ANGLE OF CIRCUM.
contour edge. If no radius is specified, the radius of
SURFACE
the cutting insert is generated.
Q501=+1 ;TYPE OF STARTING
Angle of face Q496: Angle between the face and ELEMENT
the rotary axis
Q502=+0.5 ;SIZE OF STARTING
Type of end element Q503: Define the type of ELEMENT
element at the end of the contour (face): Q500=+1.5 ;RADIUS OF CONTOUR
0: No additional element EDGE
1: Element is a chamfer
Q496=+0 ;ANGLE OF FACE
2: Element is a radius
Q503=+1 ;TYPE OF END ELEMENT
Size of end element Q504: Size of the end element
(chamfer section) Q504=+0.5 ;SIZE OF END ELEMENT
Q463=+3 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed
(radius value) in radial direction. The infeed is divided Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
evenly to avoid abrasive cuts. Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
DIAMETER
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Q506=+0 ;CONTOUR SMOOTHING
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter 12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
oversize for the defined contour
13 CYCL CALL
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the
defined contour in axial direction
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Contour smoothing Q506:
0: After each cut along the contour (within the
infeed range)
1: Contour smoothing after the last cut (complete
contour); retract below 45°
2: No contour smoothing; retract below 45°

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 295

13 Cycles: Turning
13.7 TURN, LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE
(Cycle 813, DIN/ISO: G813)

13.7 TURN, LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE

(Cycle 813, DIN/ISO: G813)

Application
This cycle enables you to run longitudinal turning of shoulders with
plunge elements (undercuts).
You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining. If the start
diameter Q491 is larger than the end diameter Q493, the cycle
runs outside machining. If the start diameter Q491 is less than the
end diameter Q493, the cycle runs inside machining.

Roughing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a
cycle is called. If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than
Q492 CONTOUR START IN Z, the TNC positions the tool in the Z
coordinate to set-up clearance and begins the cycle there.
In undercutting the TNC runs the infeed with feed rate Q478. The
return movements are then each at set-up clearance.
1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse. The
infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX. CUTTING
DEPTH.
2 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in longitudinal direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate by one infeed
value.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
5 The TNC repeats this process (1 to 4) until the final contour is
completed.
6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

296 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN, LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE 13.7
(Cycle 813, DIN/ISO: G813)

Finishing cycle run

1 The TNC runs the infeed motion at rapid traverse.
2 The TNC finishes the finished part contour (contour starting
point to contour end point) at the defined feed rate Q505.
3 The TNC returns the tool to set-up clearance at the defined feed
rate.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to a safe position with

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 297

13 Cycles: Turning
13.7 TURN, LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE
(Cycle 813, DIN/ISO: G813)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining
operation: Q494 Q492
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
Ø Q491
3: Only finishing to oversize
Ø Q483
Set-up clearance Q460 (incremental): Distance for
retraction and pre-positioning Ø Q493

Diameter at contour start Q491: X coordinate of

the contour starting point (diameter value) Q484
Contour start in Z Q492: Z coordinate of the Q463
starting point for the plunging path
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
the contour end point (diameter value)
Q460
Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour
end point
Angle of side Q495: Angle of the plunging side. The NC blocks
reference angle is formed by the perpendicular to
the rotary axis. 11 CYCL DEF 813 TURN,
LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
(radius value) in radial direction. The infeed is divided
evenly to avoid abrasive cuts. Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
Q491=+75 ;DIAMETER AT
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during CONTOUR START
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per Q492=-10 ;CONTOUR START IN Z
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute. Q493=+50 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
CONTOUR
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter
oversize for the defined contour Q494=-55 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Q495=+70 ;ANGLE OF SIDE
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the
defined contour in axial direction Q463=+3 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH

Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per DIAMETER
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute. Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
Contour smoothing Q506: Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
0: After each cut along the contour (within the
Q506=+0 ;CONTOUR SMOOTHING
infeed range)
1: Contour smoothing after the last cut (complete 12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
contour); retract below 45° 13 CYCL CALL
2: No contour smoothing; retract below 45°

298 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN, LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE EXTENDED 13.8
(Cycle 814, DIN/ISO: G814)

13.8 TURN, LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE

EXTENDED
(Cycle 814, DIN/ISO: G814)

Application
This cycle enables you to run longitudinal turning of shoulders with
plunge elements (undercuts). Expanded scope of function:
You can insert a chamfer or curve at the contour start and
contour end.

In the cycle you can define an angle for the face and a radius for
the contour edge

Roughing cycle run

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 299

13 Cycles: Turning
13.8 TURN, LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE EXTENDED
(Cycle 814, DIN/ISO: G814)

Finishing cycle run

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to a safe position with

300 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN, LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE EXTENDED 13.8
(Cycle 814, DIN/ISO: G814)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining
operation: Q484
0: Roughing and finishing Q463
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize
Set-up clearance Q460 (incremental): Distance for Q460
retraction and pre-positioning
Diameter at contour start Q491: X coordinate of
the contour starting point (diameter value)
Q494 Q492
Contour start in Z Q492: Z coordinate of the
starting point for the plunging path
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
the contour end point (diameter value) Ø Q491

Ø Q483
Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour
end point Ø Q493

Angle of side Q495: Angle of the plunging side. The

reference angle is formed by the perpendicular to
the rotary axis.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 301

13 Cycles: Turning
13.8 TURN, LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE EXTENDED
(Cycle 814, DIN/ISO: G814)

Type of starting element Q501: Define the type of NC blocks

element at the start of the contour (circumferential 11 CYCL DEF 814 TURN,
surface): LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE EXT.
0: No additional element Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
1: Element is a chamfer
2: Element is a radius Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
Q491=+75 ;DIAMETER AT
Size of starting element Q502: Size of the starting
CONTOUR START
element (chamfer section)
Q492=-10 ;CONTOUR START IN Z
Radius of contour edge Q500: Radius of the inside
Q493=+50 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
contour edge. If no radius is specified, the radius of
CONTOUR
the cutting insert is generated.
Q494=-55 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Angle of face Q496: Angle between the face and
Q495=+70 ;ANGLE OF SIDE
the rotary axis
Q501=+1 ;TYPE OF STARTING
Type of end element Q503: Define the type of ELEMENT
element at the end of the contour (face):
0: No additional element Q502=+0.5 ;SIZE OF STARTING
ELEMENT
1: Element is a chamfer
2: Element is a radius Q500=+1.5 ;RADIUS OF CONTOUR
EDGE
Size of end element Q504: Size of the end element
Q496=+0 ;ANGLE OF FACE
(chamfer section)
Q503=+1 ;TYPE OF END ELEMENT
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed
(radius value) in radial direction. The infeed is divided Q504=+0.5 ;SIZE OF END ELEMENT
evenly to avoid abrasive cuts. Q463=+3 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per DIAMETER
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
oversize for the defined contour
Q506=+0 ;CONTOUR SMOOTHING
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the
12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
defined contour in axial direction
13 CYCL CALL
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Contour smoothing Q506:
0: After each cut along the contour (within the
infeed range)
1: Contour smoothing after the last cut (complete
contour); retract below 45°
2: No contour smoothing; retract below 45°

302 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN CONTOUR LONGITUDINAL 13.9
(Cycle 810, DIN/ISO: G810)

13.9 TURN CONTOUR LONGITUDINAL

(Cycle 810, DIN/ISO: G810)

Application
This cycle enables you to run longitudinal turning of workpieces
with any turning contours. The contour description is in a
subprogram.
You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining. If the
starting point of the contour is larger than the end point of the
contour, the cycle runs outside machining. If the contour starting
point is less than the end point, the cycle runs inside machining.

Roughing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a
cycle is called. If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than
the contour starting point, the TNC positions the tool in the Z
coordinate to set-up clearance and begins the cycle there.
1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse. The
infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX. CUTTING
DEPTH.
2 The TNC machines the area between the starting position and
the end point in longitudinal direction. The longitudinal cut is run
paraxially with the defined feed rate Q478.
3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate by one infeed
value.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
5 The TNC repeats this process (1 to 4) until the final contour is
completed.
6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 303

13 Cycles: Turning
13.9 TURN CONTOUR LONGITUDINAL
(Cycle 810, DIN/ISO: G810)

Finishing cycle run

If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than the contour
starting point, the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate to set-
up clearance and begins the cycle there.
1 The TNC runs the infeed motion at rapid traverse.
2 The TNC finishes the finished part contour (contour starting
point to contour end point) at the defined feed rate Q505.
3 The TNC returns the tool to set-up clearance at the defined feed
rate.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Please note while programming:

The cutting limit defines the contour range to be

machined. The approach and departure paths can
exceed the cutting limits.
The tool position before the cycle call influences the
execution of the cutting limit. The TNC 640 machines
the area to the right or to the left of the cutting
limit, depending on which side the tool has been
positioned before the cycle is called.

Program a positioning block to a safe position with

radius compensation R0 before the cycle call.
The tool position at cycle call (cycle starting point)
affects the area to be machined.
The TNC takes the cutting geometry of the tool into
account to prevent damage to contour elements.
If complete machining with the active tool is not
possible, a warning is output by the TNC.
Before calling the cycle you must program the cycle
14 CONTOUR to define the subprogram number.
Also refer to the fundamentals of turning cycles (See
page 289).
When you use local QL Q parameters in a contour
subprogram you must also assign or calculate these
in the contour subprogram.

304 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN CONTOUR LONGITUDINAL 13.9
(Cycle 810, DIN/ISO: G810)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining
operation:
0: Roughing and finishing Q484
1: Only roughing Q463
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize
Set-up clearance Q460 (incremental): Distance for
retraction and pre-positioning Q460
Reverse contour Q499: Define the machining
direction of the contour:
0: Contour machined in the programmed direction
1: Contour machined in reverse direction to the
programmed direction Q482

Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed

(radius value) in radial direction. The infeed is divided
evenly to avoid abrasive cuts.
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during Ø Q483
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 305

13 Cycles: Turning
13.9 TURN CONTOUR LONGITUDINAL
(Cycle 810, DIN/ISO: G810)

Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter NC blocks

oversize for the defined contour 9 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the 10 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL2
defined contour in axial direction 11 CYCL DEF 810 TURN CONTOUR
LONG.
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Q499=+0 ;REVERSE CONTOUR
Plunging Q487: Permit machining of plunging Q463=+3 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
elements:
0: Do not machine plunging elements Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
1: Machine plunging elements Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
DIAMETER
Feed rate for plunging Q488: Feed rate for
machining of plunging elements Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
Cutting limit Q479: Activate cutting limit:
0: No cutting limit active Q487=+1 ;PLUNGE
1: Cutting limit (Q480/Q482) Q488=+0 ;PLUNGING FEED RATE
Limit value for diameter Q480: X value for contour Q479=+0 ;CUTTING LIMIT
limitation (diameter value) Q480=+0 ;LIMIT VALUE FOR
Limit value Z Q482: Z value for contour limitation DIAMETER
Q482=+0 ;LIMIT VALUE IN Z
Contour smoothing Q506:
0: After each cut along the contour (within the Q506=+0 ;CONTOUR SMOOTHING
infeed range) 12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
1: Contour smoothing after the last cut (complete
13 CYCL CALL
contour); retract below 45°
2: No contour smoothing; retract below 45° 14 M30
15 LBL 2
16 L X+60 Z+0
17 L Z-10
18 RND R5
19 L X+40 Z-35
20 RND R5
21 L X+50 Z-40
22 L Z-55
23 CC X+60 Z-55
24 C X+60 Z-60
25 L X+100
26 LBL 0

306 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN CONTOUR-PARALLEL 13.10
(Cycle 815, DIN/ISO: G815)

13.10 TURN CONTOUR-PARALLEL

(Cycle 815, DIN/ISO: G815)

Application
This cycle enables you to machine workpieces with any turning
contours. The contour description is in a subprogram.
You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning with roughing is contour-parallel.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining. If the
starting point of the contour is larger than the end point of the
contour, the cycle runs outside machining. If the contour starting
point is less than the end point, the cycle runs inside machining.

Roughing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a
cycle is called. If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than
the contour starting point, the TNC positions the tool in the Z
coordinate to set-up clearance and begins the cycle there.
1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse. The
infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX. CUTTING
DEPTH.
2 The TNC machines the area between the starting position and
end point. The cut is run contour-parallel with the defined feed
rate Q478.
3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate back to the
starting position in the X coordinate.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
5 The TNC repeats this process (1 to 4) until the final contour is
completed.
6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 307

13 Cycles: Turning
13.10 TURN CONTOUR-PARALLEL
(Cycle 815, DIN/ISO: G815)

Finishing cycle run

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to a safe position with

308 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN CONTOUR-PARALLEL 13.10
(Cycle 815, DIN/ISO: G815)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining
operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing Q460
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize
Set-up clearance Q460 (incremental): Distance for
retraction and pre-positioning Ø Q483
Oversize for blank Q485 (incremental): Contour-
parallel oversize for the defined contour
Cutting lines Q486: Define the type of cutting lines:
0: Cuts with constant chip cross section Q484
1: Equidistant proportioning of cuts
Reverse contour Q499: Define the machining
direction of the contour: Q463
0: Contour machined in the programmed direction
Q458
1: Contour machined in reverse direction to the
programmed direction
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed
(radius value) in radial direction. The infeed is divided
evenly to avoid abrasive cuts.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 309

13 Cycles: Turning
13.10 TURN CONTOUR-PARALLEL
(Cycle 815, DIN/ISO: G815)

Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during NC blocks

roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the 9 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
10 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL2
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
11 CYCL DEF 815 TURN CONTOUR-
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter PARALLEL
oversize for the defined contour Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
defined contour in axial direction
Q485=+5 ;OVERSIZE ON BLANK
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during Q486=+0 ;CUTTING LINES
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per Q499=+0 ;REVERSE CONTOUR
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute. Q463=+3 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
DIAMETER
Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
13 CYCL CALL
14 M30
15 LBL 2
16 L X+60 Z+0
17 L Z-10
18 RND R5
19 L X+40 Z-35
20 RND R5
21 L X+50 Z-40
22 L Z-55
23 CC X+60 Z-55
24 C X+60 Z-60
25 L X+100
26 LBL 0

310 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN SHOULDER FACE 13.11
(Cycle 821, DIN/ISO: G821)

13.11 TURN SHOULDER FACE

(Cycle 821, DIN/ISO: G821)

Application
This cycle enables you to face turn right-angled shoulders.
You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining. If the tool
is outside the contour to be machined when the cycle is called, the
cycle runs outside machining. If the tool is inside the contour to be
machined, the cycle runs inside machining.

Roughing cycle run

The cycle processes the area from the cycle starting point to the
end point defined in the cycle.
1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse. The
infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX. CUTTING
DEPTH.
2 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in traverse direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate by one infeed
value.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
5 The TNC repeats this process (1 to 4) until the final contour is
completed.
6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 311

13 Cycles: Turning
13.11 TURN SHOULDER FACE
(Cycle 821, DIN/ISO: G821)

Finishing cycle run

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to the starting position

with radius compensation R0 before the cycle call.
The tool position at cycle call (cycle starting point)
affects the area to be machined.
Also refer to the fundamentals of turning cycles (See
page 289).

312 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN SHOULDER FACE 13.11
(Cycle 821, DIN/ISO: G821)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining Q460
operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension Q463
3: Only finishing to oversize
Set-up clearance Q460 (incremental): Distance for
retraction and pre-positioning
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
the contour end point (diameter value) Ø Q493

Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour Q484

end point
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed in
axial direction. The infeed is divided evenly to avoid
abrasive cuts.
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the
Ø Q483
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
NC blocks
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter
11 CYCL DEF 821 TURN SHOULDER
oversize for the defined contour
FACE
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
defined contour in axial direction
Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during Q493=+30 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the CONTOUR
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
Q494=-5 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Q463=+3 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
Contour smoothing Q506:
0: After each cut along the contour (within the Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
infeed range) Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
1: Contour smoothing after the last cut (complete DIAMETER
contour); retract below 45° Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
2: No contour smoothing; retract below 45°
Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
Q506=+0 ;CONTOUR SMOOTHING
12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
13 CYCL CALL

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 313

13 Cycles: Turning
13.12 TURN SHOULDER FACE EXTENDED
(Cycle 822, DIN/ISO: G822)

13.12 TURN SHOULDER FACE EXTENDED

(Cycle 822, DIN/ISO: G822)

Application
This cycle enables you to face turn shoulders. Expanded scope of
function:
You can insert a chamfer or curve at the contour start and
contour end.

In the cycle you can define angles for the face and
circumferential surfaces

You can insert a radius in the contour edge

Roughing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle
is called. If the starting point is within the area to be machined,
the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate and then in the X
coordinate to set-up clearance and begins the cycle there.
1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse. The
infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX. CUTTING
DEPTH.
2 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in traverse direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate by one infeed
value.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
5 The TNC repeats this process (1 to 4) until the final contour is
completed.
6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

314 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN SHOULDER FACE EXTENDED 13.12
(Cycle 822, DIN/ISO: G822)

Finishing cycle run

1 The TNC runs the paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse.
2 The TNC finishes the finished part contour (contour starting
point to contour end point) at the defined feed rate Q505.
3 The TNC returns the tool to set-up clearance at the defined feed
rate.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to the starting position

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 315

13 Cycles: Turning
13.12 TURN SHOULDER FACE EXTENDED
(Cycle 822, DIN/ISO: G822)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining Q460
operation:
0: Roughing and finishing Q494
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize Ø Q491
Q463

Set-up clearance Q460 (incremental): Distance for

retraction and pre-positioning
Diameter at contour start Q491: X coordinate of
Ø Q493
the contour starting point (diameter value)
Contour start in Z Q492: Z coordinate of the Q484
contour starting point
Q492
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
the contour end point (diameter value)
Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour
end point
Angle of face Q495: Angle between the face and
the rotary axis Ø Q483

316 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN SHOULDER FACE EXTENDED 13.12
(Cycle 822, DIN/ISO: G822)

Type of starting element Q501: Define the type of NC blocks

element at the start of the contour (circumferential 11 CYCL DEF 822 TURN SHOULDER
surface): FACE EXTENDED
0: No additional element Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
1: Element is a chamfer
2: Element is a radius Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
Q491=+75 ;DIAMETER AT
Size of starting element Q502: Size of the starting
CONTOUR START
element (chamfer section)
Q492=+0 ;CONTOUR START IN Z
Radius of contour edge Q500: Radius of the inside
Q493=+30 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
contour edge. If no radius is specified, the radius of
CONTOUR
the cutting insert is generated.
Q494=-15 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Angle of circumferential surface Q496: Angle
Q495=+0 ;ANGLE OF FACE
between the circumferential surface and the rotary
axis Q501=+1 ;TYPE OF STARTING
ELEMENT
Type of end element Q503: Define the type of
element at the end of the contour (face): Q502=+0.5 ;SIZE OF STARTING
ELEMENT
0: No additional element
1: Element is a chamfer Q500=+1.5 ;RADIUS OF CONTOUR
2: Element is a radius EDGE
Q496=+5 ;ANGLE OF CIRCUM.
Size of end element Q504: Size of the end element
SURFACE
(chamfer section)
Q503=+1 ;TYPE OF END ELEMENT
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed in
axial direction. The infeed is divided evenly to avoid Q504=+0.5 ;SIZE OF END ELEMENT
abrasive cuts. Q463=+3 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH

Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per DIAMETER
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute. Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
oversize for the defined contour
Q506=+0 ;CONTOUR SMOOTHING
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the 12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
defined contour in axial direction
13 CYCL CALL
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Contour smoothing Q506:
0: After each cut along the contour (within the
infeed range)
1: Contour smoothing after the last cut (complete
contour); retract below 45°
2: No contour smoothing; retract below 45°

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 317

13 Cycles: Turning
13.13 TURN, TRANSVERSE PLUNGE
(Cycle 823, DIN/ISO: G823)

13.13 TURN, TRANSVERSE PLUNGE

(Cycle 823, DIN/ISO: G823)

Application
This cycle enables you to face turn plunge elements (undercuts).
You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining. If the start
diameter Q491 is larger than the end diameter Q493, the cycle
runs outside machining. If the start diameter Q491 is less than the
end diameter Q493, the cycle runs inside machining.

Roughing cycle run

In undercutting the TNC runs the infeed with feed rate Q478. The
return movements are then each at set-up clearance.
1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse. The
infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX. CUTTING
DEPTH.
2 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in traverse direction at the defined feed rate.
3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate Q478 by one
infeed value.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
5 The TNC repeats this process (1 to 4) until the final contour is
completed.
6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

318 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN, TRANSVERSE PLUNGE 13.13
(Cycle 823, DIN/ISO: G823)

Finishing cycle run

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to a safe position with

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 319

13 Cycles: Turning
13.13 TURN, TRANSVERSE PLUNGE
(Cycle 823, DIN/ISO: G823)

Diameter at contour start Q491: X coordinate of

the contour starting point (diameter value)
Contour start in Z Q492: Z coordinate of the Ø Q493
starting point for the plunging path
Q484
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
Q492
the contour end point (diameter value)
Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour
end point
Ø Q491
Angle of side Q495: Angle of the plunging side. The
reference angle is formed by the parallel line to the
rotary axis
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed in Ø Q483
axial direction. The infeed is divided evenly to avoid
abrasive cuts. NC blocks
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during 11 CYCL DEF 823 TURN, TRANSVERSE
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the PLUNGE
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter
Q491=+75 ;DIAMETER AT
oversize for the defined contour CONTOUR START
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the Q492=+0 ;CONTOUR START IN Z
defined contour in axial direction
Q493=+20 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during CONTOUR
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the Q494=-5 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
Q495=+60 ;ANGLE OF SIDE
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Q463=+3 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
Contour smoothing Q506:
0: After each cut along the contour (within the Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
infeed range) Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
1: Contour smoothing after the last cut (complete DIAMETER
contour); retract below 45° Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
2: No contour smoothing; retract below 45°
Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
Q506=+0 ;CONTOUR SMOOTHING
12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
13 CYCL CALL

320 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN, TRANSVERSE PLUNGE EXTENDED 13.14
(Cycle 824, DIN/ISO: G824)

13.14 TURN, TRANSVERSE PLUNGE

EXTENDED
(Cycle 824, DIN/ISO: G824)

Application
This cycle enables you to face turn plunge elements (undercuts).
Expanded scope of function:
You can insert a chamfer or curve at the contour start and
contour end.

In the cycle you can define an angle for the face and a radius for
the contour edge

Roughing cycle run

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 321

13 Cycles: Turning
13.14 TURN, TRANSVERSE PLUNGE EXTENDED
(Cycle 824, DIN/ISO: G824)

Finishing cycle run

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to a safe position with

322 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN, TRANSVERSE PLUNGE EXTENDED 13.14
(Cycle 824, DIN/ISO: G824)

Diameter at contour start Q491: X coordinate of

the starting point for the plunging path (diameter
value)
Ø Q493
Contour start in Z Q492: Z coordinate of the
Q484
starting point for the plunging path
Q492
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
the contour end point (diameter value)
Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour
end point Ø Q491

Angle of side Q495: Angle of the plunging side. The

reference angle is formed by the parallel line to the
rotary axis
Ø Q483

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 323

13 Cycles: Turning
13.14 TURN, TRANSVERSE PLUNGE EXTENDED
(Cycle 824, DIN/ISO: G824)

Type of starting element Q501: Define the type of NC blocks

element at the start of the contour (circumferential 11 CYCL DEF 824 TURN, TRANSVERSE
surface): PLUNGE EXT.
0: No additional element Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
1: Element is a chamfer
2: Element is a radius Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
Q491=+75 ;DIAMETER AT
Size of starting element Q502: Size of the starting
CONTOUR START
element (chamfer section)
Q492=+0 ;CONTOUR START IN Z
Radius of contour edge Q500: Radius of the inside
Q493=+20 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
contour edge. If no radius is specified, the radius of
CONTOUR
the cutting insert is generated.
Q494=-10 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Type of end element Q503: Define the type of
Q495=+70 ;ANGLE OF SIDE
element at the end of the contour (face):
0: No additional element Q501=+1 ;TYPE OF STARTING
1: Element is a chamfer ELEMENT
2: Element is a radius Q502=+0.5 ;SIZE OF STARTING
ELEMENT
Size of end element Q504: Size of the end element
(chamfer section) Q500=+1.5 ;RADIUS OF CONTOUR
EDGE
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed in
Q496=+0 ;ANGLE OF FACE
axial direction. The infeed is divided evenly to avoid
abrasive cuts. Q503=+1 ;TYPE OF END ELEMENT

Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during Q504=+0.5 ;SIZE OF END ELEMENT
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the Q463=+3 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter DIAMETER
oversize for the defined contour
Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
defined contour in axial direction
Q506=+0 ;CONTOUR SMOOTHING
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during
12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per 13 CYCL CALL
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Contour smoothing Q506:
0: After each cut along the contour (within the
infeed range)
1: Contour smoothing after the last cut (complete
contour); retract below 45°
2: No contour smoothing; retract below 45°

324 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN CONTOUR FACE 13.15
(Cycle 820, DIN/ISO: G820)

13.15 TURN CONTOUR FACE

(Cycle 820, DIN/ISO: G820)

Application
This cycle enables you to face turn workpieces with any turning
contours. The contour description is in a subprogram.
You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining. If the
starting point of the contour is larger than the end point of the
contour, the cycle runs outside machining. If the contour starting
point is less than the end point, the cycle runs inside machining.

Roughing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a
cycle is called. If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than
the contour starting point, the TNC positions the tool in the Z
coordinate to the contour starting point and begins the cycle there.
1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse. The
infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX. CUTTING
DEPTH.
2 The TNC machines the area between the starting position and
the end point in traverse direction. The transverse cut is run
paraxially with the defined feed rate Q478.
3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate by one infeed
value.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
5 The TNC repeats this process (1 to 4) until the final contour is
completed.
6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 325

13 Cycles: Turning
13.15 TURN CONTOUR FACE
(Cycle 820, DIN/ISO: G820)

Finishing cycle run

Please note while programming:

The cutting limit defines the contour range to be

Program a positioning block to a safe position with

326 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
TURN CONTOUR FACE 13.15
(Cycle 820, DIN/ISO: G820)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining Q460
operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize Q463
Set-up clearance Q460 (incremental): Distance for
retraction and pre-positioning
Reverse contour Q499: Define the machining
direction of the contour:
0: Contour machined in the programmed direction Q484
1: Contour machined in reverse direction to the
programmed direction
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed in
axial direction. The infeed is divided evenly to avoid
abrasive cuts.
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the Ø Q483
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 327

13 Cycles: Turning
13.15 TURN CONTOUR FACE
(Cycle 820, DIN/ISO: G820)

Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter NC blocks

Feed rate for plunging Q488: Feed rate for Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
machining of plunging elements Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
Cutting limit Q479: Activate cutting limit: Q487=+1 ;PLUNGE
0: No cutting limit active Q488=+0 ;PLUNGING FEED RATE
1: Cutting limit (Q480/Q482)
Q479=+0 ;CUTTING LIMIT
Limit value for diameter Q480: X value for contour
Q480=+0 ;LIMIT VALUE FOR
limitation (diameter value) DIAMETER
Limit value Z Q482: Z value for contour limitation Q482=+0 ;LIMIT VALUE IN Z
Contour smoothing Q506: Q506=+0 ;CONTOUR SMOOTHING
0: After each cut along the contour (within the 12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
infeed range)
13 CYCL CALL
1: Contour smoothing after the last cut (complete
contour); retract below 45° 14 M30
2: No contour smoothing; retract below 45° 15 LBL 2
16 L X+75 Z-20
17 L X+50
18 RND R2
19 L X+20 Z-25
20 RND R2
21 L Z+0
22 LBL 0

328 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
SIMPLE RADIAL RECESSING 13.16
(Cycle 841, DIN/ISO: G841)

13.16 SIMPLE RADIAL RECESSING

(Cycle 841, DIN/ISO: G841)

Application
This cycle enables you to recess right-angled slots in longitudinal
direction. With recess turning, a recessing traverse to plunging
depth and then a roughing traverse is alternatively machined. The
machining process thus requires a minimum of retraction and
infeed movements.
You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining. If the tool
is outside the contour to be machined when the cycle is called, the
cycle runs outside machining. If the tool is inside the contour to be
machined, the cycle runs inside machining.

Roughing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle
is called. The cycle processes only the area from the cycle starting
point to the end point defined in the cycle.
1 From the cycle starting point, the TNC recesses until the first
plunging depth.
2 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in longitudinal direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
3 If only one machining direction Q507=1 was specified in
the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool by the set-up clearance,
positions the tool back at rapid traverse and approaches the
contour again with the defined feed rate. With machining
direction Q507=0, infeed is on both sides.
4 The tool recesses to the next plunging depth.
5 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 4) until the slot depth is
reached.
6 The TNC returns the tool to set-up clearance and machines a
recessing traverse on both side walls.
7 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 329

13 Cycles: Turning
13.16 SIMPLE RADIAL RECESSING
(Cycle 841, DIN/ISO: G841)

Finishing cycle run

1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side.
2 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
3 The TNC finishes the slot floor at the defined feed rate.
4 The TNC returns the tool at rapid traverse.
5 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the second slot
side.
6 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
7 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to the starting position

with radius compensation R0 before the cycle call.
The tool position at cycle call defines the size of the
area to be machined (cycle starting point).
From the second infeed, the TNC reduces each
further cutting traverse by 0.1 mm. This reduces
lateral pressure on the tool. If the offset width Q508
was input into the cycle, the TNC reduces the cutting
traverse by this value. After clearance roughing, the
remaining material is removed with a single cut. The
TNC generates an error message if the lateral offset
exceeds 80 % of the effective cutting width (effective
cutting width = cutting width –2*cutting radius).

330 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
SIMPLE RADIAL RECESSING 13.16
(Cycle 841, DIN/ISO: G841)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining
operation: Q494 Q463
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize
Q460
Set-up clearance Q460: Reserved, currently
Ø Q493
without function
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
the contour end point (diameter value) Q484

Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour

end point
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the Ø Q483
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter NC blocks
oversize for the defined contour
11 CYCL DEF 841 RECESS TURNG.
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the SIMPLE R.
defined contour in axial direction Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the Q493=+50 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per CONTOUR
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Q494=-50 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed
Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
(radius value) in radial direction. The infeed is divided
evenly to avoid abrasive cuts. Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
DIAMETER
Machining direction Q507: Cutting direction:
Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
0: bidirectional (in both directions)
1: unidirectional (in contour direction) Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE

Offset width Q508: Reduction of cutting length. Q463=+2 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
After clearance roughing, the remaining material Q507=+0 ;MACHINING DIRECTION
is removed with a single cut. If required, the TNC Q508=+0 ;OFFSET WIDTH
limits the programmed offset width.
Q509=+0 ;DEPTH COMPENSATION
Turning depth compensation Q509: Depending
12 L X+75 Y+0 Z-25 FMAX M303
on factors such as workpiece material or feed rate,
the tool tip is displaced during a turning operation. 13 CYCL CALL
You can correct the resulting infeed error with the
turning depth compensation factor.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 331

13 Cycles: Turning
13.17 RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED
(Cycle 842, DIN/ISO: G842)

13.17 RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED

(Cycle 842, DIN/ISO: G842)

In the cycle you can define angles for the side walls of the slot

You can insert radii in the contour edges

Roughing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle
is called. If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than Q491
DIAMETER AT CONTOUR START, the TNC positions the tool in the X
coordinate to Q491 and begins the cycle there.
1 From the cycle starting point, the TNC recesses until the first
plunging depth.
2 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in longitudinal direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
3 If only one machining direction Q507=1 was specified in
the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool by the set-up clearance,
positions the tool back at rapid traverse and approaches the
contour again with the defined feed rate. With machining
direction Q507=0, infeed is on both sides.
4 The tool recesses to the next plunging depth.
5 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 4) until the slot depth is
reached.
6 The TNC returns the tool to set-up clearance and machines a
recessing traverse on both side walls.
7 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

332 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED 13.17
(Cycle 842, DIN/ISO: G842)

Finishing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle
is called. If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than Q491
DIAMETER AT CONTOUR START, the TNC positions the tool in the X
coordinate to Q491 and begins the cycle there.
1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side.
2 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
3 The TNC finishes the slot floor at the defined feed rate. If a
radius for contour edges Q500 was specified, the TNC finishes
the complete slot in one pass.
4 The TNC returns the tool at rapid traverse.
5 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the second slot
side.
6 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
7 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to the starting position

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 333

13 Cycles: Turning
13.17 RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED
(Cycle 842, DIN/ISO: G842)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining
operation: Q494 Q463
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension Ø Q491
3: Only finishing to oversize
Q460
Set-up clearance Q460: Reserved, currently
Ø Q493 Q492
without function
Diameter at contour start Q491: X coordinate of
the contour starting point (diameter value) Q484

Contour start in Z Q492: Z coordinate of the

contour starting point
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
the contour end point (diameter value) Ø Q483
Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour
end point

334 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED 13.17
(Cycle 842, DIN/ISO: G842)

Angle of side Q495: Angle between the side at the NC blocks

contour starting point and the perpendicular to the 11 CYCL DEF 842 RADIAL RECESSING
rotary axis EXTENDED
Type of starting element Q501: Define the type of Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
element at the start of the contour (circumferential Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
surface):
Q491=+75 ;DIAMETER AT
0: No additional element
CONTOUR START
1: Element is a chamfer
2: Element is a radius Q492=-20 ;CONTOUR START IN Z
Q493=+50 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
Size of starting element Q502: Size of the starting
CONTOUR
element (chamfer section)
Q494=-50 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Radius of contour edge Q500: Radius of the inside
Q495=+5 ;ANGLE OF SIDE
contour edge. If no radius is specified, the radius of
the cutting insert is generated. Q501=+1 ;TYPE OF STARTING
ELEMENT
Angle of second side Q496: Angle between the
side at the contour end point and the perpendicular Q502=+0.5 ;SIZE OF STARTING
ELEMENT
to the rotary axis
Q500=+1.5 ;RADIUS OF CONTOUR
Type of end element Q503: Define the type of EDGE
element at the end of the contour:
Q496=+5 ;ANGLE OF SECOND
0: No additional element
SIDE
1: Element is a chamfer
2: Element is a radius Q503=+1 ;TYPE OF END ELEMENT

Size of end element Q504: Size of the end element Q504=+0.5 ;SIZE OF END ELEMENT
(chamfer section) Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE

Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the DIAMETER
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute. Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter Q463=+2 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
oversize for the defined contour
Q507=+0 ;MACHINING DIRECTION
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the Q508=+0 ;OFFSET WIDTH
defined contour in axial direction
Q509=+0 ;DEPTH COMPENSATION
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during
12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per 13 CYCL CALL
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed
(radius value) in radial direction. The infeed is divided
evenly to avoid abrasive cuts.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 335

13 Cycles: Turning
13.17 RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED
(Cycle 842, DIN/ISO: G842)

Machining direction Q507: Cutting direction:

0: bidirectional (in both directions)
1: unidirectional (in contour direction)
Offset width Q508: Reduction of cutting length.
After clearance roughing, the remaining material
is removed with a single cut. If required, the TNC
limits the programmed offset width.
Turning depth compensation Q509: Depending
on factors such as workpiece material or feed rate,
the tool tip is displaced during a turning operation.
You can correct the resulting infeed error with the
turning depth compensation factor.

336 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL 13.18
(Cycle 840, DIN/ISO: G840)

13.18 RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL

(Cycle 840, DIN/ISO: G840)

Application
This cycle enables you to recess right-angled slots of any form in
longitudinal direction. With recess turning, a recessing traverse
to plunging depth and then a roughing traverse is alternatively
machined.
You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining. If the
starting point of the contour is larger than the end point of the
contour, the cycle runs outside machining. If the contour starting
point is less than the end point, the cycle runs inside machining.

Roughing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a
cycle is called. If the X coordinate of the starting point is less than
the contour starting point, the TNC positions the tool in the X
coordinate to the contour starting point and begins the cycle there.
1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse in the Z coordinate
(first cut-in position).
2 The TNC recesses until the first plunging depth.
3 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in longitudinal direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
4 If only one machining direction Q507=1 was specified in
the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool by the set-up clearance,
positions the tool back at rapid traverse and approaches the
contour again with the defined feed rate. With machining
direction Q507=0, infeed is on both sides. .
5 The tool recesses to the next plunging depth.
6 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 4) until the slot depth is
reached.
7 The TNC returns the tool to set-up clearance and machines a
recessing traverse on both side walls.
8 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 337

13 Cycles: Turning
13.18 RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL
(Cycle 840, DIN/ISO: G840)

Finishing cycle run

1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side.
2 The TNC finishes the side walls of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
3 The TNC finishes the slot floor at the defined feed rate.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Please note while programming:

The cutting limit defines the contour range to be

Program a positioning block to the starting position

with radius compensation R0 before the cycle call.
The tool position at cycle call defines the size of the
area to be machined (cycle starting point).
Before calling the cycle you must program the cycle
14 CONTOUR to define the subprogram number.
When you use local QL Q parameters in a contour
subprogram you must also assign or calculate these
in the contour subprogram.
From the second infeed, the TNC reduces each
further cutting traverse by 0.1 mm. This reduces
lateral pressure on the tool. If the offset width Q508
was input into the cycle, the TNC reduces the cutting
traverse by this value. After clearance roughing, the
remaining material is removed with a single cut. The
TNC generates an error message if the lateral offset
exceeds 80 % of the effective cutting width (effective
cutting width = cutting width –2*cutting radius).

338 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL 13.18
(Cycle 840, DIN/ISO: G840)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining
Q484
operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize
Q460
Set-up clearance Q460: Reserved, currently
without function
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute. Q463

Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter

oversize for the defined contour
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the Ø Q483
defined contour in axial direction

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 339

13 Cycles: Turning
13.18 RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL
(Cycle 840, DIN/ISO: G840)

Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during NC blocks

finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the 9 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
10 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL2
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
11 CYCL DEF 840 RECESS TURNG,
Cutting limit Q479: Activate cutting limit: RADIAL
0: No cutting limit active Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
1: Cutting limit (Q480/Q482)
Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
Limit value for diameter Q480: X value for contour
Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
limitation (diameter value)
Q488=+0 ;PLUNGING FEED RATE
Limit value Z Q482: Z value for contour limitation
Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed DIAMETER
(radius value) in radial direction. The infeed is divided Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
evenly to avoid abrasive cuts.
Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
Machining direction Q507: Cutting direction:
Q479=+0 ;CUTTING LIMIT
0: bidirectional (in both directions)
1: unidirectional (in contour direction) Q480=+0 ;LIMIT VALUE FOR
DIAMETER
Offset width Q508: Reduction of cutting length.
Q482=+0 ;LIMIT VALUE IN Z
After clearance roughing, the remaining material
is removed with a single cut. If required, the TNC Q463=+2 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
limits the programmed offset width. Q507=+0 ;MACHINING DIRECTION
Turning depth compensation Q509: Depending Q508=+0 ;OFFSET WIDTH
on factors such as workpiece material or feed rate, Q509=+0 ;DEPTH COMPENSATION
the tool tip is displaced during a turning operation.
You can correct the resulting infeed error with the 12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
turning depth compensation factor. 13 CYCL CALL
14 M30
15 LBL 2
16 L X+60 Z-10
17 L X+40 Z-15
18 RND R3
19 CR X+40 Z-35 R+30 DR+
18 RND R3
20 L X+60 Z-40
21 LBL 0

340 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
SIMPLE AXIAL RECESSING 13.19
(Cycle 851, DIN/ISO: G851)

13.19 SIMPLE AXIAL RECESSING

(Cycle 851, DIN/ISO: G851)

Application
This cycle enables you to recess right-angled slots in traverse
direction. With recess turning, a recessing traverse to plunging
depth and then a roughing traverse is alternatively machined. The
machining process thus requires a minimum of retraction and
infeed movements.
You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining. If the tool
is outside the contour to be machined when the cycle is called, the
cycle runs outside machining. If the tool is inside the contour to be
machined, the cycle runs inside machining.

Roughing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle
is called. The cycle processes the area from the cycle starting point
to the end point defined in the cycle.
1 From the cycle starting point, the TNC recesses until the first
plunging depth.
2 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in traverse direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
3 If only one machining direction Q507=1 was specified in
the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool by the set-up clearance,
positions the tool back at rapid traverse and approaches the
contour again with the defined feed rate. With machining
direction Q507=0, infeed is on both sides.
4 The tool recesses to the next plunging depth.
5 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 4) until the slot depth is
reached.
6 The TNC returns the tool to set-up clearance and machines a
recessing traverse on both side walls.
7 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 341

13 Cycles: Turning
13.19 SIMPLE AXIAL RECESSING
(Cycle 851, DIN/ISO: G851)

Finishing cycle run

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to the starting position

342 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
SIMPLE AXIAL RECESSING 13.19
(Cycle 851, DIN/ISO: G851)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining Q460
operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize
Set-up clearance Q460: Reserved, currently
without function
Q494 Ø Q493
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
the contour end point (diameter value) Q484

Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour

end point
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per Ø Q483
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter NC blocks
oversize for the defined contour 11 CYCL DEF 851 RECESS TURNG,
SIMPLE AXIAL
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the
defined contour in axial direction Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the Q493=+50 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per CONTOUR
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute. Q494=-10 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
(radius value) in radial direction. The infeed is divided Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
evenly to avoid abrasive cuts. DIAMETER
Machining direction Q507: Cutting direction: Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
0: bidirectional (in both directions) Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
1: unidirectional (in contour direction)
Q463=+2 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
Offset width Q508: Reduction of cutting length.
Q507=+0 ;MACHINING DIRECTION
After clearance roughing, the remaining material
is removed with a single cut. If required, the TNC Q508=+0 ;OFFSET WIDTH
limits the programmed offset width. Q509=+0 ;DEPTH COMPENSATION
Turning depth compensation Q509: Depending 12 L X+65 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
on factors such as workpiece material or feed rate, 13 CYCL CALL
the tool tip is displaced during a turning operation.
You can correct the resulting infeed error with the
turning depth compensation factor.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 343

13 Cycles: Turning
13.20 AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED
(Cycle 852, DIN/ISO: G852)

13.20 AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED

(Cycle 852, DIN/ISO: G852)

In the cycle you can define angles for the side walls of the slot

You can insert radii in the contour edges

Roughing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a
cycle is called. If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than
Q492 CONTOUR START IN Z, the TNC positions the tool in the Z
coordinate to Q492 and begins the cycle there.
1 From the cycle starting point, the TNC recesses until the first
plunging depth.
2 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in traverse direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
3 If only one machining direction Q507=1 was specified in
the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool by the set-up clearance,
positions the tool back at rapid traverse and approaches the
contour again with the defined feed rate. With machining
direction Q507=0, infeed is on both sides.
4 The tool recesses to the next plunging depth.
5 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 4) until the slot depth is
reached.
6 The TNC returns the tool to set-up clearance and machines a
recessing traverse on both side walls.
7 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

344 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED 13.20
(Cycle 852, DIN/ISO: G852)

Finishing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a
cycle is called. If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than
Q492 CONTOUR START IN Z, the TNC positions the tool in the Z
coordinate to Q492 and begins the cycle there.
1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side.
2 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
3 The TNC finishes the slot floor at the defined feed rate. If a
radius for contour edges Q500 was specified, the TNC finishes
the complete slot in one pass.
4 The TNC returns the tool at rapid traverse.
5 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the second slot
side.
6 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
7 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to the starting position

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 345

13 Cycles: Turning
13.20 AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED
(Cycle 852, DIN/ISO: G852)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining Q460
operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize
Set-up clearance Q460: Reserved, currently Ø Q483
without function
Q484
Diameter at contour start Q491: X coordinate of Q494 Q492
the contour starting point (diameter value)
Contour start in Z Q492: Z coordinate of the
contour starting point
Ø Q491 Q463
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
the contour end point (diameter value)
Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour
end point Ø Q493

346 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED 13.20
(Cycle 852, DIN/ISO: G852)

Angle of side Q495: Angle between the side at the NC blocks

contour starting point and the parallel line to the 11 CYCL DEF 852 RECESS TURNG.
rotary axis AXIAL EXTENDED
Type of starting element Q501: Define the type of Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
element at the start of the contour (circumferential Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
surface):
Q491=+75 ;DIAMETER AT
0: No additional element
CONTOUR START
1: Element is a chamfer
2: Element is a radius Q492=-20 ;CONTOUR START IN Z
Q493=+50 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
Size of starting element Q502: Size of the starting
CONTOUR
element (chamfer section)
Q494=-50 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Radius of contour edge Q500: Radius of the inside
Q495=+5 ;ANGLE OF SIDE
contour edge. If no radius is specified, the radius of
the cutting insert is generated. Q501=+1 ;TYPE OF STARTING
ELEMENT
Angle of second side Q496: Angle between the
side at the contour end point and the parallel line to Q502=+0.5 ;SIZE OF STARTING
ELEMENT
the rotary axis
Q500=+1.5 ;RADIUS OF CONTOUR
Type of end element Q503: Define the type of EDGE
element at the end of the contour:
Q496=+5 ;ANGLE OF SECOND
0: No additional element
SIDE
1: Element is a chamfer
2: Element is a radius Q503=+1 ;TYPE OF END ELEMENT

Size of end element Q504: Size of the end element Q504=+0.5 ;SIZE OF END ELEMENT
(chamfer section) Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 347

13 Cycles: Turning
13.20 AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED
(Cycle 852, DIN/ISO: G852)

Machining direction Q507: Cutting direction:

348 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
AXIAL RECESSING 13.21
(Cycle 850, DIN/ISO: G850)

13.21 AXIAL RECESSING

(Cycle 850, DIN/ISO: G850)

Roughing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a
cycle is called. If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than
the contour starting point, the TNC positions the tool in the Z
coordinate to the contour starting point and begins the cycle there.
1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse in the X coordinate
(first cut-in position).
2 The TNC recesses until the first plunging depth.
3 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in traverse direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
4 If only one machining direction Q507=1 was specified in
the cycle, the TNC retracts the tool by the set-up clearance,
positions the tool back at rapid traverse and approaches the
contour again with the defined feed rate. With machining
direction Q507=0, infeed is on both sides. .
5 The tool recesses to the next plunging depth.
6 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 4) until the slot depth is
reached.
7 The TNC returns the tool to set-up clearance and machines a
recessing traverse on both side walls.
8 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 349

13 Cycles: Turning
13.21 AXIAL RECESSING
(Cycle 850, DIN/ISO: G850)

Finishing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle
is called.
1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side.
2 The TNC finishes the side walls of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
3 The TNC finishes the slot floor at the defined feed rate.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to the starting position

350 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
AXIAL RECESSING 13.21
(Cycle 850, DIN/ISO: G850)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining Q460
operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize Q463

Set-up clearance Q460: Reserved, currently

without function
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the
Q484
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter
oversize for the defined contour
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the
defined contour in axial direction
Ø Q483

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 351

13 Cycles: Turning
13.21 AXIAL RECESSING
(Cycle 850, DIN/ISO: G850)

Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during NC blocks

finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the 9 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
10 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL2
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
11 CYCL DEF 850 RECESS TURNG,
Cutting limit Q479: Activate cutting limit: AXIAL
0: No cutting limit active Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
1: Cutting limit (Q480/Q482)
Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
Limit value for diameter Q480: X value for contour
Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
limitation (diameter value)
Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
Limit value Z Q482: Z value for contour limitation DIAMETER
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum infeed Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
(radius value) in radial direction. The infeed is divided Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
evenly to avoid abrasive cuts.
Q479=+0 ;CUTTING LIMIT
Machining direction Q507: Cutting direction:
Q480=+0 ;LIMIT VALUE FOR
0: bidirectional (in both directions) DIAMETER
1: unidirectional (in contour direction)
Q482=+0 ;LIMIT VALUE IN Z
Offset width Q508: Reduction of cutting length.
Q463=+2 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
After clearance roughing, the remaining material
is removed with a single cut. If required, the TNC Q507=+0 ;MACHINING DIRECTION
limits the programmed offset width. Q508=+0 ;OFFSET WIDTH
Turning depth compensation Q509: Depending Q509=+0 ;DEPTH COMPENSATION
on factors such as workpiece material or feed rate, 12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
the tool tip is displaced during a turning operation.
You can correct the resulting infeed error with the 13 CYCL CALL
turning depth compensation factor. 14 M30
15 LBL 2
16 L X+60 Z+0
17 L Z-10
18 RND R5
19 L X+40 Z-15
20 L Z+0
21 LBL 0

352 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
RADIAL RECESSING 13.22
(Cycle 861, DIN/ISO: G861)

13.22 RADIAL RECESSING

(Cycle 861, DIN/ISO: G861)

Application
This cycle enables you to radially cut in right-angled slots.
You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining. If the tool
is outside the contour to be machined when the cycle is called, the
cycle runs outside machining. If the tool is inside the contour to be
machined, the cycle runs inside machining.

Roughing cycle run

The cycle processes only the area from the cycle starting point to
the end point defined in the cycle.
1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse (lateral
infeed = 0.8 cutting width).
2 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in axial direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
3 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
4 The TNC repeats this process (1 to 3) until the slot width is
reached.
5 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 353

13 Cycles: Turning
13.22 RADIAL RECESSING
(Cycle 861, DIN/ISO: G861)

Finishing cycle run

1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side.
2 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
3 The TNC finishes half the slot width at the defined feed rate.
4 The TNC returns the tool at rapid traverse.
5 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the second slot
side.
6 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
7 The TNC finishes half the slot width at the defined feed rate.
8 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to the starting position

with radius compensation R0 before the cycle call.
The tool position at cycle call defines the size of the
area to be machined (cycle starting point).

354 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
RADIAL RECESSING 13.22
(Cycle 861, DIN/ISO: G861)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining
operation:
Q494
0: Roughing and finishing Q463
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension Ø Q460
3: Only finishing to oversize
Set-up clearance Q460: Reserved, currently
without function Ø Q493

Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of

the contour end point (diameter value)
Q484
Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour
end point
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per Ø Q483
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter
oversize for the defined contour NC blocks
Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the 11 CYCL DEF 861 RADIAL RECESSING
defined contour in axial direction Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION

Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the Q493=+50 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per CONTOUR
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Q494=-50 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Limit to depth Q463: Max. recess depth per cut Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
DIAMETER
Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
Q463=+0 ;LIMIT TO DEPTH
12 L X+75 Y+0 Z-25 FMAX M303
13 CYCL CALL

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 355

13 Cycles: Turning
13.23 RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED
(Cycle 862, DIN/ISO: G862)

13.23 RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED

(Cycle 862, DIN/ISO: G862)

Application
This cycle enables you to radially cut in slots. Expanded scope of
function:
You can insert a chamfer or curve at the contour start and
contour end.

In the cycle you can define angles for the side walls of the slot

You can insert radii in the contour edges

Roughing cycle run

1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse (lateral
infeed = 0.8 cutting width).
2 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in axial direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
3 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
4 The TNC repeats this process (1 to 3) until the slot width is
reached.
5 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

356 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED 13.23
(Cycle 862, DIN/ISO: G862)

Finishing cycle run

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to the starting position

with radius compensation R0 before the cycle call.
The tool position at cycle call defines the size of the
area to be machined (cycle starting point).

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 357

13 Cycles: Turning
13.23 RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED
(Cycle 862, DIN/ISO: G862)

Diameter at contour start Q491: X coordinate of Q492

the contour starting point (diameter value)
Contour start in Z Q492: Z coordinate of the Q484
contour starting point
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
the contour end point (diameter value)
Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour
Ø Q483
end point
Angle of side Q495: Angle between the side at the
contour starting point and the perpendicular to the
rotary axis

358 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED 13.23
(Cycle 862, DIN/ISO: G862)

Type of starting element Q501: Define the type of NC blocks

element at the start of the contour (circumferential 11 CYCL DEF 862 RADIAL RECESSING
surface): EXTENDED
0: No additional element Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
1: Element is a chamfer
2: Element is a radius Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
Q491=+75 ;DIAMETER AT
Size of starting element Q502: Size of the starting
CONTOUR START
element (chamfer section)
Q492=-20 ;CONTOUR START IN Z
Radius of contour edge Q500: Radius of the inside
Q493=+50 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
contour edge. If no radius is specified, the radius of
CONTOUR
the cutting insert is generated.
Q494=-50 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Angle of second side Q496: Angle between the
Q495=+5 ;ANGLE OF SIDE
side at the contour end point and the perpendicular
to the rotary axis Q501=+1 ;TYPE OF STARTING
ELEMENT
Type of end element Q503: Define the type of
element at the end of the contour: Q502=+0.5 ;SIZE OF STARTING
ELEMENT
0: No additional element
1: Element is a chamfer Q500=+1.5 ;RADIUS OF CONTOUR
2: Element is a radius EDGE
Q496=+5 ;ANGLE OF SECOND
Size of end element Q504: Size of the end element
SIDE
(chamfer section)
Q503=+1 ;TYPE OF END ELEMENT
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the Q504=+0.5 ;SIZE OF END ELEMENT
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute. Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter DIAMETER
oversize for the defined contour Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z

Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
defined contour in axial direction Q463=+0 ;LIMIT TO DEPTH
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during 12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the 13 CYCL CALL
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Limit to depth Q463: Max. recess depth per cut

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 359

13 Cycles: Turning
13.24 RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL
(Cycle 860, DIN/ISO: G860)

13.24 RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL

(Cycle 860, DIN/ISO: G860)

Application
This cycle enables you to radially cut in slots of any form.
You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining. If the
starting point of the contour is larger than the end point of the
contour, the cycle runs outside machining. If the contour starting
point is less than the end point, the cycle runs inside machining.

Roughing cycle run

1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse in the Z coordinate
(first cut-in position).
2 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse (lateral
infeed = 0.8 cutting width).
3 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in radial direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
5 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 4) until the slot form is
completed.
6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

360 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL 13.24
(Cycle 860, DIN/ISO: G860)

Finishing cycle run

1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side.
2 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
3 The TNC finishes one half of the slot at the defined feed rate.
4 The TNC returns the tool at rapid traverse.
5 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the second slot
side.
6 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
7 The TNC finishes the other half of the slot at the defined feed
rate.
8 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Please note while programming:

The cutting limit defines the contour range to be

Program a positioning block to the starting position

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 361

13 Cycles: Turning
13.24 RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL
(Cycle 860, DIN/ISO: G860)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining
operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
Q463
1: Only roughing
Ø Q460
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize
Set-up clearance Q460: Reserved, currently
without function
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during Q484
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter
oversize for the defined contour Ø Q483

Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the

defined contour in axial direction
NC blocks
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the 9 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per 10 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL2
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute. 11 CYCL DEF 860 RECESSING CONTOUR
Cutting limit Q479: Activate cutting limit: RADIAL
0: No cutting limit active Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
1: Cutting limit (Q480/Q482) Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
Limit value for diameter Q480: X value for contour Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
limitation (diameter value)
Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
Limit value Z Q482: Z value for contour limitation DIAMETER
Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
Limit to depth Q463: Max. recess depth per cut
Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
Q479=+0 ;CUTTING LIMIT
Q480=+0 ;LIMIT VALUE FOR
DIAMETER
Q482=+0 ;LIMIT VALUE IN Z
Q463=+0 ;LIMIT TO DEPTH
12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
13 CYCL CALL
14 M30
15 LBL 2
16 L X+60 Z-20
17 L X+45
18 RND R2
19 L X+40 Z-25
20 L Z+0
21 LBL 0

362 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
AXIAL RECESSING 13.25
(Cycle 871, DIN/ISO: G871)

13.25 AXIAL RECESSING

(Cycle 871, DIN/ISO: G871)

Application
This cycle enables you to axially cut in right-angled slots (face
recessing).
You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.

Roughing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle
is called. The cycle processes only the area from the cycle starting
point to the end point defined in the cycle.
1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse (lateral
infeed = 0.8 cutting width).
2 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in radial direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
3 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
4 The TNC repeats this process (1 to 3) until the slot width is
reached.
5 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Finishing cycle run

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 363

13 Cycles: Turning
13.25 AXIAL RECESSING
(Cycle 871, DIN/ISO: G871)

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to the starting position

with radius compensation R0 before the cycle call.
The tool position at cycle call defines the size of the
area to be machined (cycle starting point).

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining Q494 Q460
operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize Q463

Set-up clearance Q460: Reserved, currently

without function
Ø Q493
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
the contour end point (diameter value) Q484

Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour

Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION

defined contour in axial direction Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE

Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during Q493=+50 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the CONTOUR
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per Q494=-10 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute. Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
Limit to depth Q463: Max. recess depth per cut Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
DIAMETER
Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
Q463=+0 ;LIMIT TO DEPTH
12 L X+65 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
13 CYCL CALL

364 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED 13.26
(Cycle 872, DIN/ISO: G872)

13.26 AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED

(Cycle 872, DIN/ISO: G872)

Application
This cycle enables you to axially cut in slots (face recessing).
Expanded scope of function:
You can insert a chamfer or curve at the contour start and
contour end.

In the cycle you can define angles for the side walls of the slot

You can insert radii in the contour edges

You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.

Roughing cycle run

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 365

13 Cycles: Turning
13.26 AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED
(Cycle 872, DIN/ISO: G872)

Finishing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a
cycle is called. If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than
Q492 CONTOUR START IN Z, the TNC positions the tool in the Z
coordinate to Q492 and begins the cycle there.
1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side.
2 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
3 The TNC returns the tool at rapid traverse.
4 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the second slot
side.
5 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
6 The TNC finishes one half of the slot at the defined feed rate.
7 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first side.
8 The TNC finishes the other half of the slot at the defined feed
rate.
9 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to the starting position

with radius compensation R0 before the cycle call.
The tool position at cycle call defines the size of the
area to be machined (cycle starting point).

366 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED 13.26
(Cycle 872, DIN/ISO: G872)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining Q494 Q492
operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize Q463

Set-up clearance Q460: Reserved, currently

without function
Q460 Ø Q493
Diameter at contour start Q491: X coordinate of
the contour starting point (diameter value) Q484

Contour start in Z Q492: Z coordinate of the

contour starting point
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
the contour end point (diameter value)
Ø Q483
Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the contour
end point
NC blocks
Angle of side Q495: Angle between the side at the 11 CYCL DEF 871 AXIAL RECESSING
contour starting point and the parallel line to the EXTENDED
rotary axis
Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
Type of starting element Q501: Define the type of Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
element at the start of the contour (circumferential
surface): Q491=+75 ;DIAMETER AT
CONTOUR START
0: No additional element
1: Element is a chamfer Q492=-20 ;CONTOUR START IN Z
2: Element is a radius Q493=+50 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
Size of starting element Q502: Size of the starting CONTOUR
element (chamfer section) Q494=-50 ;CONTOUR END IN Z

Radius of contour edge Q500: Radius of the inside Q495=+5 ;ANGLE OF SIDE
contour edge. If no radius is specified, the radius of Q501=+1 ;TYPE OF STARTING
the cutting insert is generated. ELEMENT

Angle of second side Q496: Angle between the Q502=+0.5 ;SIZE OF STARTING
side at the contour end point and the parallel line to ELEMENT
the rotary axis Q500=+1.5 ;RADIUS OF CONTOUR
EDGE
Type of end element Q503: Define the type of
element at the end of the contour: Q496=+5 ;ANGLE OF SECOND
0: No additional element SIDE
1: Element is a chamfer Q503=+1 ;TYPE OF END ELEMENT
2: Element is a radius Q504=+0.5 ;SIZE OF END ELEMENT
Size of end element Q504: Size of the end element Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
(chamfer section)
Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during DIAMETER
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Q463=+0 ;LIMIT TO DEPTH
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter
oversize for the defined contour 12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
13 CYCL CALL

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 367

13 Cycles: Turning
13.26 AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED
(Cycle 872, DIN/ISO: G872)

Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the

defined contour in axial direction
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Limit to depth Q463: Max. recess depth per cut

368 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
AXIAL RECESSING 13.27
(Cycle 870, DIN/ISO: G870)

13.27 AXIAL RECESSING

(Cycle 870, DIN/ISO: G870)

Application
This cycle enables you to axially cut in slots of any form (face
recessing).
You can use the cycle either for roughing, finishing or complete
machining. Turning is run paraxially with roughing.

Roughing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a
cycle is called. If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than
the contour starting point, the TNC positions the tool in the Z
coordinate to the contour starting point and begins the cycle there.
1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse in the X coordinate
(first cut-in position).
2 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse (lateral
infeed = 0.8 cutting width).
3 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the
end point in axial direction at the defined feed rate Q478.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
5 The TNC repeats this process (2 to 4) until the slot form is
completed.
6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 369

13 Cycles: Turning
13.27 AXIAL RECESSING
(Cycle 870, DIN/ISO: G870)

Finishing cycle run

The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle
is called.
1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side.
2 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
3 The TNC finishes one half of the slot at the defined feed rate.
4 The TNC returns the tool at rapid traverse.
5 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the second slot
side.
6 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed
rate Q505.
7 The TNC finishes the other half of the slot at the defined feed
rate.
8 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

Please note while programming:

The cutting limit defines the contour range to be

Program a positioning block to the starting position

370 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
AXIAL RECESSING 13.27
(Cycle 870, DIN/ISO: G870)

Cycle parameters
Machining operation Q215: Define machining Q460
operation:
0: Roughing and finishing
1: Only roughing
2: Only finishing to finished dimension
3: Only finishing to oversize
Set-up clearance Q460: Reserved, currently
without function
Ø Q483
Roughing feed rate Q478: Feed rate during
roughing. If M136 has been programmed, the
Q484
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute.
Oversize in diameter Q483 (incremental): Diameter
oversize for the defined contour Q463

Oversize in Z Q484 (incremental): Oversize for the

defined contour in axial direction
Finishing feed rate Q505: Feed rate during
finishing. If M136 has been programmed, the NC blocks
value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per
revolution, without M136 in millimeters per minute. 9 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR
10 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL2
Cutting limit Q479: Activate cutting limit:
0: No cutting limit active 11 CYCL DEF 870 AXIAL RECESSING
1: Cutting limit (Q480/Q482) Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION

Limit value for diameter Q480: X value for contour Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
limitation (diameter value) Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
Limit value Z Q482: Z value for contour limitation Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR
DIAMETER
Limit to depth Q463: Max. recess depth per cut
Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
Q479=+0 ;CUTTING LIMIT
Q480=+0 ;LIMIT VALUE FOR
DIAMETER
Q482=+0 ;LIMIT VALUE IN Z
Q463=+0 ;LIMIT TO DEPTH
12 L X+75 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
13 CYCL CALL
14 M30
15 LBL 2
16 L X+60 Z+0
17 L Z-10
18 RND R5
19 L X+40 Z-15
20 L Z+0
21 LBL 0

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 371

13 Cycles: Turning
13.28 THREAD LONGITUDINAL
(Cycle 831, DIN/ISO: G831)

13.28 THREAD LONGITUDINAL

(Cycle 831, DIN/ISO: G831)

Application
This cycle enables you to run longitudinal turning of threads.
You can process single threads or multi-threads with the cycle.
If you do not enter a thread depth, the cycle uses thread depth in
accordance with the ISO1502 standard.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining.

Cycle run
The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle
is called.
1 The TNC positions the tool in rapid traverse at set-up clearance
in front of the thread and runs an infeed motion.
2 The TNC runs a paraxial longitudinal cut. Here the TNC
synchronizes feed rate and speed so that the defined pitch is
machined.
3 The TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse by the set-up
clearance.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
5 The TNC runs an infeed motion. The infeeds are run according
to the angle of infeed Q467.
6 The TNC repeats the process (2 to 5) until the thread depth is
completed.
7 The TNC runs the number of air cuts as defined in Q476.
8 The TNC repeats the process (2 to 7) according to the number
of traverses Q475.
9 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

372 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
THREAD LONGITUDINAL 13.28
(Cycle 831, DIN/ISO: G831)

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to the starting position

with radius compensation R0 before the cycle call.
The TNC uses the set-up clearance Q460 as
approach path. The approach path must be long
enough for the feed axes to be accelerated to the
required velocity.
The TNC uses the thread pitch as overrun path. The
overrun path must be long enough to decelerate the
feed axes.
Parameters are available for approach and overrun in
Cycle 832 THREAD EXTENDED.
When the TNC runs a thread cut, the feed-rate
override knob is disabled. The spindle speed override
knob is active only within a limited range, which is
defined by the machine tool builder (refer to your
machine manual).

With some machine types the turning tool is not

clamped in the milling spindle but in a separate
holder adjacent to the spindle. The turning tool
cannot be rotated through 180° in such cases to
machine internal and external threads with only one
tool for example. If with such a machine you wish
to use an external tool for inside machining, you can
execute machining in the negative diameter range
(-X) and reverse the direction of workpiece rotation.
Note that with pre-positioning in the negative
diameter range, the TNC reverses the effect of the
parameter G471 Thread position (external thread is
then 1 and internal thread 0).
The retraction motion is directly to the starting
position. Always position the tool so that the TNC
can approach the starting point at the end of the
cycle without collisions.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 373

13 Cycles: Turning
13.28 THREAD LONGITUDINAL
(Cycle 831, DIN/ISO: G831)

Cycle parameters
Thread position Q471: Define the position of the
thread:
Q494 Q492
0: External thread
1: Internal thread Q472

Set-up clearance Q460: Set-up clearance in radial Q460

and axial direction. In axial direction, the set-up
Q473
clearance is used for acceleration (approach path) to
the synchronized feed rate.
=0 ISO 1502
Thread diameter Q491: Define the nominal
diameter of the thread.
Thread pitch Q472: Pitch of the thread.
Q467
Depth of thread Q473 (incremental): Depth of the
thread. If you enter 0, the depth is assumed for a
metric thread based on the pitch.
Contour start in Z Q492: Z coordinate of the Ø Q491 Q463
starting point
Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the end
point including the runout of the thread Q474. NC blocks
Runout of thread Q474 (incremental): Length of the 11 CYCL DEF 831 LONGITUDINAL
THREAD
path on which, at the end of the thread, the tool is
lifted from the current plunging depth to the thread Q471=+0 ;THREAD POSITION
diameter Q460. Q460=+5 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum plunging Q491=+75 ;THREAD DIAMETER
depth in radial direction relative to the radius.
Q472=+2 ;THREAD PITCH
Angle of infeed Q467: Angle for the infeed Q463. Q473=+0 ;THREAD DEPTH
The reference angle is formed by the perpendicular
Q492=+0 ;CONTOUR START IN Z
to the rotary axis.
Q494=-15 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Type of infeed Q468: Define the type of infeed:
0: Constant chip cross section (infeed lessens with Q474=+0 ;RUNOUT OF THREAD
depth) Q463=+0.5 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
1: Constant plunging depth
Q467=+30 ;ANGLE OF INFEED
Starting angle Q470: Angle of the turning spindle at Q468=+0 ;TYPE OF INFEED
which the thread start is to be made.
Q470=+0 ;START ANGLE
Number of starts Q475: Number of thread starts Q475=+30 ;NUMBER OF STARTS
Number of air cuts Q476: Number of air cuts Q476=+30 ;NO. OF AIR CUTS
without infeed at finished thread depth
12 L X+80 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
13 CYCL CALL

374 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
THREAD EXTENDED (Cycle 832, DIN/ISO: G832) 13.29

13.29 THREAD EXTENDED (Cycle 832, DIN/

ISO: G832)

Application
This cycle enables you to run both face turning and longitudinal
turning of threads or tapered threads. Expanded scope of function:
Selection of longitudinal thread or face thread.

The parameters for dimension type of taper, taper angle and

contour starting point X enable the definition of various tapered
threads.

The parameters for approach path and overrun path define a

path in which feed axes can be accelerated or decelerated.

You can process single threads or multi-threads with the cycle.

If you do not enter a thread depth in the cycle, the cycle uses a
standardized thread depth.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining.

Cycle run
The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle
is called.
1 The TNC positions the tool in rapid traverse at set-up clearance
in front of the thread and runs an infeed motion.
2 The TNC runs a longitudinal cut. Here the TNC synchronizes
feed rate and speed so that the defined pitch is machined.
3 The TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse by the set-up
clearance.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
5 The TNC runs an infeed motion. The infeeds are run according
to the angle of infeed Q467.
6 The TNC repeats the process (2 to 5) until the thread depth is
completed.
7 The TNC runs the number of air cuts as defined in Q476.
8 The TNC repeats the process (2 to 7) according to the number
of traverses Q475.
9 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 375

13 Cycles: Turning
13.29 THREAD EXTENDED (Cycle 832, DIN/ISO: G832)

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to a safe position with

radius compensation R0 before the cycle call.
The approach path (Q465) must be long enough
for the feed axes to be accelerated to the required
velocity.
The overrun path (Q466) must be long enough to
decelerate the feed axes.
When the TNC runs a thread cut, the feed-rate
override knob is disabled. The spindle speed override
knob is active only within a limited range, which is
defined by the machine tool builder (refer to your
machine manual).

With some machine types the turning tool is not

376 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
THREAD EXTENDED (Cycle 832, DIN/ISO: G832) 13.29

Cycle parameters
Thread position Q471: Define the position of the
thread:
0: External thread
1: Internal thread Q472

Thread orientationQ461: Define the direction of Q460

the thread pitch:
Q473
0: Longitudinal (parallel to the rotary axis)
1: Lateral (perpendicular to the rotary axis)
=0 ISO 1502
Set-up clearance Q460: Set-up clearance
perpendicular to thread pitch. NC blocks
Thread pitch Q472: Pitch of the thread. 11 CYCL DEF 832 THREAD EXTENDED
Q471=+0 ;THREAD POSITION
Depth of thread Q473 (incremental): Depth of the
thread. If you enter 0, the depth is assumed for a Q461=+0 ;THREAD ORIENTATION
metric thread based on the pitch. Q460=+2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Dimension type of taper Q464: Define the type of Q472=+2 ;THREAD PITCH
dimension for the taper contour:
Q473=+0 ;THREAD DEPTH
0: Via starting point and end point
1: Via end point, start-X and taper angle Q464=+0 ;DIMENSION TYPE FOR
2: Via end point, start-Z and taper angle TAPER
3: Via starting point, end-X and taper angle Q491=+100 ;DIAMETER AT
4: Via starting point, end-Z and taper angle CONTOUR START

Diameter at contour start Q491: X coordinate of Q492=+0 ;CONTOUR START IN Z

the contour starting point (diameter value) Q493=+110 ;DIAMETER AT END OF
CONTOUR
Contour start in Z Q492: Z coordinate of the
starting point Q494=-35 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Q469=+0 ;TAPER ANGLE
Diameter at end of contour Q493: X coordinate of
the end point (diameter value) Q474=+0 ;RUNOUT OF THREAD

Contour end in Z Q494: Z coordinate of the end Q465=+4 ;APPROACH PATH

point Q466=+4 ;OVERRUN PATH
Taper angle Q469: Taper angle of contour Q463=+0.5 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH

Runout of thread Q474 (incremental): Length of the Q467=+30 ;ANGLE OF INFEED

path on which, at the end of the thread, the tool is Q468=+0 ;TYPE OF INFEED
lifted from the current plunging depth to the thread Q470=+0 ;START ANGLE
diameter Q460.
Q475=+30 ;NUMBER OF STARTS
Approach path Q465 (incremental): Length of the
Q476=+30 ;NO. OF AIR CUTS
path in pitch direction on which the feed axes are
accelerated to the required velocity. The approach 12 L X+80 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
path is outside of the defined thread contour. 13 CYCL CALL
Overrun path Q466: Length of the path in pitch
direction on which the feed axes are decelerated.
The overrun path is within the defined thread
contour.
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum plunging
depth perpendicular to the thread pitch
Angle of infeed Q467: Angle for the infeed Q463.
The reference angle is formed by the parallel line to
the thread pitch.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 377

13 Cycles: Turning
13.29 THREAD EXTENDED (Cycle 832, DIN/ISO: G832)

Type of infeed Q468: Define the type of infeed:

0: Constant chip cross section (infeed lessens with
depth)
1: Constant plunging depth
Starting angle Q470: Angle of the turning spindle at
which the thread start is to be made.
Number of starts Q475: Number of thread starts
Number of air cuts Q476: Number of air cuts
without infeed at finished thread depth

378 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
CONTOUR-PARALLEL THREAD 13.30
(Cycle 830, DIN/ISO: G830)

13.30 CONTOUR-PARALLEL THREAD

(Cycle 830, DIN/ISO: G830)

Application
This cycle enables you to run both face turning and longitudinal
turning of threads with any form.
You can process single threads or multi-threads with the cycle.
If you do not enter a thread depth in the cycle, the cycle uses a
standardized thread depth.
The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining.

The cycle 830 runs the overrun Q466 following the

programmed contour. Note the spatial conditions.

Cycle run
The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle
is called.
1 The TNC positions the tool in rapid traverse at set-up clearance
in front of the thread and runs an infeed motion.
2 The TNC runs a thread cut parallel to the defined thread contour.
Here the TNC synchronizes feed rate and speed so that the
defined pitch is machined.
3 The TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse by the set-up
clearance.
4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the
beginning of cut.
5 The TNC runs an infeed motion. The infeeds are run according
to the angle of infeed Q467.
6 The TNC repeats the process (2 to 5) until the thread depth is
completed.
7 The TNC runs the number of air cuts as defined in Q476.
8 The TNC repeats the process (2 to 7) according to the number
of traverses Q475.
9 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle
starting point.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 379

13 Cycles: Turning
13.30 CONTOUR-PARALLEL THREAD
(Cycle 830, DIN/ISO: G830)

Please note while programming:

Program a positioning block to the starting position

with radius compensation R0 before the cycle call.
The approach path (Q465) must be long enough
for the feed axes to be accelerated to the required
velocity.
The overrun path (Q466) must be long enough to
decelerate the feed axes.
Both the approach and overrun take place outside the
defined contour.
When the TNC runs a thread cut, the feed-rate
override knob is disabled. The spindle speed override
knob is active only within a limited range, which is
defined by the machine tool builder (refer to your
machine manual).
Before calling the cycle you must program the cycle
14 CONTOUR to define the subprogram number.
When you use local QL Q parameters in a contour
subprogram you must also assign or calculate these
in the contour subprogram.

With some machine types the turning tool is not

380 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
CONTOUR-PARALLEL THREAD 13.30
(Cycle 830, DIN/ISO: G830)

Cycle parameters
Thread position Q471: Define the position of the
thread:
0: External thread
1: Internal thread
Q472
Thread orientationQ461: Define the direction of
the thread pitch: Q460
0: Longitudinal (parallel to the rotary axis) Q473
1: Lateral (perpendicular to the rotary axis)
Set-up clearance Q460: Set-up clearance
perpendicular to thread pitch.
Thread pitch Q472: Pitch of the thread.
Q474 Q465
Depth of thread Q473 (incremental): Depth of the
thread. If you enter 0, the depth is assumed for a
metric thread based on the pitch.
Runout of thread Q474 (incremental): Length of the
path on which, at the end of the thread, the tool is
lifted from the current plunging depth to the thread
diameter Q460.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 381

13 Cycles: Turning
13.30 CONTOUR-PARALLEL THREAD
(Cycle 830, DIN/ISO: G830)

Approach path Q465 (incremental): Length of the NC blocks

path in pitch direction on which the feed axes are 9 CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR
accelerated to the required velocity. The approach
10 CYCL DEF 14.1 CONTOUR LABEL2
path is outside of the defined thread contour.
11 CYCL DEF 830 CONTOUR-PARALLEL
Overrun path Q466: Length of the path in pitch THREAD
direction on which the feed axes are decelerated. Q471=+0 ;THREAD POSITION
The overrun path is within the defined thread
contour. Q461=+0 ;THREAD ORIENTATION
Q460=+2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Maximum cutting depth Q463: Maximum plunging
depth perpendicular to the thread pitch Q472=+2 ;THREAD PITCH

Angle of infeed Q467: Angle for the infeed Q463. Q473=+0 ;THREAD DEPTH
The reference angle is formed by the parallel line to Q474=+0 ;RUNOUT OF THREAD
the thread pitch. Q465=+4 ;APPROACH PATH
Type of infeed Q468: Define the type of infeed: Q466=+4 ;OVERRUN PATH
0: Constant chip cross section (infeed lessens with
Q463=+0.5 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
depth)
1: Constant plunging depth Q467=+30 ;ANGLE OF INFEED

Starting angle Q470: Angle of the turning spindle at Q468=+0 ;TYPE OF INFEED
which the thread start is to be made. Q470=+0 ;START ANGLE

Number of starts Q475: Number of thread starts Q475=+30 ;NUMBER OF STARTS

Q476=+30 ;NO. OF AIR CUTS
Number of air cuts Q476: Number of air cuts
without infeed at finished thread depth 12 L X+80 Y+0 Z+2 FMAX M303
13 CYCL CALL
14 M30
15 LBL 2
16 L X+60 Z+0
17 L X+70 Z-30
18 RND R60
19 L Z-45
20 LBL 0

382 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

13
Example program 13.31

13.31 Example program

Example: Shoulder with recess

0 BEGIN PGM SHOULDER MM

1 BLK FORM 0.1 Y X+0 Y-10 Z-35 Definition of workpiece blank
2 BLK FORM 0.2 X+87 Y+10 Z+2
3 TOOL CALL 12 Tool call
4 M140 MB MAX Retract the tool
5 FUNCTION MODE TURN Activate Turning mode
6 FUNCTION TURNDATA SPIN VCONST:ON VC:150 Constant surface speed
7 CYCL DEF 800 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM Cycle definition adapt rotary coordinate system
Q497=+0 ;PRECISION ANGLE
Q498=+0 ;REVERSE TOOL
8 M136 Feed rate in mm per revolution
9 L X+165 Y+0 R0 FMAX Move to starting point in the plane
10 L Z+2 R0 FMAX M304 Set-up clearance, turning spindle on
11 CYCL DEF 812 SHOULDER LONG. EXTENDED. Cycle definition shoulder longitudinal
Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
Q491=+160 ;DIAMETER AT CONTOUR START
Q492=+0 ;CONTOUR START IN Z
Q493=+150 ;DIAMETER AT END OF CONTOUR
Q494=-40 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Q495=+0 ;ANGLE OF CIRCUM. SURFACE
Q501=+1 ;TYPE OF STARTING ELEMENT
Q502=+2 ;SIZE OF STARTING ELEMENT
Q500=+1 ;RADIUS OF CONTOUR EDGE
Q496=+0 ;ANGLE OF FACE
Q503=+1 ;TYPE OF END ELEMENT
Q504=+2 ;SIZE OF END ELEMENT
Q463=+2.5 ;MAX. CUTTING DEPTH
Q478=+0.25 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR DIAMETER

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 383

13 Cycles: Turning
13.31 Example program

Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
Q505=+0.2 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
Q506=+0 ;CONTOUR SMOOTHING
12 CYCL CALL M8 Cycle call
13 M305 Turning spindle off
14 TOOL CALL 15 Tool call
15 M140 MB MAX Retract the tool
16 FUNCTION TURNDATA SPIN VCONST:ON VC:100 Constant cutting speed
17 CYCL DEF 800 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM Cycle definition adapt rotary coordinate system
Q497=+0 ;PRECISION ANGLE
Q498=+0 ;REVERSE TOOL
18 L X+165 Y+0 R0 FMAX Move to starting point in the plane
19 L Z+2 R0 FMAX M304 Set-up clearance, turning spindle on
20 CYCL DEF 862 RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle definition recess
Q215=+0 ;MACHINING OPERATION
Q460=+2 ;SAFETY CLEARANCE
Q491=+150 ;DIAMETER AT CONTOUR START
Q492=-12 ;CONTOUR START IN Z
Q493=+142 ;DIAMETER AT END OF CONTOUR
Q494=-18 ;CONTOUR END IN Z
Q495=+0 ;ANGLE OF SIDE
Q501=+1 ;TYPE OF STARTING ELEMENT
Q502=+1 ;SIZE OF STARTING ELEMENT
Q500=+0 ;RADIUS OF CONTOUR EDGE
Q496=+0 ;ANGLE OF SECOND SIDE
Q503=+1 ;TYPE OF END ELEMENT
Q504=+1 ;SIZE OF END ELEMENT
Q478=+0.3 ;ROUGHING FEED RATE
Q483=+0.4 ;OVERSIZE FOR DIAMETER
Q484=+0.2 ;OVERSIZE IN Z
Q505=+0.15 ;FINISHING FEED RATE
Q463=+0 ;LIMIT TO DEPTH
21 CYCL CALL M8 Cycle call
22 M305 Turning spindle off
23 M137 Feed rate in mm per minute
24 M140 MB MAX Retract the tool
25 FUNCTION MODE MILL Activate Milling mode
26 M30 End of program
27 END PGM SHOULDER MM

384 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

14
Using Touch Probe
Cycles
14 Using Touch Probe Cycles
14.1 General information about touch probe cycles

14.1 General information about touch probe

cycles
HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of
the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are
used.

The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine

tool builder for the use of a 3-D touch probe.
Refer to your machine manual.

Method of function
Whenever the TNC runs a touch probe cycle, the 3-D touch probe
approaches the workpiece in one linear axis. This is also true
during an active basic rotation or with a tilted working plane. The
machine tool builder determines the probing feed rate in a machine
parameter (see "Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles"
later in this chapter).
When the probe stylus contacts the workpiece,
the 3-D touch probe transmits a signal to the TNC: the
coordinates of the probed position are stored,
the touch probe stops moving, and
returns to its starting position at rapid traverse.

If the stylus is not deflected within a defined distance, the TNC

displays an error message (distance: DIST from touch probe table).

Consideration of a basic rotation in the Manual

Operation mode
During probing the TNC considers an active basic rotation and
approaches the workpiece at an angle.

Cycles in the Manual and El. Handwheel modes

In the Manual Operation and El. Handwheel modes, the TNC
provides touch probe cycles that allow you to:
Calibrate the touch probe
Compensating workpiece misalignment
Setting datums

386 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

14
General information about touch probe cycles 14.1

Touch probe cycles for automatic operation

Besides the touch probe cycles, which you can use in the Manual and
El. Handwheel modes, the TNC provides numerous cycles for a wide
variety of applications in automatic mode:
Calibrating a touch trigger probe
Compensating workpiece misalignment
Datum setting
Automatic workpiece inspection
Automatic tool measurement

You can program the touch probe cycles in the Programming and
Editing operating mode via the TOUCH PROBE key. Like the most
recent fixed cycles, touch probe cycles with numbers greater than
400 use Q parameters as transfer parameters. Parameters with
specific functions that are required in several cycles always have the
same number: For example, Q260 is always assigned the clearance
height, Q261 the measuring height, etc.
To simplify programming, the TNC shows a graphic during cycle
definition. The graphic shows the parameter that needs to be entered
(see figure at right).

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 387

14 Using Touch Probe Cycles
14.1 General information about touch probe cycles

Defining the touch probe cycle in the Programming and Editing

mode of operation
The soft-key row shows all available touch probe NC blocks
functions divided into groups. 5 TCH PROBE 410 DATUM INSIDE
Select the desired probe cycle group, for RECTAN.
example datum setting. Cycles for automatic tool Q321=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
measurement are available only if your machine has
Q322=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
been prepared for them.
Q323=60 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH
Select a cycle, e.g. datum setting at pocket center.
The TNC initiates the programming dialog and asks Q324=20 ;2ND SIDE LENGTH
for all required input values. At the same time a Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
graphic of the input parameters is displayed in the
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
right screen window. The parameter that is asked
for in the dialog prompt is highlighted. Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT

Enter all parameters requested by the TNC and Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
conclude each entry with the ENT key. Q305=10 ;NO. IN TABLE
The TNC ends the dialog when all required data has Q331=+0 ;DATUM
been entered Q332=+0 ;DATUM

Group of measuring cycles Soft key Page Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE

TRANSFER
Cycles for automatic measurement 396
Q381=1 ;PROBE IN TS AXIS
and compensation of workpiece
misalignment Q382=+85 ;1ST CO. FOR TS AXIS
Cycles for automatic workpiece 416 Q383=+50 ;2ND CO. FOR TS AXIS
presetting Q384=+0 ;3RD CO. FOR TS AXIS
Cycles for automatic workpiece 468 Q333=+0 ;DATUM
inspection
Special cycles 512

Cycles for automatic tool 558

measurement (enabled by the
machine tool builder)

388 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

14
Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles 14.2

14.2 Before You Start Working with Touch

Probe Cycles
To make it possible to cover the widest possible range of
applications, machine parameters enable you to determine the
behavior common to all touch probe cycles.

Maximum traverse to touch point: DIST in touch probe

table
If the stylus is not deflected within the path defined in DIST, the
TNC outputs an error message.

Set-up clearance to touch point: SET_UP in touch

probe table
In SET_UP you define how far from the defined (or calculated)
touch point the TNC is to pre-position the touch probe. The smaller
the value you enter, the more exactly you must define the touch
point position. In many touch probe cycles you can also define a
set-up clearance that is added to SET_UP.

Orient the infrared touch probe to the programmed

probe direction: TRACK in touch probe table
To increase measuring accuracy, you can use TRACK = ON to
have an infrared touch probe oriented in the programmed probe
direction before every probe process. In this way the stylus is
always deflected in the same direction.

If you change TRACK = ON, you must recalibrate the

touch probe.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 389

14 Using Touch Probe Cycles
14.2 Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles

Touch trigger probe, probing feed rate: F in touch

probe table
In F you define the feed rate at which the TNC is to probe the
workpiece.

Touch trigger probe, rapid traverse for positioning:

FMAX
In FMAX you define the feed rate at which the TNC pre-positions
the touch probe, or positions it between measuring points.

Touch trigger probe, rapid traverse for positioning:

F_PREPOS in touch probe table
In F_PREPOS you define whether the TNC is to position the touch
probe at the feed rate defined in FMAX or at rapid traverse.
Input value = FMAX_PROBE: Position at feed rate from FMAX
Input value = FMAX_MACHINE: Pre-position at rapid traverse

390 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

14
Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles 14.2

Multiple measurements
To increase measuring certainty, the TNC can run each probing
process up to three times in sequence. Define the number
of measurements in machine parameter ProbeSettings >
Configuration of probe behavior > Automatic mode: Multiple
measurements with probe function. If the measured position
values differ too greatly, the TNC outputs an error message
(the limit value is defined in Confidence interval of multiple
measurements). With multiple measurement it is possible to
detect random errors, e.g. from contamination.
If the measured values lie within the confidence interval, the TNC
saves the mean value of the measured positions.

Confidence interval of multiple measurements

When you perform a multiple measurement, you store the
value that the measured values may vary in ProbeSettings >
Configuration of probe behavior > Automatic mode: Confidence
interval of multiple measurements. If the difference in the
measured values exceeds the value defined by you, the TNC
outputs an error message.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 391

14 Using Touch Probe Cycles
14.2 Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles

Executing touch probe cycles

All touch probe cycles are DEF active. This means that the TNC
runs the cycle automatically as soon as the TNC executes the cycle
definition in the program run.

Danger of collision!
When running touch probe cycles, no cycles must be
active for coordinate transformation (Cycle 7 DATUM,
Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE, Cycle 10 ROTATION, and
Cycles 11 and 26 SCALING).

You can also run the Touch Probe Cycles 408 to 419
during an active basic rotation. Make sure, however,
that the basic rotation angle does not change when
you use Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables
after the measuring cycle.

Touch probe cycles with a number greater than 400 position the
touch probe according to a positioning logic:
If the current coordinate of the south pole of the stylus is less
than the coordinate of the clearance height (defined in the
cycle), the TNC retracts the touch probe in the probe axis to the
clearance height and then positions it in the working plane to
the first starting position.
If the current coordinate of the stylus south pole is greater
than the coordinate of the clearance height, then the TNC first
positions the touch probe to the first probe point in the working
plane, and then in the touch-probe axis directly to the measuring
height.

392 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

14
Touch probe table 14.3

14.3 Touch probe table

General information
Various data is stored in the touch probe table that defines the
probe behavior during the probing process. If you run several touch
probes on your machine tool, you can save separate data for each
touch probe.

Editing touch probe tables

To edit the touch probe table, proceed as follows:
Select the Manual Operation mode.

Select the touch probe functions by pressing

the TOUCH PROBE soft key. The TNC displays
additional soft keys: see table above
Select the touch probe table: Press the TCH
PROBE TABLE soft key
Set the EDIT soft key to ON
Using the arrow keys, select the desired setting.
Perform desired changes.
Exit the touch probe table: Press the END soft key

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 393

14 Using Touch Probe Cycles
14.3 Touch probe table

Touch probe data

Abbr. Inputs Dialog
NO Number of the touch probe: Enter this number in the –
tool table (column: TP_NO) under the appropriate tool
number
TYPE Selection of the touch probe used Selection of touch probe?
CAL_OF1 Offset of the touch probe axis to the spindle axis for the TS center misalignmt. ref. axis?
reference axis [mm]
CAL_OF2 Offset of the touch probe axis to the spindle axis for the TS center misalignmt. aux. axis?
minor axis [mm]
CAL_ANG The TNC orients the touch probe to the orientation angle Spindle angle for calibration?
before calibration or probing (if orientation is possible)
F Feed rate at which the TNC is to probe the workpiece Probing feed rate? [mm/min]
FMAX Feed rate at which the touch probe pre-positions, or is Rapid traverse in probing cycle?
positioned between the measuring points [mm/min]
DIST If the stylus is not deflected within the defined path, the Maximum measuring path? [mm]
TNC outputs an error message
SET_UP In SET_UP you define how far from the defined (or Set-up clearance? [mm]
calculated) touch point the TNC is to pre-position the
touch probe. The smaller the value you enter, the more
exactly you must define the touch point position. In
many touch probe cycles you can also define a set-
up clearance that is added to the SET_UP machine
parameter.
F_PREPOS Defining speed with pre-positioning: Pre-positioning at rap. traverse?
ENT/NO ENT
Pre-positioning with speed from FMAX: FMAX_PROBE
Pre-positioning with machine rapid traverse:
FMAX_MACHINE
TRACK To increase measuring accuracy, you can use TRACK Orient touch probe cycles?
= ON to have an infrared touch probe oriented in the Yes=ENT, No=NOENT
programmed probe direction before every probe
process. In this way the stylus is always deflected in the
same direction:
ON: Perform spindle tracking
OFF: Do not perform spindle tracking

394 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

15 Touch Probe
Cycles: Automatic
Measurement
of Workpiece
Misalignment
15 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Measurement of Workpiece
Misalignment
15.1 Fundamentals

15.1 Fundamentals

Overview

When running touch probe cycles, Cycle 8 MIRROR

IMAGE, Cycle 11 SCALING and Cycle 26 AXIS-
SPECIFIC SCALING must not be active.
HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of
the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are
used.

The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine

tool builder for the use of a 3-D touch probe.
Refer to your machine manual.

The TNC provides five cycles that enable you to measure and
compensate workpiece misalignment. In addition, you can reset a
basic rotation with Cycle 404:
Cycle Soft key Page
400 BASIC ROTATION 398
Automatic measurement using two
points. Compensation via basic
rotation.
401 ROT OF 2 HOLES 401
Automatic measurement using
two holes. Compensation via basic
rotation.
402 ROT OF 2 STUDS 404
Automatic measurement using
two studs. Compensation via basic
rotation.
403 ROT IN ROTARY AXIS 407
Automatic measurement using two
points. Compensation by turning the
table.
405 ROT IN C AXIS 411
Automatic alignment of an angular
offset between a hole center and the
positive Y axis. Compensation via
table rotation.
404 SET BASIC ROTATION 410
Setting any basic rotation.

396 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

15
Fundamentals 15.1

Characteristics common to all touch probe cycles for

measuring workpiece misalignment
For Cycles 400, 401 and 402 you can define through parameter
Q307 Default setting for basic rotation whether the
measurement result is to be corrected by a known angle # (see
figure at right). This enables you to measure the basic rotation
against any straight line 1 of the workpiece and to establish the
reference to the actual 0° direction 2.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 397

15 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Measurement of Workpiece
Misalignment
15.2 BASIC ROTATION (Cycle 400, DIN/ISO: G400)

15.2 BASIC ROTATION (Cycle 400, DIN/

ISO: G400)

Cycle run
Touch probe cycle 400 determines a workpiece misalignment by
measuring two points, which must lie on a straight surface. With
the basic rotation function the TNC compensates the measured
value.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction
opposite to the defined traverse direction.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F).
3 Then the touch probe moves to the next starting position 2 and
probes the second position.
4 The TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and
performs the basic rotation.

Please note while programming:

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
The TNC will reset an active basic rotation at the
beginning of the cycle.

398 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

15
BASIC ROTATION (Cycle 400, DIN/ISO: G400) 15.2

Cycle parameters
1st meas. point 1st axis Q263 (absolute):
Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference
axis of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999
to 99999.9999
1st meas. point 2nd axis Q264 (absolute):
Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis
of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
2nd meas. point 1st axis Q265 (absolute):
Coordinate of the second touch point in the
reference axis of the working plane. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
2nd meas. point 2nd axis Q266 (absolute):
Coordinate of the second touch point in the minor
axis of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999
to 99999.9999
Measuring axis Q272: Axis in the working plane in
which the measurement is to be made:
1: Principal axis = measuring axis
2: Secondary axis = measuring axis
NC blocks
Traverse direction 1 Q267: Direction in which the
probe is to approach the workpiece: 5 TCH PROBE 400 BASIC ROTATION
-1: Negative Traverse direction Q263=+10 ;1ST POINT 1ST AXIS
+1: Positive traverse direction
Q264=+3.5 ;1ST POINT 2ND AXIS
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 Q265=+25 ;2ND POINT 1ST AXIS
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (=
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which Q266=+2 ;2ND POINT 2ND AXIS
the measurement is to be made. Input range Q272=2 ;MEASURING AXIS
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q267=+1 ;TRAVERSE DIRECTION
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT

Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE

the touch probe axis at which no collision between Q307=0 ;PRESET ROT. ANGLE
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q305=0 ;NO. IN TABLE
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 399

15 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Measurement of Workpiece
Misalignment
15.2 BASIC ROTATION (Cycle 400, DIN/ISO: G400)

Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition

400 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

15
BASIC ROTATION over two holes (Cycle 401, DIN/ISO: G401) 15.3

15.3 BASIC ROTATION over two holes

(Cycle 401, DIN/ISO: G401)

Cycle run
The Touch Probe Cycle 401 measures the centers of two holes.
Then the TNC calculates the angle between the reference axis in
the working plane and the line connecting the hole centers. With
the basic rotation function, the TNC compensates the calculated
value. As an alternative, you can also compensate the determined
misalignment by rotating the rotary table.
1 Following the positioning logic (See "Executing touch probe
cycles", page 392), the control positions the touch probe at rapid
traverse (value from column FMAX) to the center of the first hole
1.
2 Then the probe moves to the entered measuring height and
probes four points to find the first hole center.
3 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the
position entered as center of the second hole 2.
4 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring
height and probes four points to find the second hole center.
5 Then the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and performs the basic rotation.

Please note while programming:

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
The TNC will reset an active basic rotation at the
beginning of the cycle.
If you want to compensate the misalignment by
rotating the rotary table, the TNC will automatically
use the following rotary axes:
C for tool axis Z
B for tool axis Y
A for tool axis X

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 401

15 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Measurement of Workpiece
Misalignment
15.3 BASIC ROTATION over two holes (Cycle 401, DIN/ISO: G401)

Cycle parameters
1st hole: Center in 1st axis Q268 (absolute):
Center of the first hole in the reference axis of
the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
1st hole: Center in 2nd axis Q269 (absolute):
Center of the first hole in the minor axis of
the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
2nd hole: Center in 1st axis Q270 (absolute):
Center of the second hole in the reference axis
of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
2nd hole: Center in 2nd axis Q271 (absolute):
Center of the second hole in the minor axis of
the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (= NC blocks
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which
5 TCH PROBE 401 ROT OF 2 HOLES
the measurement is to be made. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q268=-37 ;1ST CENTER IN 1ST
AXIS
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in Q269=+12 ;1ST CENTER 2ND AXIS
the touch probe axis at which no collision between
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q270=+75 ;2ND CENTER 1ST AXIS
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q271=+20 ;2ND CENTER 2ND AXIS
Preset value for rotation angle Q307 (absolute): Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
If the misalignment is to be measured against a Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
straight line other than the reference axis, enter
the angle of this reference line. The TNC will Q307=0 ;PRESET ROT. ANGLE
then calculate the difference between the value Q305=0 ;NO. IN TABLE
measured and the angle of the reference line for the Q402=0 ;COMPENSATION
basic rotation. Input range -360.000 to 360.000
Q337=0 ;ZERO RESET

402 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

15
BASIC ROTATION over two holes (Cycle 401, DIN/ISO: G401) 15.3

Preset number in table Q305: Enter the preset

number in the table in which the TNC is to save the
determined basic rotation. If you enter Q305=0,
the TNC automatically places the determined
basic rotation in the ROT menu of the Manual
Operation mode. The parameter has no effect
if the misalignment is to be compensated by a
rotation of the rotary table (Q402=1). In this case
the misalignment is not saved as an angular value.
Input range 0 to 2999
Compensation Q402: Define whether the TNC
should set the measured misalignment as basic
rotation or should align via rotating the rotary table:
0: Set basic rotation
1: Rotate the rotary table
If you specify rotating the rotary table, the TNC
does not save the measured misalignment, even if
you have defined a table row in parameter Q305.
Set to zero after alignment Q337: Define whether
the TNC should set the display of the aligned rotary
axis to 0:
0: Do not set the rotary axis display to 0 after
alignment
1: Set the rotary axis display to 0 after alignment.
The TNC only sets the display to 0 if you have set
Q402=1.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 403

15 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Measurement of Workpiece
Misalignment
15.4 BASIC ROTATION over two studs (Cycle 402, DIN/ISO: G402)

15.4 BASIC ROTATION over two studs

(Cycle 402, DIN/ISO: G402)

Cycle run
The Touch Probe Cycle 402 measures the centers of two studs.
Then the TNC calculates the angle between the reference axis in
the working plane and the line connecting the two stud centers.
With the basic rotation function, the TNC compensates the
calculated value. As an alternative, you can also compensate the
determined misalignment by rotating the rotary table.
1 Following the positioning logic (See "Executing touch probe
cycles", page 392), the TNC positions the touch probe at rapid
traverse (value from column FMAX) to the starting point 1 of the
first stud.
2 Then the probe moves to the entered measuring height 1 and
probes four points to find the center of the first stud. The touch
probe moves on a circular arc between the touch points, each of
which is offset by 90°.
3 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then
positions the probe to starting point 5 of the second stud.
4 The probe moves to the entered measuring height 2 and
probes four points to find the center of the second stud.
5 Then the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and performs the basic rotation.

Please note while programming:

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

404 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

15
BASIC ROTATION over two studs (Cycle 402, DIN/ISO: G402) 15.4

Cycle parameters
1st stud: Center in 1st axis Q268 (absolute):
Center of the first stud in the reference axis of
the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
1st stud: Center in 2nd axis Q269 (absolute):
Center of the first stud in the minor axis of
the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
Diameter of stud 1 Q313: Approximate diameter
of the 1st stud. Enter a value that is more likely
to be too large than too small. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Measuring height 1 in the probe axis Q261
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (=
touch point in the touch probe axis) at which stud
1 is to be measured. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
2nd stud: Center in 1st axis Q270 (absolute):
Center of the second stud in the reference axis
of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
NC blocks
2nd stud: Center in 2nd axis Q271 (absolute): 5 TCH PROBE 402 ROT OF 2 STUDS
Center of the second stud in the minor axis of
the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to Q268=-37 ;1ST CENTER IN 1ST
AXIS
99999.9999
Q269=+12 ;1ST CENTER 2ND AXIS
Diameter of stud 2 Q314: Approximate diameter
of the 2nd stud. Enter a value that is more likely Q313=60 ;DIAMETER OF STUD 1
to be too large than too small. Input range 0 to Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT 1
99999.9999 Q270=+75 ;2ND CENTER 1ST AXIS
Measuring height of stud 2 in the probe axis Q271=+20 ;2ND CENTER 2ND AXIS
Q315 (absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (=
Q314=60 ;DIAMETER OF STUD 2
touch point in the touch probe axis) at which stud
2 is to be measured. Input range -99999.9999 to Q315=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT 2
99999.9999 Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q307=0 ;PRESET ROT. ANGLE
Q305=0 ;NO. IN TABLE
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in
the touch probe axis at which no collision between Q402=0 ;COMPENSATION
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q337=0 ;ZERO RESET
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 405

15 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Measurement of Workpiece
Misalignment
15.4 BASIC ROTATION over two studs (Cycle 402, DIN/ISO: G402)

Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition

of how the touch probe is to move between the
measuring points:
0: Move at measuring height between measuring
points
1: Move at clearance height between measuring
points
Preset value for rotation angle Q307 (absolute):
If the misalignment is to be measured against a
straight line other than the reference axis, enter
the angle of this reference line. The TNC will
then calculate the difference between the value
measured and the angle of the reference line for the
basic rotation. Input range -360.000 to 360.000
Preset number in table Q305: Enter the preset
number in the table in which the TNC is to save the
determined basic rotation. If you enter Q305=0,
the TNC automatically places the determined
basic rotation in the ROT menu of the Manual
Operation mode. The parameter has no effect
if the misalignment is to be compensated by a
rotation of the rotary table (Q402=1). In this case
the misalignment is not saved as an angular value.
Input range 0 to 2999
Compensation Q402: Define whether the TNC
should set the measured misalignment as basic
rotation or should align via rotating the rotary table:
0: Set basic rotation
1: Rotate the rotary table
If you specify rotating the rotary table, the TNC
does not save the measured misalignment, even if
you have defined a table row in parameter Q305.
Set to zero after alignment Q337: Define whether
the TNC should set the display of the aligned rotary
axis to 0:
0: Do not set the rotary axis display to 0 after
alignment
1: Set the rotary axis display to 0 after alignment.
The TNC only sets the display to 0 if you have set
Q402=1.

406 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

15
BASIC ROTATION compensation via rotary axis (Cycle 403, DIN/ 15.5
ISO: G403)

15.5 BASIC ROTATION compensation via

rotary axis (Cycle 403, DIN/ISO: G403)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 403 determines a workpiece misalignment by
measuring two points, which must lie on a straight surface. The
TNC compensates the determined misalignment by rotating the A,
B or C axis. The workpiece can be clamped in any position on the
rotary table.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction
opposite to the defined traverse direction.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F).
3 Then the touch probe moves to the next starting position 2 and
probes the second position.
4 The TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and
moves the rotary axis, which was defined in the cycle, by the
measured value. Optionally you can have the display set to 0
after alignment.

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
The TNC does not check whether touch points
and compensation axis match. This can result in
compensation movements offset by 180°.

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
The TNC stores the measured angle in parameter
Q150.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 407

15 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Measurement of Workpiece
Misalignment
15.5 BASIC ROTATION compensation via rotary axis (Cycle 403, DIN/
ISO: G403)

Cycle parameters
1st meas. point 1st axis Q263 (absolute):
Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference
axis of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999
to 99999.9999
1st meas. point 2nd axis Q264 (absolute):
Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis
of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
2nd meas. point 1st axis Q265 (absolute):
Coordinate of the second touch point in the
reference axis of the working plane. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
2nd meas. point 2nd axis Q266 (absolute):
Coordinate of the second touch point in the minor
axis of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999
to 99999.9999
Measuring axis (1...3: 1 = principal axis) Q272:
Axis in which the measurement is to be made:
1: Principal axis = measuring axis
2: Secondary axis = measuring axis
3: Touch probe axis = measuring axis NC blocks
Traverse direction 1 Q267: Direction in which the 5 TCH PROBE 403 ROT IN ROTARY AXIS
probe is to approach the workpiece: Q263=+0 ;1ST POINT 1ST AXIS
-1: Negative Traverse direction
Q264=+0 ;1ST POINT 2ND AXIS
+1: Positive traverse direction
Q265=+20 ;2ND POINT 1ST AXIS
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261
Q266=+30 ;2ND POINT 2ND AXIS
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (=
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which Q272=1 ;MEASURING AXIS
the measurement is to be made. Input range Q267=-1 ;TRAVERSE DIRECTION
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in Q312=6 ;COMPENSATION AXIS
the touch probe axis at which no collision between Q337=0 ;ZERO RESET
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q305=1 ;NO. IN TABLE
Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE
Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition TRANSFER
of how the touch probe is to move between the
measuring points: Q380=+90 ;REFERENCE ANGLE
0: Move at measuring height between measuring
points
1: Move at clearance height between measuring
points

408 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

15
BASIC ROTATION compensation via rotary axis (Cycle 403, DIN/ 15.5
ISO: G403)

Axis for compensation movement Q312: Define

which rotary axis the TNC uses to compensate the
measured misalignment:
4: Compensate misalignment with rotary axis A
5: Compensate misalignment with rotary axis B
6: Compensate misalignment with rotary axis C
Set to zero after alignment Q337: Define whether
the TNC should set the display of the aligned rotary
axis to 0:
0: Do not set the rotary axis display to 0 after
alignment
1: Set the rotary axis display to 0 after alignment.
Number in table Q305: Enter the number in the
preset table/datum table in which the TNC is to set
the rotary axis to zero. Only effective if Q337 is set
to 1. Input range 0 to 2999
Measured value transfer (0, 1) Q303: Specify if
the determined basic rotation is to be saved in the
datum table or in the preset table:
0: Write the measured basic rotation as datum shift
active datum table. The reference system is the
active workpiece coordinate system
1: Write the measured basic rotation into the
preset table. The reference system is the machine
coordinate system (REF system).
Reference angle? (0=ref. axis) Q380: Angle
with which the TNC is to align the probed straight
line. Only effective if the rotary axis C is selected
(Q312=6). Input range -360.000 to 360.000

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 409

15 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Measurement of Workpiece
Misalignment
15.6 SET BASIC ROTATION (Cycle 404, DIN/ISO: G404)

15.6 SET BASIC ROTATION (Cycle 404, DIN/

ISO: G404)

Cycle run
With Touch Probe Cycle 404, you can set any basic rotation NC blocks
automatically during program run. This cycle is intended primarily for 5 TCH PROBE 404 BASIC ROTATION
resetting a previous basic rotation.
Q307=+0 ;PRESET ROT. ANGLE

Cycle parameters
Preset value for rotation angle: Angular value at
which the basic rotation is to be set. Input range
-360.000 to 360.000

410 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

15
Compensating workpiece misalignment by rotating the C axis 15.7
(Cycle 405, DIN/ISO: G405)

15.7 Compensating workpiece

misalignment by rotating the C axis
(Cycle 405, DIN/ISO: G405)

Cycle run
With Touch Probe Cycle 405, you can measure
the angular offset between the positive Y axis of the active
coordinate system and the center of a hole, or
the angular offset between the nominal position and the actual
position of a hole center.

The TNC compensates the determined angular offset by rotating

the C axis. The workpiece can be clamped in any position on the
rotary table, but the Y coordinate of the hole must be positive.
If you measure the angular misalignment of the hole with touch
probe axis Y (horizontal position of the hole), it may be necessary
to execute the cycle more than once because the measuring
strategy causes an inaccuracy of approx. 1% of the misalignment.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the
safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe
table.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F). The TNC derives the probing direction automatically
from the programmed starting angle.
3 Then the touch probe moves in a circular arc either at measuring
height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and
probes the second touch point.
4 The TNC positions the touch probe to starting point 3 and then
to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points and
positions the touch probe on the hole center measured.
5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance
height and and aligns the workpiece by rotating the table.
The TNC rotates the rotary table so that the hole center after
compensation lies in the direction of the positive Y axis, or on
the nominal position of the hole center—both with a vertical and
horizontal touch probe axis. The measured angular misalignment
is also available in parameter Q150.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 411

15 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Measurement of Workpiece
Misalignment
15.7 Compensating workpiece misalignment by rotating the C axis
(Cycle 405, DIN/ISO: G405)

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
To prevent a collision between the touch probe and
the workpiece, enter a low estimate for the nominal
diameter of the pocket (or hole).
If the dimensions of the pocket and the safety
clearance do not permit pre-positioning in the
proximity of the touch points, the TNC always starts
probing from the center of the pocket. In this case
the touch probe does not return to the clearance
height between the four measuring points.
Before a cycle definition you must have programmed
a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
The smaller the angle, the less accurately the TNC
can calculate the circle center. Minimum input value:
5°.

Cycle parameters
Center in 1st axis Q321 (absolute): Center of the
hole in the reference axis of the working plane.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Center in 2nd axis Q322 (absolute value): Center
of the hole in the minor axis of the working plane.
If you program Q322 = 0, the TNC aligns the hole
center to the positive Y axis. If you program Q322
not equal to 0, then the TNC aligns the hole center
to the nominal position (angle of the hole center).
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Nominal diameter Q262: Approximate diameter
of the circular pocket (or hole). Enter a value that
is more likely to be too small than too large. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Starting angle Q325 (absolute): Angle between the
reference axis of the working plane and the first
touch point. Input range -360.000 to 360.000

412 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

15
Compensating workpiece misalignment by rotating the C axis 15.7
(Cycle 405, DIN/ISO: G405)

Stepping angle Q247 (incremental): Angle between

two measuring points. The algebraic sign of the
stepping angle determines the direction of rotation
(negative = clockwise) in which the touch probe
moves to the next measuring point. If you wish to
probe a circular arc instead of a complete circle,
then program the stepping angle to be less than
90°. Input range -120.000 to 120.000
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (=
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which
the measurement is to be made. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 NC blocks
5 TCH PROBE 405 ROT IN C AXIS
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional
distance between measuring point and ball tip. Q321=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input Q322=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
range 0 to 99999.9999
Q262=10 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in Q325=+0 ;STARTING ANGLE
the touch probe axis at which no collision between
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q247=90 ;STEPPING ANGLE
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT

Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE

of how the touch probe is to move between the Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
measuring points:
Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
0: Move at measuring height between measuring
points Q337=0 ;ZERO RESET
1: Move at clearance height between measuring
points
Set to zero after alignment Q337: definition of
whether the TNC should set the display of the C-
axis to zero, or write the angular misalignment in
column C of the datum table:
0: Set the display of the C-axis to zero
>0: Write the measured angular misalignment
with correct algebraic signs in the datum table.
Line number = value of Q337. If a C-axis shift is
registered in the datum table, the TNC adds the
measured angular misalignment.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 413

15 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Measurement of Workpiece
Misalignment
15.8 Example: Determining a basic rotation from two holes

15.8 Example: Determining a basic rotation

from two holes

0 BEGIN PGM CYC401 MM

1 TOOL CALL 69 Z
2 TCH PROBE 401 ROT OF 2 HOLES
Q268=+25 ;1ST CENTER 1ST AXIS Center of the 1st hole: X coordinate
Q269=+15 ;1ST CENTER 2ND AXIS Center of the 1st hole: Y coordinate
Q270=+80 ;2ND CENTER 1ST AXIS Center of the 2nd hole: X coordinate
Q271=+35 ;2ND CENTER 2ND AXIS Center of the 2nd hole: Y coordinate
Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT Coordinate in the touch probe axis in which the
measurement is made
Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT Height in the touch probe axis at which the probe can
traverse without collision
Q307=+0 ;PRESET ROT. ANGLE Angle of the reference line
Q402=1 ;COMPENSATION Compensate misalignment by rotating the rotary table
Q337=1 ;ZERO RESET Set the display to zero after the alignment
3 CALL PGM 35K47 Call part program
4 END PGM CYC401 MM

414 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16 Touch Probe
Cycles: Automatic
Datum Setting
16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.1 Fundamentals

16.1 Fundamentals

Overview

When running touch probe cycles, Cycle 8 MIRROR

IMAGE, Cycle 11 SCALING and Cycle 26 AXIS-
SPECIFIC SCALING must not be active.
HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of
the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are
used.

The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine

tool builder for the use of a 3-D touch probe.
Refer to your machine manual.

The TNC offers twelve cycles for automatically finding reference

points and handling them as follows:
Setting the determined values directly as display values
Entering the determined values in the preset table
Entering the determined values in a datum table

416 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
Fundamentals 16.1

Cycle Soft key Page

408 SLOT CENTER REF PT. 420
Measuring the inside width of a slot,
and defining the slot center as datum
409 RIDGE CENTER REF PT. 424
Measuring the outside width of a
ridge, and defining the ridge center
as datum
410 DATUM INSIDE RECTANGLE 427
Measuring the inside length and
width of a rectangle, and defining the
center as datum
411 DATUM OUTSIDE RECTANGLE 431
Measuring the outside length and
width of a rectangle, and defining the
center as datum
412 DATUM INSIDE CIRCLE 435
Measuring any four points on the
inside of a circle, and defining the
center as datum
413 DATUM OUTSIDE CIRCLE 440
Measuring any four points on the
outside of a circle, and defining the
center as datum
414 DATUM OUTSIDE CORNER 444
Measuring two lines from the
outside of the angle, and defining the
intersection as datum
415 DATUM INSIDE CORNER 448
Measuring two lines from within the
angle, and defining the intersection
as datum
416 DATUM CIRCLE CENTER 451
(2nd soft-key level) Measuring any
three holes on a bolt hole circle,
and defining the bolt-hole center as
datum
417 DATUM IN TS AXIS 455
(2nd soft-key level) Measuring any
position in the touch probe axis and
defining it as datum
418 DATUM FROM 4 HOLES 457
(2nd soft-key level) Measuring 4
holes crosswise and defining the
intersection of the lines between
them as datum
419 DATUM IN ONE AXIS 461
(2nd soft-key row) Measuring any
position in any axis and defining it as
datum

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 417

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.1 Fundamentals

Characteristics common to all touch probe cycles for

datum setting

You can also run the Touch Probe Cycles 408 to 419
during an active rotation (basic rotation or Cycle 10).

Datum point and touch probe axis

From the touch probe axis that you have defined in the measuring
program the TNC determines the working plane for the datum.
Active touch probe axis Datum setting in
Z X and Y
Y Z and X
X Y and Z

Saving the calculated datum

In all cycles for datum setting you can use the input parameters
Q303 and Q305 to define how the TNC is to save the calculated
datum:
Q305 = 0, Q303 = any value: The TNC sets the calculated
datum in the display. The new datum is active immediately. At
the same time, the TNC saves the datum set in the display by
the cycle in line 0 of the preset table.
Q305 not equal to 0, Q303 = –1

This combination can only occur if you

read in programs containing Cycles 410 to 418
created on a TNC 4xx
read in programs containing Cycles 410 to 418
created with an older software version on an iTNC
530
did not specifically define the measured-value
transfer with parameter Q303 when defining the
cycle.

In these cases the TNC outputs an error message,

since the complete handling of REF-referenced
datum tables has changed. You must define a
measured-value transfer yourself with parameter
Q303.

Q305 not equal to 0, Q303 = 0 The TNC writes the calculated

reference point in the active datum table. The reference
system is the active workpiece coordinate system. The value of
parameter Q305 determines the datum number. Activate the
datum with Cycle 7 in the part program.
Q305 not equal to 0, Q303 = 1 The TNC writes the calculated
reference point in the preset table. The reference system is
the machine coordinate system (REF coordinates). The value of
parameter Q305 determines the preset number. Activate the
preset with Cycle 247 in the part program.

418 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
Fundamentals 16.1

Measurement results in Q parameters

The TNC saves the measurement results of the respective touch
probe cycle in the globally effective Q parameters Q150 to Q160.
You can use these parameters in your program. Note the table of
result parameters listed with every cycle description.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 419

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.2 DATUM SLOT CENTER (Cycle 408, DIN/ISO: G408)

16.2 DATUM SLOT CENTER (Cycle 408, DIN/

ISO: G408)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 408 finds the center of a slot and defines its
center as datum. If desired, the TNC can also enter the coordinates
into a datum table or the preset table.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the
safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe
table.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F).
3 Then the touch probe moves either paraxially at measuring
height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and
probes the second touch point.
4 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle
parameters Q303 and Q305 (See "") and saves the actual values
in the Q parameters listed below.
5 If desired, the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the
touch probe axis in a separate probing.

Parameter number Meaning

Q166 Actual value of measured slot width
Q157 Actual value of the centerline

420 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM SLOT CENTER (Cycle 408, DIN/ISO: G408) 16.2

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
To prevent a collision between touch probe and
workpiece, enter a low estimate for the slot width.
If the slot width and the safety clearance do not
permit pre-positioning in the proximity of the touch
points, the TNC always starts probing from the
center of the slot. In this case the touch probe does
not return to the clearance height between the two
measuring points.
Before a cycle definition you must have programmed
a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
If you set a datum (Q303 = 0) with the touch probe
cycle and also use probe in TS axis (Q381 = 1), then
no coordinate transformation must be active.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 421

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.2 DATUM SLOT CENTER (Cycle 408, DIN/ISO: G408)

Cycle parameters
Center in 1st axis Q321 (absolute): Center of the
slot in the reference axis of the working plane. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Center in 2nd axis Q322 (absolute): Center of the
slot in the minor axis of the working plane. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Width of slot Q311 (incremental): Width of the slot,
regardless of its position in the working plane. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Measuring axis Q272: Axis in the working plane in
which the measurement is to be made:
1: Principal axis = measuring axis
2: Secondary axis = measuring axis
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (=
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which
the measurement is to be made. Input range
NC blocks
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
5 TCH PROBE 408 SLOT CENTER REF
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional PT
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q321=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q322=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
Q311=25 ;SLOT WIDTH
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in
the touch probe axis at which no collision between Q272=1 ;MEASURING AXIS
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition
Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
of how the touch probe is to move between the
measuring points: Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
0: Move at measuring height between measuring Q305=10 ;NO. IN TABLE
points
Q405=+0 ;DATUM
1: Move at clearance height between measuring
points Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE
TRANSFER
Number in table Q305: Enter the number in the
Q381=1 ;PROBE IN TS AXIS
datum/preset table in which the TNC is to save the
coordinates of the slot center. If you enter Q305=0, Q382=+85 ;1ST CO. FOR TS AXIS
the TNC automatically sets the display so that the Q383=+50 ;2ND CO. FOR TS AXIS
new datum is on the slot center. Input range 0 to
2999 Q384=+0 ;3RD CO. FOR TS AXIS
Q333=+1 ;DATUM
New datum Q405 (absolute): Coordinate in the
measuring axis at which the TNC should set the
calculated slot center. Default setting = 0. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999

422 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM SLOT CENTER (Cycle 408, DIN/ISO: G408) 16.2

Measured value transfer (0, 1) Q303: Specify if

the determined basic rotation is to be saved in the
datum table or in the preset table:
0: Write the measured basic rotation as datum shift
active datum table. The reference system is the
active workpiece coordinate system
1: Write the measured basic rotation into the
preset table. The reference system is the machine
coordinate system (REF system).
Probe in TS axis Q381: Specify whether the TNC
should also set the datum in the touch probe axis:
0: Do not set the datum in the touch probe axis
1: Set the datum in the touch probe axis
Probe TS axis: Coord. 1st axis Q382 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis
of the working plane at which point the datum is
to be set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if
Q381 = 1st input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 2nd axis Q383 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of
the working plane at which point the datum is to be
set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 =
1. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 3rd axis Q384 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe
axis, at which point the datum is to be set in the
touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 = 1. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
New datum in TS axis Q333 (absolute): Coordinate
in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should
set the datum. Default setting = 0. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 423

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.3 DATUM RIDGE CENTER (Cycle 409, DIN/ISO: G409)

16.3 DATUM RIDGE CENTER (Cycle 409,

DIN/ISO: G409)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 409 finds the center of a ridge and defines its
center as datum. If desired, the TNC can also enter the coordinates
into a datum table or the preset table.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the
safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe
table.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F).
3 Then the touch probe moves at clearance height to the next
touch point 2 and probes the second touch point.
4 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle
parameters Q303 and Q305 (See "Characteristics common to all
touch probe cycles for datum setting", page 418) and saves the
actual values in the Q parameters listed below.
5 If desired, the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the
touch probe axis in a separate probing.

Parameter number Meaning

Q166 Actual value of measured ridge width
Q157 Actual value of the centerline

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
To prevent a collision between touch probe and
workpiece, enter a high estimate for the ridge width.
Before a cycle definition you must have programmed
a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
If you set a datum (Q303 = 0) with the touch probe
cycle and also use probe in TS axis (Q381 = 1), then
no coordinate transformation must be active.

424 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM RIDGE CENTER (Cycle 409, DIN/ISO: G409) 16.3

Cycle parameters
Center in 1st axis Q321 (absolute): Center of the
ridge in the reference axis of the working plane.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Center in 2nd axis Q322 (absolute): Center of the
ridge in the minor axis of the working plane. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Width of ridge Q311 (incremental): Width of the
ridge, regardless of its position in the working plane.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Measuring axis Q272: Axis in the working plane in
which the measurement is to be made:
1: Principal axis = measuring axis
2: Secondary axis = measuring axis
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (=
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which
the measurement is to be made. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional
distance between measuring point and ball tip. NC blocks
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input
range 0 to 99999.9999 5 TCH PROBE 409 SLOT CENTER RIDGE
Q321=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in
the touch probe axis at which no collision between Q322=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q311=25 ;SLOT WIDTH
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q272=1 ;MEASURING AXIS
Number in table Q305: Enter the number in the Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
datum/preset table in which the TNC is to save
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
the coordinates of the ridge center. If you enter
Q305=0, the TNC automatically sets the display Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
so that the new datum is on the slot center. Input Q305=10 ;NO. IN TABLE
range 0 to 2999
Q405=+0 ;DATUM
New datum Q405 (absolute): Coordinate in the
Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE
measuring axis at which the TNC should set the TRANSFER
calculated ridge center. Default setting = 0 input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q381=1 ;PROBE IN TS AXIS
Q382=+85 ;1ST CO. FOR TS AXIS
Measured value transfer (0, 1) Q303: Specify if
the determined basic rotation is to be saved in the Q383=+50 ;2ND CO. FOR TS AXIS
datum table or in the preset table: Q384=+0 ;3RD CO. FOR TS AXIS
0: Write the measured basic rotation as datum shift
active datum table. The reference system is the Q333=+1 ;DATUM
active workpiece coordinate system
1: Write the measured basic rotation into the
preset table. The reference system is the machine
coordinate system (REF system).
Probe in TS axis Q381: Specify whether the TNC
should also set the datum in the touch probe axis:
0: Do not set the datum in the touch probe axis
1: Set the datum in the touch probe axis

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 425

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.3 DATUM RIDGE CENTER (Cycle 409, DIN/ISO: G409)

Probe TS axis: Coord. 1st axis Q382 (absolute):

Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis
of the working plane at which point the datum is
to be set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if
Q381 = 1st input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 2nd axis Q383 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of
the working plane at which point the datum is to be
set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 =
1. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 3rd axis Q384 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe
axis, at which point the datum is to be set in the
touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 = 1. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
New datum in TS axis Q333 (absolute): Coordinate
in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should
set the datum. Default setting = 0. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999

426 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM FROM INSIDE OF RECTANGLE (Cycle 410, DIN/ISO: G410) 16.4

16.4 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF RECTANGLE

(Cycle 410, DIN/ISO: G410)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 410 finds the center of a rectangular pocket and
defines its center as datum. If desired, the TNC can also enter the
coordinates into a datum table or the preset table.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the
safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe
table.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F).
3 Then the touch probe moves either paraxially at measuring
height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and
probes the second touch point.
4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to
starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points.
5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle
parameters Q303 and Q305. (See "")
6 If desired, the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the
touch probe axis in a separate probing and saves the actual
values in the following Q parameters.

Parameter number Meaning

Q151 Actual value of center in reference
axis
Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis
Q154 Actual value of length in the reference
axis
Q155 Actual value of length in the minor
axis

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 427

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.4 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF RECTANGLE (Cycle 410, DIN/ISO: G410)

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
To prevent a collision between touch probe and
workpiece, enter low estimates for the lengths of
the first and second sides.
If the dimensions of the pocket and the safety
clearance do not permit pre-positioning in the
proximity of the touch points, the TNC always starts
probing from the center of the pocket. In this case
the touch probe does not return to the clearance
height between the four measuring points.
Before a cycle definition you must have programmed
a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
If you set a datum (Q303 = 0) with the touch probe
cycle and also use probe in TS axis (Q381 = 1), then
no coordinate transformation must be active.

428 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM FROM INSIDE OF RECTANGLE (Cycle 410, DIN/ISO: G410) 16.4

Cycle parameters
Center in 1st axis Q321 (absolute): Center of the
pocket in the reference axis of the working plane.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Center in 2nd axis Q322 (absolute): Center of the
pocket in the minor axis of the working plane. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
1st side length Q323 (incremental): Pocket length,
parallel to the reference axis of the working plane.
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
2nd side length Q324 (incremental): Pocket length,
parallel to the minor axis of the working plane. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (=
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which
the measurement is to be made. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 NC blocks
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional 5 TCH PROBE 410 DATUM INSIDE
distance between measuring point and ball tip. RECTAN.
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input Q321=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
range 0 to 99999.9999
Q322=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in Q323=60 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH
the touch probe axis at which no collision between
Q324=20 ;2ND SIDE LENGTH
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT

Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE

of how the touch probe is to move between the Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
measuring points:
Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
0: Move at measuring height between measuring
points Q305=10 ;NO. IN TABLE
1: Move at clearance height between measuring Q331=+0 ;DATUM
points
Q332=+0 ;DATUM
Datum number in table Q305: Enter the number in Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE
the datum/preset table in which the TNC is to save TRANSFER
the coordinates of the pocket center. If you enter
Q381=1 ;PROBE IN TS AXIS
Q305=0, the TNC automatically sets the display so
that the new datum is at the center of the pocket. Q382=+85 ;1ST CO. FOR TS AXIS
Input range 0 to 2999 Q383=+50 ;2ND CO. FOR TS AXIS
New datum for reference axis Q331 (absolute): Q384=+0 ;3RD CO. FOR TS AXIS
Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC
Q333=+1 ;DATUM
should set the pocket center. Default setting = 0.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
New datum for minor axis Q332 (absolute):
Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC
should set the pocket center. Default setting = 0
input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 429

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.4 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF RECTANGLE (Cycle 410, DIN/ISO: G410)

Measured-value transfer (0, 1) Q303: Specify

whether the determined datum is to be saved in the
datum table or in the preset table:
-1: Do not use! Is entered by the TNC when old
programs are read in (See "Characteristics common
to all touch probe cycles for datum setting")
0: Write determined datum in the active datum
table. The reference system is the active workpiece
coordinate system
1: Write the measured datum into the preset table.
The reference system is the machine coordinate
system (REF system).
Probe in TS axis Q381: Specify whether the TNC
should also set the datum in the touch probe axis:
0: Do not set the datum in the touch probe axis
1: Set the datum in the touch probe axis
Probe TS axis: Coord. 1st axis Q382 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis
of the working plane at which point the datum is
to be set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if
Q381 = 1st input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 2nd axis Q383 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of
the working plane at which point the datum is to be
set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 =
1. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 3rd axis Q384 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe
axis, at which point the datum is to be set in the
touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 = 1. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
New datum Q333 (absolute): Coordinate at which
the TNC should set the datum. Default setting = 0
input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999

430 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF RECTANGLE (Cycle 411, DIN/ 16.5
ISO: G411)

16.5 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF

RECTANGLE (Cycle 411, DIN/
ISO: G411)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 411 finds the center of a rectangular stud and
defines its center as datum. If desired, the TNC can also enter the
coordinates into a datum table or the preset table.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the
safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe
table.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F).
3 Then the touch probe moves either paraxially at measuring
height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and
probes the second touch point.
4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to
starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points.
5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle
parameters Q303 and Q305. (See "Characteristics common to
all touch probe cycles for datum setting", page 418)
6 If desired, the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the
touch probe axis in a separate probing and saves the actual
values in the following Q parameters.

Parameter number Meaning

Q151 Actual value of center in reference
axis
Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis
Q154 Actual value of length in the reference
axis
Q155 Actual value of length in the minor
axis

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 431

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.5 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF RECTANGLE (Cycle 411, DIN/
ISO: G411)

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
To prevent a collision between touch probe and
workpiece, enter high estimates for the lengths of
the 1st and 2nd sides.
Before a cycle definition you must have programmed
a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
If you set a datum (Q303 = 0) with the touch probe
cycle and also use probe in TS axis (Q381 = 1), then
no coordinate transformation must be active.

Cycle parameters
Center in 1st axis Q321 (absolute): Center of the
stud in the reference axis of the working plane.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Center in 2nd axis Q322 (absolute): Center of the
stud in the minor axis of the working plane. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
1st side length Q323 (incremental): Stud length,
parallel to the reference axis of the working plane
Input range 0 to 99999.9999
2nd side length Q324 (incremental): Stud length,
parallel to the minor axis of the working plane. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (=
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which
the measurement is to be made. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input
range 0 to 99999.9999

432 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF RECTANGLE (Cycle 411, DIN/ 16.5
ISO: G411)

Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in NC blocks

the touch probe axis at which no collision between 5 TCH PROBE 411 DATUM OUTS.
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. RECTAN.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q321=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition Q322=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
of how the touch probe is to move between the
Q323=60 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH
measuring points:
0: Move at measuring height between measuring Q324=20 ;2ND SIDE LENGTH
points Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
1: Move at clearance height between measuring
points Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Datum number in table Q305: Enter the number
in the datum/preset table in which the TNC is to Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
save the coordinates of the stud center. If you enter Q305=0 ;NO. IN TABLE
Q305=0, the TNC automatically sets the display
Q331=+0 ;DATUM
so that the new datum is on the stud center. Input
range 0 to 2999 Q332=+0 ;DATUM

New datum for reference axis Q331 (absolute): Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE
TRANSFER
Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC
should set the stud center. Default setting = 0 input Q381=1 ;PROBE IN TS AXIS
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q382=+85 ;1ST CO. FOR TS AXIS
New datum for minor axis Q332 (absolute): Q383=+50 ;2ND CO. FOR TS AXIS
Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC
Q384=+0 ;3RD CO. FOR TS AXIS
should set the stud center. Default setting = 0 input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q333=+1 ;DATUM

Measured-value transfer (0, 1) Q303: Specify

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 433

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.5 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF RECTANGLE (Cycle 411, DIN/
ISO: G411)

Probe TS axis: Coord. 2nd axis Q383 (absolute):

Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of
the working plane at which point the datum is to be
set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 =
1. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 3rd axis Q384 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe
axis, at which point the datum is to be set in the
touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 = 1. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
New datum in TS axis Q333 (absolute): Coordinate
in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should
set the datum. Default setting = 0. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999

434 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CIRCLE (Cycle 412, DIN/ISO: G412) 16.6

16.6 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CIRCLE

(Cycle 412, DIN/ISO: G412)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 412 finds the center of a circular pocket (or of a
hole) and defines its center as datum. If desired, the TNC can also
enter the coordinates into a datum table or the preset table.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the
safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe
table.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F). The TNC derives the probing direction automatically
from the programmed starting angle.
3 Then the touch probe moves in a circular arc either at measuring
height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and
probes the second touch point.
4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to
starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points.
5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle
parameters Q303 and Q305 (See "Characteristics common to all
touch probe cycles for datum setting", page 418) and saves the
actual values in the Q parameters listed below.
6 If desired, the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the
touch probe axis in a separate probing.

Parameter number Meaning

Q151 Actual value of center in reference
axis
Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis
Q153 Actual value of diameter

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 435

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.6 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CIRCLE (Cycle 412, DIN/ISO: G412)

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
To prevent a collision between the touch probe and
the workpiece, enter a low estimate for the nominal
diameter of the pocket (or hole).
If the dimensions of the pocket and the safety
clearance do not permit pre-positioning in the
proximity of the touch points, the TNC always starts
probing from the center of the pocket. In this case
the touch probe does not return to the clearance
height between the four measuring points.
The smaller the angle increment Q247, the less
accurately the TNC can calculate the datum.
Minimum input value: 5°.
Before a cycle definition you must have programmed
a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
If you set a datum (Q303 = 0) with the touch probe
cycle and also use probe in TS axis (Q381 = 1), then
no coordinate transformation must be active.

436 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CIRCLE (Cycle 412, DIN/ISO: G412) 16.6

Cycle parameters
Center in 1st axis Q321 (absolute): Center of the
pocket in the reference axis of the working plane.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Center in 2nd axis Q322 (absolute): Center of the
pocket in the minor axis of the working plane. If
you program Q322 = 0, the TNC aligns the hole
center to the positive Y axis. If you program Q322
not equal to 0, then the TNC aligns the hole center
to the nominal position. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
Nominal diameter Q262: Approximate diameter
of the circular pocket (or hole). Enter a value that
is more likely to be too small than too large. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Starting angle Q325 (absolute): Angle between the
reference axis of the working plane and the first
touch point. Input range -360.000 to 360.000
Stepping angle Q247 (incremental): Angle between
two measuring points. The algebraic sign of the
stepping angle determines the direction of rotation
(negative = clockwise) in which the touch probe
moves to the next measuring point. If you wish to NC blocks
probe a circular arc instead of a complete circle, 5 TCH PROBE 412 DATUM INSIDE
then program the stepping angle to be less than CIRCLE
90°. Input range -120.000 to 120.000
Q321=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 Q322=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (=
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which Q262=75 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
the measurement is to be made. Input range Q325=+0 ;STARTING ANGLE
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q247=+60 ;STEPPING ANGLE
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT

Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE

the touch probe axis at which no collision between Q305=12 ;NO. IN TABLE
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q331=+0 ;DATUM
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q332=+0 ;DATUM
Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition
Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE
of how the touch probe is to move between the TRANSFER
measuring points:
0: Move at measuring height between measuring Q381=1 ;PROBE IN TS AXIS
points Q382=+85 ;1ST CO. FOR TS AXIS
1: Move at clearance height between measuring
Q383=+50 ;2ND CO. FOR TS AXIS
points
Q384=+0 ;3RD CO. FOR TS AXIS
Datum number in table Q305: Enter the number in
the datum/preset table in which the TNC is to save Q333=+1 ;DATUM
the coordinates of the pocket center. If you enter Q423=4 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS
Q305=0, the TNC automatically sets the display so Q365=1 ;TYPE OF TRAVERSE
that the new datum is at the center of the pocket.
Input range 0 to 2999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 437

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.6 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CIRCLE (Cycle 412, DIN/ISO: G412)

New datum for reference axis Q331 (absolute):

Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC
should set the pocket center. Default setting = 0.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
New datum for minor axis Q332 (absolute):
Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC
should set the pocket center. Default setting = 0
input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Measured-value transfer (0, 1) Q303: Specify
whether the determined datum is to be saved in the
datum table or in the preset table:
-1: Do not use! Is entered by the TNC when old
programs are read in (See "Characteristics common
to all touch probe cycles for datum setting")
0: Write determined datum in the active datum
table. The reference system is the active workpiece
coordinate system
1: Write the measured datum into the preset table.
The reference system is the machine coordinate
system (REF system).
Probe in TS axis Q381: Specify whether the TNC
should also set the datum in the touch probe axis:
0: Do not set the datum in the touch probe axis
1: Set the datum in the touch probe axis
Probe TS axis: Coord. 1st axis Q382 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis
of the working plane at which point the datum is
to be set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if
Q381 = 1st input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 2nd axis Q383 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of
the working plane at which point the datum is to be
set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 =
1. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 3rd axis Q384 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe
axis, at which point the datum is to be set in the
touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 = 1. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999

438 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CIRCLE (Cycle 412, DIN/ISO: G412) 16.6

New datum in TS axis Q333 (absolute): Coordinate

in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should
set the datum. Default setting = 0. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
No. of measuring points (4/3) Q423: Specify
whether the TNC should measure the stud with 4 or
3 probing points:
4: Use 4 measuring points (default setting)
3: Use 3 measuring points
Type of traverse? Line=0/Arc=1 Q365: Definition
of the path function with which the tool is to move
between the measuring points if "traverse to
clearance height" (Q301=1) is active:
0: Move in a straight line between machining
operations
1: Move in a circular arc on the pitch circle diameter
between machining operations

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 439

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.7 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE (Cycle 413, DIN/ISO: G413)

16.7 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE

(Cycle 413, DIN/ISO: G413)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 413 finds the center of a circular stud and
defines it as datum. If desired, the TNC can also enter the
coordinates into a datum table or the preset table.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the
safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe
table.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F). The TNC derives the probing direction automatically
from the programmed starting angle.
3 Then the touch probe moves in a circular arc either at measuring
height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and
probes the second touch point.
4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to
starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points.
5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle
parameters Q303 and Q305 (See "Characteristics common to all
touch probe cycles for datum setting", page 418) and saves the
actual values in the Q parameters listed below.
6 If desired, the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the
touch probe axis in a separate probing.

Parameter number Meaning

Q151 Actual value of center in reference
axis
Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis
Q153 Actual value of diameter

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
To prevent a collision between touch probe and
workpiece, enter a high estimate for the nominal
diameter of the stud.
Before a cycle definition you must have programmed
a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
The smaller the angle increment Q247, the less
accurately the TNC can calculate the datum.
Minimum input value: 5°.
If you set a datum (Q303 = 0) with the touch probe
cycle and also use probe in TS axis (Q381 = 1), then
no coordinate transformation must be active.

440 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE (Cycle 413, DIN/ISO: G413) 16.7

Cycle parameters
Center in 1st axis Q321 (absolute): Center of the
stud in the reference axis of the working plane.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Center in 2nd axis Q322 (absolute): Center of the
stud in the minor axis of the working plane. If you
program Q322 = 0, the TNC aligns the hole center
to the positive Y axis. If you program Q322 not
equal to 0, then the TNC aligns the hole center to
the nominal position. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
Nominal diameter Q262: Approximate diameter of
the stud. Enter a value that is more likely to be too
large than too small. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Starting angle Q325 (absolute): Angle between the
reference axis of the working plane and the first
touch point. Input range -360.000 to 360.000
Stepping angle Q247 (incremental): Angle between
two measuring points. The algebraic sign of the
stepping angle determines the direction of rotation
(negative = clockwise) in which the touch probe
moves to the next measuring point. If you wish to
probe a circular arc instead of a complete circle,
then program the stepping angle to be less than NC blocks
90°. Input range -120.000 to 120.000
5 TCH PROBE 413 DATUM OUTSIDE
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 CIRCLE
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (= Q321=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which
the measurement is to be made. Input range Q322=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q262=75 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER

Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional Q325=+0 ;STARTING ANGLE

distance between measuring point and ball tip. Q247=+60 ;STEPPING ANGLE
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input
Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
range 0 to 99999.9999
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in
the touch probe axis at which no collision between Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q305=15 ;NO. IN TABLE
Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition Q331=+0 ;DATUM
of how the touch probe is to move between the
Q332=+0 ;DATUM
measuring points:
0: Move at measuring height between measuring Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE
points TRANSFER
1: Move at clearance height between measuring Q381=1 ;PROBE IN TS AXIS
points
Q382=+85 ;1ST CO. FOR TS AXIS
Datum number in table Q305: Enter the number Q383=+50 ;2ND CO. FOR TS AXIS
in the datum/preset table in which the TNC is to
save the coordinates of the stud center. If you enter Q384=+0 ;3RD CO. FOR TS AXIS
Q305=0, the TNC automatically sets the display Q333=+1 ;DATUM
so that the new datum is on the stud center. Input Q423=4 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS
range 0 to 2999
Q365=1 ;TYPE OF TRAVERSE

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 441

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.7 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE (Cycle 413, DIN/ISO: G413)

New datum for reference axis Q331 (absolute):

Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC
should set the stud center. Default setting = 0 input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
New datum for minor axis Q332 (absolute):
Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC
should set the stud center. Default setting = 0 input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Measured-value transfer (0, 1) Q303: Specify
whether the determined datum is to be saved in the
datum table or in the preset table:
-1: Do not use! Is entered by the TNC when old
programs are read in (See "Characteristics common
to all touch probe cycles for datum setting")
0: Write determined datum in the active datum
table. The reference system is the active workpiece
coordinate system
1: Write the measured datum into the preset table.
The reference system is the machine coordinate
system (REF system).
Probe in TS axis Q381: Specify whether the TNC
should also set the datum in the touch probe axis:
0: Do not set the datum in the touch probe axis
1: Set the datum in the touch probe axis
Probe TS axis: Coord. 1st axis Q382 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis
of the working plane at which point the datum is
to be set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if
Q381 = 1st input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 2nd axis Q383 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of
the working plane at which point the datum is to be
set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 =
1. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 3rd axis Q384 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe
axis, at which point the datum is to be set in the
touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 = 1. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999

442 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE (Cycle 413, DIN/ISO: G413) 16.7

New datum in TS axis Q333 (absolute): Coordinate

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 443

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.8 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CORNER (Cycle 414, DIN/ISO: G414)

16.8 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CORNER

(Cycle 414, DIN/ISO: G414)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 414 finds the intersection of two lines and
defines it as the datum. If desired, the TNC can also enter the
intersection into a datum table or preset table.
1 Following the positioning logic (See "Executing touch probe
cycles", page 392), the TNC positions the touch probe at rapid
traverse (value from FMAX column) to the first touch point 1
(see figure at upper right). The TNC offsets the touch probe by
the safety clearance in the direction opposite to the respective
traverse direction.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F). The TNC derives the probing direction automatically
from the programmed 3rd measuring point.

1 Then the touch probe moves to the next starting position 2 and
from there probes the second position.
2 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to
starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points.
3 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle
parameters Q303 and Q305 (See "Characteristics common to all
touch probe cycles for datum setting", page 418) and saves the
coordinates of the determined corner in the Q parameters listed
below.
4 If desired, the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the
touch probe axis in a separate probing.

Parameter number Meaning

Q151 Actual value of corner in reference
axis
Q152 Actual value of corner in minor axis

444 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CORNER (Cycle 414, DIN/ISO: G414) 16.8

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
If you set a datum (Q303 = 0) with the touch probe
cycle and also use probe in TS axis (Q381 = 1), then
no coordinate transformation must be active.

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
The TNC always measures the first line in the
direction of the minor axis of the working plane.
By defining the positions of the measuring points
1 and 3 you also determine the corner at which the
TNC sets the datum (see figure at right and table
below).

Corner X coordinate Y coordinate

A Point 1 greater than Point 1 less than point 3
point 3
B Point 1 less than point 3 Point 1 less than point 3
C Point 1 less than point 3 Point 1 greater than point
3
D Point 1 greater than Point 1 greater than point
point 3 3

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 445

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.8 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CORNER (Cycle 414, DIN/ISO: G414)

Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (= Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which Q304=0 ;BASIC ROTATION
the measurement is to be made. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q305=7 ;NO. IN TABLE
Q331=+0 ;DATUM
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional
distance between measuring point and ball tip. Q332=+0 ;DATUM
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE
range 0 to 99999.9999 TRANSFER
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in Q381=1 ;PROBE IN TS AXIS
the touch probe axis at which no collision between Q382=+85 ;1ST CO. FOR TS AXIS
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Q383=+50 ;2ND CO. FOR TS AXIS
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q384=+0 ;3RD CO. FOR TS AXIS
Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition
of how the touch probe is to move between the Q333=+1 ;DATUM
measuring points:
0: Move at measuring height between measuring
points
1: Move at clearance height between measuring
points
Execute basic rotation Q304: Definition of
whether the TNC should compensate workpiece
misalignment with a basic rotation:
0: Do not execute basic rotation
1: Execute basic rotation

446 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CORNER (Cycle 414, DIN/ISO: G414) 16.8

Datum number in table Q305: Enter the datum

number in the datum or preset table in which the
TNC is to save the coordinates of the corner. If
you enter Q305=0, the TNC automatically sets the
display so that the new datum is on the corner.
Input range 0 to 2999
New datum for reference axis Q331 (absolute):
Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC
should set the corner. Default setting = 0 input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
New datum for minor axis Q332 (absolute):
Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC
should set the calculated corner. Default setting = 0
input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Measured-value transfer (0, 1) Q303: Specify
whether the determined datum is to be saved in the
datum table or in the preset table:
-1: Do not use! Is entered by the TNC when old
programs are read in (See "Characteristics common
to all touch probe cycles for datum setting")
0: Write determined datum in the active datum
table. The reference system is the active workpiece
coordinate system
1: Write the measured datum into the preset table.
The reference system is the machine coordinate
system (REF system).
Probe in TS axis Q381: Specify whether the TNC
should also set the datum in the touch probe axis:
0: Do not set the datum in the touch probe axis
1: Set the datum in the touch probe axis
Probe TS axis: Coord. 1st axis Q382 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis
of the working plane at which point the datum is
to be set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if
Q381 = 1st input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 2nd axis Q383 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of
the working plane at which point the datum is to be
set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 =
1. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 3rd axis Q384 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe
axis, at which point the datum is to be set in the
touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 = 1. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
New datum in TS axis Q333 (absolute): Coordinate
in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should
set the datum. Default setting = 0. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 447

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.9 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CORNER (Cycle 415, DIN/ISO: G415)

16.9 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CORNER

(Cycle 415, DIN/ISO: G415)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 415 finds the intersection of two lines and
defines it as the datum. If desired, the TNC can also enter the
intersection into a datum table or preset table.
1 Following the positioning logic (See "Executing touch probe
cycles", page 392), the TNC positions the touch probe at rapid
traverse (value from FMAX column) to the first touch point 1
(see figure at upper right) that you have defined in the cycle.
The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the
direction opposite to the respective traverse direction.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F). The probing direction is derived from the number by
which you identify the corner.

Parameter number Meaning

Q151 Actual value of corner in reference
axis
Q152 Actual value of corner in minor axis

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
If you set a datum (Q303 = 0) with the touch probe
cycle and also use probe in TS axis (Q381 = 1), then
no coordinate transformation must be active.

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
The TNC always measures the first line in the
direction of the minor axis of the working plane.

448 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CORNER (Cycle 415, DIN/ISO: G415) 16.9

Cycle parameters
1st meas. point 1st axis Q263 (absolute):
Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference
axis of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999
to 99999.9999
1st meas. point 2nd axis Q264 (absolute):
Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis
of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
Spacing in 1st axis Q326 (incremental): Distance
between the first and second measuring points in
the reference axis of the working plane. Input range
0 to 99999.9999
Spacing in 2nd axis Q327 (incremental): Distance
between third and fourth measuring points in the
minor axis of the working plane. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Corner Q308: Number identifying the corner which
the TNC is to set as datum. Input range 1 to 4 NC blocks
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 5 TCH PROBE 415 DATUM OUTSIDE
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (= CORNER
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which Q263=+37 ;1ST POINT 1ST AXIS
the measurement is to be made. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q264=+7 ;1ST POINT 2ND AXIS
Q326=50 ;SPACING IN 1ST AXIS
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional
distance between measuring point and ball tip. Q296=+95 ;3RD POINT 1ST AXIS
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input Q297=+25 ;3RD POINT 2ND AXIS
range 0 to 99999.9999
Q327=45 ;SPACING IN 2ND AXIS
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
the touch probe axis at which no collision between
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT

Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE

of how the touch probe is to move between the Q304=0 ;BASIC ROTATION
measuring points:
Q305=7 ;NO. IN TABLE
0: Move at measuring height between measuring
points Q331=+0 ;DATUM
1: Move at clearance height between measuring Q332=+0 ;DATUM
points
Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE
Execute basic rotation Q304: Definition of TRANSFER
whether the TNC should compensate workpiece Q381=1 ;PROBE IN TS AXIS
misalignment with a basic rotation:
0: Do not execute basic rotation Q382=+85 ;1ST CO. FOR TS AXIS
1: Execute basic rotation Q383=+50 ;2ND CO. FOR TS AXIS

Datum number in table Q305: Enter the datum Q384=+0 ;3RD CO. FOR TS AXIS
number in the datum or preset table in which the Q333=+1 ;DATUM
TNC is to save the coordinates of the corner. If
you enter Q305=0, the TNC automatically sets the
display so that the new datum is on the corner.
Input range 0 to 2999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 449

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.9 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CORNER (Cycle 415, DIN/ISO: G415)

New datum for reference axis Q331 (absolute):

Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC
should set the corner. Default setting = 0 input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
New datum for minor axis Q332 (absolute):
Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC
should set the calculated corner. Default setting = 0
input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Measured-value transfer (0, 1) Q303: Specify
whether the determined datum is to be saved in the
datum table or in the preset table:
-1: Do not use! Is entered by the TNC when old
programs are read in (See "Characteristics common
to all touch probe cycles for datum setting")
0: Write determined datum in the active datum
table. The reference system is the active workpiece
coordinate system
1: Write the measured datum into the preset table.
The reference system is the machine coordinate
system (REF system).
Probe in TS axis Q381: Specify whether the TNC
should also set the datum in the touch probe axis:
0: Do not set the datum in the touch probe axis
1: Set the datum in the touch probe axis
Probe TS axis: Coord. 1st axis Q382 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis
of the working plane at which point the datum is
to be set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if
Q381 = 1st input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 2nd axis Q383 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of
the working plane at which point the datum is to be
set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 =
1. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 3rd axis Q384 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe
axis, at which point the datum is to be set in the
touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 = 1. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
New datum in TS axis Q333 (absolute): Coordinate
in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should
set the datum. Default setting = 0. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999

450 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM CIRCLE CENTER (Cycle 416, DIN/ISO: G416) 16.10

16.10 DATUM CIRCLE CENTER (Cycle 416,

DIN/ISO: G416)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 416 finds the center of a bolt hole circle and
defines its center as datum. If desired, the TNC can also enter the
coordinates into a datum table or the preset table.
1 Following the positioning logic (See "Executing touch probe
cycles", page 392), the control positions the touch probe at rapid
traverse (value from column FMAX) to the center of the first hole
1.
2 Then the probe moves to the entered measuring height and
probes four points to find the first hole center.
3 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the
position entered as center of the second hole 2.
4 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring
height and probes four points to find the second hole center.
5 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the
position entered as center of the third hole 3.
6 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring
height and probes four points to find the third hole center.
7 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle
parameters Q303 and Q305 (See "Characteristics common to all
touch probe cycles for datum setting", page 418) and saves the
actual values in the Q parameters listed below.
8 If desired, the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the
touch probe axis in a separate probing.

Parameter number Meaning

Q151 Actual value of center in reference
axis
Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis
Q153 Actual value of bolt hole circle
diameter

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 451

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.10 DATUM CIRCLE CENTER (Cycle 416, DIN/ISO: G416)

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
If you set a datum (Q303 = 0) with the touch probe
cycle and also use probe in TS axis (Q381 = 1), then
no coordinate transformation must be active.

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.

452 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM CIRCLE CENTER (Cycle 416, DIN/ISO: G416) 16.10

Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 NC blocks

(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (= 5 TCH PROBE 416 DATUM CIRCLE
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which CENTER
the measurement is to be made. Input range Q273=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q274=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in
Q262=90 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
the touch probe axis at which no collision between
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q291=+34 ;ANGLE OF 1ST HOLE
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q292=+70 ;ANGLE OF 2ND HOLE
Datum number in table Q305: Enter the number Q293=+210 ;ANGLE OF 3RD HOLE
in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is to Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
save the coordinates of the bolt-hole circle center. If
you enter Q305=0, the TNC automatically sets the Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
display so that the new datum is on the bolt hole Q305=12 ;NO. IN TABLE
center. Input range 0 to 2999
Q331=+0 ;DATUM
New datum for reference axis Q331 (absolute): Q332=+0 ;DATUM
Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC
should set the bolt-hole center. Default setting = 0 Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE
TRANSFER
input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q381=1 ;PROBE IN TS AXIS
New datum for minor axis Q332 (absolute):
Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC Q382=+85 ;1ST CO. FOR TS AXIS
should set the bolt-hole center. Default setting = 0 Q383=+50 ;2ND CO. FOR TS AXIS
input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q384=+0 ;3RD CO. FOR TS AXIS
Measured-value transfer (0, 1) Q303: Specify Q333=+1 ;DATUM
whether the determined datum is to be saved in the
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
datum table or in the preset table:
-1: Do not use! Is entered by the TNC when old
programs are read in (See "Characteristics common
to all touch probe cycles for datum setting")
0: Write determined datum in the active datum
table. The reference system is the active workpiece
coordinate system
1: Write the measured datum into the preset table.
The reference system is the machine coordinate
system (REF system).
Probe in TS axis Q381: Specify whether the TNC
should also set the datum in the touch probe axis:
0: Do not set the datum in the touch probe axis
1: Set the datum in the touch probe axis
Probe TS axis: Coord. 1st axis Q382 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis
of the working plane at which point the datum is
to be set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if
Q381 = 1st input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Probe TS axis: Coord. 2nd axis Q383 (absolute):
Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of
the working plane at which point the datum is to be
set in the touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 =
1. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 453

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.10 DATUM CIRCLE CENTER (Cycle 416, DIN/ISO: G416)

Probe TS axis: Coord. 3rd axis Q384 (absolute):

Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe
axis, at which point the datum is to be set in the
touch probe axis. Only effective if Q381 = 1. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
New datum in TS axis Q333 (absolute): Coordinate
in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should
set the datum. Default setting = 0. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table), and
is only effective when the datum is probed in the
touch probe axis. Input range 0 to 99999.9999

454 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM IN TOUCH PROBE AXIS (Cycle 417, DIN/ISO: G417) 16.11

16.11 DATUM IN TOUCH PROBE AXIS (Cycle

417, DIN/ISO: G417)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 417 measures any coordinate in the touch probe
axis and defines it as datum. If desired, the TNC can also enter the
measured coordinate in a datum table or preset table.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the positive
direction of the touch probe axis.
2 Then the touch probe moves in its own axis to the coordinate
entered as starting point 1 and measures the actual position
with a simple probing movement.
3 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle
parameters Q303 and Q305 (See "Characteristics common to all
touch probe cycles for datum setting", page 418) and saves the
actual value in the Q parameters listed below.

Parameter number Meaning

Q160 Actual value of measured point

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
If you set a datum (Q303 = 0) with the touch probe
cycle and also use probe in TS axis (Q381 = 1), then
no coordinate transformation must be active.

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
The TNC then sets the datum in this axis.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 455

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.11 DATUM IN TOUCH PROBE AXIS (Cycle 417, DIN/ISO: G417)

Cycle parameters
1st meas. point 1st axis Q263 (absolute):
Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference
axis of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999
to 99999.9999
1st meas. point 2nd axis Q264 (absolute):
Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis
of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
1st meas. point 3rd axis Q294 (absolute):
Coordinate of the first touch point in the touch probe
axis. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in
the touch probe axis at which no collision between
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Datum number in table Q305: Enter the number NC blocks
in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is
5 TCH PROBE 417 DATUM IN TS AXIS
to save the coordinate. If you enter Q305=0, the
TNC automatically sets the display so that the new Q263=+25 ;1ST POINT 1ST AXIS
datum is on the probed surface. Input range 0 to Q264=+25 ;1ST POINT 2ND AXIS
2999
Q294=+25 ;1ST POINT 3RD AXIS
New datum Q333 (absolute): Coordinate at which Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
the TNC should set the datum. Default setting = 0
input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q260=+50 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Q305=0 ;NO. IN TABLE
Measured-value transfer (0, 1) Q303: Specify
whether the determined datum is to be saved in the Q333=+0 ;DATUM
datum table or in the preset table: Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE
-1: Do not use! Is entered by the TNC when old TRANSFER
programs are read in (See "Characteristics common
to all touch probe cycles for datum setting")
0: Write determined datum in the active datum
table. The reference system is the active workpiece
coordinate system
1: Write the measured datum into the preset table.
The reference system is the machine coordinate
system (REF system).

456 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM AT CENTER OF 4 HOLES (Cycle 418, DIN/ISO: G418) 16.12

16.12 DATUM AT CENTER OF 4 HOLES (Cycle

418, DIN/ISO: G418)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 418 calculates the intersection of the lines
connecting opposite holes and sets the datum at the intersection.
If desired, the TNC can also enter the intersection into a datum
table or preset table.
1 Following the positioning logic (See "Executing touch probe
cycles", page 392), the control positions the touch probe at rapid
traverse (value from column FMAX) to the center of the first hole
1.
2 Then the probe moves to the entered measuring height and
probes four points to find the first hole center.
3 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the
position entered as center of the second hole 2.
4 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring
height and probes four points to find the second hole center.
5 The TNC repeats steps 3 and 4 for holes 3 and 4.
6 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle
parameters Q303 and Q305 (See "Characteristics common to
all touch probe cycles for datum setting", page 418). The TNC
calculates the datum as the intersection of the lines connecting
the centers of holes 1/3 and 2/4 and saves the actual values in
the Q parameters listed below.
7 If desired, the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the
touch probe axis in a separate probing.

Parameter number Meaning

Q151 Actual value of intersection point in
reference axis
Q152 Actual value of intersection point in
minor axis

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 457

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.12 DATUM AT CENTER OF 4 HOLES (Cycle 418, DIN/ISO: G418)

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
If you set a datum (Q303 = 0) with the touch probe
cycle and also use probe in TS axis (Q381 = 1), then
no coordinate transformation must be active.

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.

458 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM AT CENTER OF 4 HOLES (Cycle 418, DIN/ISO: G418) 16.12

3rd center in 2nd axis Q317 (absolute): center of NC blocks

the 3rd hole in the minor axis of the working plane. 5 TCH PROBE 418 DATUM FROM 4
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 HOLES
4th center in 1st axis Q318 (absolute): center of Q268=+20 ;1ST CENTER 1ST AXIS
the 4th hole in the reference axis of the working Q269=+25 ;1ST CENTER 2ND AXIS
plane. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q270=+150 ;2ND CENTER 1ST AXIS
4th center in 2nd axis Q319 (absolute): center of Q271=+25 ;2ND CENTER 2ND AXIS
the 4th hole in the minor axis of the working plane.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q316=+150 ;3RD CENTER 1ST AXIS
Q317=+85 ;3RD CENTER 2ND AXIS
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (= Q318=+22 ;4TH CENTER 1ST AXIS
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which Q319=+80 ;4TH CENTER 2ND AXIS
the measurement is to be made. Input range
Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q260=+10 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in
the touch probe axis at which no collision between Q305=12 ;NO. IN TABLE
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q331=+0 ;DATUM
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q332=+0 ;DATUM
Datum number in table Q305: Enter the number Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE
in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is TRANSFER
to save the coordinates of the line intersection. If
Q381=1 ;PROBE IN TS AXIS
you enter Q305=0, the TNC automatically sets the
display so that the new datum is at the intersection Q382=+85 ;1ST CO. FOR TS AXIS
of the connecting lines. Input range 0 to 2999 Q383=+50 ;2ND CO. FOR TS AXIS
New datum for reference axis Q331 (absolute): Q384=+0 ;3RD CO. FOR TS AXIS
Coordinate in the reference axis at which the Q333=+0 ;DATUM
TNC should set the calculated intersection of the
connecting lines. Default setting = 0 input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
New datum for minor axis Q332 (absolute):
Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC
should set the calculated intersection of the
connecting lines. Default setting = 0 input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Measured-value transfer (0, 1) Q303: Specify
whether the determined datum is to be saved in the
datum table or in the preset table:
-1: Do not use! Is entered by the TNC when old
programs are read in (See "Characteristics common
to all touch probe cycles for datum setting")
0: Write determined datum in the active datum
table. The reference system is the active workpiece
coordinate system
1: Write the measured datum into the preset table.
The reference system is the machine coordinate
system (REF system).
Probe in TS axis Q381: Specify whether the TNC
should also set the datum in the touch probe axis:
0: Do not set the datum in the touch probe axis
1: Set the datum in the touch probe axis

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 459

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.12 DATUM AT CENTER OF 4 HOLES (Cycle 418, DIN/ISO: G418)

Probe TS axis: Coord. 1st axis Q382 (absolute):

460 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM IN ONE AXIS (Cycle 419, DIN/ISO: G419) 16.13

16.13 DATUM IN ONE AXIS (Cycle 419, DIN/

ISO: G419)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 419 measures any coordinate in any axis
and defines it as datum. If desired, the TNC can also enter the
measured coordinate in a datum table or preset table.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction
opposite the programmed probing direction.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the programmed measuring
height and measures the actual position with a simple probing
movement.
3 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle
parameters Q303 and Q305. (See "Characteristics common to
all touch probe cycles for datum setting", page 418)

Please note while programming:

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
If you use Cycle 419 several times in succession to
save the datum in more than one axis in the preset
table, you must activate the preset number last
written to by Cycle 419 after every execution of Cycle
419 (this is not required if you overwrite the active
preset).

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 461

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.13 DATUM IN ONE AXIS (Cycle 419, DIN/ISO: G419)

Axis assignment Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE

Active touch probe Corresponding Corresponding Q260=+50 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT

axis: Q272= 3 reference axis: minor axis: Q272= Q272=+1 ;MEASURING AXIS
Q272= 1 2 Q267=+1 ;TRAVERSE DIRECTION
Z X Y Q305=0 ;NO. IN TABLE
Y Z X Q333=+0 ;DATUM
X Y Z Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE
TRANSFER

462 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
DATUM IN ONE AXIS (Cycle 419, DIN/ISO: G419) 16.13

Traverse direction 1 Q267: Direction in which the

probe is to approach the workpiece:
-1: Negative Traverse direction
+1: Positive traverse direction
Datum number in table Q305: Enter the number
in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is
to save the coordinate. If you enter Q305=0, the
TNC automatically sets the display so that the new
datum is on the probed surface. Input range 0 to
2999
New datum Q333 (absolute): Coordinate at which
the TNC should set the datum. Default setting = 0
input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Measured-value transfer (0, 1) Q303: Specify
whether the determined datum is to be saved in the
datum table or in the preset table:
-1: Do not use! Is entered by the TNC when old
programs are read in (See "Characteristics common
to all touch probe cycles for datum setting")
0: Write determined datum in the active datum
table. The reference system is the active workpiece
coordinate system
1: Write the measured datum into the preset table.
The reference system is the machine coordinate
system (REF system).

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 463

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.14 Example: Datum setting in center of a circular segment and on top
surface of workpiece

16.14 Example: Datum setting in center of a

circular segment and on top surface of
workpiece

0 BEGIN PGM CYC413 MM

1 TOOL CALL 69 Z Call tool 0 to define the touch probe axis
2 TCH PROBE 413 DATUM OUTSIDE CIRCLE
Q321=+25 ;CENTER 1ST AXIS Center of circle: X coordinate
Q322=+25 ;CENTER 2ND AXIS Center of circle: Y coordinate
Q262=30 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER Circle diameter
Q325=+90 ;STARTING ANGLE Polar coordinate angle for 1st touch point
Q247=+45 ;STEPPING ANGLE Stepping angle for calculating the starting points 2 to 4
Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT Coordinate in the touch probe axis in which the
measurement is made
Q320=2 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE Safety clearance in addition to SET_UP column
Q260=+10 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT Height in the touch probe axis at which the probe can
traverse without collision
Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE Do not move to clearance height between measuring points
Q305=0 ;NO. IN TABLE Set display
Q331=+0 ;DATUM Set the display in X to 0
Q332=+10 ;DATUM Set the display in Y to 10
Q303=+0 ;MEAS. VALUE TRANSFER Without function, since display is to be set
Q381=1 ;PROBE IN TS AXIS Also set datum in the touch probe axis
Q382=+25 ;1ST CO. FOR TS AXIS X coordinate of touch point
Q383=+25 ;2ND CO. FOR TS AXIS Y coordinate of touch point
Q384=+25 ;3RD CO. FOR TS AXIS Z coordinate of touch point
Q333=+0 ;DATUM Set the display in Z to 0
Q423=4 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS Measure circle with 4 probes
Q365=0 ;TYPE OF TRAVERSE Move on circular path between measuring points
3 CALL PGM 35K47 Call part program
4 END PGM CYC413 MM

464 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

16
Example: Datum setting on top surface of workpiece and in center 16.15
of a bolt hole circle

16.15 Example: Datum setting on top surface

of workpiece and in center of a bolt
hole circle
The measured bolt hole center shall be written in the
preset table so that it may be used at a later time.

0 BEGIN PGM CYC416 MM

1 TOOL CALL 69 Z Call tool 0 to define the touch probe axis
2 TCH PROBE 417 DATUM IN TS AXIS Cycle definition for datum setting in the touch probe axis
Q263=+7.5 ;1ST POINT 1ST AXIS Touch point: X coordinate
Q264=+7.5 ;1ST POINT 2ND AXIS Touch point: Y coordinate
Q294=+25 ;1ST POINT 3RD AXIS Touch point: Z coordinate
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE Safety clearance in addition to SET_UP column
Q260=+50 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT Height in the touch probe axis at which the probe can
traverse without collision
Q305=1 ;NO. IN TABLE Write Z coordinate in line 1
Q333=+0 ;DATUM Set touch-probe axis to 0
Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE TRANSFER In the preset table PRESET.PR, save the calculated datum
referenced to the machine-based coordinate system (REF
system)
3 TCH PROBE 416 DATUM CIRCLE CENTER
Q273=+35 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS Center of the bolt hole circle: X coordinate
Q274=+35 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS Center of the bolt hole circle: Y coordinate
Q262=50 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER Diameter of the bolt hole circle
Q291=+90 ;ANGLE OF 1ST HOLE Polar coordinate angle for 1st hole center 1
Q292=+180 ;ANGLE OF 2ND HOLE Polar coordinate angle for 2nd hole center 2
Q293=+270 ;ANGLE OF 3RD HOLE Polar coordinate angle for 3rd hole center 3
Q261=+15 ;MEASURING HEIGHT Coordinate in the touch probe axis in which the
measurement is made
Q260=+10 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT Height in the touch probe axis at which the probe can
traverse without collision
Q305=1 ;NO. IN TABLE Enter center of bolt hole circle (X and Y) in line 1
Q331=+0 ;DATUM
Q332=+0 ;DATUM

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 465

16 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Datum Setting
16.15 Example: Datum setting on top surface of workpiece and in center
of a bolt hole circle

Q303=+1 ;MEAS. VALUE TRANSFER In the preset table PRESET.PR, save the calculated datum
referenced to the machine-based coordinate system (REF
system)
Q381=0 ;PROBE IN TS AXIS Do not set a datum in the touch probe axis
Q382=+0 ;1ST CO. FOR TS AXIS No function
Q383=+0 ;2ND CO. FOR TS AXIS No function
Q384=+0 ;3RD CO. FOR TS AXIS No function
Q333=+0 ;DATUM No function
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE Safety clearance in addition to SET_UP column
4 CYCL DEF 247 DATUM SETTING Activate new preset with Cycle 247
Q339=1 ;DATUM NUMBER
6 CALL PGM 35KLZ Call part program
7 END PGM CYC416 MM

466 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17 Touch Probe
Cycles: Automatic
Workpiece
Inspection
17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.1 Fundamentals

17.1 Fundamentals

Overview

When running touch probe cycles, Cycle 8 MIRROR

IMAGE, Cycle 11 SCALING and Cycle 26 AXIS-
SPECIFIC SCALING must not be active.
HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of
the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are
used.

The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine

tool builder for the use of a 3-D touch probe.
Refer to your machine manual.

The TNC offers twelve cycles for measuring workpieces

automatically.
Cycle Soft key Page
0 REFERENCE PLANE 474
Measuring a coordinate in a
selectable axis
1 POLAR DATUM PLANE 475
Measuring a point in a probing
direction
420 MEASURE ANGLE 476
Measuring an angle in the working
plane
421 MEASURE HOLE 479
Measuring the position and diameter
of a hole
422 MEASURE CIRCLE OUTSIDE 482
Measuring the position and diameter
of a circular stud
423 MEASURE RECTANGLE INSIDE 485
Measuring the position, length and
width of a rectangular pocket
424 MEASURE RECTANGLE 489
OUTSIDE
Measuring the position, length and
width of a rectangular stud
425 MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH 492
(2nd soft-key level) Measuring slot
width
426 MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH 495
(2nd soft-key row) Measuring the
width of a ridge

468 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
Fundamentals 17.1

Cycle Soft key Page

427 MEASURE COORDINATE 498
(2nd soft-key row) Measuring any
coordinate in a selectable axis
430 MEASURE BOLT HOLE CIRCLE 501
(2nd soft-key row) Measuring
position and diameter of a bolt hole
circle
431 MEASURE PLANE 504
(2nd soft-key row) Measuring the A
and B axis angles of a plane

Recording the results of measurement

For all cycles in which you automatically measure workpieces (with
the exception of Cycles 0 and 1), you can have the TNC record
the measurement results. In the respective probing cycle you can
define if the TNC is to
Save the measuring log to a file
Interrupt program run and display the measuring log on the
screen
Create no measuring log

If you want to save the measuring log to a file, the TNC, by default,
saves the data as an ASCII file in the directory TNC:\..

Use the HEIDENHAIN data transfer software

TNCRemo if you wish to output the measuring log
over the data interface.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 469

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.1 Fundamentals

Example: Measuring log for touch probe cycle 421:

Measuring log for Probing Cycle 421 Hole Measuring

Date: 30-06-2005
Time: 6:55:04
Measuring program: TNC:\GEH35712\CHECK1.H

Nominal values:
Center in reference axis: 50.0000
Center in minor axis: 65.0000
Diameter: 12.0000

Given limit values:

Maximum limit for center in reference axis: 50.1000
Minimum limit for center in reference axis: 49.9000
Maximum limit for center in minor axis: 65.1000

Minimum limit for center in minor axis: 64.9000

Maximum dimension for hole: 12.0450
Minimum dimension for hole: 12.0000

Actual values:
Center in reference axis: 50.0810
Center in minor axis: 64.9530
Diameter: 12.0259

Deviations:
Center in reference axis: 0.0810
Center in minor axis: -0.0470
Diameter: 0.0259

Further measuring results: Measuring -5.0000

height:

End of measuring log

470 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
Fundamentals 17.1

Measurement results in Q parameters

The TNC saves the measurement results of the respective touch
probe cycle in the globally effective Q parameters Q150 to Q160.
Deviations from the nominal value are saved in the parameters
Q161 to Q166. Note the table of result parameters listed with
every cycle description.
During cycle definition the TNC also shows the result parameters
for the respective cycle in a help graphic (see figure at upper right).
The highlighted result parameter belongs to that input parameter.

Classification of results
For some cycles you can inquire the status of measuring results
through the globally effective Q parameters Q180 to Q182.
Class of results Parameter value
Measurement results are within Q180 = 1
tolerance
Rework is required Q181 = 1
Scrap Q182 = 1
The TNC sets the rework or scrap marker as soon as one of the
measuring values falls outside of tolerance. To determine which
of the measuring results lies outside of tolerance, check the
measuring log, or compare the respective measuring results (Q150
to Q160) with their limit values.
In Cycle 427 the TNC assumes that you are measuring an outside
dimension (stud). However, you can correct the status of the
measurement by entering the correct maximum and minimum
dimension together with the probing direction.

The TNC also sets the status markers if you have not
defined any tolerance values or maximum/minimum
dimensions.

Tolerance monitoring
For most of the cycles for workpiece inspection you can have the
TNC perform tolerance monitoring. This requires that you define
the necessary limit values during cycle definition. If you do not
wish to monitor for tolerances, simply leave the 0 (the default
value) in the monitoring parameters.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 471

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.1 Fundamentals

Tool monitoring
For some cycles for workpiece inspection you can have the TNC
perform tool monitoring. The TNC then monitors whether
The tool radius should be compensated because of the
deviations from the nominal value (values in Q16x).
The deviations from the nominal value (values in Q16x) are
greater than the tool breakage tolerance.
Tool compensation

This function works only:

If the tool table is active.
If tool monitoring is switched on in the cycle
(enter a tool name or Q330 unequal to 0). Select
the tool name input by soft key. The TNC no
longer displays the right single quotation mark.

If you perform several compensation measurements,

the TNC adds the respective measured deviation to
the value stored in the tool table.

The TNC always compensates the tool radius in the DR column of

the tool table, even if the measured deviation lies within the given
tolerance. You can inquire whether re-working is necessary via
parameter Q181 in the NC program (Q181=1: must be reworked).
For Cycle 427:
If an axis of the active working plane is defined as measuring
axis (Q272 = 1 or 2), the TNC compensates the tool radius as
described above. From the defined traversing direction (Q267)
the TNC determines the direction of compensation.
If the touch probe axis is defined as measuring axis (Q272 = 3),
the TNC compensates the tool length.

472 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
Fundamentals 17.1

Tool breakage monitoring

This function works only:

If the tool table is active.
If tool monitoring is switched on in the cycle
(enter Q330 not equal to 0).
If the breakage tolerance RBREAK for the tool
number entered in the table is greater than 0 (see
also the User's Manual, section 5.2 "Tool Data").

The TNC will output an error message and stop program run if the
measured deviation is greater than the breakage tolerance of the
tool. At the same time the tool will be deactivated in the tool table
(column TL = L).

Reference system for measurement results

The TNC transfers all the measurement results to the result
parameters and the log file in the active coordinate system, or
as the case may be, the shifted and/or rotated/tilted coordinate
system.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 473

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.2 DATUM PLANE (Cycle 0, DIN/ISO: G55)

17.2 DATUM PLANE (Cycle 0, DIN/ISO: G55)

Cycle run
1 The touch probe moves at rapid traverse (value from FMAX
column) to the starting position 1 programmed in the cycle.
2 Then the touch probe runs the probing process at the probing
feed rate (column F). The probing direction is defined in the
cycle.
3 After the TNC has saved the position, the probe retracts to
the starting point and saves the measured coordinate in a
Q parameter. The TNC also stores the coordinates of the
touch probe position at the time of the triggering signal in the
parameters Q115 to Q119. For the values in these parameters
the TNC does not account for the stylus length and radius.

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
Pre-position the touch probe in order to avoid a
collision when the programmed pre-positioning point
is approached.

Cycle parameters
Parameter number for result: Enter the number NC blocks
of the Q parameter to which you want to assign the 67 TCH PROBE 0.0 REF. PLANE Q5 X-
coordinate. Input range 0 to 1999
68 TCH PROBE 0.1 X+5 Y+0 Z-5
Probing axis/Probing direction: Enter the probing
axis with the axis selection keys or ASCII keyboard
and the algebraic sign for the probing direction.
Confirm your entry with the ENT key. Input range:
All NC axes
Nominal position value: Use the axis selection
keys or the ASCII keyboard to enter all coordinates
of the nominal pre-positioning point values for
the touch probe. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
To conclude the input, press the ENT key.

474 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
POLAR DATUM PLANE (Cycle 1) 17.3

17.3 POLAR DATUM PLANE (Cycle 1)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 1 measures any position on the workpiece in
any direction.
1 The touch probe moves at rapid traverse (value from FMAX
column) to the starting position 1 programmed in the cycle.
2 Then the touch probe runs the probing process at the
probing feed rate (column F). During probing the TNC moves
simultaneously in two axes (depending on the probing angle).
The probing direction is defined by the polar angle entered in
the cycle.
3 After the TNC has saved the position, the probe returns to the
starting point. The TNC also stores the coordinates of the touch
probe position at the time of the triggering signal in parameters
Q115 to Q119.

Please note while programming:

Danger of collision!
Pre-position the touch probe in order to avoid a
collision when the programmed pre-positioning point
is approached.

The probing axis defined in the cycle specifies the

probing plane:
Probing axis X: X/Y plane
Probing axis Y: Y/Z plane
Probing axis Z: Z/X plane

Cycle parameters
Probing axis: Enter the probing axis with the axis NC blocks
selection keys or ASCII keyboard. Confirm your 67 TCH PROBE 1.0 POLAR REFERENCE
entry with the ENT key. Input range: X, Y or Z PLANE
Probing angle: Angle, measured from the probing 68 TCH PROBE 1.1 X ANGLE: +30
axis, at which the touch probe is to move. Input 69 TCH PROBE 1.2 X+5 Y+0 Z-5
range -180.0000 to 180.0000
Nominal position value: Use the axis selection
keys or the ASCII keyboard to enter all coordinates
of the nominal pre-positioning point values for
the touch probe. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
To conclude the input, press the ENT key.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 475

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.4 MEASURE ANGLE (Cycle 420, DIN/ISO: G420)

17.4 MEASURE ANGLE (Cycle 420, DIN/ISO:

G420)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 420 measures the angle that any straight
surface on the workpiece describes with respect to the reference
axis of the working plane.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction
opposite to the defined traverse direction.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F).
3 Then the touch probe moves to the next starting position 2 and
from there probes the second position.
4 The TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and
saves the measured angle in the following Q parameter:

Parameter number Meaning

Q150 The measured angle is referenced to
the reference axis of the machining
plane.

Please note while programming:

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
If touch probe axis = measuring axis, set Q263
equal to Q265 if the angle about the A axis is to be
measured; set Q263 not equal to Q265 if the angle is
to be measured about the B axis.

476 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE ANGLE (Cycle 420, DIN/ISO: G420) 17.4

Cycle parameters
1st meas. point 1st axis Q263 (absolute):
Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference
axis of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999
to 99999.9999
1st meas. point 2nd axis Q264 (absolute):
Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis
of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
2nd meas. point 1st axis Q265 (absolute):
Coordinate of the second touch point in the
reference axis of the working plane. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
2nd meas. point 2nd axis Q266 (absolute):
Coordinate of the second touch point in the minor
axis of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999
to 99999.9999
Measuring axis Q272: Axis in which the
measurement is to be made:
1: Principal axis = measuring axis
2: Secondary axis = measuring axis
3: Touch probe axis = measuring axis NC blocks
Traverse direction 1 Q267: Direction in which the 5 TCH PROBE 420 MEASURE ANGLE
probe is to approach the workpiece: Q263=+10 ;1ST POINT 1ST AXIS
-1: Negative Traverse direction
Q264=+10 ;1ST POINT 2ND AXIS
+1: Positive traverse direction
Q265=+15 ;2ND POINT 1ST AXIS
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (= Q266=+95 ;2ND POINT 2ND AXIS
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which Q272=1 ;MEASURING AXIS
the measurement is to be made. Input range Q267=-1 ;TRAVERSE DIRECTION
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input Q260=+10 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q301=1 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
Q281=1 ;MEASURING LOG

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 477

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.4 MEASURE ANGLE (Cycle 420, DIN/ISO: G420)

Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in

the touch probe axis at which no collision between
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition
of how the touch probe is to move between the
measuring points:
0: Move at measuring height between measuring
points
1: Move at clearance height between measuring
points
Measuring log Q281: Define whether the TNC
should create a measuring log:
0: Do not create a measuring log
1: Create a measuring log: The TNC saves the log
file TCHPR420.TXT as standard in the directory
TNC:\.
2: Interrupt program run and output measuring log
to the TNC screen. Resume program run with NC
Start.

478 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE HOLE (Cycle 421, DIN/ISO: G421) 17.5

17.5 MEASURE HOLE (Cycle 421, DIN/ISO:

G421)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 421 measures the center and diameter of a hole
(or circular pocket). If you define the corresponding tolerance values
in the cycle, the TNC makes a nominal-to-actual value comparison
and saves the deviation value in system parameters.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the
safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe
table.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F). The TNC derives the probing direction automatically
from the programmed starting angle.
3 Then the touch probe moves in a circular arc either at measuring
height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and
probes the second touch point.
4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to
starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points.
5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and saves the actual values and the deviations in the following
Q parameters:

Parameter number Meaning

Q151 Actual value of center in reference
axis
Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis
Q153 Actual value of diameter
Q161 Deviation at center of reference axis
Q162 Deviation at center of minor axis
Q163 Deviation from diameter

Please note while programming:

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
The smaller the angle, the less accurately the TNC
can calculate the hole dimensions. Minimum input
value: 5°

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 479

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.5 MEASURE HOLE (Cycle 421, DIN/ISO: G421)

Cycle parameters
Center in 1st axis Q273 (absolute): Center of the
hole in the reference axis of the working plane.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Center in 2nd axis Q274 (absolute value): Center
of the hole in the minor axis of the working plane.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Nominal diameter Q262: Enter the diameter of the
hole. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Starting angle Q325 (absolute): Angle between the
reference axis of the working plane and the first
touch point. Input range -360.000 to 360.000
Stepping angle Q247 (incremental): Angle between
two measuring points. The algebraic sign of the
stepping angle determines the direction of rotation
(negative = clockwise) in which the touch probe
moves to the next measuring point. If you wish to
probe a circular arc instead of a complete circle,
then program the stepping angle to be less than
90°. Input range -120.000 to 120.000
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261
NC blocks
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (=
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which 5 TCH PROBE 421 MEASURE HOLE
the measurement is to be made. Input range Q273=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q274=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional Q262=75 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input Q325=+0 ;STARTING ANGLE
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q247=+60 ;STEPPING ANGLE

Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT

the touch probe axis at which no collision between Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q301=1 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition
of how the touch probe is to move between the Q275=75.12;MAXIMUM DIMENSION
measuring points: Q276=74.95;MINIMUM DIMENSION
0: Move at measuring height between measuring
Q279=0.1 ;TOLERANCE 1ST
points CENTER
1: Move at clearance height between measuring
points Q280=0.1 ;TOLERANCE 2ND
CENTER
Maximum limit of size for hole Q275: Maximum Q281=1 ;MEASURING LOG
permissible diameter for the hole (circular pocket).
Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q309=0 ;PGM STOP IF ERROR
Q330=0 ;TOOL
Minimum limit of size for hole Q276: Minimum
permissible diameter for the hole (circular pocket). Q423=4 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS
Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q365=1 ;TYPE OF TRAVERSE
Tolerance for center 1st axis Q279: Permissible
position deviation in the reference axis of the
working plane. Input range 0 to 99999.9999

480 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE HOLE (Cycle 421, DIN/ISO: G421) 17.5

Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280: Permissible

position deviation in the minor axis of the working
plane. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Measuring log Q281: Define whether the TNC
should create a measuring log:
0: Do not create a measuring log
1: Create a measuring log: The TNC saves the log
file TCHPR421.TXT as standard in the directory
TNC:\.
2: Interrupt program run and output measuring log
to the TNC screen. Resume program run with NC
Start.
PGM stop if tolerance error Q309: Definition of
whether in the event of a violation of tolerance
limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output
an error message:
0: Do not interrupt program run, do not output an
error message
1: Interrupt program run and output an error
message
Tool for monitoring Q330: Definition of whether
the TNC is to monitor the tool (See "Tool
monitoring"). Input range 0 to 32767.9, alternatively
tool name with maximum of 16 characters
0: Monitoring inactive
>0: Tool number in the tool table TOOL.T
No. of measuring points (4/3) Q423: Specify
whether the TNC should measure the stud with 4 or
3 probing points:
4: Use 4 measuring points (default setting)
3: Use 3 measuring points
Type of traverse? Line=0/Arc=1 Q365: Definition
of the path function with which the tool is to move
between the measuring points if "traverse to
clearance height" (Q301=1) is active:
0: Move in a straight line between machining
operations
1: Move in a circular arc on the pitch circle diameter
between machining operations

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 481

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.6 MEASURE HOLE OUTSIDE (Cycle 422, DIN/ISO: G422)

17.6 MEASURE HOLE OUTSIDE (Cycle 422,

DIN/ISO: G422)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 422 measures the center and diameter of a
circular stud. If you define the corresponding tolerance values in
the cycle, the TNC makes a nominal-to-actual value comparison and
saves the deviation value in system parameters.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the
safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe
table.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F). The TNC derives the probing direction automatically
from the programmed starting angle.
3 Then the touch probe moves in a circular arc either at measuring
height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and
probes the second touch point.
4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to
starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points.
5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and saves the actual values and the deviations in the following
Q parameters:

Parameter number Meaning

Please note while programming:

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
The smaller the angle, the less accurately the TNC
can calculate the dimensions of the stud. Minimum
input value: 5°

482 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE HOLE OUTSIDE (Cycle 422, DIN/ISO: G422) 17.6

Cycle parameters
Center in 1st axis Q273 (absolute): Center of the
stud in the reference axis of the working plane.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Center in 2nd axis Q274 (absolute): Center of the
stud in the minor axis of the working plane. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Nominal diameter Q262: Enter the diameter of the
stud. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Starting angle Q325 (absolute): Angle between the
reference axis of the working plane and the first
touch point. Input range -360.0000 to 360.0000
Stepping angle Q247 (incremental): Angle between
two measuring points. The algebraic sign of the
stepping angle determines the direction of rotation
(negative = clockwise). If you wish to probe a
circular arc instead of a complete circle, then
program the stepping angle to be less than 90°.
Input range -120.0000 to 120.0000
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (=
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which NC blocks
the measurement is to be made. Input range
5 TCH PROBE 422 MEAS. CIRCLE
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 OUTSIDE
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional Q273=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q274=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q262=75 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
Q325=+90 ;STARTING ANGLE
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in
the touch probe axis at which no collision between Q247=+30 ;STEPPING ANGLE
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition
Q260=+10 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
of how the touch probe is to move between the
measuring points: Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
0: Move at measuring height between measuring Q275=35.15;MAXIMUM DIMENSION
points
Q276=34.9 ;MINIMUM DIMENSION
1: Move at clearance height between measuring
points Q279=0.05 ;TOLERANCE 1ST
CENTER
Maximum limit of size for stud Q277: Maximum
Q280=0.05 ;TOLERANCE 2ND
permissible diameter for the stud. Input range 0 to
CENTER
99999.9999
Q281=1 ;MEASURING LOG
Minimum limit of size for the stud Q278:
Q309=0 ;PGM STOP IF ERROR
Minimum permissible diameter for the stud. Input
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q330=0 ;TOOL

Tolerance for center 1st axis Q279: Permissible Q423=4 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS
position deviation in the reference axis of the Q365=1 ;TYPE OF TRAVERSE
working plane. Input range 0 to 99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 483

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.6 MEASURE HOLE OUTSIDE (Cycle 422, DIN/ISO: G422)

Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280: Permissible

position deviation in the minor axis of the working
plane. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Measuring log Q281: Define whether the TNC
should create a measuring log:
0: Do not create a measuring log
1: Create a measuring log: The TNC saves the log
file TCHPR422.TXT as standard in the directory
TNC:\.
2: Interrupt program run and output measuring log
to the TNC screen. Resume program run with NC
Start.
PGM stop if tolerance error Q309: Definition of
whether in the event of a violation of tolerance
limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output
an error message:
0: Do not interrupt program run, do not output an
error message
1: Interrupt program run and output an error
message
Tool for monitoring Q330: Definition of whether
the TNC is to monitor the tool (See "Tool
monitoring", page 472). Input range 0 to 32767.9,
alternatively tool name with maximum of 16
characters
0: Monitoring inactive
>0: Tool number in the tool table TOOL.T
No. of measuring points (4/3) Q423: Specify
whether the TNC should measure the stud with 4 or
3 probing points:
4: Use 4 measuring points (default setting)
3: Use 3 measuring points
Type of traverse? Line=0/Arc=1 Q365: Definition
of the path function with which the tool is to move
between the measuring points if "traverse to
clearance height" (Q301=1) is active:
0: Move in a straight line between machining
operations
1: Move in a circular arc on the pitch circle diameter
between machining operations

484 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE RECTANGLE INSIDE (Cycle 423, DIN/ISO: G423) 17.7

17.7 MEASURE RECTANGLE INSIDE

(Cycle 423, DIN/ISO: G423)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 423 finds the center, length and width of a
rectangular pocket. If you define the corresponding tolerance
values in the cycle, the TNC makes a nominal-to-actual value
comparison and saves the deviation value in system parameters.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the
safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe
table.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F).
3 Then the touch probe moves either paraxially at measuring
height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and
probes the second touch point.
4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to
starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points.
5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and saves the actual values and the deviations in the following
Q parameters:

Parameter number Meaning

Q151 Actual value of center in reference
axis
Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis
Q154 Actual value of length in the reference
axis
Q155 Actual value of length in the minor
axis
Q161 Deviation at center of reference axis
Q162 Deviation at center of minor axis
Q164 Deviation of side length in reference
axis
Q165 Deviation of side length in minor axis

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 485

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.7 MEASURE RECTANGLE INSIDE (Cycle 423, DIN/ISO: G423)

Please note while programming:

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
If the dimensions of the pocket and the safety
clearance do not permit pre-positioning in the
proximity of the touch points, the TNC always starts
probing from the center of the pocket. In this case
the touch probe does not return to the clearance
height between the four measuring points.

Cycle parameters
Center in 1st axis Q273 (absolute): Center of the
pocket in the reference axis of the working plane.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Center in 2nd axis Q274 (absolute): Center of the
pocket in the minor axis of the working plane. Input
range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
1st side length Q282: Pocket length, parallel to the
reference axis of the working plane. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
2nd side length Q283: Pocket length, parallel to the
minor axis of the working plane. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (=
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which
the measurement is to be made. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input
range 0 to 99999.9999

486 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE RECTANGLE INSIDE (Cycle 423, DIN/ISO: G423) 17.7

Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in NC blocks

the touch probe axis at which no collision between 5 TCH PROBE 423 MEAS. RECTAN.
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. INSIDE
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q273=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition Q274=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
of how the touch probe is to move between the
Q282=80 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH
measuring points:
0: Move at measuring height between measuring Q283=60 ;2ND SIDE LENGTH
points Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
1: Move at clearance height between measuring
points Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q260=+10 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Max. size limit 1st side length Q284: Maximum
permissible length of the pocket. Input range 0 to Q301=1 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
99999.9999 Q284=0 ;MAX. LIMIT 1ST SIDE
Min. size limit 1st side length Q285: Minimum Q285=0 ;MIN. LIMIT 1ST SIDE
permissible length of the pocket. Input range 0 to Q286=0 ;MAX. LIMIT 2ND SIDE
99999.9999
Q287=0 ;MIN. LIMIT 2ND SIDE
Max. size limit 2nd side length Q286: Maximum
Q279=0 ;TOLERANCE 1ST
permissible width of the pocket. Input range 0 to CENTER
99999.9999
Q280=0 ;TOLERANCE 2ND
Min. size limit 2nd side length Q287: Minimum CENTER
permissible width of the pocket. Input range 0 to Q281=1 ;MEASURING LOG
99999.9999
Q309=0 ;PGM STOP IF ERROR
Tolerance for center 1st axis Q279: Permissible
Q330=0 ;TOOL
position deviation in the reference axis of the
working plane. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280: Permissible
position deviation in the minor axis of the working
plane. Input range 0 to 99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 487

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.7 MEASURE RECTANGLE INSIDE (Cycle 423, DIN/ISO: G423)

Measuring log Q281: Define whether the TNC

should create a measuring log:
0: Do not create a measuring log
1: Create a measuring log: The TNC saves the log
file TCHPR423.TXT as standard in the directory
TNC:\.
2: Interrupt program run and output measuring log
to the TNC screen. Resume program run with NC
Start.
PGM stop if tolerance error Q309: Definition of
whether in the event of a violation of tolerance
limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output
an error message:
0: Do not interrupt program run, do not output an
error message
1: Interrupt program run and output an error
message
Tool for monitoring Q330: Definition of whether
the TNC is to monitor the tool (See "Tool
monitoring", page 472). Input range 0 to 32767.9,
alternatively tool name with maximum of 16
characters
0: Monitoring inactive
>0: Tool number in the tool table TOOL.T

488 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE RECTANGLE OUTSIDE (Cycle 424, DIN/ISO: G424) 17.8

17.8 MEASURE RECTANGLE OUTSIDE

(Cycle 424, DIN/ISO: G424)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 424 finds the center, length and width of a
rectangular stud. If you define the corresponding tolerance values
in the cycle, the TNC makes a nominal-to-actual value comparison
and saves the deviation value in system parameters.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the
safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe
table.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F).
3 Then the touch probe moves either paraxially at measuring
height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and
probes the second touch point.
4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to
starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points.
5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and saves the actual values and the deviations in the following
Q parameters:

Parameter number Meaning

Please note while programming:

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 489

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.8 MEASURE RECTANGLE OUTSIDE (Cycle 424, DIN/ISO: G424)

Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition Q274=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS

of how the touch probe is to move between the Q282=75 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH
measuring points:
Q283=35 ;2ND SIDE LENGTH
0: Move at measuring height between measuring
points Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
1: Move at clearance height between measuring Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
points
Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Max. size limit 1st side length Q284: Maximum
Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
permissible length of the stud. Input range 0 to
99999.9999 Q284=75.1 ;MAX. LIMIT 1ST SIDE
Q285=74.9 ;MIN. LIMIT 1ST SIDE
Min. size limit 1st side length Q285: Minimum
permissible length of the stud. Input range 0 to Q286=35 ;MAX. LIMIT 2ND SIDE
99999.9999 Q287=34.95;MIN. LIMIT 2ND SIDE
Max. size limit 2nd side length Q286: Maximum Q279=0.1 ;TOLERANCE 1ST
permissible width of the stud. Input range 0 to CENTER
99999.9999 Q280=0.1 ;TOLERANCE 2ND
Min. size limit 2nd side length Q287: Minimum CENTER
permissible width of the stud. Input range 0 to Q281=1 ;MEASURING LOG
99999.9999 Q309=0 ;PGM STOP IF ERROR
Tolerance for center 1st axis Q279: Permissible Q330=0 ;TOOL
position deviation in the reference axis of the
working plane. Input range 0 to 99999.9999

490 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE RECTANGLE OUTSIDE (Cycle 424, DIN/ISO: G424) 17.8

Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280: Permissible

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 491

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.9 MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH (Cycle 425, DIN/ISO: G425)

17.9 MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH (Cycle 425,

DIN/ISO: G425)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 425 measures the position and width of a slot
(or pocket). If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the
cycle, the TNC makes a nominal-to-actual value comparison and
saves the deviation value in a system parameter.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the
safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe
table.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F). 1. The first probing is always in the positive direction
of the programmed axis.
3 If you enter an offset for the second measurement, the TNC
then moves the touch probe (if required, at clearance height)
to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point.
If the nominal length is large, the TNC moves the touch probe
to the second touch point at rapid traverse. If you do not enter
an offset, the TNC measures the width in the exact opposite
direction.
4 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and saves the actual values and the deviation value in the
following Q parameters:

Parameter number Meaning

Q156 Actual value of measured length
Q157 Actual value of the centerline
Q166 Deviation of the measured length

Please note while programming:

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.

492 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH (Cycle 425, DIN/ISO: G425) 17.9

Cycle parameters
Starting point in 1st axis Q328 (absolute): Starting
point for probing in the reference axis of the working
plane. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Starting point in 2nd axis Q329 (absolute): Starting
point for probing in the minor axis of the working
plane. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Offset for 2nd measurement Q310 (incremental):
Distance by which the touch probe is displaced
before the second measurement. If you enter 0, the
TNC does not offset the touch probe. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Measuring axis Q272: Axis in the working plane in
which the measurement is to be made:
1: Principal axis = measuring axis
2: Secondary axis = measuring axis
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (=
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which NC blocks
the measurement is to be made. Input range
5 TCH PROBE 425 MEASURE INSIDE
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999 WIDTH
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in Q328=+75 ;STARTNG PNT 1ST AXIS
the touch probe axis at which no collision between
Q329=-12.5;STARTNG PNT 2ND
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. AXIS
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q310=+0 ;OFFS. 2ND
Nominal length Q311: Nominal value of the length MEASUREMNT
to be measured. Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q272=1 ;MEASURING AXIS
Maximum dimension Q288: Maximum permissible Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
length. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Q260=+10 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Minimum dimension Q289: Minimum permissible Q311=25 ;NOMINAL LENGTH
length. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Q288=25.05;MAXIMUM DIMENSION
Measuring log Q281: Define whether the TNC
Q289=25 ;MINIMUM DIMENSION
should create a measuring log:
0: Do not create a measuring log Q281=1 ;MEASURING LOG
1: Create a measuring log: The TNC saves the log Q309=0 ;PGM STOP IF ERROR
file TCHPR425.TXT as standard in the directory
Q330=0 ;TOOL
TNC:\.
2: Interrupt program run and output measuring log Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
to the TNC screen. Resume program run with NC Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
Start.
PGM stop if tolerance error Q309: Definition of
whether in the event of a violation of tolerance
limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output
an error message:
0: Do not interrupt program run, do not output an
error message
1: Interrupt program run and output an error
message

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 493

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.9 MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH (Cycle 425, DIN/ISO: G425)

Tool for monitoring Q330: Definition of whether

the TNC is to monitor the tool (See "Tool
monitoring"). Input range 0 to 32767.9, alternatively
tool name with maximum of 16 characters
0: Monitoring inactive
>0: Tool number in the tool table TOOL.T
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table), and
is only effective when the datum is probed in the
touch probe axis. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition
of how the touch probe is to move between the
measuring points:
0: Move at measuring height between measuring
points
1: Move at clearance height between measuring
points

494 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH (Cycle 426, DIN/ISO: G426) 17.10

17.10 MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH (Cycle 426,

DIN/ISO: G426)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 426 measures the position and width of a ridge.
If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle, the
TNC makes a nominal-to-actual value comparison and saves the
deviation value in system parameters.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the
safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe
table.
2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height
and runs the first probing process at the probing feed rate
(column F). 1. The first probing is always in the negative
direction of the programmed axis.
3 Then the touch probe moves at clearance height to the next
starting position and probes the second touch point.
4 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and saves the actual values and the deviation value in the
following Q parameters:

Parameter number Meaning

Q156 Actual value of measured length
Q157 Actual value of the centerline
Q166 Deviation of the measured length

Please note while programming:

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 495

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.10 MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH (Cycle 426, DIN/ISO: G426)

Cycle parameters
1st meas. point 1st axis Q263 (absolute):
Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference
axis of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999
to 99999.9999
1st meas. point 2nd axis Q264 (absolute):
Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis
of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
2nd meas. point 1st axis Q265 (absolute):
Coordinate of the second touch point in the
reference axis of the working plane. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
2nd meas. point 2nd axis Q266 (absolute):
Coordinate of the second touch point in the minor
axis of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999
to 99999.9999
Measuring axis Q272: Axis in the working plane in
which the measurement is to be made:
1: Principal axis = measuring axis
2: Secondary axis = measuring axis
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 NC blocks
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (= 5 TCH PROBE 426 MEASURE RIDGE
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which WIDTH
the measurement is to be made. Input range Q263=+50 ;1ST POINT 1ST AXIS
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q264=+25 ;1ST POINT 2ND AXIS
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional
Q265=+50 ;2ND POINT 1ST AXIS
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input Q266=+85 ;2ND POINT 2ND AXIS
range 0 to 99999.9999 Q272=2 ;MEASURING AXIS
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
the touch probe axis at which no collision between Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Q311=45 ;NOMINAL LENGTH
Nominal length Q311: Nominal value of the length
to be measured. Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q288=45 ;MAXIMUM DIMENSION
Q289=44.95;MINIMUM DIMENSION
Maximum dimension Q288: Maximum permissible
length. Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q281=1 ;MEASURING LOG

Minimum dimension Q289: Minimum permissible Q309=0 ;PGM STOP IF ERROR

length. Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q330=0 ;TOOL

496 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH (Cycle 426, DIN/ISO: G426) 17.10

Measuring log Q281: Define whether the TNC

should create a measuring log:
0: Do not create a measuring log
1: Create a measuring log: The TNC saves the log
file TCHPR426.TXT as standard in the directory
TNC:\.
2: Interrupt program run and output measuring log
to the TNC screen. Resume program run with NC
Start.
PGM stop if tolerance error Q309: Definition of
whether in the event of a violation of tolerance
limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output
an error message:
0: Do not interrupt program run, do not output an
error message
1: Interrupt program run and output an error
message
Tool for monitoring Q330: Definition of whether
the TNC is to monitor the tool (See "Tool
monitoring", page 472). Input range 0 to 32767.9,
alternatively tool name with maximum of 16
characters
0: Monitoring inactive
>0: Tool number in the tool table TOOL.T

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 497

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.11 MEASURE COORDINATE (Cycle 427, DIN/ISO: G427)

17.11 MEASURE COORDINATE (Cycle 427,

DIN/ISO: G427)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 427 finds a coordinate in a selectable axis
and saves the value in a system parameter. If you define the
corresponding tolerance values in the cycle, the TNC makes a
nominal-to-actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in
system parameters.
1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse (value from
FMAX column) following the positioning logic (See "Executing
touch probe cycles", page 392) to the starting point 1. The TNC
offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction
opposite to the defined traverse direction.
2 Then the TNC positions the touch probe to the entered touch
point 1 in the working plane and measures the actual value in
the selected axis.
3 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance
height and saves the measured coordinate in the following Q
parameter.

Parameter number Meaning

Q160 Measured coordinate

Please note while programming:

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.

498 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE COORDINATE (Cycle 427, DIN/ISO: G427) 17.11

Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in Q261=+5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT

the touch probe axis at which no collision between Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q272=3 ;MEASURING AXIS
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q267=-1 ;TRAVERSE DIRECTION
Measuring log Q281: Define whether the TNC
Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
should create a measuring log:
0: Do not create a measuring log Q281=1 ;MEASURING LOG
1: Create a measuring log: The TNC saves the log Q288=5.1 ;MAXIMUM DIMENSION
file TCHPR427.TXT as standard in the directory
Q289=4.95 ;MINIMUM DIMENSION
TNC:\.
2: Interrupt program run and output measuring log Q309=0 ;PGM STOP IF ERROR
to the TNC screen. Resume program run with NC Q330=0 ;TOOL
Start.
Maximum limit of size Q288: Maximum
permissible measured value. Input range 0 to
99999.9999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 499

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.11 MEASURE COORDINATE (Cycle 427, DIN/ISO: G427)

Minimum limit of size Q289: Minimum permissible

measured value. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
PGM stop if tolerance error Q309: Definition of
whether in the event of a violation of tolerance
limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output
an error message:
0: Do not interrupt program run, do not output an
error message
1: Interrupt program run and output an error
message
Tool for monitoring Q330: Definition of whether
the TNC is to monitor the tool (See "Tool
monitoring", page 472). Input range 0 to 32767.9,
alternatively tool name with maximum of 16
characters
0: Monitoring inactive
>0: Tool number in the tool table TOOL.T

500 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE BOLT HOLE CIRCLE (Cycle 430, DIN/ISO: G430) 17.12

17.12 MEASURE BOLT HOLE CIRCLE

(Cycle 430, DIN/ISO: G430)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 430 finds the center and diameter of a bolt
hole circle by probing three holes. If you define the corresponding
tolerance values in the cycle, the TNC makes a nominal-to-
actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in system
parameters.
1 Following the positioning logic (See "Executing touch probe
cycles", page 392), the control positions the touch probe at rapid
traverse (value from column FMAX) to the center of the first hole
1.
2 Then the probe moves to the entered measuring height and
probes four points to find the first hole center.
3 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the
position entered as center of the second hole 2.
4 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring
height and probes four points to find the second hole center.
5 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the
position entered as center of the third hole 3.
6 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring
height and probes four points to find the third hole center.
7 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height
and saves the actual values and the deviations in the following
Q parameters:

Parameter number Meaning

Q151 Actual value of center in reference
axis
Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis
Q153 Actual value of bolt hole circle
diameter
Q161 Deviation at center of reference axis
Q162 Deviation at center of minor axis
Q163 Deviation of bolt hole circle diameter

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 501

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.12 MEASURE BOLT HOLE CIRCLE (Cycle 430, DIN/ISO: G430)

Please note while programming:

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
Cycle 430 only monitors for tool breakage; there is
no automatic tool compensation.

Cycle parameters
Center in 1st axis Q273 (absolute): Bolt hole circle
center (nominal value) in the reference axis of
the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
Center in 2nd axis Q274 (absolute): Bolt hole
circle center (nominal value) in the minor axis of
the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
Nominal diameter Q262: Enter the bolt hole circle
diameter. Input range 0 to 99999.9999
Angle of 1st hole Q291 (absolute): Polar coordinate
angle of the first hole center in the working plane.
Input range -360.0000 to 360.0000
Angle of 2nd hole Q292 (absolute): Polar coordinate
angle of the second hole center in the working
plane. Input range -360.0000 to 360.0000
NC blocks
Angle of 3rd hole Q293 (absolute): Polar coordinate
angle of the third hole center in the working plane. 5 TCH PROBE 430 MEAS. BOLT HOLE
Input range -360.0000 to 360.0000 CIRC
Q273=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261
(absolute): Coordinate of the ball tip center (= Q274=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
touch point) in the touch probe axis in which Q262=80 ;NOMINAL DIAMETER
the measurement is to be made. Input range
Q291=+0 ;ANGLE OF 1ST HOLE
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q292=+90 ;ANGLE OF 2ND HOLE
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in
the touch probe axis at which no collision between Q293=+180 ;ANGLE OF 3RD HOLE
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur. Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Q260=+10 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Maximum limit of size Q288: Maximum Q288=80.1 ;MAXIMUM DIMENSION
permissible diameter of bolt hole circle. Input range
Q289=79.9 ;MINIMUM DIMENSION
0 to 99999.9999
Q279=0.15 ;TOLERANCE 1ST
Minimum limit of size Q289: Minimum permissible CENTER
diameter of bolt hole circle. Input range 0 to
99999.9999 Q280=0.15 ;TOLERANCE 2ND
CENTER
Tolerance for center 1st axis Q279: Permissible Q281=1 ;MEASURING LOG
position deviation in the reference axis of the
working plane. Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q309=0 ;PGM STOP IF ERROR
Q330=0 ;TOOL
Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280: Permissible
position deviation in the minor axis of the working
plane. Input range 0 to 99999.9999

502 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE BOLT HOLE CIRCLE (Cycle 430, DIN/ISO: G430) 17.12

Measuring log Q281: Define whether the TNC

should create a measuring log:
0: Do not create a measuring log
1: Create a measuring log: The TNC saves the log
file TCHPR430.TXT as standard in the directory
TNC:\.
2: Interrupt program run and output measuring log
to the TNC screen. Resume program run with NC
Start.
PGM stop if tolerance error Q309: Definition of
whether in the event of a violation of tolerance
limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output
an error message:
0: Do not interrupt program run, do not output an
error message
1: Interrupt program run and output an error
message
Tool number for monitoring Q330: Definition of
whether the TNC is to monitor for tool breakage
(See "Tool monitoring", page 472): Input range 0 to
32767.9, alternatively tool name with maximum of
16 characters
0: Monitoring inactive
>0: Tool number in the tool table TOOL.T

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 503

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.13 MEASURE PLANE (Cycle 431, DIN/ISO: G431)

17.13 MEASURE PLANE (Cycle 431, DIN/ISO:

G431)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 431 finds the angle of a plane by measuring
three points. It saves the measured values in system parameters.
1 Following the positioning logic (See "Executing touch probe
cycles", page 392), the TNC positions the touch probe at rapid
traverse (value from FMAX column) to the programmed starting
point 1 and measures the first touch point of the plane. The TNC
offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction
opposite to the direction of probing.
2 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then moves
in the working plane to starting point 2 and measures the actual
value of the second touch point of the plane.
3 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then moves
in the working plane to starting point 3 and measures the actual
value of the third touch point of the plane.
4 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance
height and saves the measured angle values in the following Q
parameters:

Parameter number Meaning

Q158 Projection angle of the A axis
Q159 Projection angle of the B axis
Q170 Spatial angle A
Q171 Spatial angle B
Q172 Spatial angle C
Q173 to Q175 Measured values in the touch probe
axis (first to third measurement)

504 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
MEASURE PLANE (Cycle 431, DIN/ISO: G431) 17.13

Please note while programming:

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
For the TNC to be able to calculate the angular
values, the three measuring points must not be
positioned on one straight line.
The spatial angles that are needed for tilting the
working plane are saved in parameters Q170 – Q172.
With the first two measuring points you also specify
the direction of the reference axis when tilting the
working plane.
The third measuring point determines the direction
of the tool axis. Define the third measuring point in
the direction of the positive Y axis to ensure that the
position of the tool axis in a clockwise coordinate
system is correct.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 505

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.13 MEASURE PLANE (Cycle 431, DIN/ISO: G431)

3rd meas. point 1st axis Q296 (absolute): Q263=+20 ;1ST POINT 1ST AXIS
Coordinate of the third touch point in the reference Q264=+20 ;1ST POINT 2ND AXIS
axis of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999
to 99999.9999 Q294=-10 ;1ST POINT 3RD AXIS
Q265=+50 ;2ND POINT 1ST AXIS
3rd meas. point 2nd axis Q297 (absolute):
Coordinate of the third touch point in the minor axis Q266=+80 ;2ND POINT 2ND AXIS
of the working plane. Input range -99999.9999 to Q295=+0 ;2ND POINT 3RD AXIS
99999.9999
Q296=+90 ;3RD POINT 1ST AXIS
3rd meas. point 3rd axis Q298 (absolute): Q297=+35 ;3RD POINT 2ND AXIS
Coordinate of the third touch point in the touch
probe axis. Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999 Q298=+12 ;3RD POINT 3RD AXIS
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional
distance between measuring point and ball tip. Q260=+5 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input Q281=1 ;MEASURING LOG
range 0 to 99999.9999
Clearance height Q260 (absolute): Coordinate in
the touch probe axis at which no collision between
touch probe and workpiece (fixtures) can occur.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Measuring log Q281: Define whether the TNC
should create a measuring log:
0: Do not create a measuring log
1: Create a measuring log: The TNC saves the log
file TCHPR431.TXT as standard in the directory
TNC:\.
2: Interrupt program run and output measuring log
to the TNC screen. Resume program run with NC
Start.

506 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
Programming Examples 17.14

17.14 Programming Examples

Example: Measuring and reworking a rectangular stud

Program sequence
Roughing with 0.5 mm finishing allowance
Measuring
Rectangular stud finishing in accordance with the
measured values

0 BEGIN PGM BEAMS MM

1 TOOL CALL 69 Z Tool call for roughing
2 L Z+100 R0 FMAX Retract the tool
3 FN 0: Q1 = +81 Length of rectangle in X (roughing dimension)
4 FN 0: Q2 = +61 Length of rectangle in Y (roughing dimension)
5 CALL LBL 1 Call subprogram for machining
6 L Z+100 R0 FMAX Retract the tool, change the tool
7 TOOL CALL 99 Z Call the touch probe
8 TCH PROBE 424 MEAS. RECTAN. OUTS. Measure the rough-milled rectangle
Q273=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Q274=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
Q282=80 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH Nominal length in X (final dimension)
Q283=60 ;2ND SIDE LENGTH Nominal length in Y (final dimension)
Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q260=+30 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
Q284=0 ;MAX. LIMIT 1ST SIDE Input values for tolerance checking not required
Q285=0 ;MIN. LIMIT 1ST SIDE
Q286=0 ;MAX. LIMIT 2ND SIDE
Q287=0 ;MIN. LIMIT 2ND SIDE
Q279=0 ;TOLERANCE 1ST CENTER
Q280=0 ;TOLERANCE 2ND CENTER
Q281=0 ;MEASURING LOG No measuring log transmission
Q309=0 ;PGM STOP IF ERROR Do not output an error message
Q330=0 ;TOOL NO. No tool monitoring
9 FN 2: Q1 = +Q1 - +Q164 Calculate length in X including the measured deviation
10 FN 2: Q2 = +Q2 - +Q165 Calculate length in Y including the measured deviation
11 L Z+100 R0 FMAX Retract the touch probe, change the tool
12 TOOL CALL 1 Z S5000 Tool call for finishing
13 CALL LBL 1 Call subprogram for machining

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 507

17 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Workpiece Inspection
17.14 Programming Examples

14 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M2 Retract in the tool axis, end program

15 LBL 1 Subprogram with fixed cycle for rectangular stud
16 CYCL DEF 213 STUD FINISHING
Q200=20 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q201=-10 ;DEPTH
Q206=150 ;FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG
Q202=5 ;PLUNGING DEPTH
Q207=500 ;FEED RATE FOR MILLING
Q203=+10 ;SURFACE COORDINATE
Q204=20 ;2ND SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q216=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Q217=+50 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
Q218=Q1 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH Length in X variable for roughing and finishing
Q219=q2 ;SECOND SIDE LENGTH Length in Y variable for roughing and finishing
Q220=0 ;CORNER RADIUS
Q221=0 ;ALLOWANCE IN 1ST AXS
17 CYCL CALL M3 Cycle call
18 LBL 0 End of subprogram
19 END PGM BEAMS MM

508 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

17
Programming Examples 17.14

Example: Measuring a rectangular pocket and

recording the results

0 BEGIN PGM BSMEAS MM

1 TOOL CALL 1 Z Tool call for touch probe
2 L Z+100 R0 FMAX Retract the touch probe
3 TCH PROBE 423 MEAS. RECTAN. INSIDE
Q273=+50 ;CENTER IN 1ST AXIS
Q274=+40 ;CENTER IN 2ND AXIS
Q282=90 ;FIRST SIDE LENGTH Nominal length in X
Q283=70 ;2ND SIDE LENGTH Nominal length in Y
Q261=-5 ;MEASURING HEIGHT
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q260=+20 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Q301=0 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
Q284=90.15 ;MAX. LIMIT 1ST SIDE Maximum limit in X
Q285=89.95 ;MIN. LIMIT 1ST SIDE Minimum limit in X
Q286=70.1 ;MAX. LIMIT 2ND SIDE Maximum limit in Y
Q287=69.9 ;MIN. LIMIT 2ND SIDE Minimum limit in Y
Q279=0.15 ;TOLERANCE 1ST CENTER Permissible position deviation in X
Q280=0.1 ;TOLERANCE 2ND CENTER Permissible position deviation in Y
Q281=1 ;MEASURING LOG Save measuring log to a file
Q309=0 ;PGM STOP IF ERROR Do not display an error message in case of a tolerance
violation
Q330=0 ;TOOL NUMBER No tool monitoring
4 L Z+100 R0 FMAX M2 Retract the tool, end program
5 END PGM BSMEAS MM

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 509

18Touch Probe
Cycles: Special
Functions
18 Touch Probe Cycles: Special Functions
18.1 Fundamentals

18.1 Fundamentals

Overview

When running touch probe cycles, Cycle 8 MIRROR

IMAGE, Cycle 11 SCALING and Cycle 26 AXIS-
SPECIFIC SCALING must not be active.
HEIDENHAIN grants a warranty for the function of
the touch probe cycles only if HEIDENHAIN touch
probes are used.

The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine

tool builder for the use of a 3-D touch probe.

The TNC provides a cycle for the following special purpose:

Cycle Soft key Page
3 MEASURING 513
Cycle for defining OEM cycles

512 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

18
MEASURE (Cycle 3) 18.2

18.2 MEASURE (Cycle 3)

Cycle run
Touch Probe Cycle 3 measures any position on the workpiece
in a selectable direction. Unlike other measuring cycles, Cycle 3
enables you to enter the measuring range SET UP and feed rate
F directly. Also, the touch probe retracts by a definable value after
determining the measured value MB.
1 The touch probe moves from the current position at the entered
feed rate in the defined probing direction. The probing direction
must be defined in the cycle as a polar angle.
2 After the TNC has saved the position, the touch probe stops.
The TNC saves the X, Y, Z coordinates of the probe-tip center in
three successive Q parameters. The TNC does not conduct any
length or radius compensations. You define the number of the
first result parameter in the cycle.
3 Finally, the TNC moves the touch probe back by that value
against the probing direction that you defined in the parameter
MB.

Please note while programming:

The exact behavior of Touch Probe Cycle 3 is

defined by your machine tool builder or a software
manufacturer who uses it within specific touch probe
cycles.

The DIST (maximum traverse to touch point) and F

(probing feed rate) data from the touch-probe table,
which are effective in other measuring cycles, do not
apply in Touch Probe Cycle 3.
Remember that the TNC always writes to four
successive Q-parameters.
If the TNC was not able to determine a valid touch
point, the program is run without error message. In
this case the TNC assigns the value –1 to the 4th
result parameter so that you can deal with the error
yourself.
The TNC retracts the touch probe by no more than
the retraction distance MB and does not pass the
starting point of the measurement. This rules out any
collision during retraction.
With function FN17: SYSWRITE ID 990 NR 6 you can
set whether the cycle runs through the probe input
X12 or X13.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 513

18 Touch Probe Cycles: Special Functions
18.2 MEASURE (Cycle 3)

Cycle parameters
Parameter number for result: Enter the number NC blocks
of the Q parameter to which you want the TNC 4 TCH PROBE 3.0 MEASURING
to assign the first measured coordinate (X). The
5 TCH PROBE 3.1 Q1
values Y and Z are in the immediately following Q
parameters. Input range 0 to 1999 6 TCH PROBE 3.2 X ANGLE: +15
7 TCH PROBE 3.3 DIST +10 F100 MB1
Probing axis: Enter the axis in whose direction the REFERENCE SYSTEM:0
probe is to move and confirm with the ENT key.
Input range: X, Y or Z 8 TCH PROBE 3.4 ERRORMODE1

Probing angle: Angle, measured from the defined

probing axis in which the touch probe is to move.
Confirm with ENT. Input range -180.0000 to
180.0000
Maximum measuring range: Enter the maximum
distance from the starting point by which the touch
probe is to move. Confirm with ENT. Input range
-99999.9999 to 99999.9999
Feed rate for measurement: Enter the measuring
feed rate in mm/min. Input range 0 to 3000.000
Maximum retraction distance: Traverse path in the
direction opposite the probing direction, after the
stylus was deflected. The TNC returns the touch
probe to a point no farther than the starting point,
so that there can be no collision. Input range 0 to
99999.9999
Reference system? (0=ACTUAL/1=REF): Define
whether the probing direction and measuring result
should reference the current coordinate system
(ACTUAL, can be shifted or rotated) or the machine
coordinate system (REF):
0: Probe in the current system and save the
measuring result to the ACTUAL system
1: Probe in the fixed machine REF system and save
the measuring result to the REF system.
Error mode (0=OFF/1=ON): Specify whether the
TNC is to issue an error message if the stylus
is deflected at cycle start. If you select mode 1,
the TNC saves the value -1 in the fourth result
parameter and continues the cycle:
0: Error message output
1: No error message output

514 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

18
Calibrating a touch trigger probe 18.3

18.3 Calibrating a touch trigger probe

In order to precisely specify the actual trigger point of a 3-D touch
probe, you must calibrate the touch probe, otherwise the TNC
cannot provide precise measuring results.

Always calibrate a touch probe in the following cases:

Commissioning
Stylus breakage
Stylus exchange
Change in the probe feed rate
Irregularities caused, for example, when the
machine heats up
Change of active tool axis

The TNC assumes the calibration values for the

active probe system directly after the calibration
process. The updated tool data become effective
immediately, and a new tool call is not necessary.

During calibration, the TNC finds the "effective" length of the stylus
and the "effective" radius of the ball tip. To calibrate the 3-D touch
probe, clamp a ring gauge or a stud of known height and known
radius to the machine table.
The TNC provides calibration cycles for calibrating the length and
the radius:
Press the TOUCH PROBE soft key
Display the calibration cycles: Press CALIBRATE
TS
Select the calibration cycle
Calibration cycles of the TNC
Soft key Function Page
Calibrating the length 519

Measure the radius and the center 520

offset using a calibration ring

Measure the radius and the center 522

offset using a stud or a calibration
pin
Measure the radius and the center 517
offset using a calibration sphere

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 515

18 Touch Probe Cycles: Special Functions
18.4 Displaying calibration values

18.4 Displaying calibration values

The TNC saves the effective length and effective radius of the
touch probe in the tool table. The TNC saves the ball-tip center
offset of the touch probe in the touch-probe table in the CAL_OF1
(principal axis) and CAL_OF2 (secondary axis) columns. You can
display the values on the screen by pressing the TOUCH PROBE
TABLE soft key.

Make sure that you have activated the correct tool

number before using the touch probe, regardless of
whether you wish to run the touch probe cycle in
automatic mode or manual mode.

For more information about the touch probe table,

refer to the User’s Manual for Cycle Programming.

516 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

18
CALIBRATE TS (Cycle 460, DIN/ISO: G460) 18.5

18.5 CALIBRATE TS (Cycle 460, DIN/ISO:

G460)
With Cycle 460 you can calibrate a triggering 3-D touch probe
automatically on an exact calibration sphere. You can do radius
calibration alone, or radius and length calibration.
1 Clamp the calibration sphere and check for potential collisions.
2 In the touch probe axis, position the touch probe over the
calibration sphere, and in the working plane, approximately over
the sphere center.
3 The first movement in the cycle is in the negative direction of
the touch probe axis.
4 Then the cycle determines the exact center of the sphere in the
touch probe axis.
Please note while programming:

HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of

the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are
used.

The effective length of the touch probe is always

referenced to the tool datum. The machine tool
builder usually defines the spindle tip as the tool
datum.
Before a cycle definition you must have programmed
a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
Pre-position the touch probe in the program so that
it is located approximately above the center of the
calibration sphere.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 517

18 Touch Probe Cycles: Special Functions
18.5 CALIBRATE TS (Cycle 460, DIN/ISO: G460)

Exact calibration sphere radius Q407: Enter the NC blocks

exact radius of the calibration sphere used. Input 5 TCH PROBE 460 CALIBRATE TS
range 0.0001 to 99.9999
Q407=12.5 ;SPHERE RADIUS
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q320 is added to SET_UP in the touch probe table. Q301=1 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
Input range 0 to 99999.9999 Q423=4 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS

Traversing to clearance height Q301: definition Q380=+0 ;REFERENCE ANGLE

of how the touch probe is to move between the Q433=0 ;CALIBRATE LENGTH
measuring points:
Q434=-2.5 ;DATUM
0: Move at measuring height between measuring
points
1: Move at clearance height between measuring
points
Number of probe points in the plane (4/3) Q423:
Number of measuring points on the diameter. Input
range 0 to 8
Reference angle Q380 (absolute): Reference
angle (basic rotation) for measuring the measuring
points in the active workpiece coordinate system.
Defining a reference angle can considerably enlarge
the measuring range of an axis. Input range 0 to
360.0000
Calibrate length (0/1) Q433: Define whether the
TNC is to calibrate the touch probe length after
radius calibration, as well:
0: Do not calibrate touch probe length
1: Calibrate touch probe length
Datum for length Q434 (absolute): Coordinate of
the calibration sphere center. The definition is only
required if length calibration is to be carried out.
Input range -99999.9999 to 99999.9999

518 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

18
CALIBRATE TS LENGTH (Cycle 461, DIN/ISO: G461) 18.6

18.6 CALIBRATE TS LENGTH (Cycle 461,

DIN/ISO: G461)
Cycle run
Before starting the calibration cycle, you must set the datum in
the spindle axis so that Z=0 on the machine table; you must also
preposition the touch probe over the calibration ring.
1 The TNC orients the touch probe to the angle CAL_ANG from
the touch probe table (only if your touch probe can be oriented).
2 The TNC probes from the current position in a negative spindle
axis direction at the probing feed rate (column F from the touch
probe table).
3 The TNC then returns the touch probe at rapid traverse (column
FMAX from the touch probe table) to the start position.

Please note while programming:

HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of

the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are
used.

The effective length of the touch probe is always

Datum Q434 (absolute): Datum for the length (e.g.

height of the ring gauge). Input range -99999.9999
to 99999.9999

NC blocks
5 TCH PROBE 461 CALIBRATE TS
LENGTH
Q434=+5 ;DATUM

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 519

18 Touch Probe Cycles: Special Functions
18.7 CALIBRATE TS RADIUS INSIDE (Cycle 462, DIN/ISO: G462)

18.7 CALIBRATE TS RADIUS INSIDE (Cycle

462, DIN/ISO: G462)
Cycle run
Before starting the calibration cycle, you need to preposition the
touch probe in the center of the calibration ring and at the required
measuring height.
When calibrating the ball tip radius, the TNC executes an automatic
probing routine. During the first probing cycle, the TNC determines
the center of the calibration ring or stud (coarse measurement)
and positions the touch probe in the center. Then the ball tip
radius is determined during the actual calibration process (fine
measurement). If the touch probe allows probing from opposite
orientations, the center offset is determined during another cycle.
The touch probe orientation determines the calibration routine:
No orientation possible or orientation possible in only one
direction: The TNC executes one approximate and one fine
measurement and determines the effective ball tip radius
(column R in tool.t)
Orientation possible in two directions (e.g. HEIDENHAIN touch
probes with cable): The TNC executes one approximate and
one fine measurement, rotates the touch probe by 180° and
then executes four more probing operations. The center offset
(CAL_OF in tchprobe.tp) is determined in addition to the radius
by probing from opposite orientations.
Any orientation possible (e.g. HEIDENHAIN infrared touch
probes): For probing routine, see "orientation possible in two
directions."
Please note while programming:

HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of

the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are
used.

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
The center offset can be determined only with a
suitable touch probe.

520 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

18
CALIBRATE TS RADIUS INSIDE (Cycle 462, DIN/ISO: G462) 18.7

In order to be able to determine the ball-tip center

misalignment, the TNC needs to be specially
prepared by the machine manufacturer. The machine
manual provides further information.
The characteristic of whether and how your
touch probe can be oriented is already defined in
HEIDENHAIN touch probes. Other touch probes are
configured by the machine tool builder.

RING RADIUS Q407: Diameter of the ring gauge.

Input range 0 to 99.9999
SET-UP CLEARANCE Q320 (incremental): Additional
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
NO. OF PROBE POINTS Q407 (absolute): Number of
measuring points on the diameter. Input range 0 to
8
REFERENCE ANGLE Q380 (absolute): Angle
between the reference axis of the working plane NC blocks
and the first touch point. Input range 0 to 360.0000
5 TCH PROBE 462 TS CALIBRATE IN
RING
Q407=+5 ;RING RADIUS
Q320=+0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Q423=+8 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS
Q380=+0 ;REFERENCE ANGLE

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 521

18 Touch Probe Cycles: Special Functions
18.8 CALIBRATE TS RADIUS OUTSIDE (Cycle 463, DIN/ISO: G463)

18.8 CALIBRATE TS RADIUS OUTSIDE

(Cycle 463, DIN/ISO: G463)
Cycle run
Before starting the calibration cycle, you need to preposition the
touch probe above the center of the calibration pin. Position the
touch probe in the touch probe axis by approximately the safety
clearance (value from touch probe table + value from cycle) above
the calibration pin.
When calibrating the ball tip radius, the TNC executes an automatic
probing routine. During the first probing cycle, the TNC determines
the center of the calibration ring or stud (coarse measurement)
and positions the touch probe in the center. Then the ball tip
radius is determined during the actual calibration process (fine
measurement). If the touch probe allows probing from opposite
orientations, the center offset is determined during another cycle.
The touch probe orientation determines the calibration routine:
No orientation possible or orientation possible in only one
direction: The TNC executes one approximate and one fine
measurement and determines the effective ball tip radius
(column R in tool.t)
Orientation possible in two directions (e.g. HEIDENHAIN touch
probes with cable): The TNC executes one approximate and
one fine measurement, rotates the touch probe by 180° and
then executes four more probing operations. The center offset
(CAL_OF in tchprobe.tp) is determined in addition to the radius
by probing from opposite orientations.
Any orientation possible (e.g. HEIDENHAIN infrared touch
probes): For probing routine, see "orientation possible in two
directions."
Please note while programming:

HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of

the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are
used.

Before a cycle definition you must have programmed

a tool call to define the touch probe axis.
The center offset can be determined only with a
suitable touch probe.

522 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

18
CALIBRATE TS RADIUS OUTSIDE (Cycle 463, DIN/ISO: G463) 18.8

In order to be able to determine the ball-tip center

STUD RADIUS Q407: Diameter of the ring gauge.

Input range 0 to 99.9999
SET-UP CLEARANCE Q320 (incremental): Additional
distance between measuring point and ball tip.
Q320 is added to SET_UP (touch probe table). Input
range 0 to 99999.9999
MOVE TO CLEARANCE Q301: Definition of how the
touch probe is to move between the measuring
points:
0: Move at measuring height between measuring
points
1: Move at clearance height between measuring NC blocks
points 5 TCH PROBE 463 TS CALIBRATE ON
NO. OF PROBE POINTS Q407 (absolute): Number of STUD
measuring points on the diameter. Input range 0 to Q407=+5 ;STUD RADIUS
8 Q320=+0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
REFERENCE ANGLE Q380 (absolute): Angle Q301=+1 ;MOVE TO CLEARANCE
between the reference axis of the working plane
Q423=+8 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS
and the first touch point. Input range 0 to 360.0000
Q380=+0 ;REFERENCE ANGLE

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 523

19 Touch Probe
Cycles: Automatic
Kinematics
Measurement
19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.1 Kinematics Measurement with TS Touch Probes (KinematicsOpt
option)

19.1 Kinematics Measurement with TS

Touch Probes (KinematicsOpt option)

Fundamentals
Accuracy requirements are becoming increasingly stringent,
particularly in the area of 5-axis machining. Complex parts need to
be manufactured with precision and reproducible accuracy even
over long periods.
Some of the reasons for inaccuracy in multi-axis machining are
deviations between the kinematic model saved in the control
(see 1 in the figure at right), and the kinematic conditions actually
existing on the machine (see 2 in the figure at right). When the
rotary axes are positioned, these deviations cause inaccuracy of
the workpiece (see 3 in the figure at right). It is therefore necessary
for the model to approach reality as closely as possible.
The TNC function KinematicsOpt is an important component
that helps you to really fulfill these complex requirements: a 3-D
touch probe cycle measures the rotary axes on your machine fully
automatically, regardless of whether they are in the form of tables
or spindle heads. A calibration sphere is fixed at any position on
the machine table, and measured with a resolution that you define.
During cycle definition you simply define for each rotary axis the
area that you want to measure.
From the measured values, the TNC calculates the static tilting
accuracy. The software minimizes the positioning error arising
from the tilting movements and, at the end of the measurement
process, automatically saves the machine geometry in the
respective machine constants of the kinematic table.

526 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
Kinematics Measurement with TS Touch Probes (KinematicsOpt 19.1
option)

Overview
The TNC offers cycles that enable you to automatically save, check
and optimize the machine kinematics:
Cycle Soft key Page
450 SAVE KINEMATICS 529
Automatically saving and restoring
kinematic configurations
451 MEASURE KINEMATICS 532
Automatically checking or optimizing
the machine kinematics
452 PRESET COMPENSATION 546
Automatically checking or optimizing
the machine kinematics

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 527

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.2 Prerequisites

19.2 Prerequisites
The following are prerequisites for using the KinematicsOpt option:
The software options 48 (KinematicsOpt), 8 (Software option 1)
and 17 (Touch Probe function) must be enabled.
The 3-D touch probe used for the measurement must be
calibrated.
The cycles can only be carried out with the tool axis Z.
A calibration sphere with an exactly known radius and sufficient
rigidity must be attached to any position on the machine table.
HEIDENHAIN recommends using the calibration spheres KKH
250 (ID number 655 475-01) or KKH 100 (ID number 655
475-02), which have particularly high rigidity and are designed
especially for machine calibration. Please contact HEIDENHAIN
if you have any questions in this regard.
The kinematics description of the machine must be complete
and correct. The transformation values must be entered with an
accuracy of approx. 1 mm.
The complete machine geometry must have been measured (by
the machine tool builder during commissioning).
The machine tool builder must have saved the machine
parameters for CfgKinematicsOpt in the configuration data.
maxModification specifies the tolerance limit from which the
TNC should indicate if the modifications to kinematic data are
above this limit value. maxDevCalBall specifies how large the
measured calibration sphere radius should be from the cycle
parameters entered. mStrobeRotAxPos defines an M function
specified by the machine tool builder for positioning the rotary
axes.

Please note while programming:

HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of

the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are
used.

If an M function has been defined in machine

parameter mStrobeRotAxPos, you have to position
the rotary axes to 0° (ACTUAL system) before
starting one of the KinematicsOpt cycles (except for
450).
If machine parameters were changed through the
KinematicsOpt cycles, the control must be restarted.
Otherwise the changes could be lost in certain
circumstances.

528 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
SAVE KINEMATICS (Cycle 450, DIN/ISO: G450, Option) 19.3

19.3 SAVE KINEMATICS (Cycle 450, DIN/

ISO: G450, Option)

Cycle run
With the touch probe cycle 450 you can save the active machine
kinematic configuration or restore a previously saved one. The
saved data can be displayed and deleted. 16 memory spaces in
total are available.

Please note while programming:

Always save the active kinematics configuration

before running a kinematics optimization. Advantage:
You can restore the old data if you are not
satisfied with the results or if errors occur during
optimization (e.g. power failure).

With the Restore mode, note that

the TNC can restore saved data only to a
matching kinematic configuration.
a change in the kinematics always changes the
preset as well. Set the preset again if necessary.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 529

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.3 SAVE KINEMATICS (Cycle 450, DIN/ISO: G450, Option)

Cycle parameters
Mode (0/1/2/3) Q410: Define if you wish to backup Saving the current kinematics
or restore the kinematics: 5 TCH PROBE 450 SAVE KINEMATICS
0: Backup active kinematics
Q410=0 ;MODE
1: Restore saved kinematics
2: Display current memory status QS409="AB";MEMORY DESIGNATION
3: Delete a data record.
Restoring data blocks
Memory designation Q409/QS409: Number or 5 TCH PROBE 450 SAVE KINEMATICS
name of the data block designator. The character
Q410=1 ;MODE
length must not exceed 16 characters. 16 memory
spaces in total are available. Without function QS409="AB";MEMORY DESIGNATION
if Mode 2 has been selected. Wildcards can be
used in Modes 1 and 3 (Restore and Delete). If Displaying all saved data blocks
several possible data blocks are found because 5 TCH PROBE 450 SAVE KINEMATICS
of the wildcards, the mean values of the data are Q410=2 ;MODE
restored (Mode 1) or all data blocks are deleted
after confirmation (Mode 3). The following wildcards QS409="AB";MEMORY DESIGNATION
exist: Deleting data blocks
?: A single indefinite character
$: A single alphabetic character (letter) 5 TCH PROBE 450 SAVE KINEMATICS
#: A single indefinite number Q410=3 ;MODE
*: An indefinite character string of any length QS409="AB";MEMORY DESIGNATION

Logging function
After running Cycle 450, the TNC creates a measuring log
(TCHPR450.TXT) containing the following information:
Creation date and time of the log
Path of the NC program from which the cycle was run
Mode used (0=Save/1=Restore/2=Saving status/3=Delete)
Designator of the current kinematics
Entered data record identifier

The other data in the log vary depending on the selected mode:
Mode 0: Logging of all axis entries and transformation entries of
the kinematics chain that the TNC has saved.
Mode 1: Logging of all transformation entries before and after
restoring the kinematics configuration.
Mode 2: List of the saved data records.
Mode 3: List of the deleted data records.

530 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
SAVE KINEMATICS (Cycle 450, DIN/ISO: G450, Option) 19.3

Notes on data management

The TNC stores the saved data in the file TNC:\table\DATA450.KD.
This file can be backed up on an external PC with TNCREMO, for
example. If the file is deleted, the stored data are removed, too.
If the data in the file are changed manually, the data records can
become corrupted so that they cannot be used anymore.

If the TNC:\table\DATA450.KD file does not exist,

it is generated automatically when Cycle 450 is
executed.
Do not change stored data manually.
Make a backup of the TNC:\table\DATA450.KD file
so that you can restore the file, if necessary (e.g. if
the data medium is damaged).

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 531

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.4 MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option)

19.4 MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451,

DIN/ISO: G451, option)

Cycle run
The touch probe cycle 451 enables you to check and, if required,
optimize the kinematics of your machine. Use the 3-D TS touch
probe to measure a HEIDENHAIN calibration sphere that you have
attached to the machine table.

HEIDENHAIN recommends using the calibration

spheres KKH 250 (ID number 655 475-01) or KKH
100 (ID number 655 475-02), which have particularly
high rigidity and are designed especially for machine
calibration. Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you have
any questions in this regard.

The TNC evaluates the static tilting accuracy. The software

minimizes the spatial error arising from the tilting movements and,
at the end of the measurement process, automatically saves the
machine geometry in the respective machine constants of the
kinematics description.
1 Clamp the calibration sphere and check for potential collisions.
2 In the Manual Operation mode, set the reference point in
the center of the sphere or, if Q431=1 or Q431=3 is defined:
Manually position the touch probe over the calibration sphere
in the touch probe axis, and in the center of the sphere in the
working plane.
3 Select the Program Run mode and start the calibration program.
4 The TNC automatically measures all three axes successively in
the resolution you defined.
5 The TNC saves the measured values in the following Q
parameters:

532 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option) 19.4

Parameter Meaning
number
Q141 Standard deviation measured in the A axis
(–1 if axis was not measured)
Q142 Standard deviation measured in the B axis
(–1 if axis was not measured)
Q143 Standard deviation measured in the C axis
(–1 if axis was not measured)
Q144 Optimized standard deviation in the A axis
(–1 if axis was not optimized)
Q145 Optimized standard deviation in the B axis
(–1 if axis was not optimized)
Q146 Optimized standard deviation in the C axis
(–1 if axis was not optimized)
Q147 Offset error in X direction, for manual
transfer to the corresponding machine
parameter
Q148 Offset error in Y direction, for manual
transfer to the corresponding machine
parameter
Q149 Offset error in Z direction, for manual
transfer to the corresponding machine
parameter

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 533

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.4 MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option)

Positioning direction
The positioning direction of the rotary axis to be measured is
determined from the start angle and the end angle that you define
in the cycle. A reference measurement is automatically performed
at 0°.
Specify the start and end angles to ensure that the same position
is not measured twice. A duplicated point measurement (e.g.
measuring positions +90° and –270°) is not advisable, but it does
not cause an error message.
Example: Start angle = +90°, end angle = –90°
Start angle = +90°
End angle = –90°
No. of measuring points = 4
Stepping angle resulting from the calculation = (–90 – +90) /
(4 – 1) = –60°
Measuring point 1 = +90°
Measuring point 2 = +30°
Measuring point 3 = –30°
Measuring point 4 = –90°

Example: start angle = +90°, end angle = +270°

Start angle = +90°
End angle = +270°
No. of measuring points = 4
Stepping angle resulting from the calculation = (270 – 90) / (4
– 1) = +60°
Measuring point 1 = +90°
Measuring point 2 = +150°
Measuring point 3 = +210°
Measuring point 4 = +270°

534 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option) 19.4

Machines with Hirth-coupled axes

Danger of collision!
In order to be positioned, the axis must move out of
the Hirth grid. So remember to leave a large enough
safety clearance to prevent any risk of collision
between the touch probe and calibration sphere.
Also ensure that there is enough space to reach the
safety clearance (software limit switch).
Define a retraction height Q408 greater than 0 if
software option 2 (M128, FUNCTION TCPM) is not
available.
If necessary, the TNC rounds the calculated
measuring positions so that they fit into the Hirth grid
(depending on the start angle, end angle and number
of measuring points).
Depending on the machine configuration, the TNC
cannot position the rotary axes automatically. If this
is the case, you need a special M function from the
machine tool builder enabling the TNC to move the
rotary axes. The machine tool builder must have
entered the number of the M function in machine
parameter mStrobeRotAxPos for this purpose.

The measuring positions are calculated from the start angle, end
angle and number of measurements for the respective axis and
from the Hirth grid.
Example calculation of measuring positions for an A axis:
Start angle Q411 = –30
End angle Q412 = +90
Number of measuring points Q414 = 4
Hirth grid = 3°
Calculated stepping angle = ( Q412 – Q411 ) / ( Q414 – 1 )
Calculated stepping angle = = ( 90 – –30 ) / ( 4 – 1 ) = 120 / 3 = 40
Measuring position 1 = Q411 + 0 * stepping angle = -30° --> -30°
Measuring position 2 = Q411 + 1 * stepping angle = +10° --> 9°
Measuring position 3 = Q411 + 2 * stepping angle = +50° --> 51°
Measuring position 4 = Q411 + 3 * stepping angle = +90° --> 90°

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 535

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.4 MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option)

Choice of number of measuring points

To save time you can make a rough optimization with a small
number of measuring points (1 or 2), for example during
commissioning.
You then make a fine optimization with a medium number of
measuring points (recommended value = approx. 4). Higher
numbers of measuring points do not usually improve the results.
Ideally, you should distribute the measuring points evenly over the
tilting range of the axis.
This is why you should measure an axis with a tilting range of 0°
to 360° at three measuring points, namely at 90°, 180° and 270°.
Thus, define a starting angle of 90° and an end angle of 270°.
If you want to check the accuracy accordingly, you can also enter a
higher number of measuring points in the Check mode.

If a measuring point has been defined at 0°, it will

be ignored because the reference measurement is
always done at 0°.

536 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option) 19.4

Choice of the calibration sphere position on the

machine table
In principle, you can fix the calibration sphere to any accessible
position on the machine table and also on fixtures or workpieces.
The following factors should positively influence the result of
measurement:
On machine with rotary tables/tilting tables: Clamp the
calibrating ball as far as possible away from the center of
rotation.
On machines with very large traverse paths: Clamp the
calibration sphere as closely as possible to the position intended
for subsequent machining.

Notes on the accuracy

The geometrical and positioning errors of the machine influence
the measured values and therefore also the optimization of a rotary
axis. For this reason there will always be a certain amount of error.
If there were no geometrical and positioning errors, any values
measured by the cycle at any point on the machine at a certain
time would be exactly reproducible. The greater the geometrical
and positioning errors are, the greater is the dispersion of
measured results when you perform measurements at different
positions.
The dispersion of results recorded by the TNC in the measuring log
is a measure of the machine's static tilting accuracy. However, the
measuring circle radius and the number and position of measuring
points have to be included in the evaluation of accuracy. One
measuring point alone is not enough to calculate dispersion. For
only one point, the result of the calculation is the spatial error of
that measuring point.
If several rotary axes are moved simultaneously, their error values
are combined. In the worst case they are added together.

If your machine is equipped with a controlled

spindle, you should activate the angle tracking in the
touch probe table (TRACK column). This generally
increases the accuracy of measurements with a 3-D
touch probe.
If required, deactivate the lock on the rotary axes
for the duration of the calibration. Otherwise it may
falsify the results of measurement. The machine tool
manual provides further information.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 537

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.4 MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option)

Notes on various calibration methods

Rough optimization during commissioning after entering
approximate dimensions.
Number of measuring points between 1 and 2
Angular step of the rotary axes: Approx. 90°
Fine optimization over the entire range of traverse
Number of measuring points between 3 and 6
The start and end angles should cover the largest possible
traverse range of the rotary axes.
Position the calibration sphere on the machine table so that
on rotary table axes there is a large measuring circle, or so
that on swivel head axes the measurement can be made at
a representative position (e.g. in the center of the traverse
range).
Optimization of a specific rotary axis position
Number of measuring points between 2 and 3
The measurements are made near the rotary axis angle at
which the workpiece is to be machined.
Position the calibration sphere on the machine table for
calibration at the position subsequently intended for
machining.
Inspecting the machine accuracy
Number of measuring points between 4 and 8
The start and end angles should cover the largest possible
traverse range of the rotary axes.
Determination of the rotary axis backlash
Number of measuring points between 8 and 12
The start and end angles should cover the largest possible
traverse range of the rotary axes.

538 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option) 19.4

Backlash
Backlash is a small amount of play between the rotary or angle
encoder and the table that occurs when the traverse direction is
reversed. If the rotary axes have backlash outside of the control
loop, for example because the angle measurement is made with
the motor encoder, this can result in significant error during tilting.
With input parameter Q432 you can activate backlash
measurement. Enter an angle that the TNC uses as traversing
angle. The cycle will then carry out two measurements per rotary
axis. If you take over the angle value 0, the TNC will not measure
any backlash.

The TNC does not perform an automatic backlash

compensation.
If the measuring circle radius is < 1 mm, the TNC
does not calculate the backlash. The larger the
measuring circle radius, the more accurately the TNC
can determine the rotary axis backlash (See "Logging
function", page 545).
Backlash measurement is not possible if an M
function for positioning the rotary axes is set in
machine parameter mStrobeRotAxPos or if the axis is
a Hirth axis.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 539

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.4 MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option)

Please note while programming:

Note that all functions for tilting in the working

plane are reset. M128 and FUNCTION TCPM are
deactivated.
Position the calibration sphere on the machine
table so that there can be no collisions during the
measuring process.
Before defining the cycle you must set the
datum in the center of the calibration sphere and
activate it, or you define the input parameter Q431
correspondingly to 1 or 3.
If machine parameter mStrobeRotAxPos is defined
as not equal –1 (M function positions the rotary axis),
then only start a measurement when all rotary axes
are at 0°.
For the positioning feed rate when moving to the
probing height in the touch probe axis, the TNC uses
the value from cycle parameter Q253 or the FMAX
value, whichever is smaller. The TNC always moves
the rotary axes at positioning feed rate Q253, while
the probe monitoring is inactive.
If the kinematic data attained in the Optimize
mode are greater than the permissible limit
(maxModification), the TNC shows a warning. Then
you have to confirm acceptance of the attained value
by pressing NC start.
Note that a change in the kinematics always changes
the preset as well. After an optimization, reset the
preset.
In every probing process the TNC first measures
the radius of the calibration sphere. If the measured
sphere radius differs from the entered sphere radius
by more than you have defined in machine parameter
maxDevCalBall the TNC shows an error message
and ends the measurement.
If you interrupt the cycle during the measurement,
the kinematic data might no longer be in the original
condition. Save the active kinematic configuration
before an optimization with Cycle 450, so that in
case of an emergency the most recently active
kinematic configuration can be restored.
Programming in inches: The TNC always records the
log data and results of measurement in millimeters.
The TNC ignores cycle definition data that applies to
inactive axes.

540 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option) 19.4

Cycle parameters
Mode (0=Check/1=Measure) Q406: Specify Saving and checking the kinematics
whether the TNC should check or optimize the 4 TOOL CALL "TCH PROBE" Z
active kinematics:
5 TCH PROBE 450 SAVE KINEMATICS
0: Check active kinematics. The TNC measures
the kinematics in the rotary axes you have defined, Q410=0 ;MODE
but it does not make any changes to it. The Q409=5 ;MEMORY DESIGNATION
TNC displays the results of measurement in a
6 TCH PROBE 451 MEASURE
measurement log.
KINEMATICS
1: Optimize active kinematics. The TNC measures
the kinematics in the rotary axes you have defined Q406=0 ;MODE
and optimizes the position of the rotary axes of Q407=12.5 ;SPHERE RADIUS
the active kinematics.
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Exact calibration sphere radius Q407: Enter the Q408=0 ;RETR. HEIGHT
exact radius of the calibration sphere used. Input
Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
range 0.0001 to 99.9999
Q380=0 ;REFERENCE ANGLE
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional
distance between measuring point and ball tip. Q411=-90 ;START ANGLE A AXIS
Q320 is added to SET_UP in the touch probe table. Q412=+90 ;END ANGLE A AXIS
Input range 0 to 99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF
Q413=0 ;INCID. ANGLE A AXIS
Retraction height Q408 (absolute): Input range Q414=0 ;MEAS. POINTS A AXIS
0.0001 to 99999.9999
Q415=-90 ;START ANGLE B AXIS
Input 0:
Do not move to any retraction height. The TNC Q416=+90 ;END ANGLE B AXIS
moves to the next measuring position in the axis Q417=0 ;INCID. ANGLE B AXIS
to be measured. Not allowed for Hirth axes! The Q418=2 ;MEAS. POINTS B AXIS
TNC moves to the first measuring position in the
sequence A, then B, then C. Q419=-90 ;START ANGLE C AXIS

Input >0: Q420=+90 ;END ANGLE C AXIS

Retraction height in the untilted workpiece Q421=0 ;INCID. ANGLE C AXIS
coordinate system to which the TNC positions
Q422=2 ;MEAS. POINTS C AXIS
before a rotary axis positioning in the spindle
axis. Also, the TNC moves the touch probe in the Q423=4 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS
working plane to the datum. Probe monitoring is Q431=0 ;PRESET
not active in this mode. Define the positioning
velocity in parameter Q253. Q432=0 ;BACKLASH, ANG.
RANGE
Feed rate for pre-positioning Q253: Traversing
speed of the tool during positioning in mm/min.
Input range 0.0001 to 99999.9999; alternatively
FMAX, FAUTO, PREDEF

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 541

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.4 MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option)

Reference angle Q380 (absolute): Reference

angle (basic rotation) for measuring the measuring
points in the active workpiece coordinate system.
Defining a reference angle can considerably enlarge
the measuring range of an axis. Input range 0 to
360.0000
Start angle A axis Q411 (absolute): Starting angle in
the A axis at which the first measurement is to be
made. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
End angle A axis Q412 (absolute): Ending angle in
the A axis at which the last measurement is to be
made. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
Angle of incid. A axis Q413: Angle of incidence in
the A axis at which the other rotary axes are to be
measured. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
Number meas. points A axis Q414: Number of
probe measurements with which the TNC is to
measure the A axis. If the input value = 0, the TNC
does not measure the respective axis. Input range 0
to 12
Start angle B axis Q415 (absolute): Starting angle in
the B axis at which the first measurement is to be
made. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
End angle B axis Q416 (absolute): Ending angle in
the B axis at which the last measurement is to be
made. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
Angle of incid. in B axis Q417: Angle of incidence
in the B axis at which the other rotary axes are to be
measured. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
Number meas. points B axis Q418: Number of
probe measurements with which the TNC is to
measure the B axis. If the input value = 0, the TNC
does not measure the respective axis. Input range 0
to 12
Start angle C axis Q419 (absolute): Starting angle in
the C axis at which the first measurement is to be
made. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
End angle C axis Q420 (absolute): Ending angle in
the C axis at which the last measurement is to be
made. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
Angle of incid. in C axis Q421: Angle of incidence
in the C axis at which the other rotary axes are to be
measured. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
Number meas. points C axis Q422: Number of
probe measurements with which the TNC is to
measure the C axis. Input range 0 to 12. If input
value = 0, the TNC does not measure the respective
axis.

542 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option) 19.4

Number meas. points (3-8) Q423: Number of

probe measurements with which the TNC is to
measure the calibration sphere in the plane. Input
range 3 to 8. Less measuring points increase speed
and more measuring points increase measurement
precision.
Preset (0/1/2/3) Q431: Define whether the TNC
automatically sets the active preset (datum) into the
center of the sphere:
0: Do not set the preset automatically into the
center of the sphere: Preset manually before cycle
start
1: Automatically preset into the center of the sphere
before measurement: Manually preposition the
touch probe before the cycle start via the calibration
sphere
2: Automatically preset into the center of the sphere
after measurement: Preset manually before cycle
start
3: Preset before and after measurement into the
center of the sphere: Preposition the touch probe
manually before cycle start via the calibration sphere
Backlash, angle range Q432: Here you define
the angle value to be used as traverse for the
measurement of the rotary axis. The traversing
angle must be significantly larger than the actual
backlash of the rotary axes. If input value = 0, the
TNC does not measure the backlash. Input range:
-3.0000 to +3.0000

If you have activated "Preset" before the calibration

(Q431 = 1/3), then move the touch probe by the safety
clearance (Q320 + SET_UP) to a position approximately
above the center of the calibration sphere before the
start of the cycle.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 543

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.4 MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option)

Various modes (Q406)

Test mode Q406 = 0 Position optimization of the rotary
The TNC measures the rotary axes in the positions defined and axes with preceding, automatic
calculates the static accuracy of the tilting transformation. datum setting and measurement of
the rotary axis backlash
The TNC records the results of a possible position optimization
but does not make any adjustments. 1 TOOL CALL "TCH PROBE" Z
2 TCH PROBE 451 MEASURE
Position Optimization mode Q406 = 1
KINEMATICS
The TNC measures the rotary axes in the positions defined and
Q406=1 ;MODE
calculates the static accuracy of the tilting transformation.
During this, the TNC tries to change the position of the rotary axis Q407=12.5 ;SPHERE RADIUS
in the kinematics model in order to achieve higher accuracy. Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
The machine data is adjusted automatically. Q408=0 ;RETR. HEIGHT
Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
Q380=0 ;REFERENCE ANGLE
Q411=-90 ;START ANGLE A AXIS
Q412=+90 ;END ANGLE A AXIS
Q413=0 ;INCID. ANGLE A AXIS
Q414=0 ;MEAS. POINTS A AXIS
Q415=-90 ;START ANGLE B AXIS
Q416=+90 ;END ANGLE B AXIS
Q417=0 ;INCID. ANGLE B AXIS
Q418=0 ;MEAS. POINTS B AXIS
Q419=+90 ;START ANGLE C AXIS
Q420=+270 ;END ANGLE C AXIS
Q421=0 ;INCID. ANGLE C AXIS
Q422=3 ;MEAS. POINTS C AXIS
Q423=3 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS
Q431=1 ;PRESET
Q432=0.5 ;BACKLASH, ANG.
RANGE

544 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451, DIN/ISO: G451, option) 19.4

Logging function
After running Cycle 451, the TNC creates a measuring log
(TCHPR451.TXT) containing the following information:
Creation date and time of the log
Path of the NC program from which the cycle was run
Mode used (0=Check/1=Optimize position/2=Optimize pose)
Active kinematic number
Entered calibration sphere radius
For each measured rotary axis:
Starting angle
End angle
Angle of incidence
Number of measuring points
Dispersion (standard deviation)
Maximum error
Angular error
Averaged backlash
Averaged positioning error
Measuring circle radius
Compensation values in all axes (preset shift)
Measurement uncertainty of rotary axes

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 545

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.5 PRESET COMPENSATION (Cycle 452, DIN/ISO: G452, option)

19.5 PRESET COMPENSATION (Cycle 452,

DIN/ISO: G452, option)

Cycle run
Touch probe cycle 452 optimizes the kinematic transformation
chain of your machine (See "MEASURE KINEMATICS (Cycle 451,
DIN/ISO: G451, option)", page 532). Then the TNC corrects the
workpiece coordinate system in the kinematics model in such a
way that the current preset is in the center of the calibration sphere
after optimization.
This cycle enables you, for example, to adjust different
interchangeable heads so that the workpiece preset applies for all
heads.
1 Clamp the calibration sphere
2 Measure the complete reference head with Cycle 451, and use
Cycle 451 to finally set the preset in the center of the sphere.
3 Insert the second head.
4 Use Cycle 452 to measure the interchangeable head up to the
point where the head is changed.
5 Use Cycle 452 to adjust other interchangeable heads to the
reference head.

If it is possible to leave the calibration sphere clamped to the

machine table during machining, you can compensate for machine
drift, for example. This procedure is also possible on a machine
without rotary axes.
1 Clamp the calibration sphere and check for potential collisions.
2 Define the preset in the calibration sphere.
3 Set the preset on the workpiece, and start machining the
workpiece.
4 Use Cycle 452 for preset compensation at regular intervals. The
TNC measures the drift of the axes involved and compensates it
in the kinematics description.

546 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
PRESET COMPENSATION (Cycle 452, DIN/ISO: G452, option) 19.5

Parameter Meaning
number
Q141 Standard deviation measured in the A axis
(–1 if axis was not measured)
Q142 Standard deviation measured in the B axis
(–1 if axis was not measured)
Q143 Standard deviation measured in the C axis
(–1 if axis was not measured)
Q144 Optimized standard deviation in the A axis
(–1 if axis was not measured)
Q145 Optimized standard deviation in the B axis
(–1 if axis was not measured)
Q146 Optimized standard deviation in the C axis
(–1 if axis was not measured)
Q147 Offset error in X direction, for manual
transfer to the corresponding machine
parameter
Q148 Offset error in Y direction, for manual
transfer to the corresponding machine
parameter
Q149 Offset error in Z direction, for manual
transfer to the corresponding machine
parameter

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 547

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.5 PRESET COMPENSATION (Cycle 452, DIN/ISO: G452, option)

Please note while programming:

In order to be able to perform a preset

compensation, the kinematics must be specially
prepared. The machine manual provides further
information.
Note that all functions for tilting in the working
plane are reset. M128 and FUNCTION TCPM are
deactivated.
Position the calibration sphere on the machine
table so that there can be no collisions during the
measuring process.
Before defining the cycle you must set the datum in
the center of the calibration sphere and activate it.
For rotary axes without separate position encoders,
select the measuring points in such a way that you
have to traverse a distance of 1° to the limit switch.
The TNC needs this distance for internal backlash
compensation.
For the positioning feed rate when moving to the
probing height in the touch probe axis, the TNC uses
the value from cycle parameter Q253 or the FMAX
value, whichever is smaller. The TNC always moves
the rotary axes at positioning feed rate Q253, while
the probe monitoring is inactive.
If the kinematic data are greater than the permissible
limit (maxModification), the TNC shows a warning.
Then you have to confirm acceptance of the attained
value by pressing NC start.
Note that a change in the kinematics always changes
the preset as well. After an optimization, reset the
preset.
In every probing process the TNC first measures
the radius of the calibration sphere. If the measured
sphere radius differs from the entered sphere radius
by more than you have defined in machine parameter
maxDevCalBall the TNC shows an error message
and ends the measurement.
If you interrupt the cycle during the measurement,
the kinematic data might no longer be in the original
condition. Save the active kinematic configuration
before an optimization with Cycle 450, so that in
case of a failure the most recently active kinematic
configuration can be restored.
Programming in inches: The TNC always records the
log data and results of measurement in millimeters.

548 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
PRESET COMPENSATION (Cycle 452, DIN/ISO: G452, option) 19.5

Cycle parameters
Exact calibration sphere radius Q407: Enter the Calibration program
exact radius of the calibration sphere used. Input 4 TOOL CALL "TCH PROBE" Z
range 0.0001 to 99.9999
5 TCH PROBE 450 SAVE KINEMATICS
Set-up clearance Q320 (incremental): Additional Q410=0 ;MODE
distance between measuring point and ball
Q409=5 ;MEMORY DESIGNATION
tip. Q320 is added to SET_UP. Input range 0 to
99999.9999, alternatively PREDEF 6 TCH PROBE 452 PRESET
COMPENSATION
Retraction height Q408 (absolute): Input range
Q407=12.5 ;SPHERE RADIUS
0.0001 to 99999.9999
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Input 0:
Do not move to any retraction height. The TNC Q408=0 ;RETR. HEIGHT
moves to the next measuring position in the axis Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
to be measured. Not allowed for Hirth axes! The
TNC moves to the first measuring position in the Q380=0 ;REFERENCE ANGLE
sequence A, then B, then C. Q411=-90 ;START ANGLE A AXIS
Input >0: Q412=+90 ;END ANGLE A AXIS
Retraction height in the untilted workpiece
Q413=0 ;INCID. ANGLE A AXIS
coordinate system to which the TNC positions
before a rotary axis positioning in the spindle Q414=0 ;MEAS. POINTS A AXIS
axis. Also, the TNC moves the touch probe in the Q415=-90 ;START ANGLE B AXIS
working plane to the datum. Probe monitoring is
Q416=+90 ;END ANGLE B AXIS
not active in this mode. Define the positioning
velocity in parameter Q253. Q417=0 ;INCID. ANGLE B AXIS
Feed rate for pre-positioning Q253: Traversing Q418=2 ;MEAS. POINTS B AXIS
speed of the tool during positioning in mm/min. Q419=-90 ;START ANGLE C AXIS
Input range 0.0001 to 99999.9999; alternatively
FMAX, FAUTO, PREDEF Q420=+90 ;END ANGLE C AXIS
Q421=0 ;INCID. ANGLE C AXIS
Reference angle Q380 (absolute): Reference
angle (basic rotation) for measuring the measuring Q422=2 ;MEAS. POINTS C AXIS
points in the active workpiece coordinate system. Q423=4 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS
Defining a reference angle can considerably enlarge
Q432=0 ;BACKLASH, ANG.
the measuring range of an axis. Input range 0 to RANGE
360.0000
Start angle A axis Q411 (absolute): Starting angle in
the A axis at which the first measurement is to be
made. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
End angle A axis Q412 (absolute): Ending angle in
the A axis at which the last measurement is to be
made. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
Angle of incid. A axis Q413: Angle of incidence in
the A axis at which the other rotary axes are to be
measured. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
Number meas. points A axis Q414: Number of
probe measurements with which the TNC is to
measure the A axis. If the input value = 0, the TNC
does not measure the respective axis. Input range 0
to 12
Start angle B axis Q415 (absolute): Starting angle in
the B axis at which the first measurement is to be
made. Input range -359.999 to 359.999

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 549

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.5 PRESET COMPENSATION (Cycle 452, DIN/ISO: G452, option)

End angle B axis Q416 (absolute): Ending angle in

the B axis at which the last measurement is to be
made. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
Angle of incid. in B axis Q417: Angle of incidence
in the B axis at which the other rotary axes are to be
measured. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
Number meas. points B axis Q418: Number of
probe measurements with which the TNC is to
measure the B axis. If the input value = 0, the TNC
does not measure the respective axis. Input range 0
to 12
Start angle C axis Q419 (absolute): Starting angle in
the C axis at which the first measurement is to be
made. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
End angle C axis Q420 (absolute): Ending angle in
the C axis at which the last measurement is to be
made. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
Angle of incid. in C axis Q421: Angle of incidence
in the C axis at which the other rotary axes are to be
measured. Input range -359.999 to 359.999
Number meas. points C axis Q422: Number of
probe measurements with which the TNC is to
measure the C axis. If the input value = 0, the TNC
does not measure the respective axis. Input range 0
to 12
No. of measuring points Q423: Specify the
number of probing points to be used by the TNC for
measuring the calibration sphere in the plane. Input
range: 3 to 8 measurements
Backlash, angle range Q432: Here you define
the angle value to be used as traverse for the
measurement of the rotary axis. The traversing
angle must be significantly larger than the actual
backlash of the rotary axes. If input value = 0, the
TNC does not measure the backlash. Input range:
-3.0000 to +3.0000

550 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
PRESET COMPENSATION (Cycle 452, DIN/ISO: G452, option) 19.5

Adjustment of interchangeable heads

The goal of this procedure is for the workpiece preset to remain Measuring a reference head
unchanged after changing rotary axes (head exchange). 1 TOOL CALL "TCH PROBE" Z
In the following example, a fork head is adjusted to the A and C axes.
2 TCH PROBE 451 MEASURE
The A axis is changed, whereas the C axis continues being a part of KINEMATICS
the basic configuration.
Q406=1 ;MODE
Insert the interchangeable head that will be used as a reference
Q407=12.5 ;SPHERE RADIUS
head.
Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
Clamp the calibration sphere
Q408=0 ;RETR. HEIGHT
Insert the touch probe
Q253=2000 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
Use Cycle 451 to measure the complete kinematics, including the Q380=+45 ;REFERENCE ANGLE
reference head.
Q411=-90 ;START ANGLE A AXIS
Set the preset (using Q431 = 2 or 3 in Cycle 451) after measuring
Q412=+90 ;END ANGLE A AXIS
the reference head
Q413=45 ;INCID. ANGLE A AXIS
Q414=4 ;MEAS. POINTS A AXIS
Q415=-90 ;START ANGLE B AXIS
Q416=+90 ;END ANGLE B AXIS
Q417=0 ;INCID. ANGLE B AXIS
Q418=2 ;MEAS. POINTS B AXIS
Q419=+90 ;START ANGLE C AXIS
Q420=+270 ;END ANGLE C AXIS
Q421=0 ;INCID. ANGLE C AXIS
Q422=3 ;MEAS. POINTS C AXIS
Q423=4 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS
Q431=3 ;PRESET
Q432=0 ;BACKLASH, ANG.
RANGE

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 551

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.5 PRESET COMPENSATION (Cycle 452, DIN/ISO: G452, option)

Insert the second interchangeable head Adjusting an interchangeable head

Insert the touch probe 4 TOOL CALL "TCH PROBE" Z

4 TCH PROBE 452 PRESET
Measure the interchangeable head with Cycle 452 COMPENSATION
Measure only the axes that have actually been changed (in this Q407=12.5 ;SPHERE RADIUS
example: only the A axis; the C axis is hidden with Q422) Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
The preset and the position of the calibration sphere must not be Q408=0 ;RETR. HEIGHT
changed during the complete process
Q253=2000 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
All other interchangeable heads can be adjusted in the same way Q380=+45 ;REFERENCE ANGLE
Q411=-90 ;START ANGLE A AXIS
The head change function can vary depending on the
individual machine tool. Refer to your machine manual. Q412=+90 ;END ANGLE A AXIS
Q413=45 ;INCID. ANGLE A AXIS
Q414=4 ;MEAS. POINTS A AXIS
Q415=-90 ;START ANGLE B AXIS
Q416=+90 ;END ANGLE B AXIS
Q417=0 ;INCID. ANGLE B AXIS
Q418=2 ;MEAS. POINTS B AXIS
Q419=+90 ;START ANGLE C AXIS
Q420=+270 ;END ANGLE C AXIS
Q421=0 ;INCID. ANGLE C AXIS
Q422=0 ;MEAS. POINTS C AXIS
Q423=4 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS
Q432=0 ;BACKLASH, ANG.
RANGE

552 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
PRESET COMPENSATION (Cycle 452, DIN/ISO: G452, option) 19.5

Drift compensation
During machining various machine components are subject to drift Reference measurement for drift
due to varying ambient conditions. If the drift remains sufficiently compensation
constant over the range of traverse, and if the calibration sphere 1 TOOL CALL "TCH PROBE" Z
can be left on the machine table during machining, the drift can be
measured and compensated with Cycle 452. 2 CYCL DEF 247 DATUM SETTING
Q339=1 ;DATUM NUMBER
Clamp the calibration sphere
3 TCH PROBE 451 MEASURE
Insert the touch probe KINEMATICS
Measure the complete kinematics with Cycle 451 before starting Q406=1 ;MODE
the machining process Q407=12.5 ;SPHERE RADIUS
Set the preset (using Q432 = 2 or 3 in Cycle 451) after measuring Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
the kinematics.
Q408=0 ;RETR. HEIGHT
Then set the presets on your workpieces and start the machining Q253=750 ;F PRE-POSITIONING
process
Q380=+45 ;REFERENCE ANGLE
Q411=+90 ;START ANGLE A AXIS
Q412=+270 ;END ANGLE A AXIS
Q413=45 ;INCID. ANGLE A AXIS
Q414=4 ;MEAS. POINTS A AXIS
Q415=-90 ;START ANGLE B AXIS
Q416=+90 ;END ANGLE B AXIS
Q417=0 ;INCID. ANGLE B AXIS
Q418=2 ;MEAS. POINTS B AXIS
Q419=+90 ;START ANGLE C AXIS
Q420=+270 ;END ANGLE C AXIS
Q421=0 ;INCID. ANGLE C AXIS
Q422=3 ;MEAS. POINTS C AXIS
Q423=4 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS
Q431=3 ;PRESET
Q432=0 ;BACKLASH, ANG.
RANGE

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 553

19 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Kinematics Measurement
19.5 PRESET COMPENSATION (Cycle 452, DIN/ISO: G452, option)

Measure the drift of the axes at regular intervals. Drift compensation

Insert the touch probe 4 TOOL CALL "TCH PROBE" Z

4 TCH PROBE 452 PRESET
Activate the preset in the calibration sphere. COMPENSATION
Use Cycle 452 to measure the kinematics. Q407=12.5 ;SPHERE RADIUS

The preset and the position of the calibration sphere must not be Q320=0 ;SET-UP CLEARANCE
changed during the complete process Q408=0 ;RETR. HEIGHT
Q253=99999;F PRE-POSITIONING
This procedure can also be performed on machines
without rotary axes. Q380=+45 ;REFERENCE ANGLE
Q411=-90 ;START ANGLE A AXIS
Q412=+90 ;END ANGLE A AXIS
Q413=45 ;INCID. ANGLE A AXIS
Q414=4 ;MEAS. POINTS A AXIS
Q415=-90 ;START ANGLE B AXIS
Q416=+90 ;END ANGLE B AXIS
Q417=0 ;INCID. ANGLE B AXIS
Q418=2 ;MEAS. POINTS B AXIS
Q419=+90 ;START ANGLE C AXIS
Q420=+270 ;END ANGLE C AXIS
Q421=0 ;INCID. ANGLE C AXIS
Q422=3 ;MEAS. POINTS C AXIS
Q423=3 ;NO. OF PROBE POINTS
Q432=0 ;BACKLASH, ANG.
RANGE

554 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

19
PRESET COMPENSATION (Cycle 452, DIN/ISO: G452, option) 19.5

Logging function
After running Cycle 452, the TNC creates a measuring log
(TCHPR452.TXT) containing the following information:
Creation date and time of the log
Path of the NC program from which the cycle was run
Active kinematic number
Entered calibration sphere radius
For each measured rotary axis:
Starting angle
End angle
Angle of incidence
Number of measuring points
Dispersion (standard deviation)
Maximum error
Angular error
Averaged backlash
Averaged positioning error
Measuring circle radius
Compensation values in all axes (preset shift)
Measurement uncertainty of rotary axes
Notes on log data
(See "Logging function", page 545)

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 555

20 Touch Probe
Cycles: Automatic
Tool Measurement
20 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Tool Measurement
20.1 Fundamentals

20.1 Fundamentals

Overview

When running touch probe cycles, Cycle 8 MIRROR

IMAGE, Cycle 11 SCALING and Cycle 26 AXIS-
SPECIFIC SCALING must not be active.
HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of
the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are
used.

The TNC and the machine tool must be set up by the

machine tool builder for use of the TT touch probe.
Some cycles and functions may not be provided on
your machine tool. Refer to your machine manual.

In conjunction with the TNC's tool measurement cycles, the tool

touch probe enables you to measure tools automatically. The
compensation values for tool length and radius can be stored in
the central tool file TOOL.T and are accounted for at the end of the
touch probe cycle. The following types of tool measurement are
provided:
Tool measurement while the tool is at standstill
Tool measurement while the tool is rotating
Measurement of individual teeth

558 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

20
Fundamentals 20.1

You can program the cycles for tool measurement in the

Programming and Editing mode of operation via the TOUCH
PROBE key. The following cycles are available:
Cycle New Old Page
format format
Calibrating the TT, Cycles 30 and 480 564

Calibrating the wireless TT 449, Cycle 484 565

Measuring the tool length, Cycles 31 and 481 566

Measuring the tool radius, Cycles 32 and 482 568

Measuring the tool length and radius, Cycles 33 and 483 570

The measuring cycles can be used only when the

central tool file TOOL.T is active.
Before working with the measuring cycles, you must
first enter all the required data into the central tool
file and call the tool to be measured with TOOL
CALL.

Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to

483
The features and the operating sequences are absolutely identical.
There are only two differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles
481 to 483:
Cycles 481 to 483 are also available in controls for ISO
programming under G481 to G483.
Instead of a selectable parameter for the status of the
measurement, the new cycles use the fixed parameter Q199.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 559

20 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Tool Measurement
20.1 Fundamentals

Setting machine parameters

Before you start work with the TT cycles, inspect

all machine parameters defined in ProbeSettings >
CfgToolMeasurement and CfgTTRoundStylus.
The TNC uses the feed rate for probing defined in
probingFeed when measuring a tool at standstill.

When measuring a rotating tool, the TNC automatically calculates

the spindle speed and feed rate for probing.
The spindle speed is calculated as follows:
n = maxPeriphSpeedMeas / ( r • 0.0063) where
n: Spindle speed [rpm]
maxPeriphSpeedMeas: Maximum permissible cutting speed in
m/min
r: Active tool radius in mm

The feed rate for probing is calculated from:

v = measuring tolerance • n with
v: Feed rate for probing in mm/min
Measuring tolerance Measuring tolerance [mm], depending
on maxPeriphSpeedMeas
n: Shaft speed [rpm]

560 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

20
Fundamentals 20.1

probingFeedCalc determines the calculation of the probing feed

rate:
probingFeedCalc = ConstantTolerance:
The measuring tolerance remains constant regardless of the tool
radius. With very large tools, however, the feed rate for probing
is reduced to zero. The smaller you set the maximum permissible
rotational speed (maxPeriphSpeedMeas) and the permissible
tolerance (measureTolerance1), the sooner you will encounter this
effect.
probingFeedCalc = VariableTolerance:
The measuring tolerance is adjusted relative to the size of the tool
radius. This ensures a sufficient feed rate for probing even with
large tool radii. The TNC adjusts the measuring tolerance according
to the following table:
Tool radius Measuring tolerance
Up to 30 mm measureTolerance1
30 to 60 mm 2 • measureTolerance1
60 to 90 mm 3 • measureTolerance1
90 to 120 mm 4 • measureTolerance1
probingFeedCalc = ConstantFeed:
The feed rate for probing remains constant; the error of
measurement, however, rises linearly with the increase in tool
radius:
Measuring tolerance = r • measureTolerance1/ 5 mm, where
r: Active tool radius in mm
measureTolerance1: Maximum permissible error of
measurement

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 561

20 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Tool Measurement
20.1 Fundamentals

Entries in the tool table TOOL.T

Abbr. Inputs Dialog
CUT Number of teeth (20 teeth maximum) Number of teeth?
LTOL Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear Wear tolerance: length?
detection. If the entered value is exceeded, the TNC
locks the tool (status L). Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm
RTOL Permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear Wear tolerance: radius?
detection. If the entered value is exceeded, the TNC
locks the tool (status L). Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm
DIRECT. Cutting direction of the tool for measuring the tool during Cutting direction (M3 = –)?
rotation
R_OFFS Tool length measurement: Tool offset between stylus Tool offset: radius?
center and tool center. Default setting: No value entered
(offset = tool radius)
L_OFFS Tool radius measurement: tool offset in addition to Tool offset: length?
offsetToolAxis between upper surface of stylus and
lower surface of tool. Default: 0
LBREAK Permissible deviation from tool length L for breakage Breakage tolerance: length?
detection. If the entered value is exceeded, the TNC
locks the tool (status L). Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm
RBREAK Permissible deviation from tool radius R for breakage Breakage tolerance: radius?
detection. If the entered value is exceeded, the TNC
locks the tool (status L). Input range: 0 to 0.9999 mm

562 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

20
Fundamentals 20.1

Input examples for common tool types

Tool type CUT TT:R_OFFS TT:L_OFFS
Drill – (no function) 0 (no offset required
because tool tip is to be
measured)
End mill with diameter 4 (4 teeth) 0 (no offset required 0 (no additional offset
of < 19 mm because tool diameter is required during radius
smaller than the contact measurement. Offset from
plate diameter of the TT) offsetToolAxis is used)
End mill with diameter 4 (4 teeth) R (offset required because 0 (no additional offset
of > 19 mm tool diameter is larger than required during radius
the contact plate diameter measurement. Offset from
of the TT) offsetToolAxis is used)
Radius cutter 4 (4 teeth) 0 (no offset required 5 (always define the tool
because the south pole of radius as the offset so
the ball is to be measured) that the diameter is not
measured in the radius)

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 563

20 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Tool Measurement
20.2 Calibrate the TT (Cycle 30 or 480, DIN/ISO: G480)

20.2 Calibrate the TT (Cycle 30 or 480, DIN/

ISO: G480)

Cycle run
The TT is calibrated with the measuring cycle TCH PROBE 30 or
TCH PROBE 480 (See "Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and
Cycles 481 to 483", page 559). The calibration process is automatic.
The TNC also measures the center misalignment of the calibrating
tool automatically by rotating the spindle by 180° after the first half
of the calibration cycle.
The calibrating tool must be a precisely cylindrical part, for example
a cylinder pin. The resulting calibration values are stored in the
TNC memory and are accounted for during subsequent tool
measurement.

Please note while programming:

The functioning of the calibration cycle is dependent

on machine parameter CfgToolMeasurement. Refer
to your machine tool manual.
Before calibrating the touch probe, you must enter
the exact length and radius of the calibrating tool into
the tool table TOOL.T.
The position of the TT within the machine working
space must be defined by setting the Machine
Parameters centerPos > [0] to [2].
If you change the setting of any of the Machine
Parameters centerPos > [0] to [2], you must
recalibrate.

Cycle parameters
Clearance height: Enter the position in the spindle NC blocks in old format
axis at which there is no danger of collision with 6 TOOL CALL 1 Z
the workpiece or fixtures. The clearance height is
7 TCH PROBE 30.0 CALIBRATE TT
referenced to the active workpiece datum. If you
enter such a small clearance height that the tool 8 TCH PROBE 30.1 HEIGHT: +90
tip would lie below the level of the probe contact, NC blocks in new format
the TNC automatically positions the tool above
the level of the probe contact (safety zone from 6 TOOL CALL 1 Z
safetyDistStylus). Input range -99999.9999 to 7 TCH PROBE 480 CALIBRATE TT
99999.9999 Q260=+100 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT

564 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

20
Calibrating the wireless TT 449 (Cycle 484, DIN/ISO: G484) 20.3

20.3 Calibrating the wireless TT 449 (Cycle

484, DIN/ISO: G484)

Fundamentals
With Cycle 484, you calibrate the wireless infrared TT 449 tool
touch probe. The calibration process is not completely automated,
because the TT's position on the table is not defined.

Cycle run
Insert the calibrating tool
Define and start the calibration cycle
Position the calibrating tool manually above the center of the
touch probe and follow the instructions in the pop-up window.
Ensure that the calibrating tool is located above the measuring
surface of the probe contact
The calibration process is semi-automatic. The TNC also measures
the center misalignment of the calibrating tool by rotating the
spindle by 180° after the first half of the calibration cycle.
The calibrating tool must be a precisely cylindrical part, for example
a cylinder pin. The resulting calibration values are stored in the
TNC memory and are accounted for during subsequent tool
measurement.

The calibration tool should have a diameter of more

than 15 mm and protrude approx. 50 mm from the
chuck. This configuration causes a deformation of 0.1
µm per 1 N of probing force.

Please note while programming:

The functioning of the calibration cycle is dependent

on machine parameter CfgToolMeasurement. Refer
to your machine manual.
Before calibrating the touch probe, you must enter
the exact length and radius of the calibrating tool into
the tool table TOOL.T.
The TT needs to be recalibrated if you change its
position on the table.

Cycle parameters
Cycle 484 has no cycle parameters.

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 565

20 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Tool Measurement
20.4 Measuring tool length (Cycle 31 or 481, DIN/ISO: G481)

20.4 Measuring tool length (Cycle 31 or 481,

DIN/ISO: G481)

Cycle run
To measure the tool length, program the measuring cycle TCH
PROBE 31 or TCH PROBE 480 (See "Differences between Cycles
31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483", page 559). Via input parameters
you can measure the length of a tool by three methods:
If the tool diameter is larger than the diameter of the measuring
surface of the TT, you measure the tool while it is rotating.
If the tool diameter is smaller than the diameter of the
measuring surface of the TT, or if you are measuring the length
of a drill or spherical cutter, you measure the tool while it is at
standstill.
If the tool diameter is larger than the diameter of the measuring
surface of the TT, you measure the individual teeth of the tool
while it is at standstill.
Cycle for measuring a tool during rotation
The control determines the longest tooth of a rotating tool by
positioning the tool to be measured at an offset to the center of the
touch probe and then moving it toward the measuring surface of
the TT until it contacts the surface. The offset is programmed in the
tool table under Tool offset: Radius (TT: R_OFFS).
Cycle for measuring a tool during standstill (e.g. for drills)
The control positions the tool to be measured over the center of
the measuring surface. It then moves the non-rotating tool toward
the measuring surface of the TT until it touches the surface. To
activate this function, enter zero for the tool offset: Radius (TT:
R_OFFS) in the tool table.
Cycle for measuring individual teeth
The TNC pre-positions the tool to be measured to a position at
the side of the touch probe head. The distance from the tip of
the tool to the upper edge of the touch probe head is defined
in offsetToolAxis. You can enter an additional offset with tool
offset: Length (TT: L_OFFS) in the tool table. The TNC probes
the tool radially during rotation to determine the starting angle for
measuring the individual teeth. It then measures the length of each
tooth by changing the corresponding angle of spindle orientation.
To activate this function, program TCH PROBE 31 = 1 for CUTTER
MEASUREMENT.

566 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

20
Measuring tool length (Cycle 31 or 481, DIN/ISO: G481) 20.4

Please note while programming:

Before measuring a tool for the first time, enter the

following data on the tool into the tool table TOOL.T:
the approximate radius, the approximate length, the
number of teeth, and the cutting direction.
You can run an individual tooth measurement of tools
with up to 20 teeth.

Cycle parameters
Measure tool=0 / Check tool=1: Select whether Measuring a rotating tool for the first
the tool is to be measured for the first time or time; old format
whether a tool that has already been measured is to 6 TOOL CALL 12 Z
be inspected. If the tool is being measured for the
7 TCH PROBE 31.0 TOOL LENGTH
first time, the TNC overwrites the tool length L in
the central tool file TOOL.T by the delta value DL = 8 TCH PROBE 31.1 CHECK: 0
0. If you wish to inspect a tool, the TNC compares 9 TCH PROBE 31.2 HEIGHT: +120
the measured length with the tool length L that is 10 TCH PROBE 31.3 PROBING THE
stored in TOOL.T. It then calculates the positive or TEETH: 0
negative deviation from the stored value and enters
it into TOOL.T as the delta value DL. The deviation Inspecting a tool and measuring the
can also be used for Q-parameter Q115. If the delta individual teeth and saving the status
value is greater than the permissible tool length in Q5; old format
tolerance for wear or break detection, the TNC will 6 TOOL CALL 12 Z
lock the tool (status L in TOOL.T).
7 TCH PROBE 31.0 TOOL LENGTH
Parameter number for result ?: Parameter 8 TCH PROBE 31.1 CHECK: 1 Q5
number in which the TNC saves the status of the
9 TCH PROBE 31.2 HEIGHT: +120
measurement result:
0.0: Tool is within tolerance 10 TCH PROBE 31.3 PROBING THE
1.0: Tool is worn (LTOL exceeded) TEETH:1
2.0: Tool is broken (LBREAK exceeded). NC blocks in new format
If you do not wish to use the result of measurement
6 TOOL CALL 12 Z
within the program, answer the dialog prompt with
NO ENT. 7 TCH PROBE 481 TOOL LENGTH
Q340=1 ;CHECK
Clearance height: Enter the position in the spindle
axis at which there is no danger of collision with Q260=+100 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
the workpiece or fixtures. The clearance height is Q341=1 ;PROBING THE TEETH
referenced to the active workpiece datum. If you
enter such a small clearance height that the tool
tip would lie below the level of the probe contact,
the TNC automatically positions the tool above
the level of the probe contact (safety zone from
safetyDistStylus). Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
Cutter measurement? 0=No / 1=Yes: Choose
whether the control is to measure the individual
teeth (maximum of 20 teeth)

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 567

20 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Tool Measurement
20.5 Measuring tool radius (Cycle 32 or 482, DIN/ISO: G482)

20.5 Measuring tool radius (Cycle 32 or 482,

DIN/ISO: G482)

Cycle run
To measure the tool radius, program the cycle TCH PROBE 32
or TCH PROBE 482 (See "Differences between Cycles 31 to 33
and Cycles 481 to 483", page 559). Select via input parameters by
which of two methods the radius of a tool is to be measured:
Measuring the tool while it is rotating
Measuring the tool while it is rotating and subsequently
measuring the individual teeth.

The TNC pre-positions the tool to be measured to a position at

the side of the touch probe head. The distance from the tip of the
milling tool to the upper edge of the touch probe head is defined in
offsetToolAxis. The TNC probes the tool radially while it is rotating.
If you have programmed a subsequent measurement of individual
teeth, the control measures the radius of each tooth with the aid of
oriented spindle stops.

Please note while programming:

Before measuring a tool for the first time, enter the

following data on the tool into the tool table TOOL.T:
the approximate radius, the approximate length, the
number of teeth, and the cutting direction.
Cylindrical tools with diamond surfaces can be
measured with stationary spindle. To do so, define
in the tool table the number of teeth CUT as 0 and
adjust machine parameter CfgToolMeasurement.
Refer to your machine manual.

568 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

20
Measuring tool radius (Cycle 32 or 482, DIN/ISO: G482) 20.5

Cycle parameters
Measure tool=0 / Check tool=1: Select whether Measuring a rotating tool for the first
the tool is to be measured for the first time or time; old format
whether a tool that has already been measured is to 6 TOOL CALL 12 Z
be inspected. If the tool is being measured for the
7 TCH PROBE 32.0 TOOL RADIUS
first time, the TNC overwrites the tool radius R in
the central tool file TOOL.T by the delta value DR = 8 TCH PROBE 32.1 CHECK: 0
0. If you wish to inspect a tool, the TNC compares 9 TCH PROBE 32.2 HEIGHT: +120
the measured radius with the tool radius R that is 10 TCH PROBE 32.3 PROBING THE
stored in TOOL.T. It then calculates the positive or TEETH: 0
negative deviation from the stored value and enters
it into TOOL.T as the delta value DR. The deviation Inspecting a tool and measuring the
can also be used for Q-parameter Q116. If the delta individual teeth and saving the status
value is greater than the permissible tool radius in Q5; old format
tolerance for wear or break detection, the TNC will 6 TOOL CALL 12 Z
lock the tool (status L in TOOL.T).
7 TCH PROBE 32.0 TOOL RADIUS
Parameter number for result ?: Parameter 8 TCH PROBE 32.1 CHECK: 1 Q5
number in which the TNC saves the status of the
9 TCH PROBE 32.2 HEIGHT: +120
measurement result:
0.0: Tool is within tolerance 10 TCH PROBE 32.3 PROBING THE
1.0: Tool is worn (RTOL exceeded) TEETH: 1
2.0: Tool is broken (RBREAK exceeded). NC blocks in new format
If you do not wish to use the result of measurement
6 TOOL CALL 12 Z
within the program, answer the dialog prompt with
NO ENT. 7 TCH PROBE 482 TOOL RADIUS
Q340=1 ;CHECK
Clearance height: Enter the position in the spindle
axis at which there is no danger of collision with Q260=+100 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
the workpiece or fixtures. The clearance height is Q341=1 ;PROBING THE TEETH
referenced to the active workpiece datum. If you
enter such a small clearance height that the tool
tip would lie below the level of the probe contact,
the TNC automatically positions the tool above
the level of the probe contact (safety zone from
safetyDistStylus). Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
Cutter measurement? 0=No / 1=Yes: Choose
whether the control is also to measure the individual
teeth (maximum of 20 teeth)

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 569

20 Touch Probe Cycles: Automatic Tool Measurement
20.6 Measuring tool length and radius (Cycle 33 or 483, DIN/ISO: G483)

20.6 Measuring tool length and radius

(Cycle 33 or 483, DIN/ISO: G483)

Cycle run
To measure both the length and radius of a tool, program
the measuring cycle TCH PROBE 33 or TCH PROBE 482
(See "Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to
483", page 559). This cycle is particularly suitable for the first
measurement of tools, as it saves time when compared with
individual measurement of length and radius. Via input parameters
you can select the desired type of measurement:
Measuring the tool while it is rotating
Measuring the tool while it is rotating and subsequently
measuring the individual teeth.

The TNC measures the tool in a fixed programmed sequence. First

it measures the tool radius, then the tool length. The sequence of
measurement is the same as for measuring cycles 31 and 32.

Please note while programming:

Before measuring a tool for the first time, enter the

570 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

20
Measuring tool length and radius (Cycle 33 or 483, DIN/ISO: G483) 20.6

Cycle parameters
Measure tool=0 / Check tool=1: Select whether Measuring a rotating tool for the first
the tool is to be measured for the first time or time; old format
whether a tool that has already been measured 6 TOOL CALL 12 Z
is to be inspected. If the tool is being measured
7 TCH PROBE 33.0 MEASURE TOOL
for the first time, the TNC overwrites the tool
radius R and the tool length L in the central tool file 8 TCH PROBE 33.1 CHECK: 0
TOOL.T by the delta values DR = 0 and DL = 0. If 9 TCH PROBE 33.2 HEIGHT: +120
you wish to inspect a tool, the TNC compares the 10 TCH PROBE 33.3 PROBING THE
measured data with the tool data stored in TOOL.T. TEETH: 0
The TNC calculates the deviations and enters them
as positive or negative delta values DR and DL in Inspecting a tool and measuring the
TOOL.T. The deviations are also available in the Q individual teeth and saving the status
parameters Q115 and Q116. If the delta values are in Q5; old format
greater than the permissible tool tolerances for wear 6 TOOL CALL 12 Z
or break detection, the TNC will lock the tool (status
7 TCH PROBE 33.0 MEASURE TOOL
L in TOOL.T).
8 TCH PROBE 33.1 CHECK: 1 Q5
Parameter number for result ?: Parameter
9 TCH PROBE 33.2 HEIGHT: +120
number in which the TNC saves the status of the
measurement result: 10 TCH PROBE 33.3 PROBING THE
0.0: Tool is within tolerance TEETH: 1
1.0: Tool is worn (LTOL and/or RTOL exceeded) NC blocks in new format
2,0: Tool is broken (LBREAK and/or RBREAK
6 TOOL CALL 12 Z
exceeded).
If you do not wish to use the result of measurement 7 TCH PROBE 483 MEASURE TOOL
within the program, answer the dialog prompt with Q340=1 ;CHECK
NO ENT.
Q260=+100 ;CLEARANCE HEIGHT
Clearance height: Enter the position in the spindle Q341=1 ;PROBING THE TEETH
axis at which there is no danger of collision with
the workpiece or fixtures. The clearance height is
referenced to the active workpiece datum. If you
enter such a small clearance height that the tool
tip would lie below the level of the probe contact,
the TNC automatically positions the tool above
the level of the probe contact (safety zone from
safetyDistStylus). Input range -99999.9999 to
99999.9999
Cutter measurement? 0=No / 1=Yes: Choose
whether the control is also to measure the individual
teeth (maximum of 20 teeth)

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 571

21
Tables of Cycles
21 Tables of Cycles
21.1 Overview

21.1 Overview

Fixed cycles
Cycle Cycle designation DEF CALL Page
number active active
7 Datum shift ■ 245
8 Mirror image ■ 252
9 Dwell time ■ 269
10 Rotation ■ 254
11 Scaling factor ■ 256
12 Program call ■ 270
13 Spindle orientation ■ 272
14 Contour definition ■ 178
19 Tilting the working plane ■ 259
20 Contour data SL II ■ 183
21 Pilot drilling SL II ■ 185
22 Rough out SL II ■ 187
23 Floor finishing SL II ■ 190
24 Side finishing SL II ■ 191
25 Contour train ■ 193
26 Axis-specific scaling ■ 257
27 Cylinder surface ■ 203
28 Cylindrical surface slot ■ 206
29 Cylinder surface ridge ■ 209
32 Tolerance ■ 273
200 Drilling ■ 73
201 Reaming ■ 75
202 Boring ■ 77
203 Universal drilling ■ 80
204 Back boring ■ 83
205 Universal pecking ■ 86
206 Tapping with a floating tap holder, new ■ 101
207 Rigid tapping, new ■ 104
208 Bore milling ■ 90
209 Tapping with chip breaking ■ 107
220 Polar pattern ■ 167
221 Cartesian pattern ■ 170
225 Engraving ■ 276
230 Multipass milling ■ 231
231 Ruled surface ■ 233
232 Face milling ■ 237

574 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

21
Overview 21.1

Cycle Cycle designation DEF CALL Page

number active active
240 Centering ■ 71
241 Single-lip deep-hole drilling ■ 93
247 Datum setting ■ 251
251 Rectangular pocket (complete machining) ■ 137
252 Circular pocket (complete machining) ■ 141
253 Slot milling ■ 145
254 Circular slot ■ 149
256 Rectangular stud (complete machining) ■ 154
257 Circular stud (complete machining) ■ 158
262 Thread milling ■ 113
263 Thread milling/countersinking ■ 116
264 Thread drilling/milling ■ 120
265 Helical thread drilling/milling ■ 124
267 Outside thread milling ■ 128

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 575

21 Tables of Cycles
21.1 Overview

Turning cycles
Cycle Cycle designation DEF CALL Page
number active active
800 Adapt rotary coordinate system ■ 286
801 Reset rotary coordinate system ■ 288
810 Turn contour, longitudinal ■ 303
811 Turn shoulder, longitudinal ■ 290
812 Turn shoulder, longitudinal extended ■ 292
813 Turn, longitudinal plunge ■ 296
814 Turn, longitudinal plunge extended ■ 299
815 Turn contour-parallel ■ 307
820 Turn contour, transverse ■ 325
821 Turn shoulder face ■ 311
822 Turn shoulder face extended ■ 314
823 Turn, transverse plunge ■ 318
824 Turn, transverse plunge extended ■ 321
830 Thread, contour-parallel ■ 379
831 Thread, longitudinal ■ 372
832 Thread, extended ■ 375
860 Recessing contour, radial ■ 360
861 Recessing, radial ■ 353
862 Recessing, radial extended ■ 356
870 Recessing contour, axial ■ 369
871 Recessing, axial ■ 363
872 Recessing, axial extended ■ 365

576 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

21
Overview 21.1

Touch probe cycles

Cycle Cycle designation DEF CALL Page
number active active
0 Reference plane ■ 474
1 Polar datum ■ 475
3 Measuring ■ 513
30 Calibrate the TT ■ 564
31 Measure/Inspect the tool length ■ 566
32 Measure/inspect the tool radius ■ 568
33 Measure/Inspect the tool length and the tool radius ■ 570
400 Basic rotation using two points ■ 398
401 Basic rotation over two holes ■ 401
402 Basic rotation over two studs ■ 404
403 Compensate misalignment with rotary axis ■ 407
404 Set basic rotation ■ 410
405 Compensate misalignment with the C axis ■ 411
408 Reference point at slot center (FCL 3 function) ■ 420
409 Reference point at ridge center (FCL 3 function) ■ 424
410 Datum from inside of rectangle ■ 427
411 Datum from outside of rectangle ■ 431
412 Datum from inside of circle (hole) ■ 435
413 Datum from outside of circle (stud) ■ 440
414 Datum from outside of corner ■ 444
415 Datum from inside of corner ■ 448
416 Datum from circle center ■ 451
417 Datum in touch probe axis ■ 455
418 Datum at center between four holes ■ 457
419 Datum in any one axis ■ 461
420 Workpiece—measure angle ■ 476
421 Workpiece—measure hole (center and diameter of hole) ■ 479
422 Workpiece—measure circle from outside (diameter of circular stud) ■ 482
423 Workpiece—measure rectangle from inside ■ 485
424 Workpiece—measure rectangle from outside ■ 489
425 Workpiece—measure inside width (slot) ■ 492
426 Workpiece—measure outside width (ridge) ■ 495
427 Workpiece—measure in any selectable axis ■ 498
430 Workpiece—measure bolt hole circle ■ 501
431 Workpiece—measure plane ■ 501
450 KinematicsOpt: Save kinematics (option) ■ 529
451 KinematicsOpt: Measure kinematics (option) ■ 532
452 KinematicsOpt: Preset compensation ■ 526

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 577

21 Tables of Cycles
21.1 Overview

Cycle Cycle designation DEF CALL Page

number active active
460 Calibrate the touch probe ■ 517
461 Calibrate touch probe length ■ 519
462 Calibrate touch probe inside radius ■ 520
463 Calibrate touch probe outside radius ■ 522
480 Calibrate the TT ■ 564
481 Measure/Inspect the tool length ■ 566
482 Measure/Inspect the tool radius ■ 568
483 Measure/Inspect the tool length and the tool radius ■ 570

578 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

Index Calling...................................... 52 M
Define...................................... 51 Machine parameters for 3D touch
3 Cycles and point tables.............. 67 probe........................................ 389
3D Touch Probes...................... 386 Cylinder surface Machining pattern...................... 58
3-D touch probes....................... 46 Machine contour.................... 203 Measure angle......................... 476
Ridge machining..................... 209 Measure angle of a plane......... 504
A Slot machining........................ 206 Measure any coordinate........... 498
Adapt rotary coordinate Measure bolt hole circle........... 501
D
system..................................... 286 Measure hole........................... 479
Automatic datum setting.......... 416 Datum shift.............................. 245
measure hole inside................. 479
At center of 4 holes............... 457 in the program....................... 245
Measure hole outside.............. 482
Center of a bolt hole circle..... 451 With datum tables................. 246
Measure kinematics................. 532
Center of a circular pocket Deepened starting point with
Preset compensation............. 546
(hole)...................................... 435 drilling.................................. 89, 94
Measurement parameters........ 471
Center of a circular stud......... 440 Drilling............................ 73, 80, 86
Measurement results in Q
Center of a rectangular Deepened starting point..... 89, 94
parameters............................... 471
pocket.................................... 427 Drilling Cycles............................ 70
Measure rectangular pocket..... 489
Center of a rectangular stud... 431 Dwell time................................ 269
Measure rectangular stud........ 485
In any axis.............................. 461 E Measure the plane angle.......... 504
Inside of corner...................... 448 Engraving................................. 276 Measure the slot width............ 492
In the touch probe axis........... 455 Measure the width of a
Outside of corner................... 444 F ridge................................. 495, 495
Ridge center.......................... 424 Face milling.............................. 237 Measuring slot width............... 492
Slot center............................. 420 FCL function................................ 9 Measuring the width of a ridge 495
Automatic tool measurement... 562 Feature Content Level.................. 9 Mirroring................................... 252
Axis-specific scaling................. 257 Floor finishing........................... 190 Multiple measurements........... 391
B FUNCTION TURNDATA............ 284
O
Fundamentals of Thread
Back boring................................ 83 Milling...................................... 111 Outside thread milling.............. 128
Basic rotation
Measure during program run.. 396 H P
Blank form update.................... 284 Helical thread drilling/milling..... 124 Pattern definition........................ 58
Bolt hole circle......................... 167 Peck drilling.......................... 86, 93
I Deepened starting point..... 89, 94
Bore milling................................ 90
Boring......................................... 77 Inside thread milling................. 113 Point patterns........................... 166
K Overview................................ 166
C
Point tables................................ 65
Centering................................... 71 Kinematic measurement Positioning logic....................... 392
Circular pocket Accuracy................................. 537 Probing feed rate..................... 390
Roughing+finishing................ 141 Backlash................................. 539 Program call............................. 270
Circular point patterns.............. 167 Calibration methods.... 538, 551, Via cycle................................. 270
Circular slot 553
Roughing+finishing................ 149 Hirth coupling......................... 535 R
Circular stud............................. 158 Logging function..... 530, 545, 555 Reaming..................................... 75
Classification of results............ 471 Measuring point selection.... 531, Recording measurement results....
Compensating workpiece 536 469
misalignment............................ 396 Measuring position selection. 537 Rectangular pocket
By measuring two points on a Prerequisites.......................... 528 Roughing+finishing................ 137
straight surface...................... 398 Kinematics measurement........ 526 Rectangular stud...................... 154
Over two circular studs.......... 404 Kinematics Measurement Reset rotary coordinate
Over two holes...................... 401 Measure kinematics....... 532, 546 system..................................... 288
Via rotary axis................ 407, 411 Kinematics measurement Rotation.................................... 254
Confidence interval.................. 391 Save kinematics..................... 529 Roughing:See SL Cycles,
Consideration of basic rotation. 386 KinematicsOpt.......................... 526 Roughing.................................. 187
Contour cycles......................... 176 L Ruled surface........................... 233
Contour train............................ 193 S
Linear point patterns................ 170
Coordinate transformation........ 244
Cycle.......................................... 50 Scaling...................................... 256
Set a basic rotation.................. 410

TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013 579

Index

Side finishing............................ 191 Recessing, radial extended....

Single-lip deep-hole drilling......... 93 332, 356
SL Cycles......................... 176, 203 Recessing contour, radial.... 337,
Contour cycle......................... 178 360
Contour data.......................... 183 shoulder, longitudinal extended....
Contour train.......................... 193 292
Floor finishing......................... 190 Shoulder face......................... 311
SL cycles Shoulder face extended......... 314
Fundamentals......................... 176 Shoulder longitudinal.............. 290
Fundamentals......................... 226 Thread, contour-parallel.......... 379
SL Cycles Thread, extended................... 375
Pilot drilling............................ 185 Thread, longitudinal................ 372
Roughing................................ 187 Transverse plunge.................. 318
Side finishing.......................... 191 Transverse plunge extended.. 321
Superimposed contours. 179, 220 Turn, longitudinal plunge......... 296
SL cycles with complex contour Turn, longitudinal plunge
formula..................................... 216 extended................................ 299
SL cycles with simple contour
U
formula..................................... 226
Slot milling Universal drilling................... 80, 86
Roughing+finishing................ 145 W
Spindle orientation................... 272
Workpiece Measurement......... 468
T
Tapping
With a floating tap holder....... 101
With chip breaking................. 107
Without a floating tap
holder............................. 104, 107
Thread drilling/milling............... 120
Thread milling/countersinking... 116
Tilting function
Procedure............................... 264
Tilting the working plane.. 259, 259
Cycle...................................... 259
Tolerance monitoring................ 471
Tool compensation................... 472
Tool measurement........... 558, 562
Calibrate TT.................... 564, 565
Machine parameters.............. 560
Measuring tool length and
radius..................................... 570
Tool length............................. 566
Tool radius.............................. 568
Tool monitoring........................ 472
Touch probe cycles
For automatic mode............... 388
Touch probe data...................... 394
Touch probe table..................... 393
Turning cycles.................. 280, 289
Axial recessing....
341, 349, 363, 369
Contour face.......................... 325
Contour longitudinal............... 303
Contour-parallel....................... 307
Radial recessing............. 329, 353
Recessing, axial extended.... 344,
365

580 TNC 640 | User's Manual Cycle Programming | 5/2013

��
��
��
� ��
� ��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��
��

Touch probes from HEIDENHAIN

help you reduce non-productive time and
improve the dimensional accuracy of the finished workpieces.

Workpiece touch probes

TS 220 Signal transmission by cable
TS 440, TS 444 Infrared transmission
TS 640, TS 740 Infrared transmission

• Workpiece alignment
• Setting datums
• Workpiece measurement

Tool touch probes

TT 140 Signal transmission by cable
TT 449 Infrared transmission
TL Contact-free laser systems

• Tool measurement
• Wear monitoring
• Tool breakage detection

892905-21 · Ver01 · SW02 · 5/2013 · Printed in Germany · F&W I_892905-21

Hybrid Calisthenics Interactive Ebook (3.28.23)
100% (30)
Hybrid Calisthenics Interactive Ebook (3.28.23)
156 pages
The Kettlebell Solution
90% (10)
The Kettlebell Solution
87 pages
Anatomy of Exercise PDF
89% (19)
Anatomy of Exercise PDF
98 pages
The Hypertrophy Handbook
100% (10)
The Hypertrophy Handbook
53 pages
Technical Drawing For Product Design: Stefano Tornincasa
100% (13)
Technical Drawing For Product Design: Stefano Tornincasa
310 pages
Matt Schifferle - Overcoming Isometrics Isometric Exercises For Building Muscle and Strength
100% (17)
Matt Schifferle - Overcoming Isometrics Isometric Exercises For Building Muscle and Strength
153 pages
Manufacturing Engineering Handbook
97% (35)
Manufacturing Engineering Handbook
1,193 pages
Solidworks Exercise Book PDF
74% (19)
Solidworks Exercise Book PDF
38 pages
Simplified GD&T - Based On ASME - Ashok Kumar
100% (10)
Simplified GD&T - Based On ASME - Ashok Kumar
202 pages
CNC Router Essentials: The Basics for Mastering the Most Innovative Tool in Your Workshop
From Everand
CNC Router Essentials: The Basics for Mastering the Most Innovative Tool in Your Workshop
Randy Johnson
5/5 (3)
Asmey14 5M
100% (10)
Asmey14 5M
237 pages
CNC Programming
94% (33)
CNC Programming
529 pages
Stretching Scientifically - A Guide To Flexibility Training
97% (33)
Stretching Scientifically - A Guide To Flexibility Training
220 pages
CNC Book PDF
100% (10)
CNC Book PDF
342 pages
100 PLANKS - The Plank Encyclopedia For Back Health - Bodyweight Training - and Ultimate Core Strength PDF
95% (19)
100 PLANKS - The Plank Encyclopedia For Back Health - Bodyweight Training - and Ultimate Core Strength PDF
409 pages
GD&T
100% (12)
GD&T
356 pages
Solidworks For Beginners - Getti - Arsath Natheem
100% (10)
Solidworks For Beginners - Getti - Arsath Natheem
51 pages
GDT - Fundamentals of GD&T
88% (16)
GDT - Fundamentals of GD&T
414 pages
Handbook of Mechanical Engineering Terms
96% (51)
Handbook of Mechanical Engineering Terms
366 pages
Calisthenics For Beginners - A Step-by-Step Program To Get in Shape and To Build Explosive Strength at Any Fitness Level Without Going To The Gym
92% (25)
Calisthenics For Beginners - A Step-by-Step Program To Get in Shape and To Build Explosive Strength at Any Fitness Level Without Going To The Gym
110 pages
Mastering Solidworks Parspajouhaan
92% (13)
Mastering Solidworks Parspajouhaan
552 pages
CNC Programming Tutorials Examples G M Codes G M Programming Tutorial Example
100% (4)
CNC Programming Tutorials Examples G M Codes G M Programming Tutorial Example
340 pages
Manual Solidworks 2020 PDF
86% (7)
Manual Solidworks 2020 PDF
222 pages
Handbook of Machinery Dynamics
100% (15)
Handbook of Machinery Dynamics
597 pages
Heidenhain User's Manual Script
No ratings yet
Heidenhain User's Manual Script
673 pages
Conversational Programming User's Manual: NC Software 340590-07 340591-07 340595-07
No ratings yet
Conversational Programming User's Manual: NC Software 340590-07 340591-07 340595-07
795 pages
User's Manual Heidenhain Conversational: NC Software 340 590-01 340 591-01 340 594-01
No ratings yet
User's Manual Heidenhain Conversational: NC Software 340 590-01 340 591-01 340 594-01
589 pages
25 PDF
No ratings yet
25 PDF
762 pages
Heidenhain TNC620
0% (1)
Heidenhain TNC620
467 pages
Heidenhain TC 640 (Eng) PDF
No ratings yet
Heidenhain TC 640 (Eng) PDF
948 pages
DIN ISO Programming USer Manual 2010
No ratings yet
DIN ISO Programming USer Manual 2010
618 pages
TNC320 UserManual - 2
No ratings yet
TNC320 UserManual - 2
497 pages
Conversational Programming User's Manual: NC Software 817600-04 817601-04 817605-04
No ratings yet
Conversational Programming User's Manual: NC Software 817600-04 817601-04 817605-04
726 pages
User's Manual Heidenhain Conversational: NC Software 340 560-02 340 561-02 340 564-02
No ratings yet
User's Manual Heidenhain Conversational: NC Software 340 560-02 340 561-02 340 564-02
511 pages
TNC 620
No ratings yet
TNC 620
669 pages
896020-29 TNC640 Oem Hsci
No ratings yet
896020-29 TNC640 Oem Hsci
135 pages
Itnc 530
No ratings yet
Itnc 530
648 pages
User's Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Format ITNC 530
100% (2)
User's Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Format ITNC 530
747 pages
ITNC 530 User's Manual
No ratings yet
ITNC 530 User's Manual
735 pages
iTNC 530: User's Manual Heidenhain Conversational Programming
No ratings yet
iTNC 530: User's Manual Heidenhain Conversational Programming
713 pages
ITNC530 en 340 49x-05 - IsO Programming
No ratings yet
ITNC530 en 340 49x-05 - IsO Programming
606 pages
Manual Programação Heindenhain
No ratings yet
Manual Programação Heindenhain
20 pages
Heidenhain Manual
100% (2)
Heidenhain Manual
725 pages
iTNC 530: User's Manual Heidenhain Conversational Programming
No ratings yet
iTNC 530: User's Manual Heidenhain Conversational Programming
729 pages
PR Options and Accessories For TNC ID827222 en
No ratings yet
PR Options and Accessories For TNC ID827222 en
43 pages
ISO Programming 737760-24
No ratings yet
ISO Programming 737760-24
668 pages
iTNC 530: User's Manual Cycle Programming
No ratings yet
iTNC 530: User's Manual Cycle Programming
513 pages
1303406-23 TNC640 Bearb-Zyk MLS18 en
No ratings yet
1303406-23 TNC640 Bearb-Zyk MLS18 en
797 pages
User Manual Itnc 530 670 - 388-22
No ratings yet
User Manual Itnc 530 670 - 388-22
525 pages
TNC320 UserManual Cycles
No ratings yet
TNC320 UserManual Cycles
437 pages
ITNC 530 Cycle Progamming
No ratings yet
ITNC 530 Cycle Progamming
527 pages
iTNC 530: User's Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Format
No ratings yet
iTNC 530: User's Manual HEIDENHAIN Conversational Format
552 pages
Klartext Programming 737759-24
No ratings yet
Klartext Programming 737759-24
745 pages
318 179-24 PDF
No ratings yet
318 179-24 PDF
389 pages
Опции и аксессуары PDF
No ratings yet
Опции и аксессуары PDF
60 pages
User in
No ratings yet
User in
626 pages
Heidenhain Itnc 530 Din Iso
0% (1)
Heidenhain Itnc 530 Din Iso
675 pages
Manual de Operação ITNC530
No ratings yet
Manual de Operação ITNC530
656 pages
TNC en 2001
No ratings yet
TNC en 2001
18 pages
20 PDF
No ratings yet
20 PDF
583 pages
892909-2C TNC640 ISO MLS18 en
No ratings yet
892909-2C TNC640 ISO MLS18 en
639 pages
Heidenhain 426 430 TNC Manual 2001
100% (5)
Heidenhain 426 430 TNC Manual 2001
502 pages
Manuals
No ratings yet
Manuals
491 pages
User's Manual Conversational Programming: NC Software 340590-09 340591-09 340595-09
No ratings yet
User's Manual Conversational Programming: NC Software 340590-09 340591-09 340595-09
604 pages
BHB
No ratings yet
BHB
753 pages
TNC 426 TNC 430: User's Manual Conversational Programming
No ratings yet
TNC 426 TNC 430: User's Manual Conversational Programming
374 pages
Heidenhain 355
No ratings yet
Heidenhain 355
237 pages
Vdocuments - MX Heidenhain-355 PDF
No ratings yet
Vdocuments - MX Heidenhain-355 PDF
237 pages
Heidenhain iTNC530
No ratings yet
Heidenhain iTNC530
530 pages
Heidenhain PDF
No ratings yet
Heidenhain PDF
488 pages
User's Manual Conversational Programming: NC-Software 286 040-xx
No ratings yet
User's Manual Conversational Programming: NC-Software 286 040-xx
205 pages
Системы с Интерфейсом Hsci
No ratings yet
Системы с Интерфейсом Hsci
108 pages
TNC320 UserManual - 1
No ratings yet
TNC320 UserManual - 1
525 pages
Heidenhain TNC 640
No ratings yet
Heidenhain TNC 640
24 pages
TNC 426 TNC 430: User's Manual Conversational Programming
No ratings yet
TNC 426 TNC 430: User's Manual Conversational Programming
482 pages
User's Manual Conversational Programming: NC-Software 286 060-xx 286 080-xx
No ratings yet
User's Manual Conversational Programming: NC-Software 286 060-xx 286 080-xx
319 pages
DMG-iTNC530 MillProgManual (533 190-23) PDF
No ratings yet
DMG-iTNC530 MillProgManual (533 190-23) PDF
789 pages
895922-29 TNC620 OEM en 01
No ratings yet
895922-29 TNC620 OEM en 01
116 pages
IBM 1401 Programming Systems
From Everand
IBM 1401 Programming Systems
Archive Classics
No ratings yet
Correct Maintenance - Cognex DataMan 8500
From Everand
Correct Maintenance - Cognex DataMan 8500
Unique Content
No ratings yet
Preliminary Specifications: Programmed Data Processor Model Three (PDP-3) October, 1960
From Everand
Preliminary Specifications: Programmed Data Processor Model Three (PDP-3) October, 1960
Digital Equipment Corporation
No ratings yet
CNC Machine Mastery: From Fundamentals to Technical and CNC Job Interview Q&A
From Everand
CNC Machine Mastery: From Fundamentals to Technical and CNC Job Interview Q&A
Chetan Singh
No ratings yet
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller – Arktika.: EXPERIMENTAL PRODUCT BASED ON CPLD.
From Everand
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller – Arktika.: EXPERIMENTAL PRODUCT BASED ON CPLD.
Franco Mario
No ratings yet
Solidworks (Basics & Advanced) PDF
100% (8)
Solidworks (Basics & Advanced) PDF
272 pages
Geometric and Engineering Drawing
91% (11)
Geometric and Engineering Drawing
216 pages
American Machinists Handbook 1000165626
91% (11)
American Machinists Handbook 1000165626
586 pages
025694586
100% (7)
025694586
487 pages
Design For Fit Second Edition
100% (2)
Design For Fit Second Edition
415 pages
Tool and Die Making Troubleshooter PDF
100% (1)
Tool and Die Making Troubleshooter PDF
281 pages
Manufacturing Process
100% (9)
Manufacturing Process
517 pages
SYIL X Series 20240916
No ratings yet
SYIL X Series 20240916
32 pages
Probing r0112-403
No ratings yet
Probing r0112-403
112 pages
Touch Probe Cycles TNC 426, TNC 430
No ratings yet
Touch Probe Cycles TNC 426, TNC 430
157 pages
tc55 en
No ratings yet
tc55 en
2 pages
Files Documents MU-4000V Sept2016
No ratings yet
Files Documents MU-4000V Sept2016
11 pages
TNC 640 - User Manual Cycles en (892905-21)
No ratings yet
TNC 640 - User Manual Cycles en (892905-21)
581 pages
SYIL X Series-Detailed
No ratings yet
SYIL X Series-Detailed
39 pages